Undergraduate Bulletin, 1976-1977

Online content

Fullscreen

STATE UNIVERSITY OF NEW YORK AT ALBANY

UNDERGRADUATE BULLETIN 1976-77

§
i
'
!

oe ee see a ray eS oy ap

15 Dec.
and

16 Dec.

17 Dec.
through

23 Dec.

Academic Calendar

Fri,
Sat.

Mon.

Tues.

Mon.

Thurs.

Mon.

Tues.
Fri.

Thurs.

Fri.
Mon.
Fri.
Mon.

Fri,

Thurs.

Mon,
Wed.

Tues.

Wed.

Thurs.

Fri,

Thurs.

FALL 1976
Registration—day students—9:00 a.m.—
4:30 p.m.

Registration—Saturday and evening stu-
dents only—9:00 a.m.—12:00 noon

Classes begin—8:10 a.m.

First day for late registration and to add
or drop courses

Classes suspended

Last day for late registration and to add

~ courses; last day for undergraduate stu-
dents to file S/U or A-E grading options

Last day to file December 1976 degree ap-
plication in Office of the Registrar—
Records Service (AD B #5)

Classes suspended

Academic advisement begins—University
College

First Quarter Final Examination Period

Second Quarter classes begin—8:10 a.m.

Last day for graduate students to drop
courses

Pre-registration for Spring 1977 begins—
Colonial Quad

Last day to make up Incomplete grades;
pre-registration ends— 3:00 p.m.

Classes suspended

Classes. resume—8: 10 a.m.

Last day for dissertation and thesis submis-
sion for December 1976 graduation

Last day for undergraduate students to
drop courses

Classes end; classes which meet once a
week on Wednesday or Thursday, and
Second Quarter courses continue to meet
through 16 December

Reading Days

Final examinations

Te ee ee

Academic Calendar

SPRING 1977

Registration—day students—9:00 a.m.— —
4:30 p.m.

Registration—Saturday and evening stu-
dents—9:00 a.m.—12:00 noon

Classes begin—8:10 a.m.

First day for late registration and to add or
drop courses

. Last day for late registration and to add

courses; last. day for undergraduate stu-
dents to file S/U or A-E grading options
Last day to file May 1977 degree applica-
tion in Office of the Registrar—Records
Service (AD B#5)
Classes suspended—5:00 p.m.
Classes resume—8:10 a.m. |
Academic advisement begins—University
College

Third Quarter Final Examination Period

| 14 Jan Fri.
| | 15 Jan Sat.
“17 Jan Mon.
18 Jan Tues.
f
| | 27 Jan Thurs
| 4 Feb Fri.
19 Feb. Sat’
( {28 Feb. Mon
| | 7 Mar Mon.
_17 Mar. Thurs
| \ and
| , 18 Mar. Fri.
_25—Mar; Fri:
| 2 Apr. Sat.
| 311 Apr. Mon.
| 15 Apr. Fri.
| ,29 Apr. Fri.
_ 2 May Mon.
. ' 5 May Thurs,
(3
12, May Thurs,
Li
13 May Fri.
| and
| j17 May _ Tues.
through
(23 May Mon
28 May Sat.
and
29 May Sun

—_—_— =

Last day for graduate students to drop
courses |

Classes suspended—5:00 p.m.

Classes resume—8:10 a.m.; pre-registration
for Summer and Fall 1977 begin—
Colonial Quad

Last day to make up Incomplete grades

Pre-registration ends—3:00 p.m.

Last day for dissertation and thesis sub-
mission for May 1977 graduation

Last day for undergraduate students to
drop courses

Classes end; classes which meet once a |

week on Friday, Saturday, or Monday,

and Fourth Quarter courses continue to
meet through 16 May

Reading days’
Fina] examinations

Graduation weekend

CONTENTS
alendar 0.0... ee Inside Front Cover |
General Information ........ 0.0.0.0 0c cece ees 6
Description ...... 0... 0.00. e ees ree Ti
Accreditation... 0.0... ccc eee re 8 | !
Libraries . 000. eee ees 9
Computing Center 00... 0... be es 9. |
Undergraduate Study 2.0.0.0... 0.0 11; ,
Expenses .. 0.0.0... 0.000 cee Le eee ee eee ees 15
Undergraduate Academic Regulations ................. 17 !
Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree ............... 25:
Credit and Course Designations ....... Dees Lee 28.
College of Arts and Sciences ......... 0.0.0 e eee 32, |
Division of Humanities ...... 0.0.0.0 cee ees 37 i §
Division of Sciences and Mathematics ............... 38
Division of Social and Behavioral Sciences ........... 39 3 |
Department of African and Afro-American Studies .... 39:
Department of Anthropology ............ 000000000 44. .
Department of Art .............,....,.,.........04, 51
Program in Art History .. 0.0.0... 0.00 cee ee eee 54 :
Program in Asian Studies ........ 0.0.00 cece es 58 i |
Department of Astronomy and Space Science ......... 60)!
Department of Atmospheric Science ........ cee hes be 61
Department of Biological Sciences .................. 64 | |
Department of Chemistry ............ 0.00.0... 000, 76 ° !
Chinese Studies Program ........... eee 81 io
‘Department of Classics .........0 000060 cee eee ee 84
Department of Comparative and World Literature ..... 90 {|
Department of Computer Science .......... 00.00.06. O7 . |
Program in Computer Science and Applied Mathematics 100? °
Department of Economics ......... 0.00.0. cee eee 101
Department of English ......0...00 00.0.0... cue ee 105°

Environmental Studies Program .................... 118 L

Department of French ........0.0 0.000. c eee ee eee 116? :
Department of Geography .................00. 000. 124
Department of Geological Sciences ................. 130 } |
Department of Germanic Languages and Literatures... 134, |
Department of Hispanic and Italian Studies .......... 140 |
Department of History .........0 0000000 ce eee 150
Center for Inter-American Studies ................., 160° .
Department of Judaic Studies ...................05. 163 |
Linguistics Program ..... 00... ce ee es 169°
2 Md
ey,

|. Department of Mathematics ........... 0.000000 sees 172
Department of Music ,.c.cisniimsseeawes eas eueweis 179
Department of Philosophy «ss «ise ceeeaeexeyrwre wens 189
Departrient.Of PHYSICS «occ carn eres ewes 193

Department of Psychology ............0. 000 cece eee 200
Department of Puerto Rican Studies ................ 203
i: Department of Rhetoric and Communication ......... 207
| Program in Russian and East European Studies ....... 211
' Department of Slavic Languages and Literature ....... 212
Social Studies Program ......... 0.00.0 c eee ean 218
f) Department of Sociology... 0100.6 cin ccncee creer wenan 219
| | Department of Theatre ...........0. 0.0.00 en we. 227
‘ School of Business ......... 00.0 ce cece evened TTT Ty 233
t School of Criminal Justice ... 0.00 .00.0 00.0 ce eee ee 249
| School of Education ........0..0 000. ccc ee eee en 251
~ Student Teaching ........ 00.0.0. ce eee eee 253
Hoeeubiow (ours ois ew a0 eee week PSR ewe es BES RE 254
| Education Elective Courses ............. wan an gaenacss 256
, Department of Business Education .................. 261

‘ Departments of Health, Physical Education, and
7 po ee eee Tee Tr Tree Trey Soa WES 266
: Department of Speech Pathology and Audiology ...... 270
L College of General Studies .....0.. 0.00.00. ccc eee 275
| Office of International Programs .......... Saeweemenwes 278
| | School of Library and Information Science ............. 281
' School of Nursing ....... 0.0000 cece a eeeeeeeeeveey 282
, » Graduate School of Public Affairs .............. bees 288
t Department of Political Science .................... 288
| : Department of Public Administration ................ 299
School of Social Welfare ...0. 00000000000 cece eee 301

| "State University of New York .......00.0.0.0.00 cece ues 307

\ i Publications of SUNYA ...... 0.0.0 ccc ccc ce cece cece. 309

Ss 310

| Board of Trustees, SUNY ...0............ Inside Back Cover

-* Units of SUNY .. 000. o cece cc cece ee, Inside Back Cover

State University of New York
at Albany

7iccemmansims

OFFICES OF ADMINISTRATION

1976-77 :
POCO wa mee seemene Bom oem OLeKeam ee ewe Emmett B. Fields ©
Assistants to the President............... Robert C, Shirley

J. Fredericks Volkwein . ;

Vice President for Academic Affairs (Acting)... David W. Martin ;
Vice President for Management and Planning. .To be appointed ° *
Assistant Vice President and Controller. . ..John A. Hartigan |

Assistant Vice President for Management

and Planning.......... 00.0.0. 0 0c ee. Robert A. Stierer —
Vice President for Research and
Dean of Graduate Studies............... Louis R, Salkever _ .
Vice President for University Affairs.......... Lewis P. Welch ; |
Assistant Vice President for a;
Universtiy Afleive «sa ssocae eaaae5 gam 83 Sorrell E. Chesin —
Dean for Student Affairs................., . Neil C, Brown, Jr.
College of Arts and Sciences Lt
Dean of the Division of Humanities.......... Ruth Schmidt _ -
Dean of the Division of Science and —
Mathematics.__. | . Vincent_F. Cowling ___
Dean of the Division of Social and it
Behavioral Sciences...........6.0540055 Richard Kendall ; |
Dean of the School of Business......... William K. Holstein ~~
Dean of the School of Criminal Justice. .... Vincent O’Leary ,.,
Dean of the School of Education.........Gilbert D. Moore } '
Dean of the College of General Studies... .. Hilton M. Power ; :

Dean of the School of Library and
Information Science ................... John J. Farley ,

Dean of the School of Nursing (Acting)... .Marjorie A. Meyer '

Dean of the Graduate School of Public Affairs. .L. Gray Cowan j .

Dean of the School of Social Welfare

toi

t
t
i

(Acting)... eee ee eee Seth W. Spellman ,
Director of Personnel.................. Leon J. Calhoun, Sr. | |
Director of Undergraduate Admissions........ Rodney A. Hart | =
Director of Libraries.................0..., C. James Schmidt
University Registrar...... eee e eee ne ene Donald Bunis ,

The calendars, curricula, and fees described in this bul-
letin are subject to change at any time by official action of

State University of New York at Albany.

; i
,

rt UNIVERSITY COUNCIL

. J. Vanderbilt Straub, Chairman.............. ...... Albany

' Kenneth E, Buhrmaster Lette eet e eee eee een ees Scotia
: C, Theodore Carlson, H........ essen eeeeee ae ena Albany
John F. Filippone......0.0. 00... cece cece eee Albany

*; Carl C, Hudson............ 0000. cee ee Niskayuna
| | Harry O. Lees... ccc eee eens Troy
| | Victor K. Looper, Jr... 0... eee re Hempstead

Mrs. Marvin Posner |
: ‘ Wayne FE. Wagner..... 0... cee eee ey Scotia

Official Notice

}
| Calendars for 1976-77 printed in official bulletins of the
| School of Business, School of Criminal Justice, School -of
Education, and the School of Social Welfare do not reflect

| { important ‘changes in the examination schedule and other
: dates,

The 1976-77 calendar in this bulletin supersedes all
. calendars printed before March 8, 1976. Approved on that

date, it stands until officially changed by State University
of New York at Albany.

Ey
ee Sb

oo ee

State University of New York
at Albany

GENERAL INFORMATION

State University of New York at Albany is the oldest of 7
four university centers of the state-wide university system. © |

It offers undergraduate and graduate education in a wide

variety of fields of study culminating in bachelors’, mas-

ters’, and doctoral degrees.

The University at Albany acknowledges its three tradi- |

tional obligations—for teaching, for research, and for ser-
vice to its community,

To fulfill the first of these obligations, the university pro-_ i

vides, through teaching and the design of academic pro- :
grams, opportunities for students to become liberally edu- ;
cated men and women with superior competence in their ‘

chosen professions or occupations. This goal is accom-
plished through the expansion of intellectual horizons,

which is the traditional aim of liberal studies, in combina- _ ff

tion with thorough specialized or professional study. Such —

jai Gin = aes bm ot

ich -the-stu=>

dent is encouraged to explore freely and to accept the co- |

requisite responsibility which such freedom affords.

The university’s. responsibility for research rests on its ,
historic obligation to extend the boundaries of knowledge '

by all the means at its command. Thus, the university of- « :

fers the most active assistance and encouragement to its

members to carry out scholarly, scientific or creative proj- ;

ects and to make their results widely available.

These traditional activities of the university underlie and

support the services it renders to its community. The uni- :
versity shares its interest in intellectual and artistic pur- |

suits, disseminates the results of its research, and en-

courages its scholars to serve the community through 7

application of their skills and special competencies.

All these responsibilities are mutually reinforcing; ace |

cordingly, the university recognizes that in order to dis-
charge effectively any one of its responsibilities, it must be!
wholeheartedly committed to them all.

6
_ | DESCRIPTION

“a

State University of New York at Albany enrolled more

‘ than 15,400 students in 1975-76, The University at Albany

t *
’
H
Lg
i
?

is committed to a policy of development consistent with

“ the maintenance of the high standards of educational qual-

.
|

Cj six-student suites, divided into two or three sleeping rooms,

| {

. ity which have marked the excellent reputation Albany has

_ enjoyed for more than 180 years.

A new campus, boldly conceived and striking in appear-

ance, is located at the junction of the Northway and the

Thruway (Interstate 87 and 90). Designed by Edward
Durrell Stone, it contains 18 academic buildings on a com-

*mon platform, all connected by a continuous roof and an
enclosed below-level corridor,

Four nearby residence units house students in quadran-—

gles; each contains eight three-story halls surrounding a
23-story tower. The living units consist of four-, five-, and

a common study and an adjacent bath. Lounge, recreation,
and dining facilities are provided for each unit,

Heart of the academic group is the Lecture Hall Center.
Rooms seating 60-500 students are arranged around a cen-
tral court. Each is equipped with the latest audio-visual

—_—_ oe?

_—

eee oe ol

communications devices, connected to the nearby Educa-
> tional Communication Center. On one end of the lecture
complex is the University Library which contains more
‘than 850,000 volumes and seats 3,000 readers at one time.

On the opposite side is the Performing Arts Center with

| its several theatres, recital halls and rehearsal rooms, in
, addition to instructional space,

The Fine Arts Building houses one of the outstanding

-- galleries in the Northeast with an exciting series of exhi-
-bitions constantly underway.

Ok
fog

The Campus Center serves the entire university. Its
four floors include a variety of lounges, meeting and ac-
tivities rooms, a ballroom, cafeteria, snack bar-rathskeller,
' dining room, bookstore, bowling lanes. information and
check-cashing services.

Outdoor recreation facilities include 24 tennis courts,

four basketball and six volleyball courts, as well as several
“grassed multi-purpose playing areas. In the Physical Edu-
cation Center are a pool, handball and squash courts and
areas for team sports.

”

ee He

The university maintains residence, instructional, clini-

|
t

Pres

cal, and research facilities in the heart of the city. Shuttle

buses connect the uptown campus with university buildings
and commercial areas downtown.

Facilities for the disabled, including wheel chair ramps |
and shower facilities, are incorporated in the university. A -

program expanding these features is well underway.

Located near the junction of the Hudson and Mohawk’ |

rivers, Albany offers a variety of cultural and recreational

activities. Summer and winter sports are available in the -
mountains and lakes nearby, and major metropolitan cen- ~ °

ters are only a few hours away by highway.

ACCREDITATION
State University of New York at Albany enjoys unusual

i
¢

accreditation privileges. It is chartered by the Board of ,

Regents of New York State. All its degrees and programs *

are registered and its professional programs fully approved .

by the Board of Regents through the New York State Edu-

ct ie

a ee

Se ee ca ee

cation Department. It is a member of the Council of Grad-
uate Schools in the United States. It is fully accredited by:

The Middle States Association of Colleges and Secon-
ary Schools,

The National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Edu-
cation,

The Council on Social Work Education,

The National League for Nursing, Inc.,

The American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Busi-
ness,

The American Chemical Society,

The American Library Association,

The Medical Library Association, and

The American Board on Counseling Services, Inc.

Its graduates are recognized by the American Associa-
tion of University Women. Many national scholastic hon- °

orary organizations are chartered at the university, includ-
ing Phi Beta Kappa.

nee

£ Pye sk:

bet ee

ny
| _ LIBRARIES J

The University Libraries include the main library hous-

- ing the bulk of the collection, the Downtown Campus
| | ; Branch Library in Hawley Hall, and the School of Library
and Information Science Library located on the ground
_ floor of the University Library. The main library provides
| | ; individual student carrels and study rooms for faculty and

/ , doctoral research, Books and periodicals resources, orga-
! nized by the Library of Congress classification scheme, ex-
| | ceed 850,000 volumes. Current periodical and newspaper

subscriptions number 6,200 with extensive backfiles. The
library, a selective depository for U.S, government publi-

_, eations, also collects documents of local, state, foreign and

| | , international governmental agencies. Membership in the
. ; Center for Research Libraries provides access to the cen-
ter’s 3,000,000 volume collection. The University Library

| 4 is also a member of the Association of Research Libraries.
| The main library, except for holidays, is open during
regular sessions Monday-Thursday, 7:80 a.m.-12 midnight;
Friday, 7:30 a.m.-10:00 p.m.; Saturday, 9:00 a.m.-8:00

_ p.m. ; and Sunday, 12 noon-12 midnight. Information on

| | library hours is available by calling 457- 8551 at any hour.

As-part-of reference service, the Information Retrieval
| Section formulates computer-produced bibliographies using
MEDLARS, ERIC, Biological Abstracts and Psychological
Abstracts data bases. These data bases, providing nearly
3,300,000 monographic and journal citations, are particu-
| , larly useful for searches requiring an interrelationship be-
| 1 tween two or more subjects.
| In addition to the Reference staff, Bibliographic Devel-
opment provides subject qualified specialists to aid faculty
' land students in the use of library materials. Other available
| | services include tours, orientation sessions and instruction
in the techniques of bibliographic research.

mat

The Computing Center is a regional computing facility
, with responsibility for providing computer resources to the
}SUNYA campus and to other par ticipating public and pri-
vate educational institutions. The major computer hard-
ware is a UNIVAC 1110, a large, high-speed, general pur-
pose computer which provides research, instructional and

| ‘COMPUTING CENTER

administrative data processing support in both an inter-
active and batch mode.

The Center supports a wide range of programming lan-
guages as well as a comprehensive library of applications
programs and subprograms which are available to the user
community. Besides a general purpose time-sharing capa-
bility that allows access to most of the currently popular
programming languages, high volume time-sharing is pro-
vided by a system called RTB. Written at SUNYA, RTB
gives access to a rich and responsive BASIC programming

language. Also available is a computer image processing |

facility, and under development is an extended interactive : ;

computer graphics capability. The Center maintains a user
room equipped with RTB terminals, keypunches, and
graphics terminals that are available from 16-22 hours
per day.

10
Expenses

Fa +

| | TUITION AND FEES

At the printing of this bulletin, charges for 1976~77 are

) 4 predicted to be billed at the following rates. They are sub-

i ject to change. (Tuition and fees are prorated for part-time
1+ students.)

i All expenses listed below (excluding graduation assess-

| ment) are based on one session’s cost; items must be dou-
| | bled for cost of academic year.
'}? A. Tuition—Undergraduate Students:
( 1. New York State Residents

| | a, Lower Division—Freshmen and
Lh Sophomores per session .....$375.00
( or part-time (under 12 credits). $ 25.00 per credit
i b. Upper Division—Juniors and
| | Seniors per session ......... $450.00 |
“9 or part-time (under 12 credits). $ 30.00 per credit
2. Out-of-State Residents |
| a. Lower Division—Freshmen and |
| Sophomores per session ..... $600.00 :
( —or part-time (under 12 credits). $ 40.00 per credit
: b, Upper Division—Juniors and
| Seniors per session ......... $750.00
F or part-time (under 12 credits) $ 50.00 per credit
. B. University Fee ............... re $ 12.50 |
| | C. Student Activity Assessment ........,...... $ 33,00
| D, Books ............ 000.0. re $ 75,00
| FE, Room in residence hall ................... $375.00
B F, Board ...... 0.0. cc cee ne, $365,00
'G, Class Dues 000... ee $ 2,00
ls H. Health and Accident Insurance
( (See Health Services)......... 0 ...... ...$ 26.50
| | I, Service charge for late registration ........ ..8 10,00
| J. Service charge for late payment of fees ...... $ 10.00

Invalidated checks received on account will constitute

; late payment; the above service charge will be applied.

| To the above costs should be added an estimated cost of
, $275 per session to cover clothing, travel, recreation, and
( personal needs, It is, therefore, suggested that each student
' registered at this university have available for the academic
| year the amounts of money indicated below; these amounts

ia)

( represent average total cost.

| 15
:
7

fare. The program objective of this course of study is to
educate students in becoming familiar with the basic nature
of the field of social welfare and various forms of service. |

re ey

CROSS-REGISTRATION

Undergraduate students at SUNYA may cross-register | |
for courses at other campuses within this area while en- {| |
rolled at this institution. Cross-registration enrollments
must be in courses not available through the SUNYA | :
curriculum. iy

Cross-registered students must be full-time undergrad- ; |
uate, matriculated students and at least one half of a stu-
dent’s credits registered during a cross-registered term ;>j
must be SUNYA courses. No extra tuition charge is as- | |
sessed, but students are responsible for any fees that may °— '
be required by the host institution for a particular course. |
Credits earned through cross-registration are recorded as | j
transfer credits. |

Students seeking more information about the participat-
ing institutions and the courses available should contact ; .
the Associate Dean of the University College, ULB 86. |

dot

THE_VISITING_STUDENT PROGRAM

State University of New York at Albany participates in | |
the Visiting Student Program which allows students to |
study at participating public and private institutions in the
state. The purpose of the program is to enable students to ; |
take advantage of the extraordinarily rich educational re- | !
sources represented by the institutions for a session or year. °
There are 50 colleges and universities participating in —
the Visiting Student Program. Further details on the par- | |
ticipating schools and procedures for applying may be ob- |

tained from University College, ULB 86.

LEAVE OF ABSENCE |

A student at State University of New York at Albany >
may apply for a leave of absence to study in an approved, .
program at another accredited college or university. The ; |
student on leave must have the approval of his academic I
adviser. Information and applications for leaves of absence
may be obtained at the Office of the Dean of Student |

Affairs. |
12

——
eee
Ho i"

Undergraduate Academic Regulations

| Within the governance framework of this university, the
Undergraduate Academic Council recommends policy con-

cerning undergraduate academic programs and regulations,
ji To assist in academic governance, individual schools and
| colleges have collateral committees which can recommend
z academic policy to this council and review individual ap-
pellate cases. It is the responsibility of each undergraduate
, . student to be knowledgeable concerning pertinent aca-
; demic policy. The university encourages each student to
accept the widest responsibility for his academic program.

: l. CLASSIFICATION OF STUDENTS
| : Students are classified by the University Registrar on
‘the basis of graduation credits, as follows:
; Freshman ...............000. Fewer than 24
| Sophomore ................5. 24-55
Junior 2.0... 56-87
Senior... 0... 0c. cee eee eee 88 or more
| Most students are enrolled in University College during
| their freshman year. When a student has been accepted as

a nrajor het is enrolled in the school or college offering study
. in the desired major field.* In line with policy developed

| ; by the Committee on Academic Standing of the Under-
|; graduate Academic Council, a particular department,
school, or college within the university may permit a stu-

: dent to enroll who has not fulfilled the minimum stan-
| : dards of enrollment. Special conditions of enrollment may
be required by individual departments, schools, or colleges.

[ ll. GRADING**

The normative grading pattern is “A-E.” Students may
select up to 30 credits of courses below the 500 level
graded on an “S/U” (satisfactory/unsatisfactory) basis, six

| *These are the College of Arts & Sciences and the Schools of
* Business, Education, Public Affairs, and Social Welfare. Those regis-
tered in the Teacher Education Program must first be acceptable to
* the School of Education.

| | *#In 1969-70, all freshman students were under a mandatory
“S/U” grading system. In 1970—71, most freshman and sophomore
students were graded “S/U”; a limited number of students were
granted exception to this system and were graded “A—E” as were
. all juniors and seniors. From 1971 to 1973 “S/U” grading was
, normative for freshman and sophomores with an option to grant

“A-E” grading to any student who petitioned for exception.

. 17

FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE _

All matters regarding financial assistance to students of
the university should be directed to:
Office of Financial Aids
Business Administration Room 109
State University of New York at Albany
1400 Washington Avenue
Albany, New York 12222,
Phone: (518) 457-8882

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT

Academic advisement services for undergraduate stu- :

dents are coordinated by the University College. Advisers
assist students to plan and select a course of study which
is consistent with the student’s abilities, interests, achieve-
ments, and future plans. Information about courses, aca-
demic study beyond the SUNY-Albany campus, interpre-
tation of the university’s academic policies, and referral to
other university offices and persons for assistance in psy-
chological counseling, health problems, financial needs,
and other specialized resources are part of the services
provided by academic advisers.

Students who are “open majors” or who intend to pur-

the staff of the University College until they are ready to
declare a major or until they are accepted by the academic
unit that offers their intended major. Various patterns exist
as to when a student may be accepted as a major in a
specific department. The University College works closely
with each of the degree-granting schools and colleges
within the university to insure that students have access to
trained and knowledgeable persons who can assist students
to make responsible- decisions as they plan their academic
programs.

Specialized advisement opportunities are provided for
students who intend to apply to medical, dental, allied
health, or law schools, These services are coordinated
through the University College and specific information
about pre-professional advisement is presented during the
orientation programs provided for entering students.

Students are encouraged to meet with their assigned -
adviser on a regular basis and to review the advisement .
information materials that are provided to students by the |
staff of the University College.

sue-one-of the —“limited-enrollment~majors-are-advised-by—

| |

tof

sere

a
lll, ACADEMIC STANDING 4

The following minimum academic retention standards
apply to full-time students:

Bie

Full-time students shall have their university regis-
tration terminated at the end of the appropriate ses-
sion if they do not have the number of graduation
credits listed below under “Academic Termination.”
Students who are terminated shall have the words

“Registration Terminated” placed on the Academic
Record.

A full-time student shall be placed on probation if he
fails to complete satisfactorily at least nine gradua-
tion credits during a session and/or if he has not
accumulated the appropriate number of credits ac-
cording to the listing below under “Academic Proba-
tion.” He shall be given written notification of his
status at the end of the appropriate session.

A student dismissed from the university for failing to

meet

the minimum academic standards set forth above

shall have the right to seek reinstatement by written peti-
tion to the appropriate committee on academic standing.

IV. CREDIT LOAD

A full-time student is defined as one carrying a min-
imum of 12 credits at the close of the first week of

classes, Those carrying fewer credits are classified as
part-time students.

A normal session load is 15 credits.

a. New York State Resident

(1) Lower Division ............. ... $8,100.00 5 |
(2) Upper Division ................ 3,250.00: |
b. Out-of-State Resident | f
(1) Lower Division ................ 3,650.00.
(2) Upper Division ............. ... 8,850.00,
c. Commuting Students : |
(1) Lower Division ................ 1,800.00
(2) Upper Division ................ 2,000.00 : |
|
i |
REFUNDS

A student withdrawing officially from his courses is en- | 2
titled to a refund of a proportion of the tuition paid for the : |
course according to the schedule below. The Office of Stu-

dent Accounts, upon receipt of formal notice of with-
drawal, automatically refunds tuition due. Saturday of the
week in which the first class session occurs shall be deemed
the end of the first week for refund purposes.

Last Class Attended During Percent of Tuition Refunded |
First Week ..........0.0.0 0.00000. 100% 7
Second Week ST TTrTnT eT eee ee ee 10% up
Third Week .........0.000 0.00000, 50% | |
Fourth Week ................0005. 380% ut
Fifth Week ................. wl. «=0%

Example of refund to a student whose program drops below
12 credits

a. Tuition charge for student taking 18 credits. . $375.00
Student drops a 83 credit course during
fourth week:

b. Tuition charge as a special student for the
remaining 10 credits (10 credits @ $21.50). . 250.00

c. Difference between amount originally
charged as a full-time student and re-

evaluated charges as a special student: ..... 125.00
d, Liability percentage as provided by schedule

of tuition during fourth week: ............ T0%
e, Tuition charge: ............ 000000. e eee 87.50
f. Refund: ......0 000... ce 37.50

rh ee ee
ie cc
—e ne Cn eee aaa | el

level course, the student must have the approval of
his adviser and obtain the written permission of his
department chairman and the instructor offering the
course. The department chairman should arrange for
copies of these permissions to be distributed to the

persons involved and filed in the student’s official
folder,

VI. AUDITING COURSES

There are two categories of audit. In the informal audit
the student visits courses without tuition, fees, examina-
tions, grading, or credit and no record is maintained, In
the formal audit the student pays tuition and fees, and the
course is entered on the transcript of the student with the
grade of “N” (non-credit).

Vil. TRANSFER OF CREDIT

A degree candidate wishing to take courses at other in-
stitutions for credit toward a degree at this university must
have prior approval in writing from his academic adviser.
Such written approval must be filed with the Office of the

University Registrar_and_an_official_transeript- of swork-satis———

factorily completed at another institution must be received
by that office before credit can be awarded.

VI. ATTENDANCE

Class attendance is a matter between the instructor and
the student. The instructor is obliged to announce and in-

terpret specific attendance policies to his class at the begin-
ning of the course,

IX. RE-EXAMINATION

A student who fails a course may, under special circum-

stances and with approval of the instructor, be granted a
re-examination.

X. GRIEVANCE PROCEDURES
Fach academic unit of SUNY-Albany has grievance pro-

cedures whereby students can have complaints against an

instructor investigated. Students should contact the office
of the dean of the academic unit involved if further infor-
mation is desired.

me oe rr Se

of which may be in the major, second field, or combination
thereof. Courses for which a student selects “S/U” grading
are so designated on the academic record. In addition, some
courses listed in the Schedule of Classes by a department
are designated for “G/U” grading; these departmentally
designated “S/U” graded courses are in addition to the 80
credits of “S/U” courses a student may select.

The grade of “A” indicates excellent achievement and
the grades of “B”, “C”, “D”, and “E” indicate achievement
in descending order of accomplishment. The grade of “D”
can only be used to fulfill graduation requirements if it is
balanced as defined in section XIV, B of these regulations.
The grade of “E” is a failing grade and cannot be used to
fulfill graduation requirements.

The grade of “S” indicates satisfactory achievement at
least at the level necessary for an undergraduate degree
and is acceptable to fulfill graduation requirements, The
grade of “U” is unsatisfactory and is not acceptable to
fulfill graduation requirements.

Additionally, the following grades may be assigned:

I Incomplete. No graduation credit. A temporary
grade assigned by the instructor only when the

Fevegersy te

student—has-nearly completed his course require-
ments but because of circumstances beyond the
student's control the work is not completed, The
incomplete grade must be resolved prior to one
month before the end of the term following that
in which the incomplete is received. Failure to
satisfy the deadline for resolving the grade of “I”
will result in the appropriate academic grade be-
ing assigned by the instructor.

N_ Non-credit.

W Withdrawn, Not an academic grade. (See the sec-
tion on dropping a course and withdrawal from
the University.)

Z Administrative penalty grade. No graduation credit.

The grade was assigned before August 20, 1973,

for failure to complete an “I” or when no other

grade was appropriate.

ere = elie
oo,
——

gserne ae ok

3, A student whose last date of course attendance is

before the last day to drop courses shall receive
the grade of ““W” for each registered course,

4. A student who withdraws from the university
after the last day to drop courses for that session
will receive the appropriate academic grade as-
signed by the instructor for each course.

5. A matriculated student who does not register, or
registers but does not attend any classes, for a

given session will be withdrawn from the univer-
sity.

Xil. ACADEMIC AVERAGE

The academic average is computed using all course
credits graded and weighted as follows: A-4, B-3, C-2,
D-1, and E-0, The average does not include courses with
the grades of 8S, U, I, W, or N.

Xill. DEAN’S LIST

A student is placed on the dean’s list if a minimum of 15
graduation credits is completed in one session with a term

ee,

so ee cere te St

average of 3.00 or greater and if at least 12 of those pradu-
ation credits are graded “A-E.”

XIV. GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Requirements for the Bachelor's Degree are found
in the next section of this bulletin.

B. Credit-Grade Requirements
1. Credits
A student must earn a minimum of 120 accept-
able graduation credits to be eligible for gradu-
ation from the university.

Acceptable graduation credit is:

a. Credit accepted by transfer.

b. Credit earned through approved proficiency
examinations.

c. Credit completed with the grades of “A”, “B”,
“C”, or “S,”

d. Credit completed with the grade of “D” only if
it is balanced by credit with the grades of “A”
or “B”. One credit earned with the grade of “B”

gat ny —_

/ C. The maximum number of credits for which a student

registers in a session is an individual matter. The
maximum credit load for a student in a given session
is determined with the advice and consent of that
student’s academic adviser. It is incumbent upon the
student who desires to take more than the normal 15
credits to prepare the rationale for discussion with
his academic adviser,

V. COURSE ENROLLMENT

A. A student ordinarily enrolls in courses at the level

appropriate to his class.

Individual departments have the authority to require
a “C” or “S” grade in courses that are prerequisite
for advanced courses in that area.
Graduate-Undergraduate Study

Seniors of high academic standing in the university
may receive graduate credit for graduate courses
taken in excess of undergraduate requirements in the
last session of their senior year provided not more
than six credits are needed to complete the student’s

undergraduate program. _Permission_of the Dean of

Graduate Studies is required and must be obtained
in advance of registration to receive such credit. A
senior who is permitted to take courses for graduate
credit in his last session also must make formal ap-
plication for admission to a graduate program and
be accepted as a graduate student before registering
for study in the final session.

. Graduate Courses—Undergraduate Credit

500 level course enrollment: A senior with a superior
academic record may register for a 500 level course
for undergraduate credit with the approval of the
major department chairman and the course instruc-
tor. 600 level course enrollment: In exceptional cir-
cumstances, a senior may be authorized to register
for a 600 level graduate course provided he has com-
pleted most of the upper division undergraduate and
other courses essential to his major and requires a
graduate course to strengthen it. To qualify for such
enrollment the senior must have a superior record,
particularly in his major field. To register for a 600
with an average equal to or greater than 3.00 but
less than 3,40; Magna Cum Laude with an aver-
age equal to or greater than 3.40, but less than
3.70; Summa Cum Laude with an average equal
to or greater than 3.70. For graduation with hon-
ors, a student must have completed a minimurn of
56 credits at this university graded on the “A-E”
scale.

2. A student who completes an Honors Program may
receive a special Honors Certificate upon the rec-
ommendation of his major department.

Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree

The university awards the degree of Bachelor of Arts
(B.A.) or Bachelor of Science (B.S.) to those candidates
who have completed an approved sequence of courses and
study totaling a minimum of 120 credits and who, by vote

of the faculty, are certified as having fulfilled all degree
requirements.

A.BACHELOR—OF-ARTS

wen
aie oo

1. The Bachelor of Arts degree requires a minimum of 120
credits.

2. The Bachelor of Arts degree requires at least 90 credits
in the liberal arts and sciences.

3. The Bachelor of Arts degree requires 30-36 credits in
a major which has been registered with the Education
Department of the State of New York.

a. A major in one of the following:

General Program

College of Arts and Sciences: African and Afro-
American Studies, Anthropology, Art, Biology,
Comparative and World Literature, Economics,
English, French, Geography, German, Greek,
Greek and Roman Civilization, History, Inter-
American Studies, Interdisciplinary Studies (such
as Chinese Studies, Asian Studies, Linguistics, En-
vironmental Studies, Russian and East European
Studies), Italian, Judaic Studies, Latin, Mathema-

/ |

XI. PROGRAM CHANGES (Consult the Calendar in this
Bulletin for applicable dates mentioned in this section.)

Adding a Course

A course may be added to a student’s program with
the consent of the student’s adviser up to that day
specified for the session in the academic calendar.
For Fall and Spring sessions, the period to add a
course begins with the second day of classes and
extends to and includes the tenth calendar day fol-
lowing the beginning of classes,

Grading Choice

Students may change their grading choice (“A-E” or
“S/U”) for courses not departmentally designated
for “S/U” grading during the time designated for
adding courses. Changes in grading selection cannot
be authorized beyond the day specified as the last
day to add a course.

Dropping a Course

A student may initiate a course withdrawal and re-
ceive a “W” by filing the appropriate form with the
Registrar at any time between the last day to add a

Be eben

Wh. wen, =

course-and the last day to drop.

Normally, a course dropped before the last day to

add will be deleted from the student record.

The instructor responsible for the course may assign
a “W” where there is no evidence of attendance since
the last day to add.

A student who attends a course after the last day to
add, and does not complete the drop procedure, is
assigned the appropriate academic grade by the in-
structor responsible for the course.

Withdrawal from the University (See also the section
on readmission.)

1. A student dropping an entire course load for a

session must process a voluntary withdrawal form
with the Office of the Dean of Student Affairs.

2. A student who withdraws from the university
without having attended any course meetings for
that session has the courses for that session de-
leted from the academic record,

eee |
, y,

Teacher Education Program:

College of Arts and Sciences: Biology, Chemistry,
Earth Science, Mathematics, Physics.

School of Education: Business Education or Speech
Pathology and Audiology.

| 4, The Bachelor of Science degree requires 18-24 credits
; in a second field which is defined as including at least
six credits of advanced course work (usually courses
; numbered 300 or above). The second field may be
| closely related to, be supportive of, or be totally inde-
_ pendent of the major, but the second field must have
coherence; it must be unified and make sense, The sec-
| ond field requirements may be combined with the major
| requirements, but the total not to exceed 66 credits.

5. The. Bachelor of Science degree requires 21 credits in

| professional courses for the candidate desiring State
\ | certification in Education.

€._THE-SEGOND-FIELD

* 1. In addition to second fields available in the fields rep-
| resented by the majors noted above, students may com-
plete second fields in Computer Science, Education,
- Journalism, Peace Studies, Women’s Studies and Urban
| Studies.

2. Moreover, within the parameters noted in A. 4 and B. 4
above, a student may develop and complete an interde-
partmental second field.

| | D. THE DOUBLE MAJOR

Students who elect to declare a major in two depart-

; , ments may do so with the provision that the faculty of the

| _ school or college which houses the department from which

* the student seeks and receives advisement shall recommend

_ the student for his degree. Both majors that the student has

| - chosen and completed successfully will then appear on the
|. student’s “Undergraduate Record.”

renee

;

G—Residenee

balances one credit earned with the grade of
“PD” and one credit earned with the grade
of “A” balances two credits with the grade of
“>”,

2. Major and Second Field 3

A student may fulfill the requirements of a major

or a second field or a combined major and second

field by earning graduation credit as defined above
except that credit with the grade of “D” must be
balanced as follows:

a. Credit with the grade of “D” may be used to
fulfill the requirements of a major only if bal-
anced by credit with grades of “A” or “B”
earned within the major.

b. Credit with the grade of “D” may be used to
fulfill the requirements of a second field only
if balanced by credit with grades of “A” or
“B” earned within the second field.

c. Credit with the grade of “D” may be used to
fulfill the requirements of a combined major
and second field only if balanced by credit
with grades of “A” or “B” earned within the
combined major and second field.

The university requires a degree candidate to earn
his last 30 credits in courses completed on this cam-
pus or through a program formally affiliated with
this university.

. Degree Application

Degree requirements may be completed during any
session; the degree will be conferred at the following
May commencement. The student must file a degree
application with the Office of the University Regis-
trar in accordance with the date specified in the offi-
cial university calendar, Failure to do so will necessi-
tate refiling for the degree at the end of the following
term. A student who has properly applied for the
degree will be notified in writing by the Office of the
University Registrar if he will not meet degree re-
quirements that session.

E. Degree with Honors

24.

1. University-wide honors are conferred at gradua-
tion, A student will be graduated: Cum Laude

op lo: cE ee a

.
ee we ey,
tics, Music, Philosophy, Political Science, Psychol-
ogy, Puerto Rican Studies, Rhetoric and Commu-
nication, Russian, Sociology, Spanish, Theatre.

Teacher Education: English, French, German, His-
tory, Italian, Latin, Mathematics, Russian, Social
Studies, Spanish.

The Bachelor of Arts degree requires 18-24 credits in a
second field which is defined as including at least six
credits of advanced course work (usually courses num-
bered 300 or above). The second field may be closely
related to, be supportive of, or be totally independent
of the major, but the second field must have coherence;
it must be unified and make sense.

The Bachelor of Arts degree requires 21 credits in pro-
fessional courses for the candidate desiring State certifi-
cation in Education.

. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

. The Bachelor of Science degree requires a minimum of

120 credits.

Seem nef

. The Bachelor of Science degree requires at least 60

credits in the liberal arts and sciences.

. The Bachelor of Science degree requires 30-42 credits

in a major which has been registered with the Educa-
tion Department of the State of New York.
a. A major in one of the following

General Program:
College of Arts and Sciences: Atmospheric Sci-
ence, Biology, Chemistry, Economics, Geology,
Interdisciplinary Studies (Environmental Studies,
Computer Science and Applied Mathematics),
Mathematics, Physics, Medical Technology.
School of Business: Business Administration or
Accounting.
School of Education: Speech Pathology and Audi-
ology.
School of Nursing: Nursing.
School of Social Welfare: Social Welfare.

VFS Wee
,

NeQe-wwss
Credit and Course Designations

Information concerning specific programs of study may
be found by referring to the sections in this bulletin headed
College of Arts and Sciences; School of Business; School of
Criminal Justice; School of Education; College of General

Studies; School of Library and Information Science; School
of Nursing; Graduate School of Public Affairs; School of
Social Welfare.

I. UNIT OF ACADEMIC CREDIT

Generally, one credit represents the equivalent of one
hour of lecture or recitation or at least two hours of Jab-
oratory work each week for one session or the equivalent
in honors study,

The number following each course title [e.g. (3)] indi-
cates the credits offered for that course.

Il. SIGNIFICANCE OF THE COURSE NUMBER

Each course offered by the university is assigned a des-
ignation and a number according to a plan which is out-

Ree SS

lined “below. The specific_course-designation-and numb ex

appears in the bulletin directly in front of the course title.

Each course designation consists of three separate units:

(1) the school designation; (2) the subject or depattmental
designation; and, (3) the course number.

1. The school or college offering a course is identified by
a single letter as noted below:

A—College of Arts and Sciences

B—Schoo] of Business

C-—School of Criminal Justice

E—School of Education

G—College of General Studies

L—School of Library and Information Science

N—School of Nursing

P—Graduate School of Public Affairs

R—Regional Cross-Registration

S—School of Social Welfare

All courses listed in the section of a particular school are
understood to be preceded by the letter of the school, un-

wee ne ey
less otherwise noted. Example: Eng 100, offered in the
College of Arts and Sciences, is understood to be preceded
by A (A Eng 100); Eng 490, offered in the School of Edu-
cation, is understood to be preceded by E (E Eng 490),

2. The subject or departmental designation consists of
three letters representing an abbreviation for the subject
or the department offering the course. Following is a list-

ing of designations assigned by the various schools and
colleges:

College of Arts and Sciences

African and Afro-American Studies, Aas; Anthropology,
Ant; Art History, Arh; Art, (Studio) Art; Arts and Sciences,
A&S; Astronomy and Space Science, Asy; Atmospheric Sci-
ences, Atm; Biological Sciences, Bio; Chemistry, Chm; Chi-
nese, Chi; Classical Archaeology, Cla; Comparative and
World Literature, Cwl; Computer Science, Csi; Econom-
ics, Eco; English, Eng; Environmental Studies, Env;
French, Fre; Geography, Gog; Geological Sciences, Geo;
German, Ger; Ancient Greek, Clg; Greek & Roman Civili-

zation, Cle; Moder Greek, Cmg; Hebrew, Heb; History,

His; Inter-American Studies, Jas; Italian, Ita; Journalism,
Jrl; Judaic Studies, Jst; Latin, Cll; Linguistics, Lin; Mathe-
matics, Mat; Music, Mus; Philosophy, Phi; Physics, Phy;
Polish, Pol; Portuguese, Por; Psychology, Psy; Puerto Rican
Studies, Prs; Rhetoric and Communication, Reo; Russian

& East European Studies, Res; Russian, Rus; Slavic Lan-:

guages and Literature, Sla; Social Studies, Sst; Sociology,
Soc; Spanish, Spn; Theatre, Thr; Women’s Studies, Wss;
Yiddish, Yid.

School of Business

Accounting, Acc; Business Services, Bus; Finance, Fin;
Law, Law; Management, Mgt; Management Science, Msi;
Marketing, Mkt.

School of Criminal Justice
Crj
29

AEN. SAPO HES FoR be SO

/ School of Education

Business Eiducation, Bus; Comparative Education, Com;
Curriculum and Instruction, C&I; Education, Edu; Educa-
tional Administration, Adm; Educational Communications,
Cmu; English Education, Eng; Foundations of Education,
Fdn; French, Fre; German, Ger; Counseling and Person-
nel, Cps; Health, Che; History of Education, His; Italian,
Ita; Latin Education, Lat; Mathematics Education, Mat;
Teaching Foreign Languages, Flt; Philosophy of Educa-
tion, Phl; Physical Education, Pec; Psychology, Psy; Read-

ing, Rdg; Russian,_ Rus; Suienes Education, Sci; Social

Studies Education, Sst; Sociology of Education; Soc; -Span-.

ish, Spn; Speech Pathology and Audiology, Sau: T eacher -

Education, Tch; Teaching English as a Second Language,
Es); Traffic and Safety Education, Tsp.

College of General Studies
International Programs, Ins

School of Library and information Science
Lib

School of Nursing

Nursing, Nur; Nursing Science, Nsc

Graduate School of Public Affairs

Political Economy, Pec; Political Science, Pos; Public Ad-
ministration, Pad; Public Affairs, Paf. 3

School of Social Welfare
Ssw

30
oe eet mg.

—
I .

The course number is a three-digit number reflecting the
level at which the course is taught and the specific number
assigned to the course by the department offering the
course, Some courses are given the designation a or b fol-
lowing the number, with a being assigned for the first ses-

sion and b for the second. The level designations are noted
below:

000-099 Non-credit courses

3. Course Number

| 100-299 Lower division courses with 200-299 primarily |
for sophomores. |

| ‘ 300-499 Upper division course with 400-499 primarily
| for seniors.
500-699 First year graduate courses, Open to seniors with

a appropriate background, and special permission.
if See section V,D, |
‘700-899 Advanced graduate courses ordinarily beyond the |
- master’s degree.
| :
a .

ee ae ee

College of Arts and Sciences

The College of Arts and Sciences offers the undergradu-
ate degree of Bachelor of Arts (B.A.) or Bachelor of Science
(B.S.) to those candidates who complete an approved se-
quence of courses and study totaling 120 credits and who,
by vote of the faculty, are. certified as having fulfilled all
degree requirements, To complete a major in the College
of Arts and Sciences, a minimum of 12 credits of upper
division courses (300 and 400 level) must be completed in

Albany, CO

All undergraduate courses offered by the College of Arts
and Sciences except Bio 400a and b are defined as liberal
arts and sciences courses for purposes of degree require-
ments for the B.A. and B.S. degrees.

Three divisions comprise the college: the Division of
Humanities, the Division of Sciences and Mathematics, and
the Division of Social and Behavioral Sciences.

All courses in this section are understood to be preceded
by the designation “A” unless otherwise noted.

College-Courses

wt
mene :

The College of Arts and Sciences offers several courses
designed to facilitate serious independent study and parti-
cipation in special projects which cannot be undertaken
through regular course work. Students interested in the
courses described in this section may obtain further infor-
mation and application forms from the offices of the divi-
sional deans.

Credits earned through these courses may be appor-
tioned in whole or in part as major credit, second field
credit, or elective credit, as appropriate, and as determined
by the student’s major department.

. INDEPENDENT STUDY
hes 300

Independent Study (1-4 credits, as approved)
An independent study course with variable credit. Contingent
upon the consent of an instructor willing to supervise the study,
May be repeated but each registration must be for an approved

project. Approval of the college’s Interdepartmental Studies Com-
mittee required.

32
7 A S
A&S 301. Independent Study (5-15 credits, as approved)
An independent study course designed to provide larger blocks of
| | time for independent study projects. Contingent upon the consent of
; an instructor willing to supervise the study. May be repeated, but

each registration must be for an approved project. Approval of the
College’s Interdepartmental Studies Committee required.

va SPECIAL PROJECTS

A&§S 390 Special Projects (1-15 credits, as approved)
(| Special projects involving community activity and collateral study.
| , Contingent upon the consent of an instructor willing to supervise
| the study. May be repeated, but each registration must be for an

approved project. Approval of the college’s Interdepartmeéntal Studies
Cammittee required.

vA EXPERIMENTAL PROGRAMS

| A&S 350 Experimental Programs (3)
if Experimental olass, the subject varying with instructors and the
» term offered. See special announcements of courses to be offered

... under this heading. Approval of the college’s Interdepartmental
Studies Committee required.

Interdisciplinary Majors

Lhe College of Arts and Sciences provides the opportu-
; , nity for highly motivated sutdents with special educational
| : goals to pursue a course of study in an area not provided

for by the current offerings of the university. An interdisci-

, plinary program will usually include course work in several

departments as well as independent study in an interdisci-
: plinary field taken under faculty guidance.

Faculty-initiated interdisciplinary majors have thus far
{ - been approved in the following areas; Asian Studies, Chi-
| nese Studies, Computer Science and Applied Mathematics,
_ Environmental Studies, Linguistics, and Russian and East
-: European Studies, Descriptions of these programs appear
| ' in the bulletin in appropriate alphabetical sequence.
| Student-initiated interdisciplinary majors offer qualified
_ students an opportunity to design an individual course of
. study. Individual programs should constitute a well-inte-
: grated whole, but need not be in a conventional academic
' discipline, Students interested in an interdisciplinary major
or one of the interdisciplinary second fields described be-
li low, may obtain further information and application forms
| | from the offices of the divisional deans,

———

aeneel

Interdisciplinary Second Fields
(Majors Not Currently Offered)

JOURNALISM

The interdisciplinary second field in journalism, consist-
ing of courses listed under the ‘Journalism’ subject desig-
nation (Jrl) and some offered by various departments, is
designed to combine training in journalistic writing and
some practical work in the media with a critical study of
the role of the media in society. It is intended primarily
as preparation for journalistic careers, -but its -courses-are
open to other students. Students wishing to take a second
field in journalism will need a minimum of 18 credits in a
variety of courses, making their selections to form a co-
herent body of study adapted to their needs and interests.
At least six credits must be in advanced courses. (courses
with prerequisites or at the 300 level or above). There is
only one special requirement for the second field in jour-
nalism, skill in writing, to be demonstrated by the end of
the junior year by submission of a substantial sample of
the student’s writing to the academic adviser and the di-

rector of the journalism program. The following core
_Courses_are_offered:

“aon TL

Jrl 300 Introduction to Journalism (3)

Exploration of what journalism is, in the work of the press and
television and radio. Readings in journalism, discussion with prac-
ticing journalists, journalistic writing and wvriting about journalism.

Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Eng 301 Expository Writing (3)

Eng 308 Journalistic Writing (3)
“ Jrl365 Journalism: Special Topics (3)
Study of special problems in journalism, May be taken more than
once with different content.
, Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

vA |
Jrl 397 Independent Study in Journalism (1-4)

A project in journalistic investigation and writing or a study of

some specific body of journalism, to be sponsored by a faculty mem-

jber and approved by the director of journalism. May be taken more
{ than once.

Y Jrl 400 = Internship in Journalism (3-4)

For senior students who will work part time for a term with a
newspaper or a television or radio station in the area and coordinate
their work with the director of the journalism program,

Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Somers Sore]

Meee tp
'
Nn

Other courses for the second field may be selected from
offerings of various departments, such as Pos 365 Govern-
ment and the Mass Media, Pos 321 State and Local Gov-
ernment, Pos 426b American Constitutional Law, Soc 255
Mass Media, Soc 281 Criminology, Soc 460 Human Com-
munication, Rco 214 Communication Through Mass Media,
Reo 238 Rhetoric of Mass Media, Reo 265 Introduction to
Communication Theory, Reo 303 Advanced Speech Com-
position, Reo 336 Studies in Contemporary Public Address:
The Rhetoric of the New Journalism, and independent
studies in various departments when the subject involves
journalism.

Students with particular interests may take other courses
to prepare them for a specialized branch of journalism.
Courses in this category include Eco 355 Public Finance,
Eco 470 History of the Labor Movement, and relevant
courses in environmental studies, the physical sciences,

' art, music, theatre, and cinema. No more than two courses

‘in this category should be included in the minimum 18

credits for the second field in journalism,

PEACE STUDIES

Re ae te

The second field of Peace Studies has been established
to press the development of interdisciplinary education and
research in the problems of violence in international and
domestic affairs and the possibilities of non-violent conflict
resolution in both spheres. The courses in the field are reg-
ular departmental offerings in the physical, biological, so-
cial, and behavioral sciences. The basic course is the Peace
Studies Forum offered by the Graduate School of Public

. Affairs. For further information, contact Professor Lester

| Hawkins in the Graduate School of Public Affairs,

‘URBAN AFFAIRS
The interdepartmental second field in urban affairs has

_ a two-fold purpose: (1) to provide an understanding of the

development of cities and contemporary urban civilization,
and (2) to provide background for those interested in pur-

_ suing graduate studies in areas relating to the urban milieu.

: The courses offered by the disciplines concerned with ur-

ban topics range widely. It is therefore recommended that

_ students taking a second field in urban affairs include work
. from at least three departments. Urban courses are offered

_in_this office. Members of the committee, including the

gia wig, BE

in the departments of African and Afro-American Studies,
Anthropology, Art, Economics, Environmental Studies, . -
Geography, History, Physics, Political Science, Puerto | ;
Rican Studies, and Sociology. Current course offerings ; |
in the urban affairs second field are listed in the Sched-

ule of Classes, A brochure describing the second field and j *
the list of courses available may be obtained in the office
of the Secretary of the Urban Affairs Committee, Graduate — |
School of Public Affairs, Room 904, Mohawk Tower. A
roster of the Urban Affairs Committee is also available

chairman, Professor Mark LaGory, Room 603-3, Mohawk
Tower, may be consulted for guidance in selecting urban ; :
affairs courses. |

WOMEN’S STUDIES

The university offers an interdisciplinary second field in ; |
women’s studies. Wss 200 Perspectives on Women (3) pro- * ‘
vides a multidisciplinary approach to women in contempo- __
rary society. It is designed as an introduction to Women’s : ;
Studies and to more specialized women’s studies courses, | |
Such courses concentrating specifically on women are cur-

—an ee

rently offered-in the departments-of Anthropology, Classics; :
English, Foundations of Education, French, Hispanic and ° |
Jtalian Studies, History, and Rhetoric and Communication Lt
(Ant 381; Cle 310; Eng 395; Fdn 405; Fdn 505; Fre 499;

Spn 344; Spn 420; His 256; His 293, Reo 465). in addi- i
tion, the following departments and programs offer ap- | |
plicable courses: Sociology, Economics, French, Puerto ~
Rican studies, and Health, Physical Education and Rec-
reation. Independent study courses are available in various

“departments. wy f r | “ L a

Wss 200*°”Perspectives on Women (3)

A multidisciplinary approach to women in contemporary society. | .
An examination of women in history under different socio-economic j |
systems, leading to an understanding of the biological, social/ * *
psychological, and cultural image of women. Designed as an intro-
duction to Women’s Studies as a discipline and to more specialized
/Women’s Studies courses.

Wss 210 Introduction to Feminism (3) _

A study of the origins and development of feminist thought and
of the feminist movement in America, with emphasis on the issues : :
and problems. of the contemporary women’s movement, } i
Prerequisite: consent of instructor,. tg

os ;
to Wss 399 Topics in Women’s Studies (1-3)

-: alike to gain new perspectives on what it means to be

% '

" iy
; 5

| glish, French, German, Greek, Greek and Roman Civiliza-2e
\

. Sciences offers programs in the arts and the humanities
- which afford the student opportunities to study the variety
‘ of ways in which the human spirit manifests itself, to ex-

plore the meaning of human existence, and to consider the
» role which values play in the examined life. Faculty mem-
. bers welcome the sharing of ideas and participation in

Ae eS

» tre. Majors in Art with emphasis in Art History, Compara-
' tive Literature, and Italian are being phased out and no
~ degrees in these areas will be awarded after August, 1978.
_ In addition, the Division of Humanities is responsible for ;
, interdisciplinary_m majors with concentrations in Chinese
. Studies and in Linguistics, and for second fields in Jour-

~ to the memory of the first head of the Division of Humani-

- Department of Art shares a separate building at the main
. entrance to the campus with the University Art Gallery,
- the largest in the State University of New York. The Per-

Consideration of topics or issues in Women’s Studies selected on

| ' the basis of faculty and student interest. May be taken more than
i _ Specific topics and prerequisites.

* Goss 397

once with different content. Consult fall and spring schedules for

; 2/21
DIVISION OF HUMANITIES Mt Ho |
Ruth A, Schmidt, Dean On

Judy Held Miller, Assistant to the Dean
The Division of Humanities of the College of Arts and.

common experiences which help professor and student:

human,

t Study Crna) C Mento i

ah
$78

ay [t

Fields of study cmrently_leading-to-majors in the Divi-

sion of Humanities are Art, Comparative Literature, En-

. tion, Italian, Judaic Studies, Latin, Music, Philosophy, #

Rhetoric and Communication, Russian, Spanish, and Thea-

nalism and Women’s Studies.
The Edith O. Wallace Humanities Building (dedicated

ties) is the home of 9 departments of the division. The

forming Arts Center, with four theatres and the Recital

_ Hall, is the center of actu es of the departments gf Music
Cen tye (3

a Th N25 0, Fryer doce A

Kn » Cult div + ttuw Cond
WM ISoh
Lirtine 160% Gust Dive enn Cond. 2)

umes combitic 4 a 5

ion ind

Une 432 Symbolism + Medemum (34 5/78)

‘ert Views of the

24uo Medes of

a0 ‘nc

mM
mM

iF
-

stpefael
Psy chogmatysis C3 yi

joe me aero

————— ————_—_

FOREIGN LANGUAGE STUDY
PLACEMENT POLICIES

Students with previous language experience, private :
study or high school language study in a foreign language,

who wish to continue the study of that language are re-

quired to take a placement examination. The results of the
examination are used to determine initial student place- | .

ment in a language course sequence. Students with high

school credit will receive credit for successful completion — .

. ~~ of the courses into which they are placed.

- Transfer students” and others with college credit-in a mr

language from another institution must also take the place-

ment examination if they wish to continue the study of that ‘ °
language. If the examination scores suggest placement be- :

she has the option of beginning study at this lower level.

* However, no credit will be awarded for such repetition or

work completed at another college or university,
For further details regarding placement procedures in

~ different departments, consult the announcements of indi- ;
_ vidual departments in this bulletin or the appropriate de- ©
- partment chairperson.

-: ow the level indicated by a student’s previous record, he/ *

f El barr 230 aac.

DIVISION COURSES

- Hum150aandb Cultural Diversity and the Human Condition (3, 3)

A humanistically-oriented study of selected cultures and societies,

‘focusing on continuity and change in the following: family; culture

and religious values; art and nature; work and play; health-ecology-
science and nature. Team-taught by SUNY-Albany faculty, utilizing
‘uest lecturers and international students as resource persons. The
all session focuses on_India, France, and the African Hausa; the
Spring session focuses on China, Guatemala, and Iran. Full year
course or either session. (Designed pee 7 tons eee”

yun # Onn

KACKA Qu Meo 30)
DIVISION OF EGIENCES AN le
Vincent F’. Cowling, Dean

Charlene Lewis, Assistant to the Dean

This division includes Astronomy and Space Science,

. Atmospheric Science, Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Com-

Sh Se
.-, ore swig

puter Science, Geological Sciences, Mathematics, and _.
Physics, (The Program in Medical Technology is included | '

in the Biological Sciences Department.) |
38 | |
| Specific requirements of the major for undergraduate
degrees offered in each department may be found at the

' beginning of course listings for that department.

| The division cooperates closely with some of the univer-

' sity research centers, notably the Atmospheric Sciences ,

Research Center, the Center for Nuclear Radiation Studies
(Physics Linear Accelerator Center) and the Neuro-biology
Research Center, as well as with certain external institu-
tions such as Dudley Observatory.

| : DIVISION OF SOCIAL AND

ot BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES

| Richard H. Kendall, Dean

| | Anne McNamara, Assistant to the Dean

The Division of Social and Behavioral Sciences offers
., courses and major concentrations through the following
| | departments, studies, and programs: African and Afro-
| + American Studies, Anthropology, Asian Studies, Economics,
Environmental Studies, Geography, History, Inter-Ameri-
: | can Studies, Psychology, Puerto Rican Studies, Russian
| - and Fast European Studies, Social Studies, and Sociology.

| So gaita aise soqhiraments are outlined atthe beginning

sy eel

_ of the course listing for each department or studies -
| ! gram,

1 f
\ 4

DEPARTMENT OF AFRICAN AND
4 AFRO-AMERICAN STUDIES

| FACULTY: V. Buck, G. Collier, I. Gambari, H. Ododa,
' F, G, Pogue, P. Royster, L. R. Salkever, S. Spellman, K,
_ Spurlock, J. S. Uppal, P. Ward, M. M. Weston, N.
|| Wright, Jr.

f
| ' The objective of the department is to provide a multi-
and an interdisciplinary education in African and Afro-
| ; American Studies and related fields. Students are expected
' to possess the knowledge and skills necessary to understand
~* the social, political, economic, psychological and historical
_,. consequences of institutional arrangements as they affect
' | the life experiences of African and Afro-American people.
| ; Students are prepared for careers in teaching, counsel-
ing, state and local social welfare programs, urban planning,
; ; administrative program direction, and international rela-
| tions.

Bik ecdcd a wes... Rca ES

| hf
! / The department. offers full programs leading to the B.A.

i yh ee

and M.A. degrees. Students may specialize in African
Studies and Afro-American Studies. Sub-areas in African
Studies are: the history, economics, politics, and culture of
the following regions: Eastern Africa, Central Africa, West
Africa, and Southern Africa. Sub-areas in Afro-American
Studies include: Afro-American History and Culture, Ur-
ban Economic Development, Central City Politics and In-
stitutions, Afro-American Literature and Criticism, and
Urban Planning. Though the major concentrations are
Africa and the United States, students may design pro-
grams which-will-enhance their knowledge-of- other black-
cultures, e.g., the Caribbean, Haiti.

Special Programs or Opportunities

Undergraduate and graduate students in the department
are provided an opportunity to apply theory through com-

munity projects, both through formal courses and such

other special programs that may be designed by the de-
partment. Students participating in the latter may work
directly with New York legislators or legislative committees.
Students are also provided an ongoing colloquium series
featuring local and nationally known African and Afro-

H
~ if
i 2

Fo "4
Mertens

American scholars, The senior seminar enables students
and faculty to meet to explore common research interests.

ca,

A number of graduate courses are available to qualified :

seniors.

Degree Requirements for the Major in
African and Afro-American Studies

General Program

B.A.: A minimum of 36 credits. (at least 12 credits of °

which must be at the 300 level or above) including Aas
142, Aas 219, Aas 221 or Aas 222, Aas 286 a and b, Aas
322, or Aas 490. The additional Department courses, as
advised, must include six hours of credit at the 200- level *

via nine hours of credit at the 300-level or above.

Aas 101 Elementary Swahili (3)
Beginning course with audio-lingual approach. Fundamentals of ©
language structure and sounds, with emphasis on pronunciation and

oral expression. Graded readings. Classes meet four times a week ©:

plus two required periods in the language laboratory.

40
:

A 110 The Black Theatre in America (3)

A study of the historic background of black involvement in the
American theatre and of the role and functioning of the Black

eatre in contemporary American society.

' Aas 142 African and Afro-American Literature (3)

A survey of black authors from diverse cultures and an analysis
f their relationship to black thought.

¥ ‘Aas 213 History of the Civil Rights Movement (3)

" The historical development of the major civil rights movements
in the United States, their linkages and disparities. The course ex-
amines the historical development and concrete manifestations of
| re istance movements to the institutional definitions of black people
vi Oth antebellum, post civil war, and contemporary.

Aas 219 Introduction to African and Afro-American History (3)
A survey of the cultural and historical background of Afro-
provvein from their African heritage to their present role in Ameri-

| an society. Not open to students with credit for His 419.
Aas 221 The Economic Structure of the Black Community (3)
' An analysis of old and contemporary modes of black entrepreneur-

| far and formal economic organization and its effects in the com-

unity.

-- Aas 222 Politics of Black Power (3)
The theories and current trends relating to the development of

. more extensive and effective control of those institutions that influ-
~_eheethe—lives_and—destinies—of black_people.

i Aas 224 Cities as People: America in the ’70’s (3)
| " The impact of the urban environment on the individual and group
' life of those minorities locked into the urban situation. Census tract
data, community specialists, and work projects in the inner city will
be used to develop skills in predicting and understanding individual

i 1 va styles.
t
a Aas 231 Dynamics of Racism (3)
An exploration of the socio-psychological variables involved in the
fi production and maintenance of attitudes of bigotry and racism; their
( ' effects and means of change. Prerequisite: Psy 101 or Soc 260.

as 243 Musical Traditions Among Afro-Americans (3)
The aera concepts of forms of ey tad? noe

| pas 2uy Black Women \n Krnericel3) | ‘heme
Vict 6 ou Y sireon and Afro-American Art (3) q( 291:

rant survey of major black artists from diverse cultures an
_ , examination of their work as a manifestation of cultural expression

| Le for their time.

s ,Mas 286 a and b (His 286 a and b) History of Africa (3, 3)
First session: Africa from pre-historic times to 1800 with empha-
| sis on sub-Saharan Africa, the development of indigenous states, and

their response to Western and Eastern contacts. Second session:

|
4]
i |

i Africa since 1800: exploration, the end of the slave trade, the de-

velopment of interior states, European partition, the Colonial period,
and the rise of independent Africa. Either session may be taken
without the other.

as 301 (Prs 301) Puerto Rico and the Caribbean (3)
(Same as Prs 301.)
A

Aas 311 History of Slavery in the Western Hemisphere (3)
A study of the institution of slavery and its effects in the Western
Hemisphere, its origins, bases of continuance, and contemporary
, residuals. Prerequisite: His 100 a and b; His 366 a and b recom-

i mended.
Aas 320 Black Nationalism: Political Perspective in Africa (3)

? temporary African nations. Prerequisite; His 286 b or Aas 222.
4

% # Aas 321 Black Nationalism: Political Perspective in the
J United States (3)
The emergence of black ideology in the United States with em-
phasis on current trends in socio-political and cultural unification of

J black Americans. Prerequisite: Aas 219,

Aas 322 Developing African Nations (3)
A systems analysis of the contemporary social, political, cultural,
and economic institutions crucial to the economic maturation of
: developing African nations,

} Aas 330 Crisis in Black Identification (3)
Psychodynamic analysis of the formation of self-concept and

- Avsurvey of the socio-political and Cultural developments of con- - =

processes of identification_as_related_to_the_black_experience,_Pre-
requisite: Psy 101 or Soc 260.

vi Aas 331 The Afro-American Family (3)
An in-depth study of the Afro-American family as an institution,
the dynamics of intra-family relations and the effects of social insti-
tutions on black family life. Prerequisite: Soc 115.

Aas 333 Problems in the Black Community (3)

A selective study of relevant social problems including drug ad-
diction, prostitution, and extortion, particularly as they affect the
black community, Prerequisite: Aas 231 or 22].

Aas 340 The Black Essay (3)

A study of essays written by black American writers in the 19th
and 20th century.

, Aas 341. Black Religion (3).
An analysis of the relationship of the religion of the black man to
| black culture.

Aas 342 (Ant 342) Sub-Saharan Africa: Peoples and Cultures (3)

Culture-areas of Africa south of the Sahara. Historical and geo-
graphic background studies of selected societies. Culture change
and contact during the colonial and post-colonial periods.

Aas 343 Black and Colored Identity Patterns (3)
An explication of identity patterns and the philosophical stance of

selected contemporary black American, Latin-American, African,

7 via Asian authors,

{¥ Aas 345 The Black Novel: Black Perspectives (3)

A systematic study of the novel written by black Americans from
the Harlem Renaissance to the present. The novels studied will ex-
press the cultural, political and socio-historical consciousness of {
fhe writers to demonstrate their awareness of the “Bi7 of black

Bins 8 tars Workshop(a) (2/7
vi UAE yo Slack toreser SS (3) P errno ¥/29/79

A critical study and field investigation of black institutions in the
géntral city including civic, social, fraternal, and religious groups.

LE ny
ew"

iva Aas 416 History of the Black Man in the Reconsiruction Era:
. 1862-1876 (3)
a ‘An analysis of the political, social, cultural, and economic factors
' ; xelating to the position of blacks in the Reconstruction Era.
, Prerequisite or corequisite: His 308.

Aas 417 Senior Seminar in African and Afro-American Studies (3)
A Prerequisite: consent of department chairman.

"Se 419 (His 419) Airo-American rilstory (3)
(Same

fps yo Word Pol. e Black Dias pora. (2) 12/77 MAN eg

vi Evaluation of eveinnental Programs inthe meme
Black Community (3)

An analysis of factors related to success and. failure of govern-

objectives and consequences, with particular reference to black

| fae Aas hi Five Aas ae in he amerions (3) (3/77
as eat (Prs Black The ea iy eon oncept (3) OMG 139 ter

An investigation of the ideologies and nationalistic bonds eter

ing on the black and colored peoples of the world. Prerequisite:
| Aas 219, :

jAas 432 Community Development and Organization (3)

—

—-,

_—

An internship program in which students actively participate in
organizational work within the community under faculty supervision.
pi Prerequisites: Aas 221 or 222, and 338,

a ‘nas 433 Pan-Africanism: Its Extension to ‘“Afro-Americanism” (3)
A study of the development of the concept of negritude and its
impact upon the emergence of black ideology. ay, His

ofebins suoaethg re; Pek Process (3). 12g
: us a Al Minority Children in the ores States Schodl" Y Sop
System (3)

Same as Prs 450.)

‘Aas 490 Independent Study in African and Afro-American

_ Studies (3)
| Independent reading or research on a_ selected experimental, |
theoretical, or applied problem, under the direction of a faculty
member, May be repeated for an additional three credits upon
recommendation of the faculty supervisor and with approval of the
department chairman, Prerequisite: consent of department chairman.

| Veaes 436 Hist of che Black Man tn Labip
| Bmer edhe Caribbean (a)
- 2/99 memnovkaln |

bee meee

Se et epee

- with an understanding of the broad range encompassed by ° :

DEPARTMENT OF ANTHROPOLOGY

FACULTY: L. Campbell, R. Carmack, W. Fenton, P.

Furst, G. Gmelch, B. Isbell, R. Jarvenpa, G. Klima, F,

Lees, D. Snow, D. Wallace, R. Wilkinson, M. Williams,
G. Wright, W. Zenner.

The objective of the department is to provide students, |

anthropology in its study of human cultural behavior and
its biological base, including both content and the metho-

-dological_and_ theoretical. bases involved, The subfields of _. 4

ethnology, biological anthropology, anthropological lin-
guistics, and prehistoric archaeology are well represented
in the course offerings.

Special Programs or Opportunities:

Summer programs in ethnological and archaeological | j
field work are available with the local area and Guatemala °°
the most frequent locations, Courses in ethnological film-
making and linguistics, using native American language
informants, are special opportunities, Laboratory/research
experience, both in formal courses and as independent

820-26), Archaeology (Ant 230-231, 330-339), and Eth-..: |

projects, is available in archaeology, biological anthro- - |
pology, and linguistics. er

Degree Requirements for the Major i
in Anthropology 7

General Program

B.A.: A minimum of 36 credits (80 credits in Anthro- '
pology and six credits as advised) including one course
from each of the following four groups: Biological Anthro-
pology (Ant 210, 310-19, 410-19), Linguistics (Ant 220,

nology (Ant 200, 360-379, 460-479); 18 additional credits
of Anthropology (excluding Ant 100), .

Ant 100 Culture, Society, and Biology (3) ia

An examination of the interaction of culture, society, and biology
as causative factors for behavioral patterns among human groups.
A survey of the anthropological approach to human behavior, em-
phasizing the integrative aspects of the sub-disciplines of ethnology, |
bio-anthropology, archaeology, and anthropo-linguistics, _

me P=

SU
ee
——

: dh 200 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3)
A survey of the theory, methods, and goals of cultural anthro-

my ey

pology, emphasizing the nature of culture and the varied forms in
ws it is expressed among the peoples of the world.

Ant 210 Introduction to Biological Anthropology (3)

A survey of the field of biological or physical anthropology, in
olyding human evolution, race, inheritance, and primate studies.

“aft 220 (Lin 206/Eng 206) introduction to Linguistics (3)
Safne as Lin 206 or Eng 206.

Ant’230 Introduction to Prehistoric Archaeology (3)
The techniques of recovering archaeological data; methods of

and goals of archaeology.

| ito the data and reconstructing culture history; the theory
WA

i
i

‘Ant 231 Survey of World Prehistory (3)

Presentation and analysis of the major events in human prehistory
up to the early civilizations; the role of diffusion and ecological and

evolutionary theories in the explanation of the trends and regulari-
ties in these events.

i
Ant 250 (Soc 250) The Family (3)
! oes ws ae 250.

PREeMeO
aunts 8 Fonclegumerhod ¢ Thenry (3) 12177 4/29/77

tion to Social Research (3)
Same as Soc 223,

Ant 311. Introduction to the Primates (3)

igs ND

wee

. Ant 321 (Lin 321) Morphology- -Syntax (3)

A survey of the basic morphology and behavior of non-human
primates. The prosimian and anthropoid primates will be studied in

terms of their comparative morphology and behavior, with reference
to‘these same features among humans.
f

‘Ant 312 History of Human Evolution (3)

The development of evolutionary thought as it relates to con-
cepts in physical anthropology, such as interpretations of the fossil
record, primate behavior and racial concepts, with emphasis on
16th, 19th and ig century developments. Prerequisite: Ant 210.

; Ant 320 (Lin Fahy Bh Phonology (3)

An=imtreda to-the-aralysis-of-sourrd:

spines the-lassionl-phoneme—Alee tacts MANOR Eon to. :

distinotive. feature..analyses. Eroreuntstvey sme?

description of the grammatical systems of languages, The: structural
and tagmemic approaches will be used. Prerequisite: Ant 220,

‘Ant 322 Middle American Linguistics (3)

A survey of Middle American Indian languages, their classifica-
tion, description, and their implication’ for‘ Mesoamerican prehistory.
Includes consideration of the current ‘state of ‘research in the several
language families, areal characteristics, linguistic diffusion, and
proposals for distant genetic relationships. Prerequisite: One pre-
vious course in linguistics or consent of instructor.

SS ere a a ee Sere —

nt325 Sociolinguistics (3)

Introduction to the study of language as a social phenomenon.
Includes basic sociolinguistic concepts, interactional sociolinguistics,
social dialects, Black English, diglossia, bilingualism and bilingual
education. Prerequisite: Ant 220 or consent of instructor.

“ ANL32Z..—IntroductioteA HOTS (S
Introductio ion.-td stehistoric arghacdlogy and g.gurvey
of the mettiods by w. colt ese aims,.are™ foaled ome session
or

only rerequisite?’ Ant 230 Onsent of ins

h020—inhode : votogical-kaboratorTy Téthinidttes (2)
Survey anc <actical apphiesfion of tsshnftités for anal for analysing ance

_ classifyifig chipped stoffe and ceramits, in AGE alse e'the. m texas”
wavated durjng”the preceditf® fieldsessi6n; also teebfilques of
artifact typology and settlement analysis. Prerequisite: Ant 280.

7 ‘chaealogical.fileld. Research(3—6) :
Direg cen slong ine a selectedesit€s, including ex-
ation

peri one in sit apping, exc vation, pressioutt gael
Is, lassi lon, a pabttiorpretat rerequl consentof cepart-

ment chairman. (Summer Session only, )

Ant 330 Old World Prehistory (3)

The prehistory of Africa and Eurasia from the Palaeolithic
through the beginnings of agriculture.

if Ant 331 Early Civilization of the Old World (3)

The development of urbanism and the preindustrial city out of
farming village life; an analysis of the nature and content of the

eet
Uy Serta, ef

early civilizations of the Near East, Egypt, the Indus, and China;
and the spread of civilization into Europe and Africa and. its effects
on peripheral peoples such as the nomadic peoples of the Eurasian

| steppes
' Ant 332 Eurasia and Civilization (3)
The rise of agricultural and pastoral communities and later of
mixed farming and mounted nomadism as ecologically distinct
economies. Analysis of indigenous factors and those linked to con-

temporaneous classical urban cultures. Persistences in later Celtic
and Viking culture.

YAnt333 Meso-American Prehistory (3)
Developments leading to the rise of civilization in pre-Columbian

Mexico and Guatemala; ethnohistory of the Maya and Aztecs. Pre-
requisite: Ant 230.

Ant 334 South American Prehistory (3)

Development of the pre-Columbian hunting and farming groups
of South America, with emphasis on the rise of civilization in the
ndean area and ethnohistory of the Inca, Prerequisite: Ant 230

gr consent of e Ptro dvtle Celel Tech» (3) 15 Ke

AM 82s, Spat of North America (3)

Vi, The prehistory of America north of Mexico. Prerequisite:
nt 230,

nr
2

Pee _
bape ere

es ad

a
7 S
|
’ Ant 337 Northeastern North American Prehistory (3)
4 An examination of the cultural complexes a a sequences of

eee

ortheastern United States from time of earljést occupation to
ur a3 n CoA tact,

x ax che He: (d Researc sb G); Awt 329 Tatyr

ndian
ited mln and distribution of Aen hertteen Indian cultures
rom the pre-Columbian period to the present.

Ant 341 a The Caribbean and South America:
Peoples and Cultures (3)
Prehistory, cultural background, and the present economic, social

and religious life of selected Indian, Mestizo, and Euro-American
roups in the Caribbean and South America.

Ant 341 b Meso-America: Peoples and Cultures (3)

Prehistory, cultural background, and the present-day economics,
social and religious life of selected Indian and Mestizo groups in

| ' foe and Central America.

Ant 342 (Aas 342) Sub-Saharan Africa: Peoples and Cultures (3)
Culture-areas of Africa south of the Sahara. Historical and geo-

| i abe background. Studies of selected societies. Culture change

ayfd contact during the colonial and post-colonial periods.

nt 343 The Middle East: Peoples and Cultures (3)
The main features of the “Middle Eastern culture continent.” A
comparison of selected societies in Southwest Asia and North Africa.

The impact of modernization on pre-industrial cities and peasantries
ingthe area,

(<) tral s¥) 1M

rerequisite: Ant 200 or His 382 a or b.

ant 344 South Asia: Peoples and Cultures (3)

Studies of selected peoples in the Indian sub-continent considered

against the background of Hindu and Muslim civilization. Social
[ and cultural change in the modern period.

Ant 345 Southeast Asia: Peoples and Cultures (3)

“j A survey of the historical background and present-day develop-

ments of the cultures of Indonesia, mainland Southeast Asia, and
the Philippines.

| ' /Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

v Ant 346 East Asia: Peoples and Cultures (3)

‘A survey of the cultures of East Asia; civilizations and tribal
_paltures,

347 Oceania: Peoples and Cultures (3)
\ A survey of the cultures of Micronesia, Melanesia, Polynesia,

Ps Australia.

Comparative study of social systems, tribal, traditional, and
modern societies, The course will deal with economic, kinship,
political, and other aspects of social structure. Social systems will
be studied in functionalist, evolutionary, and dialectic perspectives.

hae in one course kinship, political, economic, and stratifica-
| : anthropology.

iy requisite: Ant 200,

7
F301 Anthrot Public Dhicy(3) 3 el?
i. Senor Bo2 Skhuolegy, las (3)

| [ jAnt 360 Social Anthropology (3)

amet =

In 363 Ethnology of Religion (3)

An examination of the form and functions of ritual systems as
related to myth and world view on a cross-cultural basis. The em-

S von will be on the religions of nonliterate and peasant peoples.

Ant 364 Anthropology of Health and Health Care (3)

Cross-cultural introduction to different systems of theory and
practice in health, disease and curing; Function of shaman,
curandera and modern medical worker in traditional societies and
ethnic groups; case studies in the integration of traditional and

pon systems of medicine.

of - Ant 366 Ethnology of the Arts (3)

~The comparative study ‘of selected aspects of the arts as cultural
; Sanser Aesthetic views in non-Western societies.

Ant 367 Ethnographic Film (3)

Comparative analysis and experimental use of ethnographic film
in anthropological education. A study of theory and method of data

collection and communication of ethnographic field work through
the medium of film.

dan 368 Ethnology of Pre-Columbian Art (3)

The anthropological study of prehispanic Mesoamerican and
South American ceremonial arts and architecture for the reconstruc-
tion of pre-Columbian culture history, religion, symbolism and
ritual. Stress is laid on interrelationships of New World cultures, art
styles and world view and on ethnographic and other techniques for

-iconographic_interpretations.

Bele vm os theres t
ee

Ant 370 Culture Contact and Ethnicity (3)

An analysis of culture change in the contact situation; emphasis
on interaction between Euro-American culture and peoples of the
non-Western world. Prerequisite: Ant 200.

Ant 372 Urban Anthropology (3)
| An introduction to urban anthropology. Emphasis on rural-urban
migrations, adjustment and assimilation of urban migrants, urban
kinship and family structure, poverty culture, rural-urban typologies,
on tid the application of anthropological methods to the study of
rban societies. Prerequisite: Ant 200.

JS Ant 375 Psychological Anthropology (3)

A survey of the field of culture and personality; cross-cultural
analysis of the cultural factors affecting the development of the
individual personality; the concept of cultural relativism as applied
to social analysis. Prerequisite; Ant 100 or Ant 200 or Soc 115 or

/ Psy 101.

Ant 381 Ethnography of Women (3)
Female status and role in non-industrial societies.

x Aint 411 Human Evolution (3)

An examination of the human fossil record and of the major
theories dealing with fossil record. Prerequisite: Ant 210.

48
cr

ov,

4 Dose aandb Independent Study in Anthropology (1-6), (1-6

ndependent - reading or research on selected topics under the -

irection of a faculty member. May be repeated for credit.

‘ Ant 499 Senior Seminar in Anthropology (3)

Seminar on selected topics in Anthropology. Open to seniors
with consent of instructor. Recommended for majors planning on
graduate work, May be repeated for credit.

DEPARTMENT OF ART

a FACULTY: D. Byng, R. Callner, R. Cartmell, E. Cowley,

| M. Greenwold, A. Lennig, N. Liddle, D. Mochon, T.
le O’Connor, R. Stankiewicz, M. Walker, W. Wilson, J.
Wisniewski. |

| | The Department of Art develops artists who have a

| strong understanding of aesthetic criticism and who

achieve technical excellence. The program provides lecture

and studio experience for students with broad interests in

| the Humanities. By presenting a wide variety of exhibi-

tions, the University Art Gallery furthers all of these
interests,

Degree-Requirements-fortheMajorin_Art
(with emphasis In Studio Art)

| General Program

: B.A.; .Thirty-six .credits, including atleast 12 credits at
the 300 level or above, to be distributed as follows: 27

| f credits as advised from ‘studio courses in Art; nine credits
from Art lecture courses in Art or Art History. (A portfolio

must be submitted before a student may be officially rec-
ognized as a major in Art, The portfolio must be presented
| : by the close of the sophomore year.)
ae 105 aandb Drawing 1a and 1b (3, 3)

Drawing with a variety of media. The second session emphasiz-

: ing drawing the human figure. May be taken either or both sessions
must be taken before b.

Art 110 a and b Design (3, 3)

The principles of two-and three-dimensional design, Intended
( primarily for art majors ‘and ‘minors, May be taken either or both

| PAT Sf RI a rey i _ met pate do Be “fro Atulptive udto ay

»/ Art 220 a wee 5 Rualott ! (3, 3)

Instruction in the use of traditional and modern sculpture
3 mediums. Prerequisite: Art 110 or equivalent. May be taken either
la or both sessions,

a eee

discussed: Latin America, Middle East, Sub-Saharan Africa, South-
east Asia. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: One course in
| _/ i Anthropology, History, Political Science, or Sociology dealing

nt 464 (Soc 446) Eastern Europe: Tradition ad Change) (3)
Same as Soc 446, Sy

. Ant 465 (Jst 465) Jewish Communities (3)

Ethnological and social analysis of traditional and modern Jewish
communities in Europe, the Middle East, and the New World. Re-
lationship of Jews with their non-Jewish neighbors and with other
Jewish communities. Comparison of Jewish communities with other
: minority. and-majority ethnie -groups- (e.g, Chinese -in--Southeast
Asia; Hindus and Pakistanis in Africa). Prerequisite: Ant 370 or
he 282 or any Judaic Studies course in history.

Ant 466 The Ethnology of the Maya Culture (3)

A study of the origin, development, decline, conquest, and per-
sistence of Maya culture. Maya culture will be studied through both
its social and semantic systems, based on archeological, ethno-
graphic and ethnohistoric sources. It will be analysed as ecological
adaptation, evolutionary stage, philosophical and_ intellectual
achievement, changing socio-political system, Prerequisite: senior
or graduate standing; some knowledge of Spanish (minimal reading
abj
ivstructor.

Ant 468 Aspects of European and North American Cultures

lity); prior course on Middle American Culture; or consent of

with the culture area under topic consideration. at we | |
p § {7 nies |
|

2 oe

& .

woe vat

wena oe

t Survey—of—community—studies—in_Westem Europe and North
America. Cultural variety in Europe and its differential influence
on North America. Socio-cultural change and modernization in rural
communities. Relationship between community and _ state. Prere-
quisites: Ant 200 and one upper division course in anthropology,
sociology or history. ~. oe

Sant 470 Cross-cultural Problems in Education (3)

A study of anthropological concepts in education and a cross-
! cultural survey of the nature of the educational process. Special
| reference to situations where there are cultural differences between
| the teacher and student in the United States.

Ethnographic field work experience for qualified undergraduates.
Study of field work methodology and principles together with actual
| field work on selected topics under faculty supervision. Prerequisite:
consent of instructor.

| nt 481 (Prs 491) Research Projecis (3-6)
| An introduction to basic research skills required to answer ques-
tions on human behavior, with special emphasis on cross-cultural
7 communication and learning and dynamics of cross-cultural inter-
action. Students will be involved in a specific research project and
this will provide them with the basic research methods to include
data collection, processing and analysis. Prerequisite: junior or
senior standing and consent of instructor.

\7" 480 _ Introduction to Ethnographic Field Research (6)

ee mere
Cel

20 ET arte" ry

a
"a 5

a as 2

aot nah Ag

pn tiner,
:
oe

—————,,

re ehra y

A #1.98 —Great-Cinema-Directors-(3) 2f 2/4 Sa

+e Aas

po aeeee

VA Art 347 Advanced Photography (3)
A continuation of Art 244 a and b with emphasis on refinement

of image and technique. Students must have his/her own adjustable
fame Prerequisite: Art 244 a and b.

Art 348 Color Photography (3)
A course utilizing transparency and negative materials in color
photography with emphasis on color printing. Prerequisite: Art
an a and b or the consent of instructor, Art 110 recommended,

Art 350 = Art Criticism (3)

A seminar taught by the Art department staff with guest artists
and critics. Analysis of the attitudes found in 19th and 20th cen-
tury criticism of the visual arts. Focus on the development of per-

Lo judgment. Prerequisite; six credits of art history.

Art 352 (Env 352) The Environment as Art (3)

The understanding of art as environment as well as environment
as art; the artist and the conditions of his obligation to society; a
compauing ae er what is, what could be, and what must be.

idea of art he Gulgsan’ the ayestion of of eesyeling and
ise of art. te (2)

Aer eqs Neri Stleaf fr ee Oss? 2/3/7F
Art 380" Sofheme ‘of the 30’s (3)

A close examination of the techniques, devices and style of the

sound film in Europe and America during the 1930’s, Prerequisite:
Art 290.

~A-~close~anulysis..of&the-aesthetic~prineipless-writingss-influencesy

Trlwwdidaage~ of~the-loaciing—motion—protre” “Otreutors: Prete cuisito:
ATE ZIT |

ion and needs of man. GYase study projects in the design of build-

ngs. Design developywient through architectural drawings,
odels.._rerequsite:“consent—of-ingizuctorr |

Vart420 aandb Sculpture I! (3, 3)
Advanced course in sculpture. Prerequisite: Art 220 a and b,
vA be taken either or both sessions.
A

rt 421 aandb Sculpture Workshop (3, 3)

Studies in sculpture with an emphasis on individual criticism for
students of varied technical and aesthetic backgrounds. Pre-
requisite: Consent of instructor and Department Chairman.

Art-426-a-and-b-—Ceramits it* Nebote . Fold te
| Advanced course in cergutics. Prerequisite: Art 296 a andb;
1 Mi] be Shonen: putheslone

tructore
53

eS ee Se Tee

m a

Art 230 a and b_ Painting | (3, 3)

A studio course in painting; instruction in the use of traditional
and modern techniques of composition in painting.
Prerequisites: Art 105 a and b and 110 a and b or equivalent. May
be taken either or both sessions. a must be taken before b.

# Art 240aandb Graphics: Etching (3, 3)
A studio course using processes of graphic reproduction with a
concentration on etching. Prerequisite: Art 105 a or consent of
instructor.

| ~” Art 242aandb Graphics: Lithography (3, 3)
A studio course using processes of graphic reproduction with a

_Anstructor,

Art 244a and b Fundamentals of Photographic Art (3, 3)
Photography as a fine art. Principles of photographic composi-
tion and technical means for achieving tone and texture, Analysis of
| important work by representative studio and candid photographic
Artists. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Art 110a recommended.
/ must be taken before b.

Art 290 Introduction to the Cinema (3)
A survey of the silent and sound classics of the cinema with
emphasis on the changing conceptions of cinematographic form and
ws content, Screenings of select“ yopee and. American films.

Cian 300 arb Jechney hes $3) C1377)

‘concentration on lithography. Prerequisite: Art 105 a or consent of ©

—_—

Art-305-a-and-b—Drawir lend Hb ta

‘ Primary emphasis on developing an individual approach in draw-
/ vt Prerequisite: Art 105 b, May be taken either or both Viiv)

0 Advanced Design (3)
Three-dimensional and structural design. Emphasis on the crea-

tive use of materials, color, light and movement. Prerequisite: Art
10 a and b.

| Art 333 Stained Glass and Mosaic (3)
7 Experience with the techniques and processes used in the
design and execution 6f stained glass or mosaic objects. Functional
application of designs will be stressed. Prerequisite: Art 105 a and
f. Art 110 a and b.
Art 340 a and b Serigraphy (3, 3)
A basic course in serigraphy covering both direct and photo-
graphic processes. Prerequisite: Art 240a, Art 244a, and consent of

V heP'32. Workshop vs lhe a) Fr

// rt 346 Introductory Film Prokuntion (3)

Seeing and thinking in cinematic terms, with an introduction to
the process and equipment with which the film-maker works.
Cameras, lenses, film emulsions, and editing procedures are studied

Reo 238 and consent of instructor.

fe ewer entree

C/beck 306 Workshop in draws C3-4)hiy>. fel

in the making of short silent films. Prerequisite: Art 290, or
| | vA 180 5 Buoy oT AA ae Water Woy TTA

Sculpture, painting, and @fchj
the present,

| , ‘ cane ies Ola PPP Parats anemia ta a a tO ge cain nf "

{ PA non-chronological study of architecture: “approac ae

Hons to the interrelated problems of beauty, aun ay
s presented in architecture today and through yo"

fh 203 Classical Art (3)
f Architecture, s | tue

The arteot the Byway]
j#rescoes, and ily ) a

; ‘heey The A itive Peoples (3)
| intryetluctior arts a peoples in Negro Africa,
Ry coania as and, mnees seas hile examples of architecture and

—

‘Lo KG auooaeite i ha (22 MEF
aroyueArt-(3)-—~ ie ) Fe
Painting and sculpture in Italy, Spain, France and the how--7__
untries in the 17th century with emphasis on major figures such

aiid Rembrandt. Prerequisite: Arh 150 b or sent of instructor.
Ath 272 Italian Renaissance Art ye

Painting and sculpture inpete early Renaissance through Man-

ndrism, and its influen road. Prerequisite: Arh 150 a,
Arh 280 Roc AC nevotutton (3) Deleté Fal te

dnd sculpture in Italy, France, Hnglend, and Spain in

At te ae
eee rt

i oonard Guouro, Moudon, Repeoltte: Honaxth and Goya. P
{ My : Ash TS Bor comsent-of-the~imatrqctoT
3 LL At Baw ue EoCoco Ant LT Th (3,8)

: Art 285. American Art (3)

A survey of painting and soulpture in the United States from
~1660 to 1940.

| Prerequisite; Arh 150 b.
_ 1.288—-American-Architecture..(3).-- ?

WAL

wer

E |

Architecture in America from colonia imes to th ep
erequisite: Arh 150 a and architecture. A

Arh 292 Introduction to Modern Art ans-kfchitecture (3)

A survey of European architects ainting, and sculpture fiom
1j780 to the present,

quisite- Ash-LS0_b ox-Consent of instmotor ——_

Garavaggio, the Carracci, Bernini, Poussin, Velazquez,Rubéns | °

A VV

Art 435 a and b Painting Workshop (3, 3)
Studies in painting emphasizing individual criticisms for students

of/varied technical and aesthetic backgrounds. Prerequisite: Con-

ent of instructor and Department Chairman.

Art 440 a andb Advanced Graphics: Intaglio (3, 3)

rocess. Prerequisite: Art 240 a and b,

Pp Advanced course in printmaking with an emphasis on intaglio

y/ t442aandb Advanced Graphics: Lithography (3, 3)

gies course in | printmaking, with an emphasis on litho-

hic Bebe Pr lisite: Art °@ a and Pe

/OPTCo We Crxeme C2 & J
Art 497 Nindebendent Sikty ( (1-4) | > +y 3/ tt

Studio project in a selected art area.

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor and Department Chairman. May
be repeated with the approval of the department.

PROGRAM IN ART HISTORY *

FACULTY: L, Andrew, D. Donaldson, M. Frinta, A. Harris
R. Kinsman
ASSOCIATE FACULTY: J. Overbeck

The objective of the department is to make students
aware of the values for the humanities by systematic study
of the history of Western art, starting with the ancient

SERS
Sr Me Fckh:

Near East. The undergraduate is exposed to a broad cov-
erage of the various phases.

Degree Requirements for the Major in Art
(with emphasis in Art History) *

B.A.: Thirty-six credits, including at least 12 credits at
the 300 level or above, to be distributed as follows: nine
credits in 150 a and b and Arh 498, Three credits in each
of five areas (classical, medieval, renaissance, baroque and
rococo, and modern). Twelve credits freely selected from
art history and/or classical archeology.

an)

Y tare ‘(3y omen = eee COG 7 --

An introduction to the interrelationdt- ‘the visual arts and Tits
the-Western..world,-Offered_in-summeronly._._

Arh 150 a Survey of Art in the Western World | (3)

Sculpture, painting, and architecture from the earliest times’ to
the Renaissance.

*No degree will be awarded in this program after August, 1978.
54.
me

1
———— mt

cnnneeendmmmmiaamimeemai ata ian Rienina Ber Lternger 9
cy earanrramawee as bi dat wows FRE ARA TAY eID eV hia

capers wetial Ww art will be studied in the setting of a modern office-
building and culture-center complex. Prerequisite; Arh 150 b pr
rere pent of Gq

Att an Sealy "htedigval Act (2) o— hatile, Grd (3) =

Developments in the art of Europe from the eighth through ¥1th =
century surveying mainly Carolingian and Ottonian Art, Aspects of
artistic developments in England, Italy, and Spain will also bef con-
sidered.

Prerequisite: Arh 150 a or consent of instructor.

Arh 456 Romanesque Art (3)

An examination of regional schools of architecture, mAnuscript
ilfumination, the “minor arts,” and the re-emergence of Sculpture,
from the second half of the 11th through the 12th certury. Pre-
réquisite: Arh 150 a or consent of instructor.

Arh 465 Italian Renaissance Sculpture (3)

Emphasis on Tuscan sculpture from Donatello to Michelango.
Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Ayh 466 Venetian Art (3) : .
A study of Venetian painting and sculpture from the late Middle
Alzes to the Rococo period. Special emphasis will /be placed on the

ajor painters of the Venetian Renaissance. Pr¢requisite: consent
of the instructor.

‘rh 470 Northern Baroque Painting (3)

Cr ied a

ee eee ey

A study of 17th century painting in northern/Europe, emphasizing

fhe contributions of Flemish and Dutch masfers. Prerequisite: Ar
#70 or consent of instructor.

Arh 472 European Landscape Painting: 1490-1700 (3)
| The development of landscape paintin£ in Italy, France, Ge
many, and the Low Countries in the Rénaissance and subseque

levelopments in the 17th century. Thematic developments an¢
ndividual contributions wil] be consideréd.

Prerequisites: Arh 150 b and one other art history course in t
Renaissance-Baroque area.

\fmaz4_ Contemporary Architectur¢ (3) Dols te } TELE
A study~e rehitecture si World” War Il—its’ problenis,
theories and form fo ep rereiit

—Arh375—or.consent ¢ of the

i ot en |

al aT 2 Pe 29 cent/ Architecture (3)

Akh 476 a Literature of Art/i450—1800 (3)

An introduction to the lfterary sources of art history—artists’
letters, journals, biographi¢s of artists and art criticism. Sources
us¢d will be selected frof the following: Leonardo’s Noteb oks,
Mithelangelo’s Letters, if. ubens’ Letters, Vasari’s Lives, Bel fori’s
Lives, Reynolds’ Discogirses and later critical reactions to art off the

period covered. Preré equisite: enrollment limited to advanced\ art
histery, majors, with..consert’6f instructor, tees eee

4
!
H

(1\ n the Bt and 16th contigs, atys Uppitor.. feels ;

er re prema er Eg I

Arh-302—-Ancient. ‘Near-EastertAr ees a
Architectu e, 86 upture, and painting of Egypt, Mesopotamia,

AO mee TE ket ae mae wi mr PN TE A tty § it ac rae et

The origin ‘of Gothic art in France, as studied through the arc
ecture and sculpture of the cathedrals, and variants in-othor-Furd?
pean countries, Also included will _be--staitiéd” glass, miniatures,
anel and mura inting:-Prerequisite tA 1AQ...a..ox..consent’ of
uEetoyr,

/. Arh 3 Northern Renaissance Art (3)
Painting and “sétilpture~in..the, Ne ethorlatdeFFAHSS ey 6 and CORTETI

cture; Mete au reentry @)-
A chronological study of the sienifioant styles and form in archi

eroauisiter Arh 150 a or b,

Arh 371 Northern Baroque Art (3)
Painting and sculpture in France, Englandy and the Low Coun-
ries in the 17th century. Rubens, Van“Dyck, Hals, Rembrandt,
eorges de la Tour, Champagne, Puget” and Lebrun will be stressed
s well as the development of porfraiture, still life, landscape and
genre painting in Holland. . Psotequisite: Arh 150 b or consent of
the instructor.

rh 372 Southern whe Art (3)

Fainting nid aofiotur in: Htale—and-Spain_in_the_1'/th century.
he course fi emphasize Caravaggio and his followers, the
ij }Carracci and their successors in Italy: Bernini, and baroque sculp
ture, PoyzSsin, Claude, and landscape painting; Ribera and contact:
betw Italy and Spain; and Velazquez and court art in Spain
Prerequisites: Arh 150 b or consent of instructor.

: Arh 375 Modern Architecture (3)
A survey of important trends and characteristics of architectur
beginning with the late 18th century. Prerequisite: Arh 150 a or

! S hich HENE ee to the shaping of American architectur ,

arn 390 Contemporary Art (3)
A. critical analysis of painting and sculpture in Europe and the
United States since 1940, Prerequisite: Arh 150 b, or consent of

instructor.
“Arh.392—-Gontemperary Art at Empire State Plaza (3) oe
The outstanding collection of contemporary paint “and sculp-
Albany’s.new Empire State Plaza-providés the focus fox this

56 ;

io-Kthha Meknbaike ta? © Cut, se

weil.
i,

Degree Requirements for the Interdisciplinary
Major with a Concentration in Asian Studies |

fi
| General Program

B.A. East Asian Track: Core Curriculum: His 176 a and
b; an independent study course in a field of Asian Studies, 7
in one department, resulting ina senior essay, three credits.
Two years of Chinese language, 16 credits. Study on East
_. Asia from three disciplines other than Chinese language,
| 15 credits, Total, 40 credits.
| South Asian Track: Core Curriculum: His 176 a and b;

and independent study course in a field of Asian Studies,

; » In one department, resulting in a senior essay, three credits. |
| ; Study on South Asia in at least three disciplines, 15-18 |
' = eredits. Study in other areas of Asia, 9-12 credits, Total:
36 credits. (Study of Hindi in Lin 289 is recommended.)
Ly Asian Studies Major and Chinese Language Second
| | Field (East Asian emphasis): Core Curriculum: His 176 a
‘and b; an independent study course in a field of Asian
Studies, in one department, resulting in a senior essay, 3
credits. Three years of Chinese language, 22 credits. Study

a oN eiiiiede!
eee

| Lon ast Asia in-atleast-three-diseiplines21 credits Study ——
on other areas of Asia, six credits, Total: 58 credits. |

| Course Offerings
— (For descriptions see relevant department listings.)
| | van 176.a and b= Introduction to Asian History (3, 3)
i | ? A Cwl 180 Modern Chinese Literature in Translation (3).
A Cwl 207 Oriental Literature: Epic and Fiction (3)

| | A Cwl 202 Oriental Literature: Drama and Lyric Poetry (3)
A Cwl 345 b Asian Mythology (3)

vA A His 377 aand b_ History of South Asian Civilization (3, 3)
| e, A His 380 History of Modern Japan (3)

Vira Asian Philosophy (3)
We, Topics in Philosophy (Asian topics) (3)
Phi 214 Comparative Religion (3)

HN
A i

* A Ant 344 South Asia: Peoples and Cultures (3)
| . uff A Ant 345° Southeast Asia: Peoples and Cultures (3)
| A Ant 346 East Asia: Peoples and Cultures (3)

|
}

1S NG RULE EED Ad EM ake wer pe, tee ea

rh 49 éin Art 1: 19th Century (3)

| ae A Study of painting and sculpture in Europe.fr6m 1780 to 1880.
ey rerequisite: Arh 150 b, Arh 292, or consent of instructor.

yh 492 Modern Art II: 20th Century (3)
A study of painti d_ sculpture in Europe from 1880 to 19AO0.
Men rh 150 b, an fC SS consent of ii
rh 497 tC AE ar y (1- s

Directed reading and/or research in a selected area. Prerequisite:

consent of instructor and department chairman, May be repeated
with approval of department.

ical
ae

irh..498-.SeniorSeminar-in-ArtHistory-(3)—————_.
- An introduction to the literature, Spnden vod atime aa

-— 4
istory and connoisseurship. Required of majors and open to minor |

a enema
c

L A limited number of the following courses, available
/ through the Department of Classics, may by advisement
(be taken for credit in art history:

) Cla 208 Greek Archaeology (3)
‘ Cla 209 Roman Archaeology (3) Zz
Cla 402 Greek Sculpture (3)
pis 450 Archaeology of Southern italy and Sicily (3)

ater

+ 460 Greek Architecture (3) . :

PROGRAM IN ASIAN STUDIES

FACULTY: K. Chen, D. Ellinwood, L. Fields, H. Flierl, R. |!
Garvin, J. Hanks, L. Chung, H. Sun, J. Uppal, R. Walton,
T. Wright.

The interdisciplinary major with a concentration in ! }
| Asian Studies offers students an opportunity to study the
: most highly populated continent, its rich cultures, and its Zz
place in the world, It can provide the basis for further | |
studies in disciplines dealing with Asia, It also offers a good
background for work in journalism, government service,
inter-cultural activities, and business abroad. if

Special Programs or Opportunities

The university offers a year of intensive study of the
Chinese language at Nanyang University in Singapore.

Hindi and Japanese languages are available on an inde-
pendent study basis through Linguistics 389, Other Asian
languages may be added to this program in the future.

5 ates os aed
ane
Sameer g

sy 124" The Stellar Systenr-(3-—~

Delete fall 72

The sun as a star, stellar dist ACES, motions, variability, and }
spectra. Binary and multipl ar systems, _ gusters, interstellar
edium, the Milky Way ‘extragalactic systéms. Two classes an
yne laboratory per w . Prerequisites Q. Gorequisites: Phy 124,
Phy 125; Asy 123°0r equivalent.

Asy 210

avigation (3)
xarts and publications, piloting from n

oalestial marine navigation using” the
249,

ational aids, basit

Yautical Almanac and H
. Fwo classes and one laboratory per week,

DEPARTMENT OF ATMOSPHERIC SCIENCE

FACULTY: G, Amason, *D, Blanchard, L. Bosart, **J.

Cobine, U. Czapski, N. Gokhale, H. Hamilton, *J. Jiusto,

J. Kim, A. Loesch, *V. Mohnen, R. Orville, *V. J. Schaefer,
*B, Vonnegut.

The educational aim of the department is to provide its
undergraduate students with a broad background in the
science of the atmosphere. The program offers both general
introductory courses and advanced courses in the field of
atmospheric science. Students, in conjunction with their

ST
cree

academic advisors, may_tailortheirprograms towards 6vén-
tual graduate work in atmospheric science, a double major
in other disciplines or plan for post baccalaureate employ-
ment, Atmospheric scientists typically find employment
with federal, state and local governments as well as in
private industry. Those students. interested in academic
eareers should plan on ultimately earning a Ph.D.

Degree Requirements for the Major
in Atmospheric Science
General Program | :

B.S.: (combined major and second field sequences) Any
two of Atm 100, 101, 103 or 207, and Atm 300, 401, 404,
411 and 412, Phy 120 and Phy 121, Phy 124 and 125, and
Phy 220 and Phy 221, Mat 112, 113, 212 and 213, Chm
121 a and b; Chm 122-a and b; 10 additional credits in
mathematics and science as advised,

*Pyimary responsibility with Atmospheric Sciences Research
Center ;
** Visiting Professor |

i
}
|
;
|
1

}

VY 5 Pos 358 Government and Politics of South Asia (3)
Af#fis 379 aandb_ History of China (3, 3)

! fm 380 Geography of East Asia (3)
A

Gog 383 Geography of South and Southeast Asia (3)

ny, His 4 3 gelisain in non-Western History (Asian topics) (3)
ns A

in ae Directed Study in Foreign Language

| y | . (Hindi, Japanese) :(2287 Cé4p)
| A

Chi 101-102 Elementary Chinese (4, 4)
vp Chi 201-202 Intermediate Chinese (4, 4)

17 210-211 Survey of Classical Chinese Literature, I, II (3, 3)
/s Chi 220 Chinese Calligraphy
VA A Chi 300 a andb_ Intermediate Conversation and

Composition (3, 3) ( nN ol Q, fe, Di 9 W, tt)

" “A-Ghi-304-a-and-b-~Advaneed-Gonversation-and-Gomposition-{

Xf A,Chi 421 Documentary Chinese (3)
# A Chi 497 Independent Study in Chinese (3-6)

There also is available in some departments an inde-

Sy be offered.

re,

eo em

eT
Bed

QT Sree:

- . pendent study course which may be used for work in Asian

Studies.

Other courses may be approved for a major in Asian
Studies by the director of the program, when such courses
are devoted primarily to Asian topics, e.g., Eco 330, Eco-
nomics of Development, or Pos 458, Minority Group Poli-
tics in the Third World.

DEPARTMENT OF ASTRONOMY AND
SPACE SCIENCE
FACULTY: C. Hemenway
| rh. Although an undergraduate major in Astronomy and

y~ Space Science is not available, the following courses will

| eS A study of the earth taal “asteroids, meteors, ane
fs omets as sfeatily. Two classes. “one labora
| Q week, Prerequisites or © cored visiteer PRY 120 and 20 and Phy J 12
? equivalent”

60
vA +f 3/74 v

Aim 401 Synoptic Laboratory I (1)

thernror =
ie et oR taacsere omen oe

6 — oe ©
a ran weather Situations: three” dimensional snalvice of ayncptis
scale weather systems; application of the fundamental laws ot 2, at-

mospheric dynamics to the observed wea cree patrem Plasto l
PEN OTTO te ee a he CUO sorn Oband ob
Crotla Lect ep. rere f 200. Coreguoa:
| Te tm 404 Introduct(Sn bie Pree Geta wihes 1 Lid 00 by i.

The application of physical laws and principles including acous-
tics, electricity, wave-propagation, optics, and radiation to the at-

4 pret Three lectures each week. Prerequisites: Phy 220 and
t
we

hy 221

im 407 (Chm 407) Atmospheric Chemistry (4)
A characterization of atmospheric matter in the particulate,
.« liquid, and gaseous states. Includes sampling and nature of particu-
lates; analysis of inorganic and organic, gaseous and particulate
pollutants; precipitation chemistry. Chemical reactions in the at-
mosphere, with the under-lying principles of chemical kinetics,
thermodynamics, photochemistry, and surface phenomena. Four
7 class meetings weekly. Prerequisites: physical chemistry, or one
| year of chemistry, two years of physics, and three semesters of
if caleulus. Offered jointly with the Department of Chemistry,

_, Atm 408 Hydrometeorology (3)
: | The role of the atmosphere in the water cycle. Two lectures and

| gre two-hour discussion each week. Prerequisites. Mat 212 and Atm
Atm 411 i i

Synoptic-Dynamic Meteorology (3)

Goveming atmospheric physical laws; wind in relation to pres-
sure; influence of friction; vertical structure of wind systems; at-
mospheric kinematics; circulation, vorticity and divergence theo-
rems; fronts and frontogenesis: quasigeostrophic theory and applica-
tion of basic atmospheric dynamics to the observed weather be-
‘havior, Three lectures each week. Prerequisites: Atm 8300 and
Mat 212, Corequisite: Mat 213.

—————,
Ss ee Rare ere

_ Atm 412 Atmospheric Thermodynamics (3)
| Basic concepts and laws of classical thermodynamics with empha-
| | sis on application to water substance in its three phases, Various
le applications to the atmosphere including the thermodynamics of
scending moist air, hydrostatic stability, and rudiments of the

theory of thermal convection, Three lectures each week. Prerequi-
ites: Atm 300, and Mat 213,

ee,
ry

“Atm 417 Physical Limnology and Oceanography (3)
Physical processes in the lakes and oceans; mixing and thermal
processes; surface and internal gravity waves; seiches and tidal
aves; wind driven currents; the effect of these processes on the
aquatic environment and the surrounding atmosphere. Three lec-

tures each week. Prerequisite: Atm 300 and Mat 212, or consent of
| ; instructor,

freer

| Atm 497 Independent Study (1-4)
a By advisement only and may be repeated twice for credit..

7 63

Jan eee an 7 — eres

Students who expect to do graduate work in atmospheric
science are encouraged to acquire a skill in computer pro-
gramming or a reading knowledge of French, German, or
Russian, In addition, these students should complete Phy
224, Phy 225, and Atm 400 and consider further course
work in mathematics and science such as: Chm 320, Phy
321, Phy 332, Mat 363, Mat 409, Mat 410, Csi 201, and
Csi 209,

Atm 100 The Atmosphere (3)

A non-technical survey of the atmosphere; the physical environ-
ment of man and its effects on his activities; intentional and_unin-— -
-tentional modification of the environment; topics include radiation,
clouds, severe storms, weather forecasting, climate, air pollution,
weather modification, satellite meteorology, and planetary atmos-
phere, Two lectures, one two-hour discussion each week. Closed to
students with credit for Atm 300,

Atm 101 The Upper Atmosphere (3)

An elementary survey of the properties and geophysical phenom-
ena of the upper atmosphere; ionosphere, magnetosphere, inter-
planetary space, ionospheric and magnetic storms, aurora, airglow,

| and various cheetrabiens! techniques including rockets and satellites.

Two lectures mpage o-hour aed (dee each week,

_Atm 103 Cfimmate foryech tal (3)
Basie~principler f= “fepional and physical™¢ climatologys"introduc-

Pieces

“or

ion to methods” in rin dynamic en and man. Two
mectures, C ONG.

Atm 207 The Oceans “

An introductory survey of the physical, chemical, geological and
biological processes in the marine environment; promises and prob-

lems of the oceans as. a natural resource. Two lectures, one two-hour
discussion each week.

Atm 297 Independent Study | (1-4)
By advisement only and may be repeated twice for credit.

. Atm 300 introductory Meteorology ny ( 3)
“ +the-physi tconchonstetnty
yu perature, humidity, pre pow ation and pressure; ea of onan

xpressed a ae, ce of forces including Gific cases of
di

yah strophic and ient winds; adiabatic ch tts, instrumentati and
Fy basic ho a weather codes; thermal” wind and divergénce; basic

Ww » oy Aen ogy. Three lectures, ab each week. Jt requisites: one

tm 100, 101, 103 207 and Phy J124”and Phy 125. Co-
SEALE SN II ee ESLER

guisite-Mat-DtSyo———

Atm 400 Introduction to Fluid Mechanics (3)

Basic principles and laws goveming the motions of Huids. Topics
include elements of vector and tensor analysis; kinematics of fluid
motion; the Navier-Stokes equations of motion and the energy equa-
tion for a Newtonian fluid; ideal and viscous fluids; dimensional

analysis. Three lectures per week. Prerequisites: Mat 213 and Phy
124,

1c
y

‘ elective credit; courses which do not yield credit toward

the major are so indicated in the individual catalogue de-

| scriptions, Chm 121, 122, 345,.346, 347, 348 (Chm 216
: and 217 may be substituted for Chm 345 and 346; Chm

342 and 343 may be substituted for Chm 347 and 348).
Major electives must be so selected that together with the
courses in chemistry a total of 12 credits at the 300 level
or above is included in the major. The second field se-
quence will consist of a minimum 18 credits in an ap-

| proved area as advised, and must include at least six credits
~ at the 300 level or in courses having a prerequisite.

B.S.; Combined major and second field sequence consist-
ing of a minimum of 66 credits including Bio 101, 201 and
25 additional credits of biology courses which must include
at least THREE laboratory courses, At least one course
must be selected from each of the following FOUR areas:
(1) molecular/cellular biology Bio 301, 302, 303, 314, 315,

- 826, 406, 419; (2) Organismal biology Bio 305, 322, 324,

310, 325, 407, 415, 433; (3) Integrative biology Bio 317,
323, 332, 333, 403, 404, 410, 411 417, 418, 460; (4) Ecol-
ogy/Population Biology Bio 202, 219, 316, 340, 402, 409,
432, 434. Bio 399 and 499 may contribute up to a total of

four credits toward the major but cannot be used to fulfill
credits as a laboratory course. Courses which do not yield
credit toward the major are so indicated in the individual
catalogue descriptions. Chm 121, 122; 345, 346, 347, 348
(Chm 216 and 217 may be substituted for Chm 345-348

_ in which case Chm 342 and 343 must be completed as part
of the 25 additional credits in biology described above).

Phy 105, 106; two courses in mathematics exclusive of Mat
100, 102, 105, 107. Courses in biology must be so selected
that together with the courses in chemistry a total of 18
credits at the 300 level or above is included in the major-
second field sequence.

| 66 credits:

Mathematics ...,.............00 evan 6
FEN yee et ay cue ye Fee ak ome“ ¥E A" 8
Chemistry 2.000000... 0.0. cee eee 16
Bio 101 .... 2 ee. 8
Bio 20] ... 0.0. ee. 3

Sub Total .................00.00-. Al credits
Additional credits in biology ........... 25

Total .. oo... eee eee 66 credits

DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

FACULTY: K. Able, C. Baglioni, W. Baum, S. Brown, N.
Dulak, C, Edwards, D. Edwards, J, Flynn, Jr., H. Ghira-
della, J. Greco, R. Hausner, K. Heinig, H. Hirsch, C, Izzard,
J. Jacklet, R. Jaeger, R. Kelly, L. Lerman, J. Mackiewicz,
S. P. Marfey, J. Mascarenhas, L. Mason, S. McGee-Russell,
D. McKinley, D. McNaught, A. Millis, R. Murphey, S.
Newman, R. Rikmenspoel, J. Saunders, Jr., D. Shub, M.
Stewart, R. Stross, H. Tedeschi, F. Truscott, H. Winn,
RR, Zitomer 7
The objective of the department is to provide the under-
graduate student with a broad background in the biological
sciences and adequate supporting strength in the physical
sciences. Accordingly, the B.S. programs listed below are
structured around a combined major-second field sequence.
The B.A., which specifies the major only and requires a
separate second field sequence, is designed with the aims
of the general liberal student in mind and as such is not
intended for the professional biologist. The B.S. programs
provide a strong background for further study either in
medicine or in graduate school and prepare the student for
secondary school teaching and a variety of careers in biol-

Le remote et

es ee we

re Bee ed
wares nee ee

ogy at the technical level’ The B.S. program in Medical
Technology is conducted in cooperation with Albany Med-
ical Center Hospital and is a rigidly structured program in
the sciences intended to provide baccalaureate level educa-
tion in the basic sciences during a three year period. The
fourth year is one of clinical training spent at the hospital.
Enrollment in this program is limited to the numbers of
students who can be accommodated in the clinical year at
Albany Medical Center Hospital.

The department also offers programs leading to the M.S.
and the Ph.D. in which the graduate student is able to
obtain an in-depth professional education in one of several
more restricted areas of biological sciences.

Degree Requirements for the Major in Biology

General Program

B.A.: A minimum of 36 credits including Bio 101, 201;
and nine credits of biology major electives. A minimum of
two courses, exclusive of Bio 101, must be partially or ex-
clusively laboratory courses. Bio 399 and Bio 499 may con-
tribute up to a total of four credits of non-laboratory major

ee ee ee
te ree rey

Same. cman cay Y
———————
toe!

65 credits: LZ |
Mathematics | _ 6

Se )

~Physies 0.0.0... “om an mas tettreseeee, 8
Chemistry .......... beet ees 16
Astronomy, Geological Science or. Atmos- |
pheric Science .........0. 02.5000. 6
Bio 101 ............... re 8
Bio 201 00. eee 3
Sub Total 2.0.0.0... 0.0.6. AT
Additional credits in biology ........... 18
Total o eee eee eee eee n eee ead 7 + 85

lows:

Group 1... 0 ee 3
Be nuiubuvns tient eunbeunvbens 3.
re 3
Al eee en 3

Total o.oo eee 12

The remaining 6 credits may be selected from any of

these-courses-in-groups—l=4, Bio 399, 499, Chm 342, 343:

Special Program

B.S.: Medical Technology. The program in Medical
Technology enables a student to obtain the B.S. degree
from this university at the end of a four-year program,
including three academic years here and a fourth calendar
year at a school of medical technology approved by this

‘university. Each student during the first three years fulfills

the general liberal requirements and the major and second
field requirements for a medical technology major. The
fourth year at a school of medical technology includes both
theoretical and practical work in the medical laboratory
category. The B.S, degree is awarded by this university
upon satisfactory completion of the requirements of both

. institutions. The program is presently offered in affiliation
_ with the Albany Medical Center Hospital.

(Combined major and second field requirements) | Bio
101, 314, 315, and. at least six credits selected from Bio

' 201, 205, 213, 317, 301, 302, 325, 3826, 403, 406, 407, 410, -
411: Chm 121, 122, 216, 217, 225, 342, and 343. a labora.

s 4
ot
et
an

/ The “additional 25” credits must be distributed as follows:

Group 1. 0. eee 3 minimum
Bb mimi cs wees Pores oa cds ee Ob 3 minimum |
Ge ei ca ca ieacaawewaewesiwaunan 3 minimum :
Be gg Bk wb Rs od PRE Sa ode RT ad od 3 mininum
‘ + j
Total 2.00. een 12 i |

The remaining (25—12 = 13) credits can be selected
from among those courses in groups 1-4, Bio 399, 499,
and Chm 342, 343. Since any course carrying fewer than
3 credits has a co-requisite course in the same group, the” .|~
final distribution of credits will be as above.

B.S. Major-Second Field Sequences in Biology i
Teacher Education Program

B.S.: Combined major and second field sequence con-
sisting of a minimum of 65 credits: Bio 101, 201 and 18
additional credits of biology courses which must include at
least THREE laboratory courses. At least one course must ; :
be selected from each of the following FOUR areas: (1) | |
molecular/cellular biology Bio 301, 302, 303, 314, 315, «:

326-406--419:-(2)-Organismalbiology-Bio-305,322,-324. —
310, 825, 407, 415, 438; (8) Integrative biology Bio 317, | |
323, 332, 333, 403, 404, 410, 411, 417, 418, 460; (4) |
Ecology/Population Biology Bio 202, 219, 316, 340, 402, ~
409, 432, 434. Bio 399 and 499 may contribute up to a ,
total of four credits toward the major but cannot be used | |
to fulfill credits as a laboratory course. Courses which do | |
not yield credit toward the major are so indicated in the
individual catalogue descriptions. Chm 121, 122, 345, 346, 3 ;
347, 348 (Chm 216 and 217 may be substituted for Chm | |
345-348 in which case Chm 342 and 343 must be com- °'
pleted as part of the 18 additional credits in biology de- , .
scribed above), Phy 105, 106, 6 credits in Astronomy and i |
Space Science, Geological Science, or Atmospheric Science
as advised, two courses in mathematics exclusive of Mat
100, 102, 105, 107. Courses in biology must be so selected ; »
that together with the courses in chemistry a total of 18: |
credits at the 300 level or above is included in the major- ~-!
second field sequence.

Fee: ee ae BF
goer nes
——
Seeders

io 201 Genetics (3)

Principles of heredity and variation at all levels of biological
organization and the mechanisms of replication, mutation, recombi-
nation, and gene expression which underlie these principles. Three
class periods each week. Prerequisite: Bio 101; or consent of in-
structor. May be taken either session.

io 202 (Env 202) Ecology (3)

Introduction to the study of organisms, populations, and com-
munities in relation to their environments. The course stresses an
integrated approach at all levels of biological organization. Topics
considered include: the niche concept, species diversity, nutrient
cycling, energy flow, population dynamics and control, biological
rhythms, and other physiological mechanisms influenced by the

enyironment. Prerequisite: Bio 101, Three class periods each week,
Mby be taken either session.

io 205 Human Genetics (3)

A survey of human genetics emphasizing the principles and
mechanisms of inheritance, and including the analysis of the genetic
material of man, the behavior of genes in individuals, families and
populations, and the implications for human behavior and evolution,
medicine, and society. Does not yield credit toward the major in °
biological sciences. Not open to freshmen or to students with credit
in Bio 201. Three class periods each week.

Bio 207 Effects of Biological Research on Man and Society (2)
A scientific discussion of current aspects of biological research

| | Sato Scion sf cee ape society. Topics include:

| '
- &

ee
ee

f
:
i
t
1
‘
i
«

human reproduction (anatomy, physiology, contraception, abortion,
artificial insemination), human genetics (genetic disorders and treat-
ment, chemical and radiation-induced mutations, genetic engineer-
ing, intelligence and behavior), mechanisms of drug action, trans-
plantation, population growth and control, chemical and biological
warfare. Does not yield credit toward the major in biological
sgiences. Two class periods each week,

io 210 Dendrology (3)

Field and laboratory study of native and ornamental trees, shrubs,
and related flora, Identification, classification, natural history, and
seasonal, ecological and economic aspects. Field study at area parks,

: preserves, and nurseries; use of keys and preparation of herbaria.

Dges not yield credit toward the major in biological sciences. Two
class periods and one laboratory period each week. Prerequisites:

| Bio 101 or 102, or consent of instructor.

io 211. Plants and Human Affairs (3)

Characteristics of food, beverage, drug, industrial, and poisonous
plants. Problems of their production and utilization. Discussion of
important plants and plant products in the modern world with some
attention given to the effects of plants on the development of

civilization. Does not yield credit toward the major in biological
sciences. Three class periods each week.

tory course in college physics; and six credits in mathema-
tics exclusive of Mat 100, 102, and 105. Students in this
program also complete the fourth year in affiliation with a
registered school of medical technology (Bio 400 a and b).
This is considered as a special requirement for this pro-
gram,

Prior to the end of the fall session, junior year, each stu-
dent in the medical technology program must receive med-
ical clearance and approval from the director of medical
technology at the Albany_ Medical Center Hospital in an-

tcipation of his enrollment in Bio 400 a and b. This pro-
gram accommodates a limited number of students.

Bio 101 aandb General Biology (4, 4)

Fundamental principles common to all living systems at the
molecular, cellular, and organismal levels; with a general survey of
the plant and animal kingdoms. This course is especially designed
for prospective biology majors and also for other science majors and
minors. Biology majors should elect Chm 121 a and b, concurrently.
Not open to students with credit in Bio 102. The full year of study
is recommended. Three class periods, one laboratory period each
week, Prerequisite: Bio 101 a is prerequisite to Bio 101 b.

Bio 102 aandb General Biological Science (3, 3)
Principles of life processes with consideration of the major groups

Ferree nents ret ans ee

of-living organisms, Particutar-attention is devoted to the implication ———_

of biology to the problems of modern living, e.g., ionizing radiation
and its effects on living systems. The audio-tutorial method of in-
struction is emphasized to provide maximum individualization of
study. Laboratory experience is integrated into the audio-tutorial
format. Not open to students who have credit in Bio 101 or other
equivalent introductory courses. Two lectures per week plus one
audio-tutorial laboratory per week. Credit may be earned for either
session (102a is not a prerequisite for 102b) although the full year
of study is recommended.

fo 115 Ornithology (2)

Field and laboratory study of birds; the topography, adaptive

atures, and classification of resident and migratory species, with
emphasis on identification by sight and sound. One class period, one
laboratory period each week. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
Does not yield credit toward the major in biological sciences.

Bio 120 Conservation of Natural Resources (2)

The scientific use and management of soil, water, forests, and
wildlife with emphasis on current problems associated with environ-
mental pollution, habitat and wildlife depletion, conservation edu-
cation, and urban growth at local, national, and international levels,

Does not yield credit toward the major in biological sciences. Two
class periods each week.

cere. oy
Sa eee oe Be

Gad Wows

OF ay ereateam se ye ot

eee nee aoe te

Same + enw:

|
i}

ih ead

eto

iron ams)

area ora
j ZL, | Vv
i
Bio 306 Development of Biological Thought (2)

Philosophic treatment of major concepts of biology; changes in
_ interpretations are traced from earliest views of superstition to
| modern problems with important social, economic, hygienic, and
| _ [Pitot implications. Does not yield credit toward the major in

ins a iology coat fe, to Sen ee and seni ‘thew

: fe 27% atural ncaa n Early Seas § ex
: The rise “of natural science in Amorion mane as shown by

early animal and plant studies in naturalists’ journals, explorers’
reports and biological surveys. These are interpreted for today’s
| ecologist, taxonomist, conservationist and literary naturalist. Does
not yield credit toward the major in biological sciences. Three class

periods each week, Prerequisite: upperclass standing, or consent of
instructor,

| “Bio 310 Plant Taxonomy (3)
Principles and methods of systematics with emphasis on the

identification and classification of angiosperms. Two class periods,
ia laboratory period each week. Prerequisite: Bio 101.

| | Bio 314 General Bacteriology (3)

An introduction to the morphology and physiology of bacteria,
and the bacterial viruses. Three class periods each week. Prerequi-

__ sites: Bio 101 and a course in biochemistry. Biochemistry may be
| Tt fs concurrently,

Bio 315 General Bacteriology Laboratory (1)

i
f
bs
HT

biological sciences. Two class periods each week. Prerequisite: ten ax

Laboratory techniques for the culture and study of microorgan-
__ isms, Experiments on the dynamics of bacterial growth and the
| . physiological bases of bacterial identification, and environmental in-

uences, One laboratory period each week. Prerequisite: Bio 314
(may be taken concurrently).

. ee

Origin and differentiation of floras and faunas; biotic regions of
' the world, principles of distribution; migration, adaptation, evolu-

. pio’ and extinction. Three class periods each week. Prerequisite:
Bio 101,

| . Bio 316 Biogeography (3)

| | Bio 317 Comparative Animal Physiology (3)

L An analytical survey of the regulatory mechanisms of various
animal systems. The course will emphasize similarities and differ-
, ences in the adaptation of different organisms to their environment.
| _fissise possible the molecular basis of these adaptations will be
|

discussed. Three class periods each week. Prerequisite: Bio 101,

Bio 322 Plant Morphology (3)

An evolutionary survey of the plant kingdom. Structure, life
cycles, relationships and phylogenetic trends of major plant groups.
Principles of comparative plant morphology. Two class periods, one
laboratory period each week. Prerequisite: Bio 101.

eee
howe ae

Bio 213 Vertebrate Physiology (4)

Study of the function of organ systems in vertebrates; muscle
contraction, nervous coordination, respiration, nutrition and elimina-
tion. Does not yield credit toward the major in biological sciences.
Three class periods, one laboratory period. each week. Prerequisites:

Bio 101 or Bio 102 and Chm 121.

{ Bio 219 Field Blotogy (3)
An introduction to those aspects of biology which are based on

field study; local flora and fauna from an ecological viewpoint; se-
lected field and laboratory techniques and related literature. Each
student is required to complete an independent field investigation.
Two class periods, one laboratory period each week. Prerequisite:

- - Bio- 101-or Bio 102, Not open to freshmen. ~— 2 5 = my ae

Bio 230 (Env 230) People and Resources in
Ecological Perspective (3)
Introduction to ecosystems, soils science, and the distribution of
natural communities. The study of man as a global population and
_ its social implications for resource exploitation, A historical perspec-
tive on resource-oriented behavior. Does not yield credit toward the
major in te coh hee Wok Three class p ating Cas each week.

Biee4 Pai lology at 3) I>. ta | "He

A study of cell biology barton Soa a to study living
animal cells, the structural and functional significance of cellular
components, and those factors which are involved in the regulation
of cell proliferation. Specific areas of discussion include principles
of cell culture, structure and function of cell membranes, the cell

cycle, growth characteristics of tsotated cells, cell-hy bridization and

reconstruction, aging and senescense, and the genesis and biology of
cancer cells. Prerequisites: Bio 201, Chm 342 or 347,

Bio 302 Cell Biology Laboratory (2)

Experimental investigation on selected topics in cell biology, in-
cluding membrane permeability, cell motility, tissue culture, isola-
tion of subcellular particles, use of oxygen electrodes in metabolic
studies, and analysis of living cells using advanced techniques in
optical microscopy, One three-hour laboratory, one hour of recita-
tion per week. Prerequisite: Bio 301 (may be taken concurrently).

fogt
Bio 303 Elements of Biophysical Cell Bighouy < at [1 +e
A consideration of selected topics in cell biology witha
en-a-biopliysicrl approweh:~Fepies-will Mcludé? Eriérgetics 4
oxidative phosphorylation and its regulation, the primary process of
photosynthesis, membrane transport, _excitability, Prerequisite: Bio

201, Chm 342 or 347, ' » Contr tel wmorilr tt,

““ Bio'305 Biology of the Arthropods (3)
Form, function, systematics, and population dynamics in insects
and other arthropods. Prerequisite: Bio 101 or Bio 102. Two class

periods, one laboratory period each week. Given alternate years
only,

—r se

w= ore =
; °
a

biology. Does not yield credit toward biology major. Prerequisites:
so 101; minimum of 30 credits in sicence courses; junior or senior
standing; and consent of instructor,

‘io 399 Supervised Research for Juniors (1-3)

Individual, independent research on selected topics in biology.
Critical analysis of selected research papers. Junior majors in the
department of biological sciences may make application for this
cofirse through the office of the department chairman. May be taken
either session, May be repeated for a total of six credits.

io 400 a and b Medical Technology (3)

This is the fourth year of the medical technology program. It is
an intern year at a cooperating school of medical technology and
includes course work in Microbiology, Parasitology, Bacteriology,
Clinical Chemistry, Clinical Pathology, Urinalysis, and Serology and
the accompanying laboratory program. The intern year begins only
in September and continues for a calendar year. To be enrolled in
the program the student must have completed all required course

work for the degree except for the intern year program. (Open only
tg students enrolled in medical technology.)

io 402 ~=Evolution (3)

Origins of life: mechanisms and processes of organic evolution,
stressing evidence from population genetics, systematics, paleon-
tology, and comparative physiology, biochemistry; the evolution of

Big 101 and 201.

Oey ee ee ol

aceon oe

ef and his culture. Three class periods each week. Prerequisites:

Bio 403 Developmental Biology (3)

The development of form and function in animals and plants at
the cellular, tissue, and organismal levels; the factors controlling
developmental processes. Topics includes gametogenesis, fertiliza-
tion, early development, and organogenesis. Concepts and processes
include induction, polarity, symmetry, differentiation, morphogenetic
movement, regeneration, aging and death. Three class periods each
week. May be taken with or without associated laboratory course

Bio 404, Prerequisites: Bio 201, and Chm 347 and 348 or Chm
sf and 343,

Bio 404 Developmental Biology Laboratory (1)

The experimental understanding of the basic concepts in develop-
mental biology. Emphasis is placed on the experimental techniques
and principles used to analyze the factors controlling cellular, tissue
ahd organismal development in both plants and animals. One labora-
fy period each week, Corequisite: Bio 4038.

Bio 406 Animal Histology (3)

Fundamental microscopic and electron microscopic anatomy of
mammalian cells, tissues and selected organs and organ systems.
Practice in preparation of biological materials for examination by
the light microscope, including: dissection, fixation, imbedding in
paraffin and plastic, sectioning, and staining. Two olass periods;
one laboratory period each week. Prerequisites: Bio 101; Bio 325

' or Bio 410 strongly recommended.

‘

J Bio 323 Plant Physiology (3)

Life processes of plants, particularly those of the vascular plants:
water, relations, translocation, mineral nutrition, metabolic pathways
peculiar to plants, growth, and hormonal control. Two class periods,
one laboratory period each week. Prerequisites: Bio 101, Chm 216 a
and 217 a, or Chm 345 and 346,

Bio 324 Invertebrate Zoology (4)
Functional morphology and adaptive radiation of —
with consideration of those aspects of fine structure, developmental
biology, behavior and comparative physiology, particularly charac-
teristic of invertebrate organisms. Laboratory work emphasizes. liv-
ing marine forms. Three class periods, one laboratory period each
week. Prerequisite: Bio 101-or 102.-Not open to freshmen. — - —

Bio 325 Functional Morphology of the Vertebrates (3)

A. comparative study of the anatomy, embryonic development,
and evolutionary modifications of organ systems in the vertebrates.
Major emphasis is placed on the physiological roles of the develop-
ing and adult organism. Two class periods, one laboratory period
each week, Prerequisite: Bio 101.

Bio 326 Molecular Biology (3)

Structure of macromolecules: nucleic acids and proteins. Bio-
synthesis of macromolecules: protein synthesis, RNA and DNA syn-
thesis. Structure of chromosomes; protein/nucleic acid interactions.

Molecular genetics. Three class periods each week. Prerequisites:
Bio 101, 201, Chm 342 and 343 or Chm 347 and Chm 348.

| Bio 332. Experimental Plant Biology (3)

The influence of endogenous and exogenous plant growth regu-
lators and environmental conditions on plant development. Empha-
sis on photomorphogenesis and the phenomena and proposed mech-
anisms of action of growth-regulating hormones. Three class periods

per week, Prerequisites: Bio 201 and a course in organic chemistry.

Bio 333 Experimental Plant Biology Laboratory (1-3).

Laboratory investigations of plant morphogenesis: including em-
bryogenesis, regeneration, cellular growth and differentiation. The
equivalent of one, two, or three three-hour laboratory periods per
week. Corequisites: Bio 332 or consent of instructor.

Biology 340 Aquatic Ecology (3)

A study of aquatic environments, interactions and adaptations of
the organisms living there: form and functional adjustments, growth
characteristics of individuals and populations, and ecology of chang-

, ing environments. The course considers the fundamentals of eutrophi-

j cation of lakes and estuaries, biological treatment of domestic and

industrial wastes and aquaculture. Two one-hour lectures, one three-

1 hour laboratory each week. Prerequisite: one year of introductory
} college biology.

Bio 350 Development of Biology Laboratory Exercises (2-4)

Design and implementation of laboratory exercises and experi-
ments suitable for use in introductory biology. Exposure to and
involvement in techniques that relate to the teaching of introductory

1
| pepe in pm ree

eros ee
*
| i
i
'
4

eet

bite

Ponce teerr agtitgeteyite ot
a
f)

4 Evotogy-of-Freshwaters-(2)}--—
Experimental and observational studie
biotic interactions influencing productivit
depts at the organismic, populatigns“a
Hered during Summer Progr

of freshwaters. Basic con-

Study of wens ructural and

. dirondack,.-écosyste ns;
entaL_afialysis. aneh s
er one overnig f

red during Su

Sbrate microcommunities; descriptive and com

wulization of ete fondack sOEms ee to study

Ne ote a Course

fo 432 Animal Behavior (3)
The organization, causation, development and. evolution of be-
havior in vertebrates and invertebrates. Emphasis is on a synthesis

of environmental and

parative agsay of microhabitats of incorporating experime and
eld techniques. Course offered during Summer am at Cran-
Pre risite: Gener and ecology. |

(To: be debited 12/4+| delete. -/3/ 72, D9

2 en ae

a: Snes

bib an arn

en ene

of information from both field and laboratory. Topics include stimuli
and responsiveness, motivation, conflict behavior, social behavior
with emphasis on ecological aspects, orientation and navigation,
rhythmicity, learning, and the neural organization responsible for
behavior. Three class periods each week. Prerequisite: 15 credits
if bites including Bio 202,

‘Bio 433. Mycology (3)

Introduction to the fungi: structure, function, life cycles, evolu-
tion, and ecological and economic importance. Two lectures, one
laboratory period each week. Prerequisites: Bio 101, or consent of
the instructor,

Bio 434 Population-Community Ecology (3)
Major concepts in population dynamics and the structure and

evolution of communities. Topics include niche partitioning, compe-
ition theory, population cycles, population regulation, optimization
thdory, the community matrix, species packing and species diversity.
Exhnphasis on current research. Three class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Bio 202.

Bio 450 Fundamentals of Immunology (3)

A survey of the field of immunology encompassing topics such as
the nature of immune defense; the character of the cells involved,
their activities and their interactions; the immunoglobulins; control
of antibody synthesis; the chemical nature of antigenicity; the
antigen-antibody reaction; immunological memory; immunosuppres-
sion; autoimmunity; and the application of immunochemical tech-

io 407 Parasitology (3)

Biology of host-parasite systems; factors influencing evolution,
distribution, and host specificity of animal parasites. Host-parasite
relationships as illustrated by physiological and morphological adap-
tations, ecology, and life cycles of selected protozoan, helminth, and
arthropod parasites. Two class periods; one laboratory period each
week. Prerequisite: 14 credits in biology courses.

a emcee

Bio 409 Ecology Laboratory (3)

Laboratory and field research testing current ecological concepts.
Emphasis on learning research design and techniques by intensively ~ °
investigating a single concept, such as competition theory, com-
munity energy flow, or foraging strategy, Use of computers for : :
model building. One class period and six hours of field research each _
week. Prerequisites: Bio 202 and consent of instructor. a:

Bio 410 Systemic Physiology (3)

The function of organ systems in animals and their contribution
to the functions of the body as a whole. Topics include nervous,
endocrine, cardiovascular respiratory, gastrointestinal, and urinary
systems. Two one-and-one-half hour lecture periods each week.
Prerequsite: Bio 301,

Bio 411 Systemic Physiology Laboratory (1) y

Experimental investigations in systemic physiology with empha- :
sis on membrane transport, nerve excitability, muscle contraction,

sensory mechanisms, cardiac activity, and special problems, One » ‘

bare tere eee |

; laboratory period each week. Corequisite: Bio 410.

i
_f
we

Bio 415 Vertebrate Biology (4) é

Ctraractertattons rystarm tte —distetbyution —aduptatton—bebuvior; —

population dynamics, and ecology of the vertebrates. Appropriate = :

field and laboratory techniques. One weekend field trip will substi- |
: |

tute for some laboratory periods. Three class periods, one laboratory

period each week. Prerequisite: Bio 202 or 219.

Bio 417 Neurophysiology (3)

Comparative approach to the physiology of the nervous system
with major emphasis on invertebrate systems. Topics include func-
tional organization of nervous systems, sensory and central processes,
synaptic mechanisms and neural correlates of learning and _ be-
havior. Three class periods each week. Prerequisites: Phy 105 and !
one term of biochemistry. al

vir,

Bio 418 Experimental Neurophysiology Laboratory (1)
Experimental analyses of the nervous system including stimulating
and recording techniques, experimental design, and data analysis. :
Emphasis is placed on invertebrate nervous systems. One laboratory | :
period each week. Corequisite: Bio 417, _

Bio 419 Cytogenetics (3) aq

The study of eukaryotic chromosomes; their structure, function |
and cycles as they relate to the replication, segregation, recombina- __!
tion, and transcription of the genetic material; and their role in ~
speciation and evolution. Two class periods, one laboratory period __
each week. Prerequisites: Bio 201 and Bio 301, or consent of ; j
instructor, i.

74
7 yo

quirement by Chm 121, 122, 216, 217, 225, 340, 34la
and 342 or 420 or 440a); Mat 112, 113, 212; Phy 120, 121,
124, 125, 220, 221; Bio 101 or 102; three credits in as-
tronomy, geological or atmospheric sciences as advised.

ptt
ACE TM nts,

Other Degree Requirements

webinar emits

: Students in the general program are strongly urged to
ane at least one year of German.

| L m121aandb General Chemistry (3, 3)

{ Fundamental laws and theories of chemistry with emphasis on
' physical theory’ and quantitative relationships. Principles of equi-
librium’ applied to aqueous solutions and the chemistry of the more
j comnion elements with emphasis on the periodic relationship and

coyelation with atomic properties, Three class periods each week.
| BPferequisite for Chm 121 b; Chm 121 a.

Chm 122 aandb General Chemistry Laboratory (1, 1)

Application of some of the basic techniques of chemistry with
emphasis on fundamental principles. Quantitative aspects are
stressed. Detailed experimental study of chemical equilibrium and
introduction to elementary analysis are included. One laboratory

eriod each week. Prerequisite for Chm 122 b: Chm 122 a.

Chm 131 aandb Chemical Principles (3)

fl
om erred

| :

i Structure and_reactions of atoms_and—moleeules;nature—of chenr
ical bonds, condensed phases, chemical thermodynamics, chemical

equilibrium, basic concepts of inorganic and organic chemistry.
| Three class periods each week. Prerequisite for Chm 131 a; one
t year of high school chemistry and one year of high school physics
guia. enrollment in college physics; for Chm 131 b:

m 131 a.

| Chm 132 aandb Experimental Chemistry (1, 1)
| Synthesis and characterization of organic and inorganic com-

pounds. One laboratory period each week. Corequisite for Chm
- a and b: Chm 131 a and b,

| | Chm 198 Selected Independent Reading (1)
bo Independent study of a selected topic in chemistry which cor-
relates with and supplements the formal curriculum in chemistry.
Potential enrollees should consult with the department chairman in
_ the spring regarding the topic and registration. Work normally will
| be earried out during the summer between the students’ first and
segond years, with examination and credit given in the fall. Pre-

quisite: consent of the department chairman.

Chm 216 aandb Organic Chemistry (3, 3)

Structure, synthesis and reactions of the principal classes of or-
ganic compounds with a stress on the underlying principles of
reaction mechanisms, stereochemistry and spectroscopic techniques.

| ; Three class periods each week. Prerequisite for Chm 216 a: Chm

— 121 b and Chm 122 b (or Chm 131 b and Chm 132 b); for Chm
| , 216 b: Chm 216 a.

} . 77

rerequisite: Bio 201 and a course in biochemistry.

Blo 460 Neural Basis of Behavior (3)
Critical examination of the interrelationships of complex behavior

pe to biological research. Three class periods each week.

| with the development, structure, and function of the central nervous ,
| system in higher vertebrates. Two one-and-one-half hour lecture
x a| periods each week, Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.

Bio 499 Supervised Research for Seniors (1—4)

Individual, independent research on selected topics in biology.
Critical analysis of selected papers, Senior majors in the depart-
ment of biological sciences may make application for this course
through the office of the department chairman. May be taken either
session. May be repeated for a total of 8 credits. —

DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY

FACULTY: J. Aronson, S. Bank, A. Bryan, W. Closson,

L. Daly, G. Eadon, A. Finkelstein, H. Frisch, R. Frost,

T. King, H. Kuivila, B. Laurenzi, A. Long, E. McLaren,

Y. Myer, P. Olafsson, R. Sarma, A. Saturno, A. Yencha,
J. Zubieta, J, Zuckerman

The objective of the department is to provide students
with a broad fundamental knowledge of modern theoreti-
cal and experimental chemistry that enables graduates to
embark immediately on professional careers in chemistry

or to continue study at an advanced level toward higher
degrees, The general program in chemistry is approved by
the Committee on Professional Training of the American
Chemical Society.

Degree Requirements for the Major in Chemistry
General Program

B.S.: (Combined major requirement and second field
sequence), Chm 131, 132, 216, 218, 340, 341, 342 or 420
or 440a, and nine credits in advanced chemistry as advised
(transfer students may satisfy the major requirement by
Chm 121, 122, 216, 217, 225, 340, 341, and one of Chm
342, 420 or 440a, plus eight credits in advanced chemis-
try as advised); Mat 112, 113, 212; Phy 120, 121, 124,

125, 220, 221,
Teacher Education Program

B.S.: (combined major requirement and second field se-
quence), Chm 131, 132, 216, 218, 340, 341a, and 342 or
420 or 440a (transfer students may satisfy the major re-

76
a

emphasis on bonding, spectra, and the solid state. Three class
periods each week. Prerequisites for Chm 340 a: Chm 225, Phy
124, Mat 212, and Chm 216 (may be taken as corequisite); or
wa 218 b, Phy 124 and Mat 212; for Chm 340 b: Chm 340 a.
Chm 341 a and b_ Physical Chemistry Laboratory (3, 3)

The experimental understanding of the basic principles of physi-
i cal chemistry and development of familiarity with the instruments,
| experimental principles and their application toward the elucidation
of the fundamentals of the physical principles of chemistry. Includes:
thermodynamics, chemical kinetics, hydrodynamic, electrochemical

' and optical properties. Two laboratory periods each week. Corequi-
| a Chm 340 a and b, Prerequisite for Chm 341 b: Chm 841 a.

Chm 342 Introduction to Biochemistry (3)
' The chemistry and biochemical interrelationship of carbohydrates,
| lipids, proteins, and nucleic acids; enzymes and metabolic processes,
|

benmiactr 8 Meme bhai

= @ -

Three class periods each week. Prerequisite: Chm 216 b.

V chm 343 Introduction to Biochemistry Laboratory (1)

i Experiments illustrating the fundamentals of biochemistry as dis-

ssed in Chm 342, One laboratory period each week. Corequisite:
thm 342,

}
V com 345 Chemical Foundations for Biochemistry (3)

| A unified course dealing with the principles of physical and or-
:

ganic chemistry pertinent to the understanding of biochemistry and
| comprehension of modern_biology._Three_class_periods—each_week.

Prerequisite: Chm 121 b or Chm 131 b. Corcquisite: Chm 346.
: Lon open to majors in chemistry. )

ee re

Chm 346 Chemical Foundations for Biochemistry Laboratory (1)
Recitation and laboratory to complement Chm 345, One labora-

tory period each week. Corequisite: Chm 345 (Not open to majors
| } chemistry. )
Cc

>hm 347 Basic Principles of Biochemistry (3)
A general survey of modern topics relevant to the elucidation of
structural-functional relationships, metabolic significance, dynamics

: Fi other aspects of biological systems. Three class periods each
. e

(eee ET
te :

k, Prerequisite: Chm 345 (Not open to majors in chemistry.)

Chm 348 Basic Principles of Biochemistry Laboratory (1)
Recitation and laboratory to complement Chm 347. Corequisite:
Chm 347, One laboratory period each week. (Not open to majors

i iJ
! fin chemistry.)

Orel Saag Se ern he

, Chm 398 Selected Independent Reading III (1)
Independent study of selected topic in chemistry which corre-
| lates with and supplements the formal curriculum in chemistry.
* Potential enrollees should consult with the department chairman
in the spring regarding the topic and registration. Work normally
' will be carried out during the summer between the students’ third
| | and fourth years with examination and credit given in the fall.
: | Prerequisite: consent of the department chairman.

tinea eae

so ee wat ll

as ls Da ill sat =e

Chm 217 aandb Organic Chemistry Laboratory (1, 1)
Laboratory techniques. in organic chemistry, including extraction,
crystallization, distillation and chromatography, exemplified by the

application of these techniques to the synthesis’ and qualitative. .
analysis of organic compoutds. Applications of infra-red-and NMR

spectroscopy. One laboratory period each week, Corequisite (or ~~

prerequisite) for Chm 217 a: Chm 216 a; for Chm 21% b: cha

216 b. Prererquisite for Chim 217 b: Chm O17 a,

Chm 248 aandb Experimental Chemistry It (2, 2) _

Continuation of Chm 132 with emphasis on characterization of
compounds by physical methods, relationship between molecular
structure. and. physical properties. Two laboratory periods each
week. Corequisite (or prerequisite) for Chm 218 a: Chni 216-a;-
for Chm 218 b: Chm 216 b; prerequisite for Chm 218 ‘be
Chm 218 a, |

‘ Chm 225 Quantitative Analysis (3)

Theory of quantitative aanlysis based on modern chemical princi-
ples. Practical application to typical gravimetric, volumetric, and

week. Prerequisite: Chm 121 b and Chm 122 b; or Chm 132 b.

[cect te analysis. Two class periods, one laboratory period each

Chm 298 Selected Independent Reading If (1)

Independent study of a selected topic in chemistry which corre-
lates with and supplements the formal curriculum in chemistry.
Potential enrollees should consult with the department chairman in
the spring regarding the topic and registration. Work normally will

be carried out—during—the—summer—between_the students’ second

and third years, with examination and credit given in the fall.
Prerequisite: consent of the department chairman.

J Chm 301 (Env 301) Chemistry in Society (3)

Designed to provide the non-science student with an appreciation
of chemistry as a human pursuit’ and the nature of chemical knowl
edge and how it is obtained. Three class meetings each week.

ipo to students with credit in Chm 121 b or Chm 131 b.)

Chm 320 Elementary Physical Chemistry (8)
The interpretation of the properties of chemical systems in terms

of thermodynamics, electrochemistry and kinetics, and studies of

supface tension and viscosity. Three class periods each week.
Pferequisite: Chm 121 b, Mat 113. (Not open to. majors in
emistry. ) | |

Chim 921 Elementary Physical Chemistry Laboratory (1)
/ Experiments illustrating and applying the principles developed

Chm 340:a. and Dp Physical Chemistry (3,3) - :

The mathematical description of siiyelpcheratenl, systems and
their interpretation in terms of thermodynamics, kinetic theory, and
reaction. rates. Atomic and molecular structure from the viewpoint of
elementary statistical mechanics and wave mechanics, with special

*) eens

in the topics listed in Chm 320 to the study of chemical systems. _
One laboratory period each week: Corequisite: Chin 320, a

Perens |
i) ee te

a
1 5
——k

en,
amen ey

Va 430 Instrumental Analysis a7’ C3 ) L Lito} fo | to \

tons of instrumental
Poory, rdwefance

Theoretical principles and chemical appli

methods of sos maggoabe emissioi.
methods, polayog *C,! eli¥Smatography,
£ i oct OAS W inathé visible, UV and IR
SP iod P4i0 lebtratory periods each week.
m 340 b (may be taken as corequisite) or

/Chm 431 Intermediate Physical Chemistry (3)

Fundamental principles and their applications from the areas of

eriods each week. Prerequisite: Chm 340 b.

ft keke kinetics, and molecular structure. Three class

Chm 436 Advanced Organic Chemistry (3)

Organic chemistry at an advanced level, including introduction of
theoretical background and application in synthesis. Three class
eriods each week. Prerequisite: Chm 340 b (may be taken as a
corequisite) or Chm 218 b.

Chm 440 a and b Comprehensive Biochemistry (3, 3)

Chemical characteristics of living matter, amino acids, polypep-
tides; and proteins, supramolecular assembly and membrane struc-
tures enzyme mechanisms and kinetics; bioenergetics and the
chgmistry of metabolism; electron transport and other transports
agross membranes; biosynthesis, storage and expression of genetic

ifformation. Prerequisite: Chm 216 b, Chm 231 b or consent of
nstructor.

| f ~
£

ae eee Bled

Chm 497 Independent Study (3)
Individual, independent study of selected topics. Open to majors

in chemistry with the consent of the department chairman. May
be repeated for credit.

CHINESE STUDIES PROGRAM
(Interdisciplinary)

FACULTY: L. Chung, H, Sun, R. Walton
ASSOCIATE FACULTY: K. Chen, L. Fields, R. Garvin,
T. King, N. Lin, C. Sun

The interdisciplinary major with a concentration in Chi-
nese Studies offers to students basic instruction in Chinese
language, literature, and historical background and also
provides for various courses of independent study in Hu-
manities (art and literature) and Social Sciences (econom-
ics, sociology, geography, anthropology, and law). Students
interested in this major should apply through Professor
Ling Chung, Director of the Chinese Studies Program.

Chm 407 Atmospheric Chemistry (4) |
Same as Atm 407; offered jointly with the Department of Atmo-

fheric Science.
/om 408 Survey of Polymer Chemistry (3)

A shared resource course with Chm 508, Structure, synthesis and
morphology of polymers; polymerization reactions; molecular weight
determination; introduction to thermal, mechanical and electrical
properties; design of polymers, graft and copolymers; processing
and selected applications including adhesion and coatings and films.
‘hree class meetings each week. Prerequisite: Chm 340 b or consent
of the instructor...

Chm 410 Mathematical Methods in Theoretical Chemistry (3) ~- ~

_An introductory survey of the mathematical techniques that form
the tools of the modern worker in theoretical chemistry with appro-
priate applications. Topics include vector and matrix algebra,
curvilinear coordigate systems, complex function theory and contour
integrals. Fourier analysis, solutions of ordinary and partial differ-
ential equations, eigen value problems and the theory of groups.
Three class periods each week. Prerequisite: Mat 212; Chm 340 a;
or consent of the instructor.

‘Chm 412 Organic Synthesis (4)

Synthesis of organic compounds and the separation and identifi-
cation of products via fractional distillation and gas, paper, column,
and thin layer chromatography. The inherent limitations of these
separation methods and the type of systems to which each method
would be applicable will be examined. Two class periods, two labo-

ratory periods each week. Prerequisite: Chm 217 b or Chm 218 b.

\/ Chm 420 tnorganic Chemistry (3)
Eixtranuclear atomic structure and its relation to the properties of
the elements and their compounds, description of the chemical bond
with application to inorganic compounds, transition metal complexes.

taken as corequisite).

Chm 421 Inorganic Chemistry Laboratory (2)

Inorganic synthesis and. application of physical measurements to
the study of inorganic compounds, Two laboratory periods each
week, Prerequisite: Chm 420 (may be taken as corequisite).

Chm 423 Introduction to Organic Research (3)

The theory and practice of modern methods: of handling, separa-
tion and characterization of compounds. One class period, two
laboratory periods each week. Prerequisite: Chm 340 b (may be

taken as corequisite) or Chm 218 b.
Chm 426 Undergraduate Research in Chemistry (3)

S/U, may be repeated for a maximum of five sessions, Laboratory

; and conference hours to be arranged. Prerequisite: consent of the
department chairman.

if Three class periods each week. Prerequisite: Chm 340 b (may be
J

Original experimental and theoretical research problems. Graded

itt oe eee |
i J Chi 210 Survey of Classical Chinese Literature | (3)
An introduction to the major works of Chinese literature from
% The Book of Songs (1100-600 B.C.) to poetry and the short stories
| of the T’ang Dynasty (618-904 A.D.). Readings in English transla-
‘tion. Knowledge of Chinese not required. Reading of short selections

| from the original texts for. those who have taken Chinese 201 and. |
. vk above. Prerequisite: None. ;

| : Chi 21t Survey of Classical Chinese Literature Ht (3).
y An introduction to the major works of Chinese literature from the
| Sung (960-1279) to the Ch’ing Dynasty (1644-1911), Readings
. in English translation of the poems, plays, and. fiction of this period.
i Knowledge of Chinese not required, Reading of short selections from

the original texts for those who have taken Chinese 201 and above.
Prerequisite: none.

; Jeni 220 chinese Calligraphy (3)

Practical instruction in the artistic design and the different styles

of written Chinese with the traditional implements: brush, rice
paper, ink plate, and ink bar. No knowledge of the language is

| fa

| { Chi 300 aandb Intermediate Conversation and Composition (3, 3)
. Intensive oral practice; building of vocabulary; systematic gram-
mar review. Short stories by modern Chinese writers, a survey of
Chinese history, introduction to newspaper Chinese. Conducted in
Chinese, Three classes, one laboratory each week. Prerequisite: Chi

oe
eee

_Chi 300 a isa prerequisite-for-Ghi-300-b;

; Chi 410 Readings in Vernacular Literature (3)
| Extensive readings in Chinese vernacular literature in classical
and modern periods. Lecture and discussion conducted in Chinese.
of Chi 421 Documentary Chinese (3).

| Annotated selections from newspapers, magazines, and other non-

literary documents, Texts largely in simplified characters now used
in People’s Republic of China.

— Chi 497 independent Study in Chinese (1-6)

| Projects in selected areas of Chinese studies, with regular progress

1 | reports. Supervised readings written in the Chinese language. May

_ be repeated once for credit when topics differ. Prerequisite: Chi 202
or the equivalent: and consent of the department.

) A student exchange program co-sponsored by State University of
| New York at Albany and Nanyang University of Singapore offers
2 students who have taken Chi 101, 102, 201, and 202 an opportunity
to spend a year (usually the junior year) at Nanyang University
furthering their knowledge of the Chinese language and pursuing

| selected area studies. Nanyang credits are duly recognized by
1 SUNYA,

Special Programs or Opportunities:

SUNYA has an exchange program with Nanyang Uni-
versity in Singapore. This program provides students with
an opportunity to study Mandarin at the Language Center
of Nanyang University. One term of intensive Mandarin
at Nanyang will substitute for two terms of Chinese lan--.
guage at SUNYA. A major of this program is encouraged
to study at Nanyang after, at least, taking Chi 101 and 102
at SUNYA.,

Mandarin Program in the Language Center_of Nanyang. _

University: intensive language courses: Mandarin 101-102;
Mandarin 201—202; Mandarin 301-302 Mandarin 401-402,

Degree Requirements for the Interdisciplinary
Major with a Concentration in Chinese Studies

B.A.: Required courses: 37 credits as follows: Chi 101
and 102; Chi 201 and 202; Chi 210; Chi 211; Chi 300 a
and b; Cwl 180; His 379 a and b; and 9 additional credits
as advised from the following: Chi 220; Chi 410; Chi

fe eee

yt wee eee ee!

421; Chi 497; Cwl 399 a, b; Eco 497; Soc 497-a,_b; Ant
A498 a, b or other advanced credits approved by the adviser.

J This is a 46 credit interdisciplinary major.

Chi101 Elementary Chinese (4)

Introduction to the national language (Kuo-Yti), The emphasis
will be on oral work including training in pronunciation (Mandarin),
drill in structure, and analysis of the differences in approach to the
expression of ideas in Chinese and English. There will also be some

_ study of a limited number of ideographs selected on the basis of
J word counts, Four classes, two laboratories each week.

Chi 102 Elementary Chinese (4)

Continuation of Chi 101. Equal emphasis will be placed on speak-
ing, reading, and writing of characters. Prerequisite: Chi 101. Four
classes, two laboratories each week.

| Chi 201 Intermediate Chinese (4)
A continuation of spoken and written Chinese at the intermediate

evel with a review of grammar; composition and conversation.
rerequisite: Chi 102,

Chi 202 Intermediate Chinese (4) |
A continuation of spoken and written Chinese at the intermediate
level; composition and conversation. Prerequisite: Chi 201.

.
|
i

OSV TIT ee Het ome

6S Sores
eS

Po ee |

LT eee

Fo a |

Ps
a)

poet

Cla 209 Roman Archaeology (3)
The ancient monuments of Rome and of other Roman and

“% truscan sites, including Pompeii and Ostia.
|

la 402 Greek Sculpture (3)

A study of selected sculptural monuments from the Archaic,
Classical, and Hellenistic eras, considered in relation to their his-
orical, intellectual, and religious context.

Cla 430 Principles and Methods of Classical Archaeology (3)

Study of the aims and procedures of archaeology. Excavation
reports from Greek and Roman sites (supplemented from the ex-
perience of staff members) will be analyzed for techniques of re-
covery, recording, and interpretation of archaeological data. Besides
such strictly archaeological techniques as stratification and pottery
‘analysis, correlation with historical evidence will also be covered.

Cla 450 Archaeology of Southern Italy and Sicily (3)
Study of Greek art and civilization in Italy and Sicily, with spe-
cial attention to both the essential Greekness and the regional

peculiarities of the western Greek cities and to relations between
Greeks and non-Greeks.

Cla 460 Greek Architecture (3)

rg The development of Greek monumental architecture from the
arliest temples through the Hellenistic Age.

des 497 Independent Study (2-4)

Seniors may offer two to four credits of independent _study—in

eo |

bn eet

Bt terion oy

place of regular course-work in Classics. Projects must be approved
by the department. May be repeated once.

Certain courses in classical archaeology may by advise-

ment be elected for credit in art history. See course offer-
ings in Art History.

Greek and Roman Civilization

Degree Requirements for the Major in
Greek and Roman Civilization

General Program

B.A.: A minimum of 36 credits to be distributed as fol-

lows:

1, Cle 133 and Cle 134, to be completed before the junior
year (6).

2. Cle 320, Cle 321, Cle 330, Cle 331 (12).

3. One course in Greek or Latin above the 100 level, as
advised (3),

4, Additional courses, as advised, in the Department of
Classics, or in other departments if the content is per-

t
|

DEPARTMENT OF CLASSICS

FACULTY: S. Barnard, M. Goggin, J. Overbeck, H. Pohl-
sander, D. Prakken, P. Wallace, L. Williams.
ADJUNCT FACULTY: V. Karageorghis (Department of
Antiquities, Nicosia, Cyprus).

Aosocky), He FACULTY: J. Gould ( (Department of Phi-

losophy), Fi-~Nexton—(School_.of Education)<B, Peabody
(Department of Comparative and World Literature)

The Department of Classics tries to make the values of
the world of ancient Greece and-Rome become alive and
meaningful for its students and thereby to enrich their
minds and lives, To this end the department offers courses
in classical archaeology, in Greek and Roman civilization,
in Greek, and in Latin. A major in Greek and Roman civili-
zation is ‘available through the general program; a major in
Greek through the gener al program and the departmental
program; and a major in Latin through the general pro-
gram, the teacher education program, and the departmen-
tal program. A limited number of courses in Modern Greek
Studies is also provided. The department is anxious to
serve not only its majors but all students in the University.

eee

{ Courses:

Special Programs or Opportunities:

The department will assist students who seek placement
in summer or academic-year programs in Greece or Italy,
The department sponsors public lectures, museum excur-
sions, and other special events. Students graduating from
the department niay enter secondary-school teaching, grad-
uate study in classics, or professional programs in law,
library science, theology, and other fields.

Classical Archaeology

No major is offered in Classical Archaeology. Students
with an interest in this field should, after consultation with
the department, choose one of the other major programs
offered by the department.

No knowledge of Greek or Latin is required for these

Cla 208 Greek Archaeology (3)

A survey of the pre-historic and historical cultures of ancient
Greece, as revealed by archaeology, from the Neolithic to the Hel-
lenistic era, with emphasis on the evolution of pottery style, paint-
ing, sculpture, and architecture.

Tew oes =v
bE ie aes |
Clic 300 The Greeks and Their Neighbors (3)

The relations of the Greeks with the Near East and with Rome.

eadings in English from the works of five Greek historians:
erodutus, Thucydides, Xenophon, Arrian, and Polybius.

Pe annie
a ree

| Cle 301 Rome and the Mediterranean World (3)

The Romans’ view of their origin and their destiny in the Medi-
. terranean World. Readings in English from the works of five
| feo historians: Livy, Sallust, Caesar, Tacitus, and Ammianus.

Cle 310 Women in Antiquity (3)

A study of the literary, historical and archaeological evidence
concerning the lives and roles of women in Greek and Roman

Y iasegtie

Cle 320 The Minoan-Mycenean Age (3)
This’ course uses all available resources of history, art and ar-

| ; chaeology, geography, and literature for an area study of the
| | Minoan-Mycenaean Age. Prerequisite: Cle 133 or Cla 208.

ft Cic 321 Fifth Century Athens (3)
This course uses all available resources of history, art and

j archaeology, geography, and literature for an area study of Fifth
| poe Athens. Prerequisite: Cle 183 or Cla 208.
|

Cic 330 Rome: From Republic to Empire (3)

— This course uses all available resources of history, art and archae-
| ology, geography, and literature for an area study of Rome in the

transition from Republic to Empire. Prerequisite Cle 134 or Cla 209.

— ee
ee Lr)

Jo hers 331 The Age of Trajan and Hadrian (3)
, This course uses all available resources of history, art and archae-
| ology, geography, and literature for an area study of the age of

Cie 403 Roman Civilization and Christianity (3)
, Roman civilization in the late empire: the relation between pagan
| and Christian culture based on a study of literary and archaeological

urces

; bi 497 Independent Study (2-4)
ti Seniors may offer two to four credits of independent study in
i

place of regular course-work in Classics. Projects must be approved
i} by the department. May be repeated once.

| Ancient Greek

Degree Requirements for the Major
in Ancient Greek

| General Program

B.A.: A minimum of 33 credits, including 24 credits in

| Greek language and literature above Clg 203 a; also Cla
| | 208, Cle 138, and Cle 134.

tinent to this major. At least two of these additional
courses must be upper division courses or courses in

Greek or Latin above the 100 level (15).
|= knowledge of Greek or Latin is required for these

courses:

Clic 105 Myths of the Greek World (3)
A survey in English of the origin and development of the major
myths of ancient Greece.

Clic 106 Religion of Ancient Greece and Rome (3)

A. study of the major religious cults,-institutions, and_practices of
Gréece and Rome from the Late Bronze Age to the age of
Ggnstantine.

O
Cle BRE 110) Roman Poets and Playwrights (3)

A study of various types of Roman poetry, including lyric, epic,
and dramatic, with consideration of their role in the development

| offthe stern Literary tradition.

885 |

i g Cic #22-(Cwl 122) Greek Epic Poetry (3) |
L,

7 pres Iliad and Odyssey and the works of Hesiod.
[ a Cle 428

eu 123) Masterpieces of Greek Tragedy and Comedy (3)
Selected plays of Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, and Aris-
.,tophanes.
, WK, Odd elove
' J Cle 133 History of Ancient Greece-{3)

2/as/ >>

The antecedents of Greek culture in the Ancient Near East, the
_ Aegean culture, the rise of Greece, the development of Athenian
f democracy, the decline of Greece, and the Macedonian conquest.

Cle 134 History of Ancient Rome (3)

Alexander the Great and the Hellenistic Age, the rise of Rome,
| the Republic and the Empire.

Clic 140 Latin Elements in English (3)
A systematic study of those elements of the Latin language that
have made it the single principal source of modern English vocabu-
f lary. Designed for students with no knowledge of Latin.

Cle 141 Greek Elements in English (3)

A systematic study of those elements of the Greek language that
have contributed to the formation of modern English vocabulary,

both general and scientific. Designed for students with no knowl-
edge of Greek.

Clé k Life (3) Ys iced al77 -
ator ge peg cal nd cultural life of
aficient Greece with emphasis on Athens affd-Spartar—- \2|77
cig 218_Roman Life (3) mene paw
tet mily.,,, aougermien gs, economy, political life, edu-

CLO W7 vooRLd CLASSIC GReece (3)

VOLO 12S" LATIN eOREEK Em als [4 BOB) Fx

CLE NG LsOELd CLASSIC Rome (3) oh

eet eee
ee

Se
meh

Sere

History, six in Archaeology, six in Greek and Roman Civili-
zation and three in Ancient Philosophy. Part II—15 credits,
These credits must be chosen from Art, Comparative Lit-
erature, English Literature, History and Philosophy. Part

fees credits of electives.

Cif 101 aandb Elementary Latin (4, 4)
Grammar, composition, conversation, and reading of Latin.
rerequisite for Cll 101 b; Cll 101 a or consent of instructor.

Cll 201 aand b_ Introduction to Latin Literature (4, 4)
Selected readings from prose authors, especially Cicero, and
from Latin poetry. Prerequisite for Cll 201 a: two years of high

school Latin or Cll 101 b. Prerequisite for Cll 201 b: Cll 201 a or
fonsent of instructor.

Cil 204 a and b _ Latin Literature (3, 3)
Cicero (selections from De Amicitia and De Senectute), Catullus

ears of high school Latin or Cll 201 b.

frost hi Horace (selected odes). Prerequisite: three or four
|

Cil 312 a and b. Prose Reading and Composition (3, 3)
Readings in Livy and other selected prose authors. Studies in
prose style and practice in prose composition. Prerequisite: Cll

ip b.
Cll 403 Ovid (3)

ws +5
pe eg

9 ee

alate Pa a |

os a

ceo

weitere ws

The Fasti,a storehouse of folk tradition, and the Metamorphoses;
Ovid’s place in the history of the Latin epic, and his influence on
subsequent European literature. Prerequisite: Cll 204 a, or Cll

a b, or. consent of instructor.

Cll 404 Great Roman Writers of Letters (3)

Selected letters of Cicero and Pliny, with a study both of their
epistolary style and of the letters as an important source for the
history of the Roman Republic and of the Empire. Prerequisite:

ia 204 a, or Cll 204 b, or consent of instructor.

Cll 405 Latin Pronunciation and Conversation (3)

Examination of the evidence for the classical pronunciation of
Latin and of the underlying theory. Practice in reading aloud Latin
prose and verse, and in the use of conversational Latin. Prerequisite:

a 204 a, or Cll 204 b, or consent of instructor.
V Cll 414 Critical Studies in Cicero and Caesar (3)

Intensive and extensive reading of selected works of Cicero and
Caesar (selections not to be limited to those usually read in the high
school), a study of the interacting forces and personalities of the

period, and an introduction to the literature on the men and their
iss Prerequisite: Cll 204 a, or Cll 204 b, or consent of instructor.

Cli 421 Roman Elegiac Poets (3)

Selections from Tibullus, Propertius, and Ovid. Prerequisite:
Cll 312 a, or Cll 312 b, or consent of instructor.

Departmental Program V

B.A.: Part I—65—-79 credits including 30—44 credits in
Greek, at least 12 of which must be at the 300 level or
above, 14 credits in Latin, six credits in Ancient History,
six in Archaeology, six in Greek and Roman Civilization,
and three in Ancient Philosophy. Part II—15 credits. These
credits have to be chosen from Art, Comparative Litera-

electives.

- History, and Philosophy. Part: IIJ—26-40 credits of

Clg 101 aandb Elementary Greek (4, 4)

Introduction to Attic Greek Composition, and reading of selected —

assages of Attic prose. Prerequisite for Clg 101 b: Clg 101 a or
consent of instructor.

Clg 203 aand b_ Introduction to Greek Literature (4, 4)
Review of grammar and selected readings from Greek prose and

203 a: Clg 101 b. Prerequisite for Clg 203 b: Clg 203 a or con-
sent of instructor.

; poetry, especially Plato and Attic tragedy. Prerequisite for Clg

Ig 402 Greek Philosophy (3)
Reading and discussion of texts selected from the writings of the
fate Greek philosophers. Prerequisite: Clg 203 b.

(es 410 The Homeric Epics (3)
Reading of selections from the Iliad and the Odyssey; discussion

composition. Prerequisite: Clg 203 b.

| of Homeric style, language, and meter and of the technique of oral

Cll 497 Independent Study (2-4)
Seniors may offer two to four credits of independent study in

place of regular course work in classics. Projects must be approved
by the department. May be repeated once.

Latin

Degree Requirements for the Majorx in Latin
General Program and Teacher Education Program

B.A.: A minimum of 33 credits, 24 credits in Latin above
Cll 201 a, including Cll 204 a, b, Cll 312 a, b, and addi-
tional credits on the 400-500 level as advised, Also Cla
209, Cle 133, and Cle 134.

Departmental Program

B.A.: Part I—65-79 credits, including 30-44 credits in
Latin, at least 12 of which must be at the 300 level or
above, 14 credits in Greek, six credits in Ancient Greek

88
OA AT,
ee

tural areas such as medieval studies, literature and the arts,
oral literature and folklore, and the study of individual
genres.

The department offers the B.A. and M.A. degrees in
comparative literature. Students in the comparative litera-
ture programs receive preparation appropriate for the
teaching of literature at various levels, advanced graduate
studies in comparative literature or foreign or classical

languages, and careers in such fields as publishing, jour-
nalism, and creative writing.

Special Programs or Opportunities

Students in comparative literature are urged to partici-
pate in study programs offered by SUNY abroad (e.g. at
Wiirzburg, Nice, Neufchatel, Madrid, etc.). These foreign
study programs help students achieve proficiency in for-
eign languages, and provide experience in a variety of ap-
proaches useful for research and teaching literary studies.

Degree Requirements for the Major
in Comparative Literature*

General Program

B.A.: The B.A. in Comparative Literature is a Depart-
mental Program, and students seeking this degree should
consult with the department as early as possible. The pro-
gram requirements are:

(A) 30 credits in literature courses distributed as fol-
lows: 18-24 credits in literature courses in one language
(English or foreign); 6-12 credits in literature courses in
a second language (English or foreign),

(B) 24 credits in comparative literature courses desig-
nated by the department, including a minimum of 12
credits at the 300 level or above. This group should in-
clude Cwl 335a or Cwl 335b and one course each in a
period, a genre, and a special topic.

In addition, the student is required to write a senior
essay in conjunction with independent study (up to nine
credits in Cwl 399 may be taken) and to pass a senior oral
evaluation based on major works of world literature se-
lected from the departmental list of required readings.

*No degree will be awarded in this program after August, 1978.

J, |
Cll 445 Roman Comedy (3) / :

Reading and analysis of selected comedies of Plautus and Terence.
Study of the development of Roman drama and theatrical presenta- _
fe Prerequisite: Cll 312 a, or Cll 312 b, or consent of instructor.

Cll 481 Latin Pastoral Poetry (3)
| Readings in the Eclogues and Georgics of Vergil. Prerequisite:
: ll 312 a, or Cll 312 b, or consent of instructor.

Cll 497 Independent Study (2—4) |

Seniors may offer two to four credits of independent study in
place of regular course-work in classics. Projects must be approved
by the department. May be repeated once. “+

Modern Greek Studies

No major is offered in Modern Greek Studies. Courses >
in this field do not apply to the requirements in other pro-
grams offered by the department. Related courses are
| available from the Department of History and the Program
| in Art History. r
Cmg 10iaandb Elementary Modern Greek (4, 4)
Introduction to Modern Greek. Oral practice, composition, and

reading of selected works in poetry and prose. Prerequisite for ot
Cmg 101b: Cmg 101a or consent of instructor. i

Cmg 205 Modern Greek Civilization (3) Ls

Cmg 206 The Land of Greece (3)

A survey of the physical environment of Greece and its effects
upon Greek history and civilization. Both ancient and modern
sources will be consulted. ,

i |
f Cmg 497 Independent Study (2-4) |
Independent study in Modern Greek language and _ literature.

Projects must be approved by the department. May be repeated |
once. |

DEPARTMENT OF COMPARATIVE AND
! WORLD LITERATURE {

FACULTY: F., Beharriell L, Chung, R. Greene, H. Mac- |
lean, C, Odenkirchen, B. Peabody, H. Sun, J. Szoverffy

The principal objective of the department is to provide
a broad intellectual basis for the study of literature. To
meet this objective, the program requires the study of lit-
erature in at least two languages, Students may further .- .
specialize in a number of interdisciplinary and intercul- |

A study of the cultural background of the modern Greek nation ————
| from the Byzantine period to the present. ff
|
f

Speers er = ie

'
ee

| = See eI.
ot

ee ee

it
I

i |

' ings and_lectures—in—English;

——————
—— amarenee- 80" 5

Cwl 116 Italian Literature in English Translation (3)

Select authors and works from the 12th to the 20th century
chosen for their intrinsic literary stature (such as Dante and
Leopardi) or for their influence in European culture (e.g., Castig-
lione, Machiavelli and Vico) or for their importance in the develop-
ment of literary types and genres (e.g., the Renaissance epic, the

pastoral), Closed to majors in Italian, or to those with credit in
Ita 311 a and b.

Cwl 120 French Literature in English Translation (3)

Major literary and intellectual movements as well as individual
authors and works, chosen not only for their intrinsic worth, but also
for their relationship to other European literature. Closed to majors
in French, or those with credit in Fre 261 and 262.

Cwl 145 Primitive Literature (3)

A study designed to trace the development of primitive literature
from its ritualistic beginnings to its present state of acculturation,
and to investigate the origins and methods of primitive expression,
as well as the human needs which inspired them.

Cwl 180 Modern Chinese Literature in Translation (3)

Modern literary movements under the Wester impact, with em-
phasis on the developments. since 1919.

Cwl 201 Oriental Literature: Epic and Fiction (3)

Critical readings of major epics and novels from the traditional
cultures: of Middle, South, Southeast, and Far Eastern Asia. Read-

Cwl 202 Oriental Literature: Drama and Lyric Poetry (3)

Critical readings of the major works of drama and lyric poetry
from the traditional cultures of Middle, South, Southeast, and Far
Hastern Asia. Readings and lectures in English.

Cwil 204 Literature and Mysticism (3)

Mystical and spiritual qualities of literature, surveyed in various
literary periods. Many of the great literary works demand a deeper
interpretation of their underlying esoteric meanings. Leading writers
and great books of world literature are included in this survey.

Cwl 210 Masterworks of Western Literature: Homer to Dante (3)
Readings and discussions of selected works by major Western
authors from Homer to Dante. A variety of approaches furnish a

broad base for the understanding of literature and for the develop-
ment of analytical skills.

Cwl 211 Masterworks of Western Literature:
Boccaccio to Rousseau (3)
Readings and discussions of selected works by major Western
authors from Boccaccio through Rousseau. A variety of approaches

furnish a broad base for the understanding of literature and for
the development of analytical skills.

Cwl 221 The Poem: Texts and Comparative Interpretations (3)
Poems from French, German, Italian, Portuguese and Spanish
literatures with original texts, translations, and interpretations by

The student is encouraged to specialize in areas such as
| medieval studies, folklore, and narrative, or to develop
some other specialization with the help of the chairman and
adviser. The 66 elective credits should be used to supple-
ment the student’s specialization with courses taken in
other literary areas, Music, Art, Archaeology, Sociology,
Rhetoric, Psychology, and so forth.

Students must have or acquire knowledge of at least one
foreign language, either studied in high school or on the
college level. While knowledge of another foreign lan-
guage is not mandatory, the department urges-students_ _'
to develop at least reading knowledge in a second foreign
' language.

Teacher Education Program

Students in the Department of Comparative and World
| Literature may qualify for provisional certification to teach
? in a specific, certifiable area (e.g. a foreign language, En-
glish, ete.) by completing the academic and professional
requirements of the registered programs. Details of these
programs are available from the chairman of the depart-
ment or from the Admissions Office, School of Education.

coy

ee ewe

r.
Sri —.orrererel

ema ee cre md

1 pee wetome mie mht

id -*
’
sere cee

Cwl 103 Masterworks of Western Literature: T9th and 20th
‘ Centuries (3) 4

Readings and discussions of selected works by major Western
authors of the last two centuries. A variety of approaches furnish
a broad base for the understanding of literature and for the devel-
opment of analytical skills.

Cwl 108 Foundations of Western Literature (3) q

Tradition and rationalism: a study of the fusion of cultural tra- |
ditions in the eastern Mediterranean and the institutionalization of
these in writing that produced the literary models for later Euro-
pean culture.

Cwl 112 Hispanic Literature in English Translation (3)

A selection of authors and works from the early Middle Ages to
the present, representative of Spanish values and thought and im-
portant for their place in World Literature, Not open to majors in

F eevee. oe =

orntinate tans cma:

Cwl 114 German Literature in English Translation (3)

Major literary and intellectual movements, as well as individual
works and authors of Germany, Austria, and Switzerland. Closed
to majors in German.

Cwl 115 Modern Dutch and Flemish Literature in Translation (3)

Reading and discussion of representative works by the major
| Dutch and Flemish authors of the 20th century with special empha-
| sis on the ““Magical-Realism” movement.

Spanish or to those with credit in Spn 211 a and b. i

Pe |
PN

el ee ee

— —

Sienna

Meer et we ek:

epee

a2 oe

* ae te

ne te ewan,

Cwl 369 Faust: 1587 to Present (3)

The Faust tradition in Westem Culture as seen in various literary
texts from the Faust Chapbook of 1587 up to our own day.

Cwl 377 European Romanticism (3) |

An introduction to the romantic movement, particularly in Ger-
many, England, and France, Discussions of representative themes
and ideas as well as of literary forms and techniques.

Cwl 380 Flaubert to Musil: Topics in the Modern Continental
Novel (3)

The changing role of the narrator, shifts in the portrayal of the

external world, the primacy of the conscious versus the unconscious,
memory, and perception.

Cwl 388 (Fre 388) Don Juan Tradition (3)
A comparative study of the Don Juan theme in the literature of

the West from the 17th century to the present. (Tirso de Molina,
Moliére, Byron, Lenau, Shaw, Anouilh, Duncan, Etc.)

Cwl 391 The Relation of Modern Literature and Politics (3)
Novel, drama, and lyrics as means of political propaganda and
expression of political realities, Satire and pamphlet literature, The

reflection of great events of history in novels of the 19th and 20th
centuries, A

Cwl 399 aandb Directed Study (2-8), (2-8)

Supervised readings, assignments and_ discussions arran: ac-
cording to the specific program and interests of the student. Admis-
sion by consent of departmental chairman only.

Cwl 408 Patterns of Graeco-Roman Influence in Western
Europe (3)
Study of the ways in which the great works of the classical tra-

dition affected Western European culture from later medieval times
until the twentieth century.

Cwl 411 Arthurian Legend in Medieval Europe (3)
A comparative study of Arthurian Romances in France, Germany
and English. Social and political conditions reflected in the ro-

mances, their stylistic analysis, development of themes. Arthurian
legend and the Holy Grail.

Cwl 471 Dante’s Divine Comedy (3)

The summit and the summing up ‘of the literature and thought of
an age. A detailed reading of the poem (in the original or in trans-
lation), with comparative studies of sources and influences. For

majors in literature; others with consent of instructor. Not open
to students with credit in Ita 421,

Cwl 491 Literature and Culture in 17th Century Europe (3)
Readings from French, German, Italian, and Spanish Literature.

Mutual relationship between literature, music, art and social forms.

Genre and poetic forms. Investigation of the traditional terms

“Baroque,” “Classicism,” etc, Readings in the original or in
translations,

specialists in each field, coordinated with explanations of the tech-
nical aspects of the prosodies peculiar to the various literatures. No
knowledge of the foreign languages will be necessary for full par-
ticipation in the class. ;

Cwl 281 Love Poetry of the Western World 3)
A compatative study of love poetry from Roman times through

the Middle Ages and modem. literatures. Themes, poetic forms,

social background, ideals, and tones in various stages, Selected
texts and interpretations.

-Gwi 333 a and b Special Topics (3, 3)

Important intellectual expressions of man’s ‘spiritual, social and
aesthetic life from ancient times to the present. Students may elect
one or two. sessions,

Cwl 334 The Modern Theoldgical Novel (3)

The development of the theological novel, its background and
chief representatives, e.g., Dostoyevsky, Bloy, Bernanos, Mauriac,
Lefort, Greene, Waugh, Lagerkvist, West, and Andres.

Cwl 335 a_ History of Criticism I (3)

Important theories and their application from Plato and Aristotle
through the 18th century,

Cwl 335 b History of Criticism I! (3)

‘oy

3
wots err t4

ere ee ote

it Srinceesas

Important _theories_of the—19th—and—20th—eenturies—and—their

application.

Cwl 341 Genre (3)
A consideration of the criteria for and the realization of the
literary type.

Cwl 342 Literary Expression (3)
A consideration of the problems and achievements of the writer
in the oreative act.

Cwl 343 Creation and Environment (3)
A consideration of the effects of convention and circumstance
upon literary production.

Cwl 344 Symbolism (3)

A consideration of language characteristics and the relationship
of those to literary form.

Gwi 345 aandb Myth (3, 3)

A consideration of mythic structure and its use and modification
in various areas, and ages, from antiquity to modern Hteratures.

Cwl 355 Literature Within-the Arts (3) :
An introduction to the comparative study of literature, music, and
the visual, arts: what art forms express and how they express it.

Settee B

oe eT

einen ©

tet mei
————
~— >

Cwl 493 Liftérature d’Expression Frangalse en Afrique et aux
Antilles (3)
Same as French 493,

Cwl 496 Modern Drama to 1940 (3)
Same as Eng 496.

Cwl 498 Modern Drama after 1940 (3)
| | Same as Eng 498.

DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE /

(| FACULTY: D. N. Arden, Y, Breitbart, E. Chylinski, F.
| | Federighi, S. Finkelstein, S$. Greenfield, E. Lamagna, F. D.
Lewis, S. Lomonaco, Jr., E. D. Reilly, Jr., D. Rosenkrantz,

W. Schilling, L. Sheppard

| | The objective of the department is to provide students

with a broad in-depth training in computer science which

__ will enable them to be responsive to the rapid changes

_ taking place in the field. Our goal is to provide students

with the necessary know-how to pursue careers in indus-
try, research, and teaching,

| To accomplish its objectives, the department offers a

a
ws ome

program leading to an M.S. degree in computer science

and_a full sequence-of_undergraduate-coursesleading—to-a
second field.
i Undergraduate courses in Computer Science are offered
| | either as free electives or as the basis for a second field
sequence of particular interest to students majoring in
_ mathematics, natural science, business, economics, psy-
| | chology, and, depending on career objectives, the humani-
_ ties. Second field sequences in Computer. Science should
include at least Csi 201, 202, 301, 404, or 410. The remain-
ing four credits may include either additional Computer
Science courses or certain related courses in mathematics,
logic, and linguistics offered by other departments,
_ In addition to electing the second field sequence in
| | Computer Science, students preparing for graduate work
| | ft ‘this field are encouraged to acquire a background in

ee
i
eer ene

athematics through differential equations and linear al-
ebra,

| | Csi 201 Introduction to Computer Science (4)

: The use of the computer as a device for manipulating symbols
and the processing of information; the concept of an algorithm and

1 + the use of flow charts to depict algorithms; programming in a

| | machine-independent higher level procedure oriented language such

as BASIC and FORTRAN.
97

Courses Offered by Cooperating Departments

Cwl 110 Roman Poets and Playwrights (3)
Same as Cle 110.

Cwl 122 Greek Poetry from Homer to Aeschylus (3)
Same as Cle 122,

Cwl 123 Greek Poetry from Sophocles to the Hellenistic Age (3)
Same as Cle 123,

Cwl 171 Modern Yiddish Literature in Translation (3)
Same as Jst 171.

Cwl 172 Modern Hebrew Literature in Translation (3)
Same ‘as Jst 172,

Cwl 220 Theatre History (3)
Same as Thr 220,

Cwl 314a and b Literature of the Spanish Portuguese Jews and
New Christians (3)
Same as Jst 314 a and b.

Cwl 330 Historic Theories of Dramatic Production (3)
Same as Thr 330,

Cwl 331 History of Dramatic Criticism (3)
Same as Thr 331.

tote wees ees.

ET err

Cwl 356 Tolstoy (3)
Same as Rus 356.

Cwl 357 Dostoevsky (3)
Same as Rus 357.

Cwl 362 Contemporary Rhetorical Theory (3)
Same as Reo 362,

Cwl 370 Talmudic and Medieval Jewish Literature in
Translation (3)
Same as Jst 370.

Cwl 373 The Literature of the Holocaust in Translation (3)
Same as Jst 373.

Cwl 375 Israeli Literature in English Translation (3)
Same as Jst 375,

Cwi 376 Study of Individual Jewish Writer (3)
Same as Jst 376.

Cwl 390 Old Testament Narratives (3)
Same as Eng 390.

Cwl 492 Forms of Modern Fiction (3)
Same as Eng 492,

1 ee oe ge
~~

—

A a SS Fe
“esi 405, Introduction to Informati 1and Coding Theory (3) a

Coding remove redundancy or to reduce errors due to noise

and the funda limitations to these processes described by
Shannon's #t6rems for mmetric channel. An intro-
oo oO error-correcting codes, Prerequisité?~Mat-862—~or_equiva-

odelling-and*Simulation=(3)"”

At introduction to the constructionsSimulation and validation of
models use of discrete gnd*continuous simulation. languages.

Informal and“faymal desoxifition of models, Model simplification
procedures. Fosmal™fiition and criteria for model validity. Good-
ness of fit and statistic

l=ualidation. Basic structure of simulators

Csi 410 Logic Design of Microcomputers (3)

Fundamentals of logic design with application to the design of
basic computer elements such as counters, adders, decoders. Design
of instruction timing sequences, register structure, addressing tech-
niques, interrupts and interfaces between asynchronously operating
components. Application to micro-computer design. Prerequisites:

Csi 202, Csi 302, LE fo. oS.
accra eepner ea a LAD onnen < 3: So :
Csi 411 Computer Systems Laboratory (3)

Introduction to the EXEC 8 operating system on the UNIVAC

1110, Implementation of operating system functions on the INTER-
DATA. Offered in cooperation with the Computing Center,
Prerequisite: Csi 202, Csi 410 or Csi 404,

VEE

‘)

eS ot

a eal
ane ee

eee ee

eae renee gy

‘Csi 497 independent Study in Computer Sclence (1-3)

Independent study in computer science under the guidance of
faculty computer users. Students registered for this course should
expect to spend approximately ten hours per week solving real com-
puter related problems. May be repeated for credit with the consent
-/ the department chairman. Prerequisite: departmental approval.

Csi 498 Directed Activity in Computing (1-3)
For students interested in on-site participation in computer

operations, serving as a consultant for beginning programmers or

préblem solving in a practical environment. Prerequisite: depart-
dental approval.

Csi 499 Senior Seminar in Computer Science (3)

Selection of an appropriate topic and preparation of a research or
survey paper under the direction of a specific computer science

faculty member. Prerequisites: Csi 303 and consent of department
chairman,

Csi 0 CB)
[ See CancaMacl Si Hot obore
Fr deca plum]

Csi 202 Programming Techniques (4)

Continuation of Csi 201. Topics covered include number systems,
dvanced features of FORTRAN, machine language programming,
magnetic tape applications, sorting algorithms, and the use of an

! incremental plotting device. Prerequisite: Csi 201.

Csi 203 Data Processing Principles Jay cs)
Programming in Common Business Oriented Language—
(COBOL). File maintenance techniques. Use of Report Generators.

- §
74

Source data automation. Information retrieval methods. es Ta a

systems analysis. PEE RQUAAES * CSi 201 Quad Msi DAS

Csi 301 Data Structures (3) -
Internal representation in computer memory of various data
structures such as lists, trees, graphs and arrays. Files and inverted

/files. Programming in an advanced. procedure oriented language
‘ such as ALGOL or PL/1. Prerequisite: Csi 201.

Csi 302 Discrete Structures (3)

Lattices and Boolean Algebra. Set theory, propositional logic,
switching algebra. Deterministic and non-deterministic finite state
‘machines and procedures. Regular grammars and languages. Graphs,
trees and associated at al ps wms. Prerequisite: Csi 884. 20} Cuccl
Mat (2.

Csi 303 computers roninming Languages (3)

The description and application of such higher-level program-
ming languages as ALGOL, SNOBOL, and APL. BackusNaur form.
Reverse Polish notation. Decision Tables, Programs which eulpmats

“202.

Csi 401 Numerical Methods for Digital Computers (3)

The study of practical methods for the numerical solution of a |

variety of problems on a digital computer. Topics covered will in-
clude roots of equations, numerical interpolation, numerical integra-
tion and differentiation; the evaluation of mathematical functions,
least squares. curve fitting; the solution of simultaneous linear equa-
tions, matrix inversion and linear programming. Prerequisites:
Csi 301 or Csi 580, Mat 213,

Csi 403 Algorithms and Data Structures (3)

Description of common data structures such as lists, push-down
stores, queues, trees, and graphs. Definition of algorithm efficiency
and efficient algorithms for integer and polynomial arithmetic, sort-
ing, set manipulation, shortest paths, pattern matching ean, Fouri
ransforms. Prerequisite: Csi B01 and 202. « AY

Csi 404 Computer Organization (3)

The architecture of several conventional computing systems com-
pared and contrasted with such non-Von Neumann organizations
as the Solomon and Holland machines, Other topics include data
elena associative memories, and machine features which
facilitate moult i-programming and time-sharing. Prerequisites: Csi 202

and Csi SO: 202. feeepstt

it
oe 3

+——_———the—manipulation_of algebraic_formulas,_Prerequisites:_Csi e ( j *
BO a)

| rye een ee |

i
H
3

Snes. eg rate
_— ae

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

, FACULTY: J. Auclair, M. Bers, K. Chen, J. Gelfand,
| J. Harford, H. Horowitz, R. Kalish, K. Lahiri, P. Lee,
| B, Lentz, T. Mirer, S, Ogura, T. Osborne, D. Reeb, E.

Renshaw, L. Salkever, J. Slocum, J. Uppal, A. Virmani,

F, Walker, G. Yohe, K. Yun.

; The major in economics may be useful as training for
employment in business or government agencies or as prep-
; aration for further study at the graduate level. It is also
acceptable as undergraduate background for study in pro-
‘+ fessional schools of law, accounting, business administra-
tion, public administration, social work and others. . ~

Degree Requirements for the Major in Economics

7 General Program

B.A.: Eco 100 a and b, 320, or equivalent, 300, 301;
‘ and 18 additional credits in economics at the 300 level or
above,

B.S.: Eco 100 a and b, 320, or equivalent, 300, 301;
nd 18 additional credits in economics at the 300 level

wf van on price analysis and the international economy,
Ec

0181 Economics of Consumption (3) Nertup Chame, ea

aa,

= ee onsumption. Discussion of current issu
i

a
'

oy above.

'sfEco 100 a andb Principles of Economics |, II (3, 3)

An analysis of the function of an economic system in organizing
economic behavior and of the role of the niarket and monetary and
fiscal policy in determining levels of economic activity. The em-
' phasis in the first session will be on the institutional structure and
the determinants of levels of economic activity, and in the second

An--eeconomit’ “anal ysis “OF CONST “aiid thie moti AHS
of consumers. The impae custom, fashion, wealth, inco and

affect thé consumers 20s tt ere mescimeenearsasenen

rage ff ese TT

| YEco 182 Economics and Environmental Policy (3)
The economics of public policies which aim at environmental
“control, Emphasis is given to the concepts of resource scarcity, ex-

ternalities, and common property, as they affect the role of the
; public sector in environmental control.

Direct and? ingct SO Wyaiitientas
types. Problems iuyvaly, fianaletoanel emvpmpnnsarie a cay avaical capital,
aeettTOns, reconstruction, financing, { inflation, and resource reallo-
ontion are discussed.

101

J PROGRAM IN COMPUTER SCIENCE
AND APPLIED MATHEMATICS

(Interdisciplinary)

FACULTY: Combined faculties of the Departments of
Mathematics and Computer Science.

The interdisciplinary major-second field with a concen-
tration in Computer Science and Applied Mathematics
offers students the opportunity to achieve the following
academic objectives:

1) the achievement of a mathematical background
adequate for a large proportion of the computer ap-
plications in the engineering and business worlds; 2)
the development of technical proficiency in computer
programming and a basic understanding of computer
structure; and 3) an introduction to those theories
which have been spawned by the modern develop-
ment of computation and communication,

This program addresses itself to the rapid past and pros-
pective growth of computer software and application, and
to the present and future need for persons capable of crea-
tive contributions to this area.

ee nee

Degree Requirements for the Interdisciplinary
Major—Second Field with a Concentration
in Computer Science and Applied Mathematics

General Program

B.A.: (60 credits minimum, of which at least 12 credits
must be in courses at the 300 level or above) including
A Mat 112, 113, 212, 213, 362, 380; A Csi 201, 202, 301,
302, 303, 401, 403, 405, 404 or 410; B Msi 434, 435. Total
credit requirements: 60 credits. See the appropriate sec-
tions of this bulletin for descriptions of the mathematics
and computer science courses.

100

ta” ay Prone ae

r]
eres ae |
Qh) eae

yin ring

Ses 350 Money and Banking (3)
The principles of money, of commercial banking, and of central

banking, an elementary consideration of issues of monetary policy.

peas Eco 100 a and b.
E

co 355 Public Finance (3)

An introduction to the financial problems of governments: public
; expenditures, basic kinds of taxes and tax systems, grants-in-aid,
| public borrowing, debt management, and fiscal policy. Prerequisites:

f- 100 a and b.
Eco 360 International Economic Relations (3)

The development of international trade and trade theory since
mercantilism; international financial institutions, the. foreign ex-
change market, and the problems of international balance of pay-

va and international liquidity. Prerequisites: Eco 100 a and b.
E

Eco 370 Economics of Labor (3)

| A study of wage theories and wage structures; wage-cost-price

interaction; and wage, supply and employment relationships.
Prerequisites: Eco 100. a and b. —

3
i

Eco 410 Mathematics for Economists (3)

Techniques of differentiation, integration, differential equations,
difference equations and linear algebra as used in economic
analysis. (shared resource course with Eco 510)

~ereN

Stee 420 Applied Econometrics (3)

em a er

ee
—

Application of regression to a problem chosen by the student.
Some general discussion of data sources, the derivation of index
, numbers and other problems which might be encountered in esti-

: ating economic relations, Emphasis will be on class presentation
y P* analysis of student projects.

Eco 440 Comparative Economic Systems (3)

An analysis of capitalism, the mixed economy, socialism, and
communism: the ways in which economic activities are organized;
the role of monetary and financial institutions; the organization of
industry; of agriculture, and of trade, the allocation of resources
among competing goals; consumer sovereignty compared with eco-
' nomic planning. Prerequisite: Eco 100 a and b.

| Analysis of demand, supply Jngikchiscemnrermmeine ccrerin

| Eco 443 Comparative Labor Relations (3)

An examination of labor relations in various other countries as
part of their political and economic systems; and a comparison with
the collective bargaining process in the United States, The emphasis
- ids on labor relations laws as they have developed within different
political systems and the process of dispute settlement.

103

Eca,442.. e Economics of Agriculture (3) Rel fe
Application” OrPecenemicakpciples to problems Of vacates mis

AIM prgduchsamsP Olle s adopted and alternative “SPpreadhg: p Waa?
olution of agricultural problems. Prerequisites: Eco 100 a anc

Eco 184 Contemporary Economic Issues (3)
An introductory discussion of selected economic issues of current
importance. The course will focus on different economic problems
/ each session. May be repeated for credit when topics differ.

Eco 300 Intermediate Theory I: Microeconomics (3)

~: ~Latroducti price “theory, “distribution theory” and market

ecwilstruc uré analysis\ Rel EO ecopomit theary—in-~production
a GC eonsumption-deeision;’ Prerequisites T"Evo~t 00~a-and-be

Eco 301 Intermediate Theory IJ: Macroeconomics (3)
rinteoduetion “tithe” measurement of national imcome and the

co 312 Development of the American Economy (3)

A study of American economic institutions from the early 19th
century to the present. Statistical methods and both micro and
macro theoretical constructs will be employed. Prerequisites:

Economic change in modern European societies. A comparative
study of the growth of various European countries emphasizing the
institutions associated with development: population, technology,
i capital formation, output, resources, and income distribution.
Prerequisites: Eco 100 a and b.

eat supply; Shamik soa of
ns roductiohs--efinloy “and prices.

——

—

— ee

Eco 314 Ideas of the Great Economists (3)
The evolution of modern economics with emphasis on the contri-
butions of such writers as Smith, Malthus, Ricardo, Mill, Marx,
. Marshall and Keynes, The turn of events that motivated the~ con-
; struction of the main body of economic knowledge is also examined.

y Eco 100 a and b.
Eco 313 Development of the European Economy (3)

Eco 320 Economic Statistics (3)

Basic statistics and their use in economic analysis will be covered.
Topics will be organization and presentation of data, frequency
distributions, dispersion and probability distributions applied to
economics. Will also cover testing of hypothesis and simple linear

J regression. Prerequisites: Eco 100 a and b.

Eco 330 Economics of Development (3)
An introduction to the analysis of economic growth and develop-
ment. Historical, descriptive and analytical approaches to the prob-

jlems of fostering economic growth. Consideration of alternative
theories of the causes and problems of underdevelopment.
Prerequisites: Eco 100 a and b.

Eco 341 (Soc 371) Urban Economics (3)

An analysis of the city-metropolis and the economic forces which
condition its growth, pattern and allocation of scarce resources. The
public sector, especially the local governments is examined in its
role of solving the problems of inadequate jobs, housing, education
and other services. Prere ig Eco 100 a and b.

: theory 8)

Mette al?

smamtenh Gee Tattiarl ty

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH Va

FACULTY: T. Adams, J. Barlow, J. Berman, R, Bosco,
D. Byrd, L. Chaber, S. Cohen, F. Colby, A. Collins, D.
Daims, R. Donovan, D. Dorfman, W. Dumbleton, J. Fet-
terley, J. Gerber, R. Goldman, M. E. Grenander, G. Hast-
ings, E. Jennings, M. Kaufman, W, Knotts, C. Koban, E.
LeComte, T, Littlefield, H. Maclean, E. Mirabelli, R. Nel-
son, D. Odell, D, Redding, J. Reilly, L. Ries, R. Robbins,
D. Rosenblum, B. Rotundo, W. Rowley, M. Rozett, J.
Schulz, F. Silva, E. Sklepowich, T. Smith, H, Staley, D.
Stauffer, M. Taylor, R. Thorstensen, P. Westbrook.

The curriculum of the English Department is designed
to aid students to write effectively, to read critically, and

to acquire a sense of the development of literature written
in English and of its relation to society.

Degree Requirements for the Major in English

General Program

B.A.: 36 credits in English-with-atleast-6-eredits_atthe
300 level and at least 6 credits at the 400 level.

Other than the distribution pattern described above,
there are no specific requirements. Working closely with
a departmental adviser, the student byilds his or her own
coherent sequence of courses. In order that students be
able to make as informed a selection as possible amongst
the upper level courses, they should use their basic courses
to explore genres and subject matter unfamiliar to them.

Teacher Education Program
B.A.: 36 credits in English with at least 6 credits at the

'~ 300 level and at least 6 credits at the 400 level.

Students preparing for provisional certification will be

’ required to include courses in their program (one from

group A, one from group B, one from group C, one from
group D) which will develop their ability (A) to think and
write critically (B) to read and discuss literature critically
and analytically (C) to understand the relationships be-
tween literature and society and (D) to understand the
history and/or structure of the language.

105

{. Z 446 International Finance (3) |

The foreign exchange market and balance of international pay-
ments are described and analyzed. Emphasis is on real and mone-
tary theories of balance of payments adjustments, and policies.
Problems and proposals for reform of the international monetary

systems are examined and evaluated. (shared resource course with
Eco 546) Prerequisites: Eco 100 a and b.

Eco 450 Industrial Organization and Public Control of Industry (3)
Relationship between market structure, behavior of the firm,
/ economic performance and analysis of U.S. antitrust activities. _
(shared resource course with Eco 570) Prerequisite: Eco 300 a

Ma YS2 Economies oF Laww(3) 12/77 een Af2U77
Eco 456 State and Local Finance (3)
Problems of financing state and local government within the con- - .
straints of a federal system, Relevance and limits of fiscal theory for
state and local government tax and expenditure policy.
fans: Eco 100 a and b.

Y62 DISTRIBUTION OF Incomes wealth th 12/7

| Eco 470 History of the Labor Movement (3)
\ Emergence of trade unions as allocative factors in the economic
systems of the United States and Western Europe. Development of
trade unions and the general labor movement as part of the insti-
tutional structure. ; |
:

a9/ 17

Oe 8 SES F
Dea eet eel = saeet D

* 4 (
: ‘7 Eco 480— Economic-Fluctuations;_Forecasting-and-Stabilization-(3)——___—
| An examination of the theory and measurement of economic _,
| fluctuations, methods of forecasting the level of economic activity;
and the fiscal, monetary and other public policies used to achieve;
economic stabilization are explored. Prerequisite: Eco 301 or ‘*

Eco 350.

~—— —— —

j 4

| Eco 481 Environmental Economics (3) wf

Environmental pollution, social costs, population control, zoning,

economics of public health, conservation of endangered species,

natural wonders and artifacts, natural resource exhaustion, and end

of progress hypothesis are examined and analyzed. (shared resource
course with Eco 581) Prerequisites: Eco 100 a and b.

Eco 489 Senior Seminar in Contemporary Economic Theory (3) } |

Selected topics in current economic theory. The course is de- |: |
signed to give the advanced undergraduate major an opportunity for
intensive study in selected topics in contemporary economic theory.
The course may be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of : |

* . 4

/ instructor, ij

; 5

Eco 497 Independent Study and Research (2-6) :
Guided study in selected topics. Prerequisite: 12 credits in |
economics, Can be repeated for credit to total of six credits. 7

104 esearch
ECO 449 Senior Honors Sn

iZ ’

‘Eng 210 The English Literary Tradition |: From the Anglo-Saxon
Period through Milton (3)

A study of representative works by major authors from the Anglo-
| Saxon Period through Milton, with some attention to necessary
| historical, biographical, and intellectual background information.

The survey will provide a sense of continuity and change in the
_., English Hterary tradition, offering broad overviews of extended
| Pf |
i

cHronological periods.

ere
7

Eng 211 The English Literary Tradition Il: From the Restoration
through the Modern Period (3)
; A study of representative works by major authors from the
: Restoration through the Modern Period, with some attention to
' necessary historical, biographical, and intellectual background infor-
mation. The survey will provide a sense of continuity and change in
' the English literary tradition, offering broad overviews of extended
| f ronological periods.
I

Eng 213 Popular Literature (3)

Individual sections may concentrate on some aspect of popular
culture such as the best seller, song lyrics, detective or mystery
| fiction, science fiction, books that have had a vogue on the campus
| during the last twenty years. The student may take the course twice

or credit, provided the particular subject matter is not repeated.

eee ey

wa
et

| | Eng 283 Contemporary American Novel (3)
Forms, techniques, and themes of the novel, as exemplified by a

puimber_of Amexicannevels-of the past 25 years.

Eng 294 Modern Drama From tbsen (3)

| A survey of modern European and American drama from na-
{ turalistic theatre to. post-modern theatre. Dramatists to include
Ibsen, Chekhov, Shaw, O’Neill, Brecht, Ionesco, Williams, Pinter,

. others.
ng 300 Critical Writing (3)

Exercises in literary description and literary criticism; attention
to various critical tasks and approaches and to the major resources

| nny bibliography.

| Eng 301 Expository Writing (3)
Designed to develop precise and accurate non-technical writing
in such fields as history, the social and natural sciences, philosophy,
i ' and the fine arts. Students will choose their own subjects for several
| | essays or one long essay. Admission is limited, and those seeking to
| enréIl should submit a sample of their work to the instructor.
Py€requisite: consent of the instructor.

| Eng 302 Creative Writing (3)

A course designed for the student who wishes to experiment with
‘ a variety of kinds of writing, but who has little experience. Admis-
sion is limited, and those seeking to enroll should submit a sample
; | of their work to the instructor. Prerequisite: consent of the

tent ae

instructor,

107

as
———_— =,

Courses which will satisfy these requirements:

: A. English 100; 200; 300; 301; 302; 303; 304; 305; 308
| B. English 112; 113; 165; 201; 203; 283; 310; 315; 373;
b 465; 485; 492; 496; 498 _

C. English 202; 213; 389; 395; 396; 420; 430; 431; 440;

441; 450; 451; 460; 470; 471; 472; 480; 482

: D. English 206; 207; 306; 307 (or satisfactory completion
| | of a competency examination).

Eng 100 English Composition (3)
, Practice in writing papers of exposition, argument, and criticism,
| J including at least one requiring research. oS

Eng 112 Reading Prose Fiction (3)
An introduction to the analysis of plot, character, theme, point of
{

view, and other matters dealing with the form and substance of the
novel and short story.

ng 113 Reading Drama (3)
An introduction to.the analysis of dramatic structure: plot, char-
a

|
|

cter, theme, setting, the function of dialogue.

Eng 165 Reading Poetry (3)
An introduction to the analysis of idea, feeling, and verse form

f poetry.
~/ Eng 200 Intermediate Writing (3)

ert ‘ 2.2
oe er

-Practice_in_the-development-and-improvement of written expres-

sion of complex ideas. Prerequisite: Eng 100 or departmental
permission.

_ Eng 201 Introduction to Literary Criticism (3)
| An introduction to the theory and practice of literary criticism.

Eng 202 Introduction to Literary History (3)
An introduction to, the critical problems arising from the rela-
tionships between literary works and their eras.

Eng 203 Introduction to the Analysis of Ideas, Values, and Issues
in Literature (3)
An introduction to working with serious intellectual constructs
and setting up methods for the analysis of ideas, values, and issues.

i Eng 206 (Lin 206/Ant 220) Introduction to Linguistics (3)

; The principles of modern structural, transformational, and _ his-
orical linguistics, with English as the prime example in the exami-
nation of language and languages.

Eng 207 The Language of Literature (3)

An introductory course in the application of linguistic and
rhetorical principles to the reading of literary texts. Figures of
speech, metaphors, symbols, rhetorical structures, and neologisms
will be examined as they occur in poetry, fiction and drama.

106
rd

oe oe
*

i.
i i

Eng 337 Shakespeare through 1603 (3) J

The development of Shakespeare’s dramatic art, with emphasis
on action and character in the plays. Primarily the comedies and

| piscees through 1608,
VE

ng 338 Shakespeare after 1603 (3)
The development of Shakespeare’s dramatic art, with emphasis
on action and character in the plays. Primarily the mature tragedies,

with particular emphasis on Hamlet; attention also to the “dark
medies” and the dramatic romances.

Eng 339 Undergraduate Shakespeare Seminar (4)

selected problems in Shakespeare study for the student who al-
ready has some background in reading and interpreting Shake-
_speste Prerequisite: Eng 337 or 338 or consent of the instructor.

Eng 361 Study of a British Author (3)

The major British author to be studied in depth will vary from
section to section and from session to session, The student may take

Je course twice for credit, provided a different author is treated.

Eng 373. The American Novel (3)
A survey of the American novel in the nineteenth and twentieth

igins in romance.

_pricis paying attention to the development of the novel from its
r

Eng 377 The American Drama (3)

A survey of the American _drama—dealing_briefly—with—specinrens

ok reo

Aap”

eh OT
gt meg

of nineteenth century drama and more fully with the birth of the
art theatre movement in America, its first notable playwright,
O’Neill, and representative plays and movements in later American

pe
‘Eng 381 Study of an American Author (3)

The major American author to be studied in depth will vary from
section to section and from session to session. The student may take
the course twice for credit, provided a different author is treated.

ng 389 Study of an Afro-American Author (3)
The major Afro-American writer to be studied in depth will vary
from section to section and from session to session. The student may
take the course twice for credit, provided a different author is

trdated,

tng 390 (Cw! 390) Old Testament Narratives (3)
The early books of the Old Testament in the King James trans-
lation considered as history, literature, and folk art. Evolution of the
material and the text. Parallel developments in Greek and other

: omnes

Eng 391 Biography and Autobiography (3)

Biography and autobiography are studied in terms of various and
changing views of what constitutes a life story (inner life versus
public life; objective factual biography versus subjective interpre-
tive biography).

109

a er ee
| Se 303 Writing Prose Fiction (3)

: Advanced workshop in writing fiction. Admission is limited, and
hose seeking to enroll should submit a sample of their work to the
nstructor. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.

Eng 304 Writing Drama (3)

: Advanced workshop in writing for the stage. Admission is limited,
nd those seeking to enroll should submit a sample of their work
to the instructor. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.

Eng 305 Writing Poetry (3)

Advanced workshop in writing poetry. Admission is limited, and
those seeking to enroll should submit a sample of their work to the
instructor. Prerequisite:- consent of the instructor, - - - - - -

/ Eng 306 History of the English Language (3)

; The growth and development of English phonology, morphology,
syntax, and semantics. The history of dialects and standards.
Prerequisite: Eng (Lin) 206 or consent of the imstructor.

| Eng 307 Approaches to English Grammar (3)

Traditional analysis of the sentence structure, word-building and
accidence of English, reinterpreted and revised according to the
most current linguistic insights.

Eng 308 Journalistic Writing (3)

Expository writing that might be done for newspaper, magazine,
radio or television journalism. Designed for students in the journa-
lism second field but open to others. Admission is limited, and those
seeking—to—enroll_should_submit—a—sample—of—_theix_work—to—_the

ee Prerequisite; consent of the instructor.

ng 310 The British Novel (3)

Origins and development of the British novel, illustrated by
careful attention to selected texts. Major authors include Fielding,
Austen, Dickens, Eliot, Hardy, and Conrad.

Eng 315 Poetry in English (3)

A study of forms in poetry in English (the ballad, the sonnet, the
satire, the heroic epistle, the ode, the dramatic monologue) and
| modes (meditative, lyrical, satiric, didactic, heroic) as they typify
| fe authors and their eras.

Eng 317 Survey of English Drama (3)

A chronological study of representative plays from the Middle
Ages through the 19th century.

Eng 325 Chaucer (3)
The medieval background and the ideas and narrative art in the
pe major works. No previous knowledge of Middle English is

frequired.,

“ Eng 336 Milton (3)

Milton’s poetry and selected prose, in the intellectual context of
his time. Major emphasis on Paradise Lost, with appropriately de-
tailed study of Comus, Lycidas, Samson Agonistes, and significant
minor poems. In prose, emphasis on Of Education and Areopagitica.

108

i /

Eng 440 English Literature of the Restoration and Early
18th Century (3)
| Major poetry and prose of the Neoclassical period, with some
| attention to the social and philosophical background. This course
| will trace the development of such literary modes as satire, journa-
lism, the personal diary, and didactic literature in Dryden, Pope,
‘wift, Addison, Defoe, Pepys, Bunyan, and others.
: “Eng 441 ‘English Literature of the Late 18th Century (3)
' Poetry and prose of the. age of sensibility from ballads to biog-
raphy; selected works of Johnson, Boswell, Gray, Burns and others
| ‘ with attention to Gothicism, sentimentalism, the cult of the pic-

+ ge Faget Se
'

eg em ws =

| turesque and sublime, the rebirth of lyricism, and other new trends
-_ J the period.

Eng 450 Literature of the Romantic Period (3)
The expression of the Romantic sensibility as found in the prose
and poetry of Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Shelley, Keats, and

. J? hers.

Eng 451 Literature of the Victorian Period (3)
¢ Major mid-Victorian poets and essayists, the Pre-Raphaelites, and
| va Decadents, as they reflect the thought of the age.

Eng 460 Regional Studies in British Literature (3)
The regional literature of Great Britain and the literature written
{ jn English in the Commonwealth and in the former British posses-
| gions. Individual sections may deal with the literature _of Ireland,

ne eer
os re

1
Meee

ag ET

——Scotland, Wales, Canada, Australia, New Zealand, India or various

_ eguntries in Africa. The student may take the course twice for
felt provided the particular subject matter is not repeated.

Ti San ie
-

' Eng 465 Modern British Poetry (3)
Selected poets from Hardy to the present with emphasis on

; _ppalysis,
li | |
i + Eng 470 American Literature to 1815 (3)

s Major poetry and prose of the Colonial and Federal periods,

ith some attention to the theological and political backgrounds.

Eng 471 American Literature 1815-1865 (3)
The works of the major writers of the Romantic period. Particular

gftention to the Transcendental writers and to the development of
«the American novel.

Eng 472 American Literature 1865-1920 (3)
The major writings of the great period of American realism.

Special attention to the development of critical theory, the local
por writers, the development of the psychological novel.
' Eng 480 Regional Studies in American Literature (3)
‘ The literature of various regions of the North American continent.

Individual sections may deal with the literature of New England,
1 ' of the American South, of the Old West, of Canada. The student
i; , may take the course twice for credit, provided the particular subject
: matter is not repeated. |

—

a a a |

11}

St eh

Eng 392 Comparative Study of Authors (3)

A course treating a pairing of authors whose works mutually
illuminate each other in their treatment of themes, declaration of «= ‘
artistic purpose, search for a viable style or relation to their eras.
The authors studied may vary from section to section and from
session to session. The student may take the course twice for credit,
rovided a different pairing is studied.

ng 395 The Presentation of Social Roles in Literature (3)

A study of the ways in which factors such as age, sex, class, and
race are presented in literature. Individual sections may deal with
the presentation of women, of the Black, of the Indian, of the aged, +
f the young, of the alien. The student may take the course twice __ |
for credit, provided the particular subject matter is not repeated.

Eng 396 The Literature of a Subculiure (3)

A course which presents writing by members of a given subcul-
ture. Individual sections may concentrate on the literature written | |
by Afro-Americans, Jews, Catholics, etc. The student may take the .

ourse twice for credit, provided the particular subject matter is
not repeated, ‘
: !

Eng 397 Independent Study and Research In English (1-4) 1:
Prerequisite: Consent of a faculty member in the department and

of the appropriate departmental committee. May be taken for a,

maximum of 8 credits. it

Eng 399 Junior Seminar in English (6)

A seminar for qualified juniors: the topic for eok-tern-will-vary —
and be announced in advance. The student may take the course :
twice for credit, provided the particular subject matter is not
repeated, Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.

Se oer ee

Eng 407 Old English (4) ;

Introductory course in the language of England before 1066 A.D.
Students will learn to pronounce and translate selections in prose ° ;
and verse illustrating the origins of English language, literature, and * ‘
society. (Shared Resource Course)

—

hrs a

Eng 420 Literature of the Middle Ages (3) if
Selections from Old and Middle English literature (650- — |
1500 A.D.), exclusive of Chaucer, with attention to the evolution ~* °
of styles and themes under the influences of Catholicism and the
heroic and erotic literature of France. Earlier works read in = {
translation. | ot

Eng 430 Literature of the Early Renaissance (3)
Selections from Tudor and Stuart literature, emphasizing non-
ramatic poetry and with attention to prose romance, the early
ovel, and the essay. : |

Eng 431 Literature of the Later Renaissance (3)
Selections from seventeenth century literature exclusive of Milton,
major attention to the metaphysical and Cavalier traditions of

poetry, and the essay.
110
Pog ae ere Y

ee SP
1

RSE ee ke coe

een

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES PROGRAM
(Interdisciplinary)
FACULTY: L. Ismay, R. Nichols, J. Scott;

“ ASSOCIATED FACULTY: E. Allen, J. Bulloff, E. Cowley,
J. Heikoff, R. Kalish, D. McNaught, B. Marsh, E, Renshaw,
R. Rienow, R. Stewart.

The program offers a faculty-initiated interdisciplinary
major with a concentration in Environmental Studies (B.A.
or B,S, Degree). A description of the Interdisciplinary Ma-
jor is given on page 33, Students are prepared for graduate
level environmental study and careers in government, in-
dustry and environmental consulting firms. Opportunities |
are provided for internships and field work in the local
community. A multidisciplinary approach to the study of
human-environmental relationships is emphasized via spe-
cial projects, independent study and regular courses on a
variety of environmental subjects. Because an integrated
approach is stressed, students are advised to take a strong

second field or preferably a second major in one of the
regular disciplines.

! oy se VE EL B dae ‘Geology (3) (3) yo 2| L ¥/ oe

*No degree will be awarded in this program after AUB sty.978. \>

Degree Requirements for the Interdisciplinary
Major with a Concentration
in Environmental Studies *

A minimum of 36 credits consisting of Env 151 or 230, !
either Env 150 or 201, plus Env 250 a and b, 350 a and b,
plus 18 credits of Envy courses as advised, 12 of which must
be at the 300 level or above, Certain supportive courses in
related depar tments or ane may apply toward_a Seeerk Bre? vey

program in in special cases. ELE YE ESTIRE P

ment, geologic spacts of healtirand isease, waste disposal,
mineral resources-—arid ¢ sation, Zand’ reclamation, land-use
planningaad. geologic hazards. Threé

anniny; ards. gach week. Spring-~S
session, ce lee o
Env150-(Rat. 150) Man agar His Environment (3)

An eed foes i environmental isstes, the social vy
a~and aggravate them, the limits |

ion to and survey of the geologic aspects.of-the~e fon- y

lysis of

113
| .

/ Eng 485 Modern American Poetry (3)

Eng 482 American Literature after 1920 (3) S/ ;

Selections from American literature from 1920 to the present, _
emphasizing the novel. Major attention to contemporary trends in — |
the redefinition of substance and style in both the novel and poetry.

Selected poets from Robinson to the present with emphasis on
analysis.

Eng 490 Mythic Concepts in Literature (3)

Individual sections may concentrate on a particular mythic con-
cept which recurs in literature such as the hero, the monster, the
f ideal society, the fantastic voyage. The student may take the course
’ twice for credit, provided a different mythic concept is studied.

Eng 491 The Mythic Thought of an Era (3)
Individual sections may concentrate on the direction taken by the
mythic imagination in a given place and time, such as the Arthurian =;

sance. The student may take the course twice for credit, provided

| legend in medieval literature, the Ovidian tradition in the Renais- — ;
| the particular subject matter is not repeated.

lL:
Eng 492 Forms of Modern Fiction (3) ;
A study of the major narrative modes in modern British, Ameri- #
can, and Continental fiction. Special attention to the problem of
how experimentation in fictional forms relates. to the social realities ~ ;
and philosophical attitudes of the contemporary world. The theories <~ |
and techniques of such writers as James, Chekhov, Joyce, Proust, : |

Mann, Gide, Hesse, Beckett, Faulkner, and Robbe-Grillet,

Eng 495 Interdisciplinary Seminar (6) ‘

A seminar for qualified juniors and seniors which will deal with :
relations between the study of English and American literature and ; |
a related discipline. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor.

Eng 496 (Cwl 496) Modern Drama Before 1940 (3) -
The growth of Naturalism, Realism, and Expressionism. Selected ‘ i
European and American playwrights from Ibsen to O’Neill. 4

Eng 498 (Cwl 498) Modern Drama After 1940 (3)

The conflicting movements and ideas molding world drama in the;
post-war world. Study of selected plays of Sartre, Brecht, Ionesco, © |
and others. _

Eng 499 Senior Seminar In English (6)

A seminar for qualified seniors; the topic for each session will
vary and be announced in advance, The student may take the
course twice for credit, provided the particular subject matter is
not repeated. Prerequisite: consent of the instructor,

iA i. Be aiehie sae
gael ret}

112
Env 300 db (Paf 300 a and b) Environmental Writing-and
iia a Legislative Research (3, 3)

j Intensive analysis, résearch, and writing-6n current environ-

| mental topics. First session déyeted to learning basics of en-

vironmental library researeh’’and reportiiigy.including investigatory
reseasch_aud-coveFage of administrative ond “tou proceedings,

,: Secofid session will focus upon New York State legislatur PROPOSAL 5
on environmental issues, Writing aimed toward publication in“en:
vironmental periodicals. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Ee rony Chemistry in Society. (3) . i
; * Designed té"provide..the non-science student..with-att appreciation yy]
| f of chemistry as a_human-pursiit aid th ature of chemical knowl- Wy |
dh edge and how it is obtained. (Closed to stitien with credit in Vo

Chm 121 b or Chm 131 b.) Three class meetings each Week...

j Eny.302 (Phy 302) Urban and Environmental Physics Problems (3)

| A physicist yproach to the collection, evaluations and inter- {
tb pretation of data and“vpinigns on selected _uxba and environmental
problems. Topics will include ses Hiansportation systems, com- Md |

’ parison of various energy” sources such as™nuclear and fossil fuel, \

and eff é utilization of natural resources. Thre ertods

each week, May be taken either session. This course will be SAY
graded, Prerequisite: Algebra.

} i Env 303 "Enviro ental Information (3) _——
| Environmental into ion and literature, Statistical~analysis and
{i __written_presentation—of—envirémental data, Decision models and
envi Yi al"auality assurance. Prep atin of | public service, .
legislative position, or technical papers. PrerequiSites~cgonsent of the YD

instructor. —
Env 34Q_Environmental Law (3)
I

_—— a

Envaa0 _ introduction to Environmental Aijalysis

Elemén principles and laboratory techn “tox $detkction
and analysis of air a Ries 2 aes Sourgess-sink distribu-
tion of major pollutants and oer air and water. Intro- x
duction to methods of reeyeltiig wastes and méthods. environ- \\y)"
mental protectio PES lectures and one Saber oak took H

Preroquisite:-Giim 121 a and b, plus Phy 124 and 125. 0
to Env-350-a-and-b.... Environmental Study Projent 3,3) |
Performance of a year-Jon. mrojeot=stlted fo the student s needs ail

. or goals, Prexeguisité or corequisite: two sessions 6 Bnv.250 a and |
| ; b7Fall and Spring sessions. Y .
" So Biny. 352 (Art 352) The Environment.as. Art (3) -

,
The understanding of art as environment as_ ell-as-ehivironment

} as art; the artist and his rel&tion=d ciety; a continuing analysis of ,,, |
, what is and what_could-bé. The idea of a ade_for posterity; the Ns

i question of xeeyCling and re-use of art.
_ a 115

— ———
'
gect es

and prospects of collective action and alternatives from which we
must choose environmental policy. Live lectures plus TV presenta- ;
tions and critique twice a week, Discusston sessions once a week. 4 © |

oe
= mate
a

; Env 151 Human Environments and Natural | Systems”(3) fm
} An introdtiétierto-the.study..ofniifi’s relation to the ScrheneN
*

Three class perigds--eatht week: Several.field trips required.

Fal
| Env 182 (Eco 182) Economics and Environmental Policy-(3) ~~ b
The +e mics of public policies which“aim at environmental Y!
f control. Emphasis“ is“given,.ig~the concepts of resource scarcity, it
ai Naggtenee WS eis ct property y~as~they__affect. the role of the gf {| .

pubjic-sect6r in environmental control. nee y oof

|: '
|
1
1:
i
|
|

Env 201 Environmental Technics (3) ”
Soeial,-.enyixonmental, economic, and politicalgoals and conse-
quences of the generat ud_ytilization of science and technology.
Environmental and.soctal technolovy~foxrclosing the gap between ‘:
physieal-tééhnology and human etogvess, Pivee—alaes periods each

week. i ee
Env 202 (Bio 202) Ecology (3) :
mabe getion to the study of organisms, populations; and com-
munities mYelatian, to their ee geen ourse stresses an Hg
integrated approach to Haeughs ob bio gical organization, Topics i}
considered include: the njch t, species diversity, nutrient q) :

4 cycling, energy flow pula i , . iological
| shythins, ander physiological mechanism™ influenced by the
erfvirOhment. Prerequisite: Bio 101. Students are en O

ed t
register for Bio 203 concurrently. Three class periods cach adee
May be taken either session.

en
Ore oor

Sie De aaron aad

2 Rere STe

An introditction.tg the Se ei ee be of environmental law vr
and the functioning.ofthe=American legal system in the environ- \ !

__mental-lawtontext. Basic alomenie Be tskent, Souionnantal law
will be presented. \)
a

Eny.230 (Bio 230) People and Resources in Ecological -
cccannnersaroectv (3) a
Introduction to ecosystems. ile maaan Bh distribution of wi |

natural communities. The stydy-ofer an as a global population and
Z oe es Or resource exploitation..A historical perspec- tf
tive i ;

Env.210 Introduction to Environmental Law | (3) ae |

€Gsource-oriented behavior. Does not yield ¢ oward th
major in biological sciences. Three class periods each wee

| Env 2b0-a.and b Environmental Forum (3, 3) eee |
: A study of éfivironmental issues which, a crewdéd and industrial-

ized society must face, Leatmnessly_specalist in a variety of en-

vironmental fete wit large and smallgr discussion. Individual
and—ffoup projects on environmental problems. Prerequisite:
consent of instructor. oe

114

ae a ee

»
Wi ieee ieee x

see heading “International Study.” The use of the foreign
language and the exchange of ideas are fostered through
language dormitories, language clubs, colloquia, a lecture
series, and other department activities,

Degree Requirements for the Major in French

The major in French offers four concentrations, All stu-
dents must take a minimum of 35 credits including Fre

230 or Fre 240, Fre 241, Fre 340 a and Fre 306, Students

must also take additional courses according to the require-
ments of their concentration.

Concentration in Literature:

Fre 361, Fre 362, plus 15 credits in literature, language
or civilization, including a minimum of six credits of litera-
ture courses numbered above 400.

Concentration in Language and Linguistics:
Fre 361, Fre 362, plus 15 credits in literature, language,

linguistics or civilization, including a minimum-of-six- ered-———+

its of language courses numbered above 400,

Concentration in Teacher Education:

Hither Fre 361, Fre 362, or 363 (choice of one) 340 b
(340 b may be replaced by a course in French applied lin-
guistics); Fre 355 a; Lin 206; nine additional credits in
literature, language or civilization, including a minimum
of six credits of courses numbered above 400.

This program also requires 21 credits in education
courses, of which three credits must be in Teaching Meth-
ods for Languages (E Flt 401) and nine credits in Student
Teaching (E Fre 490).

Concentration in Civilization:

a, Core courses of 11 credits

b. One of the following: Fre 361 or Fre 362 or Fre 363
for (3)

c. Fre 355 a (3)
Fre 355 b (8)
Fre 405 (3)

117

§
4
4

ye ae ee alae a=

Wareeenecite.

Env 307 Indonendon ay (1-4)
An independent stitdy~course with variable, credit. Contingent

upon consent of instructor willing-tesupetvise the study,
: o¢ , sabranenn eee ‘ iain
Prerequisite;.consent'Of program director, i ee \
eee TT aa A,

Env 402 Environmental Impact (3)
Environmental impact statements as one fox technology

~assgesment, Intended to prepare studentst6 contribute to some

&, tH « . .
Pré¥équisite: consent of instructor.

~T See Eco 464.

portion 6 an-environmental impact statement. Techniques such as
forecasting, systems _andinfdrmation..theory as aids for govern

Env 405 Local Environmental Protection and Coordination-(3) - -
Methods and practices of environmental control,-plainning, and
operations at municipal level, Emphasis is on-work of local environ-

nsent-ofinstructor.

mental conséivation.commissions and-cOtinty environmental manage-

ment councils, as ofgal-1EH~Ho ment agencies. However,

course content will-bé of interest and bené@fit—foy all citizen con-

servationiste-aiid those working in area of environmental. affairs,
q

Env 450 a and b Advanced Environmental Study Project (3, 3)
Performance. of a year-long project-leadifig to a senior thesis on
an environmental théife.rc

rerequisite: Env 350 a and b. .
nv 464-(Ecé 464) Environmental Econo fos.(2) 0) |

Sg ree et =

“I

mental plannipgesPrerequisite: Env 3808, Efiv--310, Env 330, or
c

-
KY {
4

ar ee
|

Cate ri oN

Ot te ey

et er

DEPARTMENT OF FRENCH

FACULTY: D. Alexander, II; C. Colman; G. Gouraige;

R. Greene; D, Levy; M. B. Marvin; F. Moore; C. Oden-

kirchen; H. Ortali; R. Ortali; J. Richtman; H. Salomon;
G. Santoni; J. Savitt.

The objective of the department is to provide students
with a broad, general linguistic, literary and cultural back-
ground in French and to prepare students for teaching,
graduate work, and for a diversity of other fields which
require a broad background in French. The department
expects its students to become highly proficient in under-
standing, speaking, reading and writing French,

To accomplish its objectives, the department offers full
programs leading to the B.A., M.A., and Ph.D. in French
and, in cooperation with the Department of Hispanic and
Italian Studies, a Ph.D, in Romance Languages,

Special Programs or Opportunities

A year abroad program was initiated at the University
of Nice in September, 1968. For more detailed information

116

ee area

—_e |

Be
(a a

° ne ne:

Mrs te nee wit
> |
{ ¢
4 :

7
i}

J 5 J

Fre 120 Intensive Elementary French (8) |
A one term course covering the contents of 120 a and b. Meets
10 hours per week. Additional use of laboratory recommended.

rerequisites: for beginners: none; for students with high school
rench: placement.

Fre 130 aand b_ Intermediate French (4, 3)

Extensive practice of basic grammatical structures and vocabu-
lary building through directed conversations, readings, and compo-
sitions. 130 a meets four hours per week. 130 b meets three hours

er week, Prerequisites: for 180 a: 120 b or 120 ¢ or placement;
f° 1380 b: 130 a or placement.

‘Fre 130 c Intensive Intermediate French (7)

A one term course covering the contents of 130 a and b. Meets
eight hours per week. Additional use of laboratory recommended.
rerequisites: Fre 120 b or 120 c or placement.

Fre 218 French Culture in English (3)

Historical background of modern France. Close analysis of a
selected number of national issues, politics, administration, media
(T.V., radio and press), education, arts, leisure, etc. This course

wil not be used to fulfill the requirements of the major in French.

‘Fre 230 Grammar and Composition (3)
Review of the main grammatical structures and training in idio-
matic usage through written exercises and compositions. Not open

to students who have completed former Fre 240 a. Prerequisites:
Kre 130. b or Fre 130 cor placement,

re 240 Reading and Composition (3)
Reading and discussion of modem French texts. Training in
idiomatic usage through written exercises And compositions drawn

from the readings. Prerequisite: Fre 130 b or Fre 130 e or
placement,

J Fre 241 Introduction to Literary Analysis (3)
Presentation of the terminology of literary analysis and various
methodological approaches based on selected masterworks of prose
J and poetry. Prerequisite: Fre 230 or Fre 240 or placement.

Fre 250 Conversation (2)

A course stressing oral skills. Training in idiomatic usage through

irected discussions based on modern French texts. Prerequisite:
re 130 b or Fre 130 c or placement.

Fre 306 French Phonetics (2)

Practical introduction to the phonology of standard French Drill
in conversational speech, including French speech sounds and in-
tonation; analysis of sound production; phonetic transcription of

spoken French. Extensive use. is made of the language laboratory.
Prerequisite: Fre 230 or Fre 240.

119

= ech ee x

d. Three (3) additional credits in French in courses num-
bered at the 400 level

e. Plus six additional credits in the French Department or
in other departments (History, Anthropology, etc.) sub-
ject to prior approval by the student’s French Depart-
ment advisor

f, Total—35 credits

Honors Program

application submitted to the chairman of the Department
of French by April of the student’s sophomore year and
subsequent approval of the student’s candidacy by the de-
partmental Honors Committee. The program requires: 35
| credits above Fre 130 b (or Fre 130 c), including Fre 230
| or Fre 240, Fre 241, Fre 361 and 362, Fre 340 a, Fre 306,
Fre 387 a and b, Fre 487 and at least three credits in lit-
i erature courses numbered 400 or above.

Other Degree Requirements
AJl-students—(whether_incoming—high-school-students-or

B.A.: Admission to the Honors Program is by letter of —

—

transfer students) wishing to enter elementary or interme-
diate language courses must take the placement examina-
tion administered by the department. Previous experience
of the department has indicated that students with one
year high school French will usually be placed in Fre 120 a,
or 120 b; two years in Fre 130 a; three years in Fre 130 b;
four years in Fre 230 or Fre 240; more than four years in
Fre 340 a.

Language majors must take, in their junior year, the pro-
ficiency examination in French administered by the French

| Department.

; “J Fre 10aandb French for Reading Knowledge (0)
Grammar, vocabulary; general and special readings. Designed
{= graduate students preparing for the French reading knowledge

examination. Prerequisites: for Fre 10b: Fre 10 a or placement.

Fre 120 aandb Elementary French (4, 4)

French as a spoken and written language. Extensive oral practice
of the basic grammatical structures. Meets five times per week,
Prerequisites: 120 a: for beginners, none; for students with high
school French: placement; 120 b: 120 a or placement.

118

Norn ee eee st

doe al hn —

Law een nD

aces

geo ene
Fre 318 Modern French Theater in English (3)

Reading and analysis of representative French dramatists from
Jarry to the present, especially Claudel, Giraudoux, Cocteau,
Anouilh, Sartre, Ionesco, Becket and Genet. In addition, attention |

vill be given to outstanding directors of the 20th century, Course !

ay not be used to fulfill the requirements of the major in French, a

' Fre 328 Modern French Novel in English (3)

Representative novelists of major French literary movements of
the 20th century. Includes Proust, Gide, Camus, Sartre, Malraux,
and Robbe-Grillet. This course may not 2 aria to mn the re-
arey of the wae in French.

fee a0 B38 fhe ule, Coys Bud. oCee, fs PAS tion-(3, yay 2)

Study of gray hard digms, And vopabulesy emphasizing complex
structures and éxpressive-word“ehdicé. Prerequisite: ter-340—a;

at Fre 230 or Fre 240 or placementg for-340-br-Fre—6-4.0—~-aor-places

! a; Bre BHO b Advair ced Crm position (2) (See dheo cugoh prev) |
re S, 0 Advanced Conversation (2)

Directed and free discussions based in part on current French

publications. Meets three times a week, including one period of

i eghion laboratory work designed to improve aural comprehen- }
|

coe oe

sion. Prerequisite: Fre 250 or placement.

Fre 353 a Masterpieces of French Literature (3)

Reading and analysis of selected masterpieces of French litera-
ture from the Middle Ages to the 17th century. Readings in French;
classes, papers and examinations in English. Course may not be

: used to fulfill the requirements of the major in French, Prerequisite:
Te knowledge of French.

| fe

Fre 353 b Masterpieces of French Literature (3) { |
Reading and analysis of selected masterpieces of French litera- _
ture from the 18th to the 20th century. Readings in French; ;
classes, papers and examinations in English. Course may not be
used to fulfill the requirements of the major in French. Prerequisite: !

| Kae knowledge of French.

Co ee ey

Fre 355 a Contemporary French Society and Culture (3)

A. close analysis of the family structures, the educational system,

the social classes and the political, economic and cultural institu-
f tions of modern France. Prerequisite: Fre 240.

Fre 355b Development of French Society and Civilization (3) |
An overview of the dominant social, political, economic, and a
ultural themes as expressed in French society from the medieval -
eriod to the present. Prerequisite: Fre 240, Fre 355 a highly
‘ ecommended.

Fre 361 Survey of French Literature: Middle Ages and 7
16th Century (3) _
Presentation of the main literary currents from the epic to the
end of Renaissance Humanism. Reading and discussion of selected
texts. Prerequisite: Fre 241,

120

eee oy

Lf J

Fre 362 Survey of French Literature: 17th and 18th Century (3)
Presentation of the main literary currents from Malherbe’s time
: . to Pre-Romanticism. Reading and discussion of selected texts,

come

eeteennen omy

es Fre 241
Fre 363 Survey of French Literature: 19th and 20th Century (3)
Presentation of the main literary currents from Romanticism to

| the present. Reading and discussion of selected texts. Prerequisite:
Fre 241,

ee ee

‘re 365 Contemporary French Press (3)
A close examination of the press, through the analysis and dis-
cussion of newspapers, magazines and their ideologies. Prerequisite:

j- 230 or Fre 240.

Fre 387 a Junior Honors in French (4)
4 Study of selected major works in French literature in their en-
| tirety and with relation to the background of their authors and
| periods. Training in techniques of literary analysis, criticism, and
research by discussion, instruction in bibliographical methods, and
| the writing of regular short papers. Restricted to junior French
| majors who have been admitted to the honors program. First
pe Prerequisites: Fre 36] and Fre 362,
t
F

—t re,
Serre 8

re 387 b Junior Honors in French (4)
oy Reading program in areas of French literature. Preparation of
project for individual study. Limited to members of the French
} honors program. Grade of C or better is required for the pre-

fenton, Proved fie 387 ae oF ne Gepesiment Second =

session. Prerequisite: Fre glade a,

| fs ‘wl 388, val7? aa a re 93177

Fre 397 Independent Study in French (1-4)

Study by a student in an area of special interest not treated in
courses currently offered. Work performed under direction of a
professor chosen by the student on a topic approved by the depart-

ment. May be repeated once with approval. Prerequisite: Fre 361,
r fe 362, or Fre 363.

| i Fre 405 Civilization Research (3)
Different aspects of French culture of the seventies: French

society; politics, economy; education, religion; mass media; the arts.
| ‘- -#Prerequisites: Fre-355 a and- Fre 355-b. - >

-re 406. French Linguistics: Morphology and Syntax (3)
Survey of the structure of the French language in the light of the
| . current linguistic theory, Emphasis will be on the fields of morphol-

d syntax. Prereay isite: Lin 206, or coi (S| i
Bre 1 16 Prtultr vy So Cade 1s Oy #8)
Fre 431 batter Vai 16th and 17th Century Poetry >

Main currents with emphasis on “poétes courtois,” Villon, Marot,

‘ Ronsard, Malherbe, and La Fontaine. Prerequisite: Fre 361, Fre
| | 362, or Fre 3638.

121

/ :
4

Fre 440 Advanced Language Analysis (3) |
Syntactical analysis and intensive writing of French. Prerequisite:
re 340 a, Fre 340 b or placement,

Fre 441 Renaissance and Humanism (3)
Intellectual, religious, and literary expression of the French

Renaissance with emphasis on Rabelais, Ronsard, and Montaigne.
Prerequisite: Fre 361, Fre 362, or Fre 363,

50a” French speeclt styles (3)__ (7) _- dohoti , 12. +
Introduction to variant styles of speken FYérich;~with_emphasis
n aural comprehension. Includes-€olloquial, standard, and formal
eech; socio-linguistic a regional variations; oral literature;
opular songs. Intensivé laboratory practice. Recommended for

sesiemiplr pune 7 act" Nice-hound. students, Erexeduisite: —Fre206-~or
re 450d French Speech Styles (3) EFF é/ §

Training in conversational mastery of spoken French with em- |
phasis on various speech styles: soigné, familier, populaire, Close _
attention is paid toxthe grammatical and lexical analysis of these
styles, their cultural implications and social contexts. Prerequisite:

f Fre 350, participation in Nice program, or placement.

Vein F = e tT
ees

Fre 451 French Classicism (3)

Preglassicism and baroque. The main features of French classi-
Gism, Analysis of representative works, with emphasis on Pascal, fo.

Corneille, Racine, Moliére, and Boileau. Prerequisite: Fre 361, :
‘re 362, or Fre 363. ne

re-452—17th-and-48th-Gentury-Novel-(3)
‘| Representative works illustrating the development of the novel as

‘genre: Mme. de Lafayette, Abbé Prévost, Marivaux, Voltaire, and a {
aclos, Prerequisite: Fre 861, Fre 362, or Fre 363.

re 453 17th, 18th and 19th Century Theater (3) |
‘J Representative works of Corneille, Racine, Moliére, Marivaux, |
Beaumarchais, Hugo and Becque. Prerequisite: Fre 361, Fre 362, ;

'
Pre tr eee ereememer |

ér Fre 363.
| J Fre 461 The Age of Enlightenment (3) 7
Philosophy and “sensibilité” in the works of Montesquieu, Vol- |
tgire, Diderot, and Rousseau. Prerequisite: Fre 361, Fre 362, or :

re 363.

/ Fre 471 French Romanticism (3) 5
Literary and philosophical background of French romanticism; \

romanticism in French poetry; drama, and other literary types.
Prerequisite: Fre 361, Fre 362, or Fre 363.

=. Tat
gerry

\/Fre 472 19th Century Novel (3)
Representative works illustrate the major trends of the French
novel from Romanticism to Naturalism. Emphasis on Hugo, Balzac,

Stendhal, Flaubert, and Zola, Prerequisite: Fre 361, Fre 362, or :
Fre 363. |

122

a eee tee

poor ay

Goren erty

ee A473 19th and 20th Century Poetry

Main poetic currents from Romanticism to modem times.
Prerequisite: Fre 361, Fre 362, or Fre 368.

Fre 481 20th Century Novel (3)

The social novel; exploration of the unconscious in Proust; re-
ligious problems and conflicts in Gide, Bernanos, and Mauriac;
roman-fleuve; Sartre and existentialism; Camus and the absurd;

alraux, Prerequisite: Fre 361, Fre 362, or Fre 363.

Fre 482 20th Century Theater (3)

Symbolist influence in 20th Century theater; revival of classical
themes; existentialist drama, Prerequisite: Fre 361, Fre 362, or

/* 363.

Fre 483 Le Nouveau Théatre (3)

Reaction to the classical tradition in contemporary French
theater; the “theater of the absurd” from its earliest manifestations

vA the present. Prerequisite: Fre 361, Fre 362, or Fre 363,

Fre 487 Senior Honors in French (4)

Writing of the Senior Honors Thesis under direction of a member
of the French faculty. Limited to members of the French honors
program, Grade of C or better is required for the prerequisite unless
‘waived by the chairman of the department, Either session.
Prerequisite: Fre 387 b.

Fre 490 Seminar on the Problems of Teaching Secondary Schoo!
French (1) 7

eens

S| aad

Quarter course designed to bring to prospective high school
teachers assistance in teaching French more effectively; up-to-date
information about French culture, presentation of difficult points of
French grammar, sources for supplementary teaching material, etc.
A seminar where recent graduates as well as seasoned high school
teachers participate on a regualr basis in order to discuss their
teaching experiences. Open to students during their professional

erm or consent of instructor.

Fre 491 Littérature d’Expression Francaise (3)

General view of literature written in French by African, Cana-
dian, Caribbean, and European authors. Emphasis will vary be-
tween African-Caribbean, Canadian or European. Course may be
repeated twice with different subject emphasis. Prerequisite: Fre

i Fre 362, or Fre 3638,

re 499 Undergraduate Seminar (3)
Intensive study of an author, topic or literary theme not treated
in regularly offered departmental undergraduate courses. May be
repeated. Prerequisite: Fre 361, Fre 362, or Fre 363.

123

—

me teeter ss ore

DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY

FACULTY: S. Blount, M. Dobson, H. Flierl, W. Heiser,
F, Henderson, P. Marr, J. Pipkin.

The Department of Geography offers programs leading
to the B.A. and M.A. degrees. The undergraduate program
provides students with a broad, general background in the
field of geography as preparation for work at the graduate
level. Students are also able to equip themselves with vari-
ous techniques and methods that are useful as training for
employment in a variety of business and government occu-

pations, particularly_in the_fields_of planning, cartography,

and resource and environmental management, Geography
also provides a useful background for study in professional
schools of public administration, planning, education, for-
estry, and various environmental programs.

Degree Requirements for the Major in Geography
General Program

B.A.: Gog 101, 102, 290, 396, a minimum of 15 credits
in systematic and regional courses in Geography, including
at least nine credits at the 300 level; up to nine credits in
supporting courses from the social sciences, the earth and

DetaT= WM... tf

‘

atmospheric sciences and biology as advised to total 36

| credits.
Gog 101 Introductory Physical Geography (3)

The major world climate, vegetation, soil, and landform regions
and other physical patterns, and their interrelationships, causes and
significance. The use of maps and other devices as interpretive tools
in these studies.

Gog 102 Introductory Cultural Geography (3)

Study of human patterns of earth occupance reflecting man’s
‘influence on the physical, social, political, and economic environ-
ment and his response to these environmental factors with an em-

phasis on their interrelationships.
7

Gog 150 World Peoples and Regions (3)
; A survey of the major political and cultural areas of the world,
' emphasizing regional patterns of landscapes, settlement, economy,
and intercultural contacts. (Not open to majors.)

; Gog 201 Introductory Geomorphology (3)
Origin and development of landforms produced by water, wind,
waves and ice action with man as an active or a passive agent in

the gradation processes of his physical environment. Prerequisite:
Gog 101.

124
ee

. he 210 Introductory Economic Geography (3)

An analysis of man’s role in the production, utilization, and ex-

i change of the products of agriculture, forestry, fishing, mining, and
| | manufacturing; of world patterns of trade and transportation; of the
concepts of location theory as they are influenced by the economic,
cultural, political and physical conditions that prevail on different
pArts of the earth. Prerequisite: Gog 101 or Gog 102 or Eco 100.

en ee
1
peas semen eee

Gog 220 Introductory Urban Geography (3)
Analysis of the distribution, size, function, and morphology of the

| Je 101 or Gog 102 or consent of instructor.

Gog 290 Introductory Cartography (4)
Techniques applicable to data compilation, design and construc-
{i tion of maps. Cartographic expression as a basic tool for analysis
ind presentation of spatial phenomena and statistical surfaces.
rerequisite; Gog 101 or Gog 102.

Gog 291 Map Interpretation (3)

Survey of types and uses of maps. Topics include map elements,

projections, landform analysis and cultural patterns. Prerequisite:
Gog 101.

Un ater eegertc|

1 Go 3 Map and Photo Interpretation of La rms-(38)""" SIN/ Ae ,

Recognitidn-and.interpretation~of landtorms from air photos and

r-eonsent’Of instructor, Livesavouraoerecncsinres ta *

7
Gog 361 Physiography of the United States (3)
Examination of the major landform subdivisions in the United

States and their development. Prerequisite: Gog 201 or consent of
| instructor.

wpe

palin
eS so

Gog 302 Landform Studies (3)

Map and air photographic techniques of landform inventory and
classification by means of natural grouping, morphometric analysis

and watershed evaluation. Prerequisite: Gog 201 or consent of
ipistructor.

Gog 310 Geography of Primary Production (3)

| f= - An -analysis of -world-patterns-in-the production, utilization, and.

exchange of agricultural, forest, marine and mineral products. In-

| volves the analysis of spatial variations in the impact of physical,

dultural, economic, and political conditions on the development of

_— e primary industries. Prerequisite: Gog 101 or Gog 102 or
| | ico 100,

Gog 313 Geography of Manufacturing and Service Industries (3)
The study of the major manufacturing and service industries of
| ' the world, Analysis of the regional pattems of manufacturing and

principles of industrial location are stressed. Prerequisite: Gog 10]
. or Gog 102 or Eco 100,

| . city, emphasizing the study of the American city. Prerequisite:

ps,_hasic-menstitationtechniques, Prerequisite: _Gog—201—___—
Coy AG3 mame USEY TNTIER AERIAL PIOCS)

}

— ny ee ate

: / Gog 314 Geography of Transportation and Trade (3)

' Analysis of geographic aspects of transportation and trade. In-
cludes the study of the bases of transportation and trade, the re-
gional patterns of . transportation facilities, and commodity flows
and traffic patterns, Prerequisite: Gog 101 or Gog 102 or Eco 100.

/ Gog 320 (Soc 372) Urban Planning (3)

The development of city planning, its function in urban govern-
ment, basic studies for urban planning, land use zoning, the
fe plan, and implementation of planning programs. Prerequisite:

4
a
!

Gog 220 or consent of instructor.

Gog 330 Geography of Population and Settlement (3)

An analysis of demographic variations with emphasis on the |
economic-and-social-characteristics- of the population and population ms
| mobility. Problems of underdevelopment and population pressures
: | on resources. Prerequisite: Gog 101 or Gog 102 or consent of

instructor,

Gog 335 Introduction to Behavioral Geography (3)

Survey of space-perception and spatial aspects of decision-making,
with discussion of: the perception of natural hazards, mental maps,
and cognitive images of the city; spatial aspects of information
acquisition; learning and preference-information; learning and choice 4
processes in urban travel. and migration. Questionnaire-based _re-

[tin techniques are introduced, Prerequisite: Gog 102 or consent «+

oe |

cr a

ot
Matta us

of instructor.

Gog 356 Geography of the United States (3)

A systematic treatment of the physical, economic, and cultural
+--—-- geography of the United States; selected regional problems of land = |
tilization and of geographic. adjustments. Prerequisite; Gog 101 or _ 2
Gog 102, if

Gog 359 Geography of Middle America (3)
A critical analysis of physical and cultural environment and an

evaluation of resources basic to economic and political develop- am
ment, Prerequisite: Gog 101 or Gog 102: ws
: Gog 362 Geography of South America (3) F
| The basic human and physical differences among regions of South
| _ America which affect economic, social, and political conditions; — ; |
| geographic factors in the development of South American countries, =
i foqon Gog 101 or Gog. 102 or consent of instructor.

Gog 365 Geography of Western Europe (3) -

A regional and topical geography of non-Communist Europe. ig

Includes an analysis of the varied physical and human factors be-

; hind Western Europe’s diversity; economic and political regions
and the development of supranational blocs and _ institutions. -
| Prerequisite: Gog 101 or Gog 102 or consent of instructor. _

Gog 368 Geography of Eastern Europe (3)

A regional and topical geography of the Communist countries of
Eastern Europe (not including the Soviet Union). Includes an — ;
analysis-of the varied physical and cultural factors behind Eastern

126
\/

Europe’s diversity; economic regions; and the development of agri-
cultural and industrial activities since World War II. Prerequisite:
~f Gog 101 or Gog 102 or consent of instructor.

| hoe 371 Geography of the Soviet Union (3)

A study of the physical and cultural patterns of the Soviet Union
with reference to the significance of industrial and agricultural ex-
pansion in relation to the environmental resources available. Em-
phasis on internal diversity of cultures and capabilities and the
planned attempts to overcome these differences and to reduce spatial

eparation. Prerequisite: Gog 101 or Gog 102 or consent of in-
|
| /
|

4,
h

structor.

Gog 374 Geography of the Middle East (3)
The physical, cultural, and resource geography of south-western
_ , Asia and northem Africa. Prerequisite: Gog 101 or Gog 102 or

perme —

| | ig of instructor
| Gog 377 Geography of Sub-Saharan Africa (3)

The physical, economic, and cultural settings in Africa south of
the Sahara which form the basis for various forms of livelihood;
analysis of regions and political units. Prerequisite: Gog 101 or

og 102 or consent of instructor.
Gog 380 Geography of East Asia (3)

Y The lands, peoples, and countries of eastern Asia including China,
|

—

Korea, and Japan. Geographical foundations of economic activities

population problems, Prerequisite: Gog 101 or Gog 102.

The lands, peoples, and countries of south and southeast Asia
including the Himalayan countries, those of the Indian subcontinent,
and of peninsular and insular southeast Asia, Geographical founda-

ns of economic activities and cultural developments. Prerequisite:

| / og 101 or Gog 102.

Gog 385 _ Introduction to Remote Sensing of Environment (4)
Analysis of multispectral reconnaissance techniques and instru-
,; ments used to study the environment. Emphasis on principles of
| multispectral photography, color and color infrared photography,

' Gog 383 Geography of South and Southeast Asia (3)

wo lectures and two hours of laboratory work per week,

; favo Tees in the investigation of cultural and biophysical phenomena.

Gog 390 Intermediate Cartography (3)

Techniques of reproduction graphics with emphasis on map plan-
ning and construction, Utilization of half-tone, color-key and other
| . roduction processes as modes of cartographic expression.

rerequisite: Gog 290.

‘+ “Gog 394 (Mat 394) Mathematical Techniques in Urban and
Regional Analysis | (3)
f Elementary mathematical applications in demographie theory,
| regional economie growth models, gravity models and transporta-
tion systems. No formal mathematical training necessary.

127

thermal infrared and multifrequency radar systems and their ap-

I
|
son 395 (Mat 395) Mathematical Techniques in Urban and
[

t
t

Regional Analysis II (3)
Linear programming applications in planning. Overview of urban
planning processes—-land use and transportation models including
derivation and parameter estimation. Prerequisites: Elementary sta-

J tistics, Gog 394, ox consent of instructor.

Gog 396 Quantitative Methods in Geography (3)

Quantitative methods used by geographers, including sampling
analyses, input-output analyses and conceptual models as these
relate to investigation of data of areal distributions. Prerequisite:

File.

wee eet
i]

og 101 or Gog 102; Mat 108 recommended.
Gog 397 Independent investigations in Geography (1-6)
= Reserved-for-highly qualified students who wish to conduct inde-
pendent research in topical and regional geography, The student,
subject to faculty approval, will select a research problem; the
number of credits will be based on the scope and difficulty of the
research proposal. The student will work independently under some
degree of guidance from a member of the faculty. The student will

submit a finished report at the end of the session. Prerequisite:
| none, Can be repeated for credit to total of six credits.

Gog 401 Techniques in Geomorphology (3)

Techniques used by contemporary geomorphologists are reviewed
with special field and laboratory emphasis placed on identification,
composition, genesis of unconsolidated surface materials and essen-

tial aspects of hydrology. Prerequisite: Gog 201, Geo 210 or con-
sent of instructor.

ae te

<a = ee ow,

og-414— Computer Map Analysis (3)

Computerized methods for displaying and analyzing spatial data.
Printer and plotter mapping. Interpolation methods, power series
and Fourier trend analysis, spatial filtering. Geographic base files.

Introduction to pattern analysis. Prerequisite: Gog 290, Gog 396,
or consent of instructor.

Gog 416 Urban and Regional Planning Laboratory (3)

Preparation of comprehensive plan elements, zoning ordinances
and subdivision regulations—study, formulation, field research,
report preparation and formal presentation before professional

pPlanners or government administrators. Prerequisite: Gog 220 or
J Gog 320 or consent of instructor.

Gog 417 Geography Internships (3-6)

Work in planning, cartography, remote sensing, environmental or
other offices to gain pre-professional experience in applied geogra-
phy. Carried out under the joint supervision of faculty and the host

con, Prerequisites: advanced standing and consent of instructor.

Gog 418 Directed Study in Topical Geography (3)

Advanced study in topical geography specialization under the
direction of the geography staff. (May be repeated for credit.)
Prerequisite: nine credits in geography.

128

DS es ee

t
te ities |

tee,
x 4

~ Gog 420 Urban Field Studies (3)

ae. eee

Lag eee ee

GT eet

fe a AR er

\
i

“Hh

Application of field techniques in the study of urbanized regions.
Yerequisite: consent of instructor.

Gog 422 Intermediate Urban Geography (3)
Analysis of recent literature on urban location, external spatial
relations of cities, intemal differentiation of land uses, and the

spatial patterns of urban population and activities. Prerequisite:
og 220 or consent of instructor.

Gog 425 Rural Field Studies (3)

Application of field techniques in the study of rural regions.
Pyerequisite: consent of instructor.

Gog 450 Directed Study in Regional Geography (3)

Advanced study of world regions and areas under the direction of
the geography staff, (May be repeated for credit.) Prerequisite:
pe eredits in geography,

Gog 455 Seminar in the Geography of a Selected Region (3)

Specific application of the regional concept to a selected area,
embodying geographic analysis and synthesis of critical interdepen-
dent elements of the region. (May be foreign or domestic.) Knowl-
edge of a language of the region is essential. Prerequisite: nine
Z.. in geography and consent of instructor.

Gog 457 Geography of New York State (3)

The resource base of New York State’s geography; landforms,
climate, water, vegetation, and soils. The historical geography of

A ae

ut
7

je ioe T

pena vane ered
ee rT

int

New York from Indian times to the present--Geography—of-eeonemie
activities today; the primary, secondary and tertiary sectors. Urban
and rural landscapes, planning and development regions. The de-

| velopment, industrial status, and economic potential of the State’s

major urban system, Prerequisite: Gog 101 or, Gog 102 or consent

wa instructor,

Gog 460 Historical Geography of the United States (3)

A study of the human geography of the American past. Charac-
teristics of the early settlement patterns along the Atlantic Coast,
the westward movements through the Appalachians, the spread of

population, and the development of the Far West. Interpretation of

the regional changes in human land use patterns, Prerequisite: Gog
2. or Gog 102 or consent of instructor.

‘Gog 466 Geography of Germany (3)

~The physical; economic -and- cultural- characteristics - of -Germany
that contribute to its regional diversity and problems. The course
covers both the Federal Republic and the German Democratic Re-
public, with some attention to areas formerly German, Prerequisite:
wh 101 or Gog 102 or consent of instructor.

Gog 485 Intermediate Remote Sensing of the Environment (3)

Current research in geographic remote sensing of the environ-
ment with emphasis on past, present, and future applications in
geography and related disciplines. Practice in planning, design, exe-
cution, and interpretation of overflights with various types of remote
sensing systems. Prerequisite: Gog 285,

129

= wher nes an

Gog 490 Concepts in Modern Geography (3)
Analysis of geography’s role in interpreting modern world so-
cieties; especially designed for those students interested in teaching

at the secondary level. Prerequisite: six credits in geography or con-
/ sent of instructor,

Gog 495 Undergraduate Seminar in Cartography (3)
Study of a particular topic of importance in cartography, such as
beneralization, perception, research, automation, landform repre-

sentation, production mapping, etc. Prerequisites: Gog 290, Gog
390, and consent of instructor.

Gog 498 Pro-Seminar in Methodology and Theory for
Undergraduates (3)

Study of geographic concepts, methods and procedures. Discus-
sion of professional geographic materials and basic bibliographic
procedures, Prerequisite: 15 credits in geography,

DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGICAL SCIENCES

FACULTY: P. Benedict, K. Burke, S. DeLong, J. Dewey,

P. Fox, W. Kidd, W. Means, A. Miyashiro, P. Pomeroy,
G. Putman, F’. Shido

The department aims to provide a broad introduction to
the geological sciences including geophysics and geochem-
istry. Within the last decade, understanding of the earth
has been revolutionized through the development_of_plate

ese nie tac

tectonic theory. Members of our faculty have played lead-
ing roles in this revolution and teach courses aimed both
at introducing students with varied backgrounds to a new
dynamic picture of the world and at training future pro-
fessionals, Continuing shortages of raw materials for indus-
try and energy production and increasing interest in envi-
ronmental problems are leading to a growing demand for
professional geologists.

Special Programs or Opportunities:

The department sponsors two weekly seminar series
that provide students with a sampling of important topics
in current geological research: (1) informal talks given by
faculty and graduate students; and (2) formal seminars
presented by outside speakers. The Geology Club and de-
partment sponsor field trips in New York, New England,
and the Appalachians. The field mapping course attracts
students from other schools.

130
Special Programs or Opportunities:

The department provides for graduate and undergradu-
ate students both research and small group laboratories, a
colloquia series with both locally and nationally known
| sociologists, and a local chapter of the national sociology
| honorary, Alpha Kappa Delta.

Degree Requiremenis for the Major in Sociology
General Program

Po ~~ --ByAvrA minimum of 36 credits including Soc 115, 2215
| 223, and either 330, 333, 335, or 430; 18 additional credits
| of sociology as advised; six credits of supporting courses as
advised, A minimum of 12, credits in sociology must be at
the 300 level or above. Mat 108 or 362 may be substituted
for Soc 221,

t ~ $§0¢115 Introduction to Sociology (3)

[ The nature of culture and of human society, personality develop-
; / ment, groups and group structure, social institutions, the processes
1 1 of social change. (Seniors should take Soc 417 instead of Soc 115.)

Soc 180 Social Problems (3)
' The application of the concepts, methods and ethics of sociology

to_the_analysis_of_“social_problems.”-Prerequisite:;_Soc_L1i5.

WSoc 221 (Soc 215) Statistics for Sociologists (3)

An introduction to quantitative analysis of sociological data:
Methods of summarizing and describing univariate distributions in-
cluding the use of tables and graphs; methods of examining rela-
tionships between two or more measures; statistical inference and

| hypothesis testing. Prerequisite: major in department.

Soc 223 (Ant 280) (Soc 220) Introduction to Social Research (3)
An examination of the assumptions and techniques of social re-

search: problems of design, data collection, quantitative and quali-

, tative analysis; review of current research in professional journals;

.the uses of survey research; application of concepts through indi-

i vidual and class projects, Prerequisite: Soc 115 and Mat 108 or
Mat 362, or Soc 221 is required.

J Soc 240 Social Institutions (3)
: An introduction to the internal organization and operation of
arious social institutions (religious, political, economic), and the
J fluence of one institution upon another, Prerequisite: Soc 115.
$s

oc 241 Social Class (3)

An examination of the antecedents, consequences, and measures

of social class including the principal theoretical and empirical liter-
ature on social stratification. Prerequisite; Soc 115.

22.0

Soc 250 (Ant 250) (Soc 315) The Family (3)
The family as a social institution, types of family organization,
: the family as a socializing agency and its interrelations with other
| | institutions, the impact of social change on the American family
it ith particular reference to the transition from a rural-agricultural .
o a predominantly urban-industrial society. Prerequisite: Soc 115. :

Soc 255 (Soc 355) Mass Media (3)

The role of the newspaper, radio, television and motion pictures
' in American society; changes in these media and their functional
pron to education, the economy, the political process, and

af
i
See]

dublic opinion. Prerequisite: Soc 115.

———SS
——_p ee

Soc 260 (Psy 270) (Soc 270) Social Psychology (3)
The relation between the individual and the group, the influence
of culture and of institutions on human personality, the nature and

i types of leadership, factors in the development of social attitudes,
i e psychology of mass movements and of social decisions. |
i rerequisite: Soc 115 or Psy 101.

Soc 270 (Soc 358) The Community (3)

!
_ The nature of the community and approaches to community study.
' The impact of urbanization and other changes on the physical and
' social structure of communities; community planning. Prerequisite:

, ap ue . ERT 300) 12/77 meme
| he 281 Criminology (3) Mts alLocuse ; 7, #/ 3/97

Y, ,
an society with particular attention to the American Negro. The
rocesses of conflict, accommodation, and assimilation; problems

arising from increasing mobility and current efforts to modify tra-
itional-pattermsof-segregation=-Prerequisite: Soc 115.

| -¥ Soc 289 (Soc 283) (Prs 289) Special Topics in Ethnicity (3)
i An intensive examination of the culture and lifestyle of a single
ethnic group within American society. The specific ethnic group to
_. .. _be_ studied_will vary. from_-session-to—session--and—will—be—indicated- —-——_-
| by course subtitle; e.g., Ethnicity; Italian Americans. Repeatable
| for up to six credits under different subtitles. Departmental permis-
, f required for more than six credits, Prerequisite: Soc 115,
S$

oc 300 (E Soc 300) Introduction to the Sociology of
| Education (3)
{i An introduction to the sociology of education. An emphasis on
the impact of institutions and various educational problems.

221

SS eee

Soc 330 (Soc 332 a) History of Social Thought to 1800 (3)

A review of the theories of the nature of society preceding the
foundation of sociology as a special discipline. The material includes
selected works of Chinese and Greek philosophers and historians;
Church theologians; Renaissance humanists; British, French, Scot-
dish, and Italian reformers, critics, political and economic writers.
Prerequisite: Soc 115.

Soc 333 (Soc 332 b) History of Social Thought—19th Century (3)
The diverse theories that have shaped modem sociology are re-

viewed, Attention is given to evolutionary, conflict, reform, organic,

Janalytic, and utopian orientations of the period. Prerequisite: Soc

115.

Soc 335 Contemporary Sociological Theory (3)

An overview of the major systems of schools of theory influencing
twentieth-century sociology. Evaluation of the role of theory in the
growth of the discipline. Special emphasis on the influencing of
modem theorists beginning with Durkheim. Prerequisite: nine
credits in sociology or consent of instructor.

Soc 342 Complex Organizations (3)
A comparative sociological analysis of the structures and processes
characterizing different types of large organizations (e.g., school,

prison, hospital); alternatives to the bureaucratic model; inter andl

intra-organizational relations, and organizational change.
Prerequisite: Soc 115.

Soc 346 (Soc 415) Social Organization (3)

ae 8 cr ethee E

Bal Bt. US |

tip nie Sere 2:

An-intensive;analytic—-coverage—of-basie—sociolegiecal-eoneepts—re-

: lating to societal organization. Prerequisite: Soe 115.

Soc 352 (Soc 449) Sociology of Religion (3)

Religion in society: the social sources of religion; religious insti-
tutions in America; the relation between religion and the social,
economic, and political forces in society. Prerequisite: Soc 115.

Soc 353 (Soc 252) Sociology of Economic Behavior (3)

A sociological analysis of economic institutions, using cross-
cultural, historical, and contemporary data; the inter-relations of
economic behavior and other institutionalized behavior; special prob-
lems arising from change in economic systems in modern societies,
Prerequisite: Soc 115,

Soc 354 (Soc 456) Political Sociology (3)
An analysis of the social bases of political power and the origin,
- course of development, and duration of social movements; the role
i of propaganda, communication, and public opinion in political be-

havior; the structure of political organizations. Prerequisite: Soc
115.

Soc 356 (Soc 354) Sociology of the Arts (3)

The social organization of art activity; the roles of artists, patrons,

critics, and the various publics; art as communication and as an
indicator of social change; the uses of art in religion, government,
and. business. Prerequisite: Soc 115.

222

0 ee tne ee
ine

J
- ? re)

57 Industrial Sociology (3)

_ alysis of industrialization; institutional and interpersonal as-
i | pe¢ts of the industrial work place. Prerequisite: Soc 115.

-_ 30c 359 Medical Sociology (3)
A comprehensive introduction to sociological factors in disease
etiology and illness behavior and to the sociology of the organiza-

- of medical practice and the health professions. Prerequisite:

a a a
+= mg

So6e 115.

oc 360 (Soc 460) Processes of Socialization (3)
7 Exploration of socialization processes with similarities and differ-
| ; ences in occurrence in various social institutions; aspects of social-
' ization in the life cycle of the individual. Prerequisite: Soc 115,

L. 260 or equivalent.

oc 363 (Soc 462) Small Groups (3)
An introduction to small group theory and research. Analysis of

i | interaction processes and group structures through laboratory ob-
ervation and experimentation. Prerequisite: Soc 115, Soc 223, and
ay in 260,
fo:
| Soc 365 Coilective Behavior (3)

A sociological analysis of forms of collective action, including
panics, crazes, fads, fashions, demonstrations, publics, movements;
| t eory of collective behavior as social action. Prerequisite: Soc 115

d an additional three credits of sociology or psychology.

oc 370 Social Demography (3)
The analysis of population processes with special emphasis on

| {the effects of population on social organization and change.
5 ines Soc 115,

oc 371 Urban Economics (3)
| , Same as Economics 341.

a Soc 372) =Urban Planning (3)
ut J Same as Geography 320.

) re 379 (Prs 329) The Urban Puerto Rican Family

: Same as Prs 329
Ssoc 380 (Prs 380) Sociology of Poverty (3)

. Analysis of structural conditions leading to the formation and
- maintenance of low-income populations: interplay between eco-
pr demographic, and cultural factors; poverty and social policy.

. rerequisite: Soc 115.
| Noe, 383 Juvenile Delinquency (3) €¢ RS 304) 1217? meme
. rhe characteristics and distribution of delinquency in society; a vein

| | exftical review of etiological theory and an analysis and critique of f°
- rrectional processes, Prerequisite; Soc 115.

—— ee

{ | Soc 384 (Soc 390) Sociology of Aging (3)
| Aging as a cultural phenomenon; a comparative study of age
| __ structure in society; the nature of age strata; relationships of age

223

4 | credits in sociology and consent of instructor.

strata; the consequence of social change for age definition.
Prerequisite: Soe 115.

Soc 417 American Social Institutions (3)

Analysis of the structure and function of contemporary American
social institutions, with emphasis on the problems created by a
rapidly changing social order. (Restricted to non-sociology majors.)

Soc. 429 Special Topics in Social Research (3)

An intensive examination of a specialized topic in the area of
social research. The special topic to be studied will vary from term
to term and will be indicated by course subtitle. Course repeatable
for up to nine credits under different subtitles. Departmental per-
ission required for more than nine credits. Prerequisite: six credits

ne ee eee

n sociology and consent of instructor.

Soc 430 (Soc 410) Origins of Sociology (3)
_ The beginnings of sociology as a distinct discipline in Europe and
in the United States. The emergence of sociology from a back-
ground of social philosophy and social reform. Prerequisite: nine
credits in sociology or consent of instructor.

Soc 439 Special Topics in Sociological Theory (3)

An intensive examination of a specialized topic in the area of
sociological theory. The special topic to be studied will vary from
term to term and will be indicated by course subtitle. Course repeat-
able for up to nine credits under different subtitles. Departmental
permission required for more than nine credits, Prerequisite: six

oc-440-(Soc-452)— Social-Control(3)

et ee ore:

Pa Deedee een

The factors involved in the maintenance of the social order and
the making of group decisions. The nature of custom, ideology,
leadership, publie opinion, and the other types of control.
Prerequisite: Soc 115.

Soc 443 (Soc 459) Social and Cultural Change (3)

The nature, sources and interrelationship of social and cultural
changes; theories of change; analysis of factors making for equi-
tbrium and disequilibrium in human societies. Prerequisite: Soc 115,

oc 445 Comparative Sociology (3) |
A comparison of societies and sub-cultures utilizing the historical
one cross-cultural approaches. Prerequisite: six credits of sociology.

Sge 446 (Ant 464) (Soc 464) Eastern Europe: Tradition anc
wenn CHANGE, (3)

Cultural background, world view? and social structure of selected

dstem European countriegy cultural persistence and change under

the impact of economic and ‘olitical transformations. prerequisite:

Pees ry)

A comparative analysis of civilizations which flourished in South-
East Europe from antiquity to the present, illustrated by the history
of conflict and interpretation between them. Prerequisite: consent
of instructor.

22.4

te 34 rom neen?

qe enema

po er en
amen et

_|_+_-social_institutions;_Fhe—special_topies—to—be—studied—will-vary—from

[
[

i
| t
t
e
iu

;

| |
i
i
|

* \Soc 448 (Ant 448) (Soc 463) (Prs 448) Social Change in Latin

America (3)

Changing class structure, ethnic composition and culture of con-
temporary Latin American nations. Prerequisite: reading knowledge
of Spanish or Portuguese and consent of instructor.

oc 449 Special Topics in Social Organization and Change (3)

An intensive examination of a specialized topic in the area of
social organization and change. The special topic to be studied will
vary from term to term and will be indicated by course subtitle.
Course repeatable for up to nine credits under different subtitles.
Departmental permission required for more than nine credits.
Prerequisite: six credits in sociology and consent of instructor.

Soc 451 Sociology of Law (3)
sociological analysis of the emergence, implementation, and
Ene al impact of legal codes and the organization of the legal sys-
. Prerequisite: Soc 115. lle

eh et

oc 457 Sociology of Science (3) e 2?

Characteristics of scientific belief systems; social backgrourid of
the development of science; the social organization of scientific ac- :

tivity; the impact of soleus on society. Prerequisite: consent of
instructor.

oc 459 Special Topics in Social Institutions (3)
An intensive examination of a specialized topic in the area of

term to term and will be indicated by course subtitle. Course re-
peatable for up to nine credits under different subtitles, Depart-
mental permission required for more than nine credits, Prerequisite:
six £redits in sociology and consent of instructor.

= Cie neat inte ines onsen, nem opine

c 460 (Soc 412) Human Communication (3)
The communication process, how communication generates social
and psychological effects; the role of communications in social inter-
action, both directly and through mass media. Emphasizes informa-
tion theory, social exchange, nonverbal communication, persuasion,
control and variations of the source, message, channel, and socio-
psyChological state of the receiver, Prerequisite: Soc 115. or Psy 101.

¢ 469 Special Topics in Social Psychology (3)
__An_ intensive_examination_of_.a_specialized_topic_in_the_area_of_._
social psychology. The special topic to be studied will vary from
term to term and will be indicated by course subtitle. Course re-
peatable fov up to nine credits under different subtitles, Depart- :
mental perrnission required for more than nine credits. Prerequisite: ;
six credits in sociology and consent of instructor.
boa 470 (Soc 436) Urban Sociology (3)

Approaches to the study of urban form and process: The city as
a crescive product and_as a social artifact; impact of the urban set-
ting upon social institutions; city, metropolis, and megalopolis; the
future of cities, Prerequisite: Soc 115,

225

ances ee pots

yy, 472 Urban Ecology (3)

A study of the adaptation of human social systems to envixon-
mental conditions, with a focus on the urban ecological system.

rerequisite: Soc 115 or Soc 417.
Soc 479 Special Topics in Urban Sociology (3)
An intensive examination of a specialized topic in the area of
urban sociology. The special topic to be studied will vary from term
jt term and will be indicated by course subtitle. Course repeatable

/ for up to nine credits under different subtitles. Departmental per-
[= mission required for more than nine credits. Prerequisite: six credits

in sociology and consent of instructor. ew cleo

ween yvian tang® ane one
fenanc ily “hee dy lant/ i

jE Soc 489 Special Topics in Social Disorganization and Deviance (3)

An intensive examination of a specialized topic in the area of

social disorganization and deviance. The special topic to be studied

will vary from term to term and will be indicated by course sub-

. title. Course repeatable for up to nine credits under different sub-

i titles. Departmental permission required for more than nine credits.
Prerequisite: six credits in sociology and consent of instructor.

sf Soc 497 a and b Independent Study in Sociology (3, 3)
Independent reading or research on a_ selected experimental,

ert

see eee ee,

‘theoretical, or applied problem, under the direction of a faculty
member. May be taken a second time for an additional three credits
; upon recommendation of the faculty supervisor and with approval
of the department chairman. Prerequisites: major in Sociology, con-
sent of department chairman and instructor.

Soc 499 aandb Senior Seminar in Sociology (3, 3)

Selection of topic and preparation of a paper under the direction
of a faculty member. Prerequisite: senior standing, a major in
Sociology, and consent of department chairman.

226

Co. eee eee

| ee

ad |
' J

1 |

- DEPARTMENT OF THEATRE

-: FACULTY: J. Burian, R. Donnelly, E. Golden, J, Hanley,
| | R. Herzel, J. Leonard, E. Mendus, L. Salsbury, J. Symons,

! A. Weiner.
ADJUNCT FACULTY: P. Snyder.

| | Theatre is a performing art. Jt is also a major area of

i, study through which one may gain a liberal arts education.

The Department of Theatre offers a program which as-

| | sumes these two views of the theatre to be mutually sup-

| ' portive rather than in opposition, The studies of designing,

‘ directing, acting, writing, stagecraft, history, theory, criti-

cism, and dramatic literature are considered interdepen-

| ; dent studies. However, a degree of specialization is ex-
| | pected of all students,

Degree Requirements for the Major in Theatre

| | A student may elect either a 36-credit General Program
‘+ or a 54-credit Departmental Program in which emphasis
in a particular area of theatre is required.

| All theatre majors take the following 21 credit core se-
| - quence of courses:

Thr 207, Thr 210, Thr 220, Thr 235, Eng 337 or Eng
. 888 plus six credits of upper division history and literature
| ' courses available in the Theatre Department.

General Program

| 36-credits (At least 12 credits must be at the 300 level

| | or above.) Students in the General Program are required to

: take the 21 credit core plus 15 additional credits as ad-
vised in performance and/or production courses.

Departmental Program

: 54-credits (At least 18 credits must be at the 300 level
7 or above.) Students in the Departmental Program are re-

| , quired to take the 21 credit core plus one of the two areas
' of concentration.
Acting/Directing Concentration:
| Thr 240, Thr 250, Thr 300, Thr 340, Thr 350, Thr
| 351, Thr 440, plus an additional 12 credits as advised.
Li Design/Technical Theatre Concentration:
Thr 300, Thr 360, Thr 365°, Thr 370, Thr 375°, Thr
i | 380, Thr 385°, plus an additional 14 credits as advised.

| *Two of the three courses are required,

227

A student wishing to concentrate in Dramatic Theory,
History, and Literature should enroll in the General Pro-
gram and plan a Second Field to accommodate such in-
terests.

Thr 110 The Biack Theatre in America (3)
Same as Aas 110.

Thr 140 Acting and Directing Fundamentals (3)
Introduction to the art & craft of acting & the responsibilities of
the director in the areas of play selection, analysis, casting, & re-

hearsing, Through class projects & exercises, emphasis is placed on

“the practical application of basic acting-and directing principles. For-
non-majors & majors with little or no performance background.

Thr 207 Introduction to Dramatic Art (3)

The components of dramatic art; attention to the contributions
of acting, script, makeup, scenery, lighting, sound, music, and archi-
tecture to the theatre as a unified creative expression.

Thr 210 World Drama (3)

An examination of major dramas from the Greeks to the late
nineteenth century, with consideration of their literary, theatrical,
and socio-cultural values.

Thr 220 (Cwl 220) Theatre History (3)
The interaction of cultural, political, economic, and _ scientific

civilization. and their implications for the modern movements in
dramatic theory and practice. Prerequisite: Thr 207, 210.

Thr 225 American Theatre History (3)

Development of theatre in the United States from its seventeenth-
century beginnings to the present; particular attention to theatres,
plays, and players since 1850 including frontier theatre, regional

repertory theatre, musical theatre, and the rise of vaudeville, bur-
lesque, Broadway, and film. ——

Thr 235 Design and Techni i Elements of-Th atre @) C4)
The function and coordination of theatre arphitecture, sc

lighting, make-up, co tune, ang. sound, fy aclete oy i Binoy eas.

Nr» Colnrga rl mee] cn

cha apa Mt

An integrated approach to » bullding an acting technique as an
actor/actress prepares intellectually, emotionally, and physically to
create characterizations. One master class and two two-hour voice,

movement, and performance labs per week. Prerequisite: consent of
instructor,

Thr 250 Theatrical Make-up (1)
Study of the design and technique of theatrical make-up.

Lecture/laboratory. Meets once a week for 1% hours. Prerequisite:
consent of instructor.

228

- |

eveerarenereme were

ti:

forees—upon—dramatie—art—during_the—major_epochs_in_Western
|

Thr 300 Theatre Workshop (1)
Application of theatre study to the challenges of theatre practice
| through participation in the production work of the State University
| Theatre. May be repeated six times, Prerequisite: Thr 207.

‘hr-304-—Foundations-of-Childréi' s Theatre (3) Hele te BY, ty
Development of materials for Children’s Theatre, including musi} "

cal pantomimes, improvisions, and dramatizations; implications of

exials.for_experimental production technique cana ae

Thr 302 Approaches to Child Drama (3) See revicloccs," jot D>
The-~-developmentof~leadership—skills—in—draniatie-=play=— far

childzengszmethods;nraterials~and—techniques~to—stimulate—the~ereas

| rfi@uwpro eessy~@bservation—and~—particip ation---in--the-—departmentis-@__-

Child~Prama—-Workshopig _ / f t oy

-303-~-Y¥outh-Theatre-Rroduction-{3)= .
The direction of young persons from nin ‘through the ’teens in®
yoduction for the child audience with-attention to special problems
o be encountered when working-With the older child. Emphasis
pon all production aspects f{ casting through performance, cul- /

inating in a laborato: <esentation before
“Prerequisite? torsent“of- instructe / lote :

Thr-304—-International.Aspecis-of-Ghil n's-“Theatre-(y-==
Philosophies, attitudes, and foreé$ shaping present-day practice

children’s theatre througho’ the world including an analyti
. a of selected foreign-Scripts anid-produeion-techmquers

tere
ee ee

: isiter"c -of-instrueter.
“Wale "0 Ceo g fae EAL (gy S/28 At em0-S72/>
f Thr 3 ‘ “onl 330) Theories of Draniatic Production (3)
| An investigation and evaluation of the precursors of the major
modern movements in dramatic productions, Emphasis on Zola,
Antoine, Duke George II of Saxe-Meiningen, Appia, Reinhardt,
opeau, Belasco, and Craig.

hr 340 Acting Il (4)
-* "A continuation of Thr 240 with increased emphasis on the devel-
opment of characterization. One master class and two two-hour

voice, movement, and performance labs per week. Prerequisite:
pe 240 or consent of instructor.

hr 350 Directing I (3)
The fundamentals of directing for the theater, with emphasis

ary

| | upon an organized sequence of operation, and the preparation of a
' prompt script. Prerequisites: Thr 285, 240, and consent of
instructor,

hr 351 Directing II (3)

f study of style in theatre, and its practical application from the
nt of view of the director. Prerequisite: Thr 350.

|
|
h
J r360 Stagecraft (4) | |
| The basic elements of set design and construction. A study of
! j; basic shop techniques and procedures, mechanical devices used on
| | the stage, materials used in set construction, elementary mechanical

229

Se cape g

Degree Requirements for the Major
in Geological Sciences

General Program

B.S.: A minimum of 66 credits for the combined major
and second field including Geo 120, 210, 220, 230, 240,
310, 330 or 470, 460, 400, 410 or 480 or 440, 450 or 497;
Mat 112, 113; Phy 120, 121, 124, 125; Chm 121 a and b,
122 a and b, 320, 321 (or Chm 340, 341 as advised), Stu-
dents are strongly urged to elect the following addiitonal
courses, Mat 214, Mat 220. or 310, Phy 220, 221. Students
are also encouraged to take electives in computer science
and English, and those who expect to do graduate work in
geology should acquire a reading knowledge of Russian,
German, or French.

Teacher Education Program

B.S, in Earth Science: A minimum of 65 credits for the
combined major and second field including Geo 100, 200,
205, 210, 220, 230; Mat 112, 113; Chm 121, 122, 320,
321. Phys 105, 106; Asy 123, 124; Atm 103; plus nine

ET I re

i
i

t
H r
H

‘
i
A

additional credits in geology 300 level-coursesorabove:
Teaching certification in General Science may be obtained
by adding Bio 101 or Bio 102. Students are also encour-
aged to elect Gog 201.

Geo 100 Planet Earth (3)

A survey of current developments in our understanding of the
evolution of the earth. Major topics covered will include: composi-
tion and origin of the earth-moon system, seismology and earth
stryeture, plate tectonics, origin of continents and oceans, and the
oyigin of life. Three lectures each week. Fall and Spring sessions.

: oea 105 (Env 105) Environmental Geology (3)

Introduction to and survey of the geologic aspects of the environ-
ment, geologic aspects of health and disease, waste disposal, mineral

~, — xesources and conservation, land reclamation, land-use’planning; and- -

ecologic hazards. Three lectures each week. Spring session.

Geo 110 Introductory Geology in the Field (2)

Basic principles of geology illustrated by field examples in the
Albany area, Elementary recognition and understanding of land-
forms, rock types, structural features, fossils, and minerals. Repre-
sentation of geological features on maps. Eight weeks only; two
lectures, one four-hour field trip each week. No prerequisites. Fall
session.

131

drawing for the theatre. Three hours of lecture and one three-hour
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Thr 235.

Thr 365 Scene Design (3) :

analysis of the script in visual terms and the translation of this into
the design for a setting. Prerequisite: Thr 360.

J The applications of the principles of design to the theatre. The

Thr 370 Lighting and Sound (3) |
Introduction to the equipment used in stage lighting and sound,

the principles of its operation, rigging, and proper maintenance.
Subject areas will include basic optics, acoustics, electricity, and

' electronics. Knowledge of simple algebra necessary. Prerequisite:

__._}-Thr-938,. —---.- — — -—- | _ ae oes ee
s/

Thr 375 Lighting Design (3)

Light as a design element in theatrical production. The phenom-
ena of color as applied to lighting, the various methods available for
lighting the stage, advanced consideration of lighting control sys-
tems and their effect on design, and the preparation of lighting
plots. Preparation of plots will require elementary mechanical draw-
ing techniques and materials, Prerequisite: Thr 370.

Thr 380 Costuming (3)
Introduction to basic theory, and techniques of theatrical cos-
. tuming. Lectures, on costume history and design theory including

laboratory on construction techniques and procedures. Prerequisite:
Thr 235,

“-Fhr-385—Advanced-Gostuming-(3)
Application of costume design theory to costume design and con-

Thr 380.

| struction methods, including laboratory period. Prerequisite:

Thr 397 Independent Study in Theatre (2—4)
Directed reading and conferences on selected topics. A student
may take the course once as strictly research, and once as a pro-
{ duction-related study, but not repeat one or the other. Prerequisite:

| consent of the instructor and department chairman,

Thr 410 Theatre in Process (3)

_, An intensive study of the components of theatre in relation to
: production activities of State University Theatre. Prerequisites:
| Thr 235, 240 and consent of instructor.

‘J Thr 415 Summer Theatre Production and Management (6)

Intense, practical training in & application of a full range of

theatre skills—performance, production, management, public rela-
tions; preparation of four productions during session. Full-time
commitment required (morning, afternoon, evening) to State Uni-
versity Summer Theatre. Audition/interview required; may be re-

peated once for credit; only six hours applicable to requirements for
major,

230

eer |

$2 weaunaeer

meen ey

Rieter ee neem
J

Geo 120 Fundamentals of Geology (3)

Chemistry, structure, and macroscopic identification of the major
groups of rock-forming silicates, classification of rocks. Surface
processes, spatial and temporal relationships of rock masses. Topo-
graphic and geologic map interpretation, geologic field work, Two
lectures, one lab each week. No prerequisites. Spring session.

Geo 200 Physical Geology (3)

The materials of the earth’s crust and the processes that shape its
features. Laboratory; identification and significance of common
minerals and rocks, and evaluation of topographic and geologic

maps. Two lectures, one lab each week. Not open to students who
have completed Geo 120. Fall Session.

Geo 205 Historical Geology (3)

The history of our planet as a logical interpretation of rock se-
quences, their major structure and the evolution evident in their
fossils assemblages. Laboratory; an introduction to paleontology

Geo 200 or consent of instructor. Spring session.

Ue stratigraphy, Two lectures, one lab each week. Prerequisite:

Geo 210 Mineralogy | (3)

The atomic structures of minerals and the thirty-two crystal
classes. Introduction to x-ray crystallography and crystal chemistry.
Optical orystallography, goniometry, crystallographic calculations
and projections, The polarizing microscope. Two lectures, ise labs

each week. Prerequisite: Geo 120 or consent of instructor. Fall
session.

Geo 220 Mineralogy II (3)

Descriptive mineralogy, especially. optic determination of rock-
forming minerals, with the polarizing microscope. Chemical and

an ai properties of rock-forming minerals. Two lectures,

labs, each week. Prerequisite: Geo 210, Spring session.

Geo 230 Chronology and Field Methods (4)

Analysis of the principles which lead to our understanding of the
spatial and temporal relationships of rock sequences, emphasizing
correlation by lithologic, biologic, and geochronologic methods. Two
lectures, one lab each week, integrated with some field work.
Prerequisite: Geo 120 or consent of instructor, Fall session.

Geo 240 Structural Geology I (3)

Descriptive structural geology with emphasis on features seen on
the outcrop and map scales, Regional structural associations. Two
lectures, one lab each week including some field work. Prerequisite:
Geo 120 or consent of instructor. Spring session.

Geo 310 Igneous Petrography and Petrology (3)
Description, properties, classification, and. occurrence of igneous
rocks; their mineralogical and chemical relationships. Examination

of major igneous rock types and series. One lecture, two labs each
week, Prerequisite: Geo 220. Fall session.

132
ee

is = sty

a Se

r
4

ee
—_—,

\
é

Geo 320 Metamorphic Petrography and Petrology (3)

Description, properties, classification, and occurrence of metamor-
phic rocks, Change of mineral assemblages with temperature and
| pressure. Examination of major metamorphic rock types and associ-
| atjons. One lecture, two labs each week. Prerequisite: Geo 220 and
i

“sn 310. Spring session.
G

eo 330 Sedimentary Petrography and Petrology (3)
; Modem continental and marine depositional environments, Prove-
; nance, dispersal, and deposition of clastic sediments. Deposition of
| chemical and biogenic sediments. Mineralogy and fabric of sedi-
ments, characteristics and recognition of paleo-environments. Two
| lectures, one lab each week, Prerequisite: Geo 220 and Geo 310,
\ Spring session,

f
1 Geo 340 Structural Geology IH (2)

An introduction to selected topics in mechanics including stress,

strain, and stress-strain relations. One two-hour lecture each week.
: f toreauisite: Geo 240, Fall session.
|*" Geo 370 Economic Geology (3)

Nature, occurrence, and origin of metallic ores, economic evapo-
; Yites and chemical sediments, coal, oil and gas. Elementary hy-
drology. Methods used in prospecting and evaluating economic de-
1] pgsits. Two lectures, one lab each week, Prerequisite: Geo 220 and
A 0. Offered biannually, in alternation with Geo 380. Spring session,

Geo 380 Paleontology (3)

Invertebrate fossils; their comparative anatomy, paleoecology,
evolution, correlation. Two lectures, one lab each week, Prerequisite:

copsent—of_instruector,_Offered—biannually—in—alternation with Geo
370. Spring session. |

eee ee

Geo 400 a see Fi veld Mapowug C C 2

TO"IMna

. wk spring term_exams finish) jin
wk pen at for_prefia tio
| i : -~Géo 23, 240. 8 (for pret —— r epeat

Geo 410 Geochemistry (4)

Origin, abundance and distribution of elements in various media.
' Physiochemical concepts of geologic processes and the application
| of thermodynamics and phase equilibria. Study of factors controlling
\y

element dispersion, and other topics. Four lectures each week.
rerequisite: Chm 121, 320, or 340. Fall session,

“Geo 440 Structural Geology III (4)
| Structural analysis, mechanisms of rock fracture and flow, inter-
pretation of regional stress and strain history from structural fea-

tures. Four lectures each week with some field work. Prerequisite:
Seo 340, Spring session.

Geo 450 Special Topics (3)
A structured program of reading and seminars leading to an in.
depth understanding of a chosen topic in geology. Prerequisite:

? consent of instructor. Students may repeat course once for an addi-
, tional three credits, Either session.

133

AYA

Geo 460 Marine Geology (3)

Geology of the ocean basins with emphasis on the morphology,
sediments, sedimentary processes, crustal structure, and evolution of

EAL ers arg,

‘the ocean floor. Three lectures each week. Prerequisite: Gey alo
f insrwctoer Fel essing cf 1330-0. canon ote be re AAfO

Seimologic basis co aaa tectonics, kinematics of plate motion, |

geometry and evolution of plate mosaics. Analysis of the structure*

and history of shields, platforms, rift valleys, plateaux, continental J

margins, island ares, transcurrent fault zones, and orogenic belts.

/Two lectures, one lab each week. Prerequisite: Geo 240 and Geo

460. Spring session,
‘Geo 480 World Historical Geology (4)

An integrated survey of the geologic history of the earth. Four
lectures each week. Prerequisite: Geq. Fall session.
Geo 497 Independent Study (3) 4ue |

A field or laboratory investigation of a chosen geologic problem,
including the writing of a research report to be undertaken during

the senior year, Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Students may
repeat course once.for an additional three credits. Either session.

DEPARTMENT OF GERMANIC LANGUAGES
AND LITERATURES

FACULTY: S. Barlau, F. Beharriell, U. Maché, E. Moore,
T. Nadar, E, Schrader-Gentry, J. Spalek, J. Strelka, J,
Winkelman.

aie

“—T

The department endeavors to expand the student’s intel-.
Jectual horizon to embrace a culture other than his/her
own. The foreign language is therefore treated both as an
end and as a means to the larger end of acquainting the
student with the foreign country and its culture.

Special Programs or Opportunities:

Extra-curricular opportunities to practice the foreign
language are afforded by language clubs and language
tables. Students in the department may participate in the
summer program of the Goethe-Institute or may qualify
for a year-abroad program at the University of Wiirzburg.

Degree Requirements for the Major in German
General Program

B.A.: At least 30 credits of German above Ger 205, in-
cluding Ger 300 a and b, 301 a, 308 a and b, 400, and a
minimum of six credits in upper division literature courses.

134

ee
Teacher Education Program

ty J
fF of
Le j
i
| i
4 ’
t

B.A.: At least 30 credits of German above Ger 205, in-
cluding Ger 300 a and b, 301 a, 308 a and b, 400, and a
minimum of six credits in upper division literature courses.

a EL Se,
‘oro ats

| | Honors Program

B.A.: Students may apply to the program by letter to the
Chairman of the Department of Germanic Languages and
| { Literatures before April 1 of the student’s sophomore year.
| Admission to the program will depend upon prior perfor-
mance of the student which can be supported by letters of
recommendation from his teachers.

Honors Requirements

7 Ger 300 a and b, 301 a, 308 a and b, 391 a and b, 400,
491; and at least 6 credits in literature at the 400 level.
i+ For each of its undergraduate major programs, the de-

. * : : t£ 2

partment recommends a course in German history as a *:; a’

| | supplement. Le

Ger 101 Elementary German (4) eo

Beginner’s course with audio-lingual approach. Emphasis on wo, rt!

. , fundamentals of German grammar, pronunciation and oral expres- «= **) '

| | sion; graded readings. Five classes, two half-hour laboratories each e |

5 week, ee
Ve

er 102 Elementary Germgh (4)

| Continuation of audio-lingual approach of Ger ior. "Reading" of =

selections from German fiction to further develop the reading skill.
' i Five classes, two half-hour laboratories each week. Prerequisite:
A 101 or placement by examination.

“7 XN
r110 Business German for Beginners (4)
Beginner’s course intended for students majoring in business,
~ economies, or related fields. Audio-lingual approach. Five classes,

Cwl 114 German Literature in English Translation (3)
See courses in Comparative Literature.

Cwl 115 Modern Dutch and Flemish Literature in Translation (3)
| See courses in Comparative Literature.

“ ° ne % ot ? . i so 5
ant woe . : ~ 4 ‘ a eT, +e canny Netagts F 13
42 ; as

two half-hour laboratories each week, |
Rope So ——- ranean fn ff Bry emmy |
| os wrmreresnen Helile (279

| vi Ger 120 Germany: East and West (3)

Exploration and discussion of various aspects of German civili-
zation since 1945, as illustrated by contemporary literature, art, and
thought. Team teaching and use of audio-visual materials such as.
films and slides. Conducted in English. i

Ger 125 Goethe to Thomas Mann in English Translation (3)
Representative authors and works from the end of the 18th cen-
tury to the beginning of the 20th. Includes: Goethe, Kleist, Heine,

‘Biichner, E.T.A. Hoffmann, Fontane, Thomas Mann, Lectures and - |
| readings in English.

Ger 180 Contemporary German Noveiists (3)

‘The representative German novelists from 1945 to the present, ,
including Béll, Grass, Frisch, Johnson, Lenz. Discussed_against-the — -—.
'————backfround of contemporary social, political and literary develop-

ments, both in West and East Germany. Lectures and discussions in _ .
English. |

Ger 201 Intermediate German (4)

; Review of grammar and syntax, followed by literary readings in
conjunction with a continuation of the audio-lingual method. Four
classes each week. One hour laboratory attendance each week is i
oe eee Prerequisite: Ger 102 or placement by examination. \ |

Mrs r 202. Intermediate German (3)
+ ish Continued literary readings in conjunction with a continued em- | |
f phasis on the audio-lingual method. Three classes each week. One : |

e hour laboratory attendance each week is recommended. Prerequisite: - !
e Gér 201 or placement by examination.

‘Ger 205— Scientific German (3) |
, | ght? Reading and technique of translation of scientific works for those | |
\ who wish to use the language in research. Prerequisite: tl sie 201 oh

agement bye eR ake P < y) 4\a
(GE 30 oN to TR rants Wess ts Te (9) ot of weetomo Pe

Civilization (3)

A survey of cultural history of Germany from the Renaissance to
the present. Particular emphasis on the impact of other European
civilizations on German life as well as on German contributions to 1 |
t Western traditions. Slides and other visual aids se ged to supple-

} ment ed goons ee onduc ef Py, n English. fF i]
ti, Li

CGE2$ wo lperndan | ava te ¢ Ane?) )
Ger 240 Yaredt ay ise in English Transiation (3)

Concentration on the works and life of one-major author, such as |_|
Franz Kafka, or one -of-the Nobel Prize winners Thomas Mann, 7
Hermann Hesse, and Heinrich Béll. The works selected will be ~< °
“chosen for their literary value as well as for their significance as a
commentary on the problems facing man in our century. Lectures — ; |

and readings in English. Course may be repeated when subject
«changes. \

4 | Ger 241 Brecht: Poet and Playwright (3)
% A study of representative dramatic and poetic works by Brecht
% with emphasis on theory and practice of “Epic Theater” 4

i
contributions to modern drama and film; discussion of biographical
* | and political aspects of Brecht’s career as reflected in his work.
Lectures and readings in English, supplemented by films and

Va rdings,

Ger 250 German Folklore and Oral Traditions (3)

A survey of German oral traditions and customs in Germany,
ss Austria and Switzerland; their origins, meanings, and reflections in
literature of the 19th and 20th centuries, with slides, films and
| | Jrsicat illustrations. Conducted in English.

ie 260 Humor and Satire in German Literature (3)
' Reading and discussion of German humorous and satiric litera-

| ture in all genres, in prose and verse. The readings and lectures are
i supplemented by discussion of the theories of humor and satire.
Pes in English,

|“Ger 270 Nordic Saga and Myth (3)

. Readings and discussion of the Poetic Edda, mythic songs of gods
and heroes, and Icelandic family sagas. Life in the pre-Christian era
Wa demonstrated by archeological discoveries. Conducted in English.

Ger 300 aandb_ Intermediate Conversation and Composition (3, 3)
| | Intensive oral practice; building of active vocabulary; conversa-
-" tion and composition based upon readings from German literature

and history. Classes meet three times per week. Prerequisite:
| Ger 202 or placement by examination including a written portion,
| Ger 300 a is a prerequisite for Ger 300 b.

Ger 301 a and b Advanced Conversation and Composition (3, 3)

_ Advanced oral practice; building of active vocabulary; conversa-
{ | tion and composition based upon readings from German literature
| and history. Classes meet three times per week. Prerequisite:

" * Ger 300 b or placement by examination including a written portion.
i 301 a is a prerequisite for Ger 301 b.

| | Ger 308a Masterworks of German Literature ! (3)
Hf Selected masterworks of German literature, mainly from the 18th

and 19th centuries. Introduction to literary analysis. Prerequisite:
| Gér 202 or placement by examination,

Ger 308 b Masterworks of German Literature II (3)
Selected masterworks of German literature from the 19th and the

a2 centuries. May be taken —Prlag | to ) Gor 808 | a. Prerequisite:
-G rt 202 or placement_by- exarfinay

ed Comma Prevester-C

ren ratio, __ 4
er ee =e (3) 4G

| A basic course in German lyric poetry concentrating on the
7 _ representative poets from Goethe to the present. Introduction to the

PER ale “Inker Business Cerman ad (u)197
! ess, 1019? Table:
ferns alsil 77 my ON

types and movements in German lyric poetry. Includes works of
Goethe, Hélderlin, Eichendorff, Heine, Rilke and others.
TR B30. CF ON or consent of instructor

‘ GER BO? O uste RYN iN? th FMEA 5 (3)

$|?
See courses in Comparative Literature. NE 44, t

Ger 391 a Junior Honors in German (4) 7279 o} $h72
Study of selected major works of German literatuee, Preparation
of project for relation to the background of their authors and
periods. Training in techniques of literary analysis, criticism, and
research by discussion, instruction in bibliographical methods, and
the writing of regular short papers. Restricted to junior German : :
majors who have been admitted to the Honors Program. if
{ Prerequisites: Ger 3808 a and b_ or concurrent enrollment... First al

Senne. gy

{ session

| Ger 391b Junior Honors in German (4)

Independent reading program in German literature. Preparation
of project for individual study. Limited to members of the German | |

fon Program who have completed Ger 391 a. Second session.

Ger 400 Growth and Structure of the German Language (3)
Introduction to phonological and morphological systems of Ger-
an. Survey of the-deVelopment and structure of German from the
Vearliest times fo the present. Lectures in English.

) += oct
er

Ger 415 Masterworks of Medieval German Literature (3)
Study of the major works and literary trends of the German’ : |
Middle Ages including selections from the Hildebrandslied,

\ Nibelungenliedt,_Parzival,_Tristan,_and_Ackermann—aus—Béhmen—as—
well as the major poets of the Minnesang. The course includes an ; |
introduction to the cultural and historical background of the period.
Prerequisites: Ger 308 a and b or consent of instructor.

Klee

«/ Ger 430 Age of Goethe ! (3)
Reading and discussion of selected works of Lessing, Goethe, |. |
Schiller and their contemporaries. Prerequisites: Ger 308 a and b i

or consent of instructor.

eer 435 Age of Goethe Il (3) i
to:

Reading and discussion of selected works of the German Roman-
tics. and their contemporaries. Prerequisites: Ger 308 a and b or
f consent of instructor.
"

Ger 440 19th Century German Prose Fiction (3)
Reading and discussion of representative novels and novellas’ by |

the principal German authors of the 19th century. Prerequisites:
er 308 a and b or consent of instructor.

\ JS 445 19th Century German Drama (3) it

- “ Reading and discussion of major dramas of the 19th century and ! |
the relevant dramatic theories. Prerequisites: Ger 308 a and b or ~~
consent of instructor.

7 /

Ger 450 20th Century German Prose Fiction (3)
Reading and discussion of representative prose works by the
| . principal German authors of the 20th century. Prerequisites: Ger

308 a-and b or consent of instructor.

wor ewes

hor 455 20th Century German Drama (3)

Reading and discussion of representative German dramatists of
ry the 20th century. Prerequisites: Ger 308 a and b or consent of
| ' instructor. |

{
{

Ger 460 Goethe’s Faust (3)
Reading of Goethe’s Faust against the background of Goethe’s
i; life: the growth of the Faust legend and of previous Faust dramas.
Poe Ger 308 a and b or consent of instructor.

7
-Ger 495 a Reading German for Graduate Students (4)

— Introduction to reading German for graduate students, followed
| by readings of gradually increasing difficulty,
i | Students passing both sessions with a grade of B or better will be
~“ certified to their major departments and to the Office of Graduate
Studies as having attained a reading proficiency at least equal to
1 |} that represented by passing the Princeton Graduate Reading Exami-

Ger 491 Senior Honors in German (4)
Writing of the Senior Honors Thesis under the direction of a

ember of the German faculty. Limited to members of the German
fone Program who have completed Ger 391 b. Either session.

nation. Prerequisite: admission to graduate study.

_“@er495-b Reading German for Graduate Students (4)
Fr, Continuation of Ger 495 a with readings of increasing difficulty,
The last part of the second session will be devoted to reading un-
. edited scholarly and scientific texts selected from the humanities,
> + science, and social science fields.
Students passing both sessions with a grade of B or better will be
* certified to their major departments and to the Office of Graduate
| Studies as having attained a reading proficiency at least equal to
).. that represented by passing the Princeton Graduate Reading

va
| er 497 Independent Studies in German (3-6)
| Projects in selected areas of German Studies, with regular

progress reports. Prerequisite: consent of department chairman.
May be repeated once for credit when topics differ.

a _. See ee —~ _ e. _

Oe
etry

139

= DEPARTMENT OF HISPANIC AND ITALIAN STUDIES

FACULTY: A. Baker, A. Berenguer, M. Bieder, R. Bosch,
C. Brakel, A. Carlos, F. Carrino, R. Castagnino, S. E.
Schyfter, D. Fachard, F. Frank, L. Jenaro-MacLennan,
FE, C. Munro, C. Nepaulsingh, R. Osuna, J. M. Polo de
Bernabé, G. Rimanelli, R. Schmidt, A. Zitelli.

The Department of Hispanic and Italian Studies expects
its students to become highly proficient in speaking, under-
standing, reading, and writing the foreign language as well
as to develop a thorough knowledge of and an appreciation

for the literature_and_civilization.Proficiency-in_ language? ;

skills is regarded not only as an end in itself but also as a
means of studying a foreign culture, The department offers
full programs leading to the B.A. in Spanish and Italian,
and a Portuguese curriculum sufficient to permit an under-
graduate a second field sequence.

All students wishing to enter language courses must take
the placement examination administered by the depart-
ment,

Language majors normally take, in their junior year, the
proficiency examination in their respective languages ad-
ministered by the New York State Department of Educa-
tion.

cpa enties + oet

Special Programs or Opportunities:

Through the Honors program students are encouraged
to undertake carefully supervised independent study.

The major in Inter-American Studies offered by the
Center for Inter-American Studies allows for a concentra-
tion in Spanish. The Department of Hispanic and Italian
Studies also participates in interdisciplinary studies in con-
junction with programs in Linguistics, Puerto Rican Stud-
ies, the School of Education, and the Departments of Art,
Classics, Comparative and World Literature, History, and
Music.

A year-abroad program was initiated at the International
Institute in Madrid, Spain in 1970, Pre-entrance summer

‘programs are offered in Italy and Spain. For more detailed

information, see “Office of International Programs—-Study
Abroad Programs.” Use of the foreign language and the
exchange of ideas are fostered through language dormi-
tories, language clubs, colloquia, lectures, and other de-
partment activities.

140

ie eee

Penn

'
ey

1 '
eee — —naerenree

Degree Requirements for the Major in Italian *
General Program

B.A.: A minimum of 33 credits including Ita 207 a and
b, Ita 223, Ita 331 a and b, Ita 301, Ita 421. Twelve addi-
tional credits must be at the 300 level or above including
three credits of literature courses at or above the 400 level.

Teacher Education Program

B.A.: A minimum of 33 credits including Ita 207 a and
b, Ita 223, Ita 301, Ita 311 a and b, Ita 421. Twelve addi-
tional credits must be at the 300 level or above including
three credits of literature courses at or above the 400 level.

N.B. Lin 206 may be taken as part of the major se-
quence in both the General and Teacher Education Pro-

Ita 101 aandb Elementary Italian (4, 4)

Beginner’s course with audio-lingual approach; fundamentals of
language structure and sounds; emphasis on correct pronunciation
and oral expression; graded readings. Classes meet four times per
week, plus two required homework periods in the language labora-
tory. Prerequisite: For Ita 101 a, for beginners: none; for students

et ges

sect ene re:

weer eet

some ne fee

with high school Italian: placement. For Ita 101 b: 101 a or
placement.

‘ita 101 c Intensive Elementary Italian (8).

An intensive one-session elementary language course covering
both 101 a and 101 b. Fundamental language skill with primary
emphasis on audio-lingual skills. Meets ten hours per week, includ-

ing’ one hour of supervised laboratory work. Prerequisite: For be-
gifnors: none; for students with high school Italian: placement.

Ita 102 aand b_ Intermediate Italian (4, 3)

Modern Italian readings: Review of Italian grammar, composition
anf conversation. Prerequisite: For Ita 102 a: 101 b or 101 c or
placement; for Ita 102 b: 102 a or placement.

Ita_102 ¢_ Intensive Intermediate Italian (7) __

An intensive one-session intermediate language course covering

both 102 a and 102 b. Primary focus on the development of reading
skills and the improvement of audio-lingual skills. Meets eight hours
per week including one hour of supervised laboratory work.
Prerequisite: Ita 101 b or 101 c or placement.

*No degree will be awarded in this program after August, 1978.
141

ae eee

we te rete tt teen

1
= a a ee

== acer ——s

f
TE

ita 207 aand bs Intermediate Conversation and Composition (3, 3)
Primary emphasis on the active skills of speaking and writing.
Prerequisite: For Ita 207 a: 102 b or 102 c or placement; for Ita

207 b: 207 Pe ay

3/%, Li ner CC perrenca (@)
ta 223 > introduction to inert Methods (3)

Textual exposition of readings selected according to genre, with

an introduction to literary terminology and writing. Prerequisite:
Ita 102 b or 102 c or placement.

Cwl 116 Italian Literature in English Translation
See Cwl 116.

Ita 301 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3)

Intensive practice in speaking and writing Italian. Prerequisite:
Ita 207b* or placement.

ita311a General View of Italian Literature (3).
Survey of Italian literature from its origins to the end of the

‘Renaissance. Prerequisite: Ita 223* or consent of department

chairman.

lta 311 b General View of Italian Literature (3)
Survey of Italian literature from the end of the Renaissance to

the present. Prerequisite: Ita 223* or consent of department chair-
man.

lta315a_ Italian Civilization (3)

Study of fundamental aspects of Italian life, art, and thought
during the Middle Ages and the Renaissance. ~Rrerequisite :

ip 20 *-or placemen:
Lt too Wferatnar C S$
HEA Se Teli nano Wieatonls) EE 6/78)

Continuation of Ita 315 a from the Baroque period to the present
time, Prerequisite: Ita 270 b* or placement.

ita 397 Independent Study in Italian Gay ~2.)

Study by a, student in an area of special interest not treated in
currently offered courses. Work performed under direction of a
professor chosen by the student on a topic approved by the depart-

ment. May be repeated once with special departmental approval.
Prerequisite: Ita 311 b.

Ita 401 Advanced Language (3)
Designed to give students intensive practice in conversation, dic-
tion, and translation. Study of passages from modern Italian authors

for style and shades of expression. Prerequisites: Ita 301 or
lacement.

Ita 421 Dante (3)

‘Introduction to the Divina Commedia. Conducted in Italian.
Required of all majors in Italian. Prerequisite: Ita 311 a or consent
of department chairman.

*Grade of S/C or better is required for the prerequisite unless
waived by the chairman of the department.

142

Tle ee
lS rei
bee eee

Ita 435 = Il Trecento (3)

- Introduction to the literature of the period with special emphasis
i on Petrarch’s Canzoniere and Boccaccio’s Decamerone. Prerequisite:
» Jta 81] a or consent of department chairman.

ta 441 a The ltalian Renaissance (Part I) (3)
| A study of Italian Renaissance, with emphasis on the individual

i i authors as well as on their influence on other western cultures and
on the thinking of the following centuries. Part I: from Petrarch to
Valla to Boiardo and to the circle of Lorenzo de’ Medici. The new

critical spirit and the search beyond all traditional boundaries.
| Prerequisite: Ita 311 a,

|
1 |. Ita441b The Italian Renaissance (Part II) (3)
I Continuation of Ita 441 a. From Machiavelli, Ariosto, and Guic-

ciardini to Cellini, Bandello, Vasari, and Tasso. Prerequisite; Ita

+ 311 a or consent of department chairman.

Tore tree Tel
'

f 461 From Baroque to Arcadia (3)

A study of literature, trends, and ideas of the 17th and 18th
centuries, from Galileo to. Marino to Vico, and to Goldoni, Parini,

cm ata
i
if TOS eters pe

nd—Alfieri_Prerequisite:_Ita—311_b—or consent of department
chairman.

lta 471‘ Italian Literature of the 19th Century | (3)
; From Neo-Classicism to Romanticism. A study of the prose and
| : poetry of the early 19th century; in particular, the works of Monti,

I Foscolo, Leopardi, and Manzoni. Prerequisite: Ita 311 b or consent
- of department chairman.

Ita 472 ‘Italian Literature of the 19th Century II (3)
A study of the 19th Century prose and poetry, in particular the
works of Carducci, Pascoli, D’Annunzio, and Verga. Prerequisite:

Eo Ita 311 b_or_consent_of_department chairman, - — —- ee

Ita 481 The Italian Novel of the 20th Century (3)
} A study of the Italian novel from the beginning of the century to
' tHe present, Prerequisite: Ita 311 b,.
I

Survey of the various trends and movements in contemporary
Italian poetry and drama, Prerequisite: Ita 311 b.

| | 143

| ; “Jta 482 litalian Poetry and Drama of the 20th Century (3)

L
qu

/ Portuguese

Por 101 a and b Elementary Portuguese (4, 4)

_ Piscean
““ Por 102 Intermediate Portuguese (4)
Continued intensive work with the four language skills, giving

j Por 101 b or placement.

JS Por 107 a andb_ Intermediate Conversation and Composition (3, 3)

Primary emphasis on the active skills of speaking and writing.

Prerequisite: For Por 107 a: 102 or placement; for Por 107 b:
107 a or placement.

Por 211 Introduction to Portuguese Literature (3)
Reading of major works of Portuguese literature from the Middle
Ages to the present. Concentration on such masters as Camées, Gil
‘Vicente, Garrett, Ega de Queiroz, Fernando Pessoa. Prerequisite:
f Por 102 or placement.

4 Por 212 Introduction to Brazilian Literature (3)
Reading of major works of Brazilian literature from the Colonial

/special emphasis-to-readings.Gonducted-in Portuguese, Prerequisite:

hy ee et ey

|__- -period_until_the-present,—Prerequisite: Por_t02-or placement.

f
“f Por 221 Introduction to Literary Methods (3)
Textual exposition of readings, selected according to genre with
-an introduction to literary terminology and writing. Poetry and
i drama. Prerequisite: Por 102 or placement.

f | |
xf Por 222 Introduction to Literary Methods (3)
Textual exposition of readings, selected according to genre with
an introduction to literary terminology and writing. Prose genres.

' Prerequisite: Por 102 or placement. 7 HB .)
| Por 397 Independent Study in prugvn

| Study by a student in an area of special ifterest not treated in
7 courses currently offered. Work performed under direction of a
professor chosen by the student on a topic approved by the depatt-

ment. May be repeated once with special departmental approval..
Prerequisite: Por 102 or placement.

Degree Requirements for the Major In Spanish

General Program

B.A.: A minimum of 35 credits including Spn 106 a,
Spn 107 a and b, Spn 123, Spn 211 a and b, Spn 301,

144

we
i
sere eri
© a Sates ciememen ont wT”

HS ee

| Studies—with emphasis in Spanish (B.A. degree). A mini-

/ |

Spn 305 and 15 additional credits. Twelve credits must be
| at the 300 level or above, including a minimum of six
credits of literature courses at or above the 400 level.

Teacher Education Program

B.A.: A minimum of 35 credits including Spn 106 a,
Spn 107 a and b, Spn 123, Spn 21] a and b, Spn 301,
Spn 305 and 15 additional credits. Twelve credits must be
at the 300 level or above, including a minimum of six
credits of literature courses at or above the 400 level.

N.B. Lin 206 may be taken as part of the major se-

quence in both the General and Teacher Education pro-
grams,

eet

General Program in Inter-American Studies

Combined major and second field in Inter-American

mum of 56 credits to include 27 credits of Spanish above
. 102 b, Por 101 a and b and Ias 400. Eighteen credits of
| area studies to include His 100 a and b or His 131 a and b,

i AM ice
.

———
ee See:

+7 — ]07a-and b, Spn 123, Spn-211-a- and b;Spn-301, ‘Spn 305,--

a a a

\ 366_a and b, three additional credits of Latin American

History as advised, and three credits as advised from |
» courses in Social Sciences or Philosophy dealing with Latin
; America.

. Honors Program

B.A.: Admission to the Honors Program is by letter of
application submitted to the chairman of the Department |
of Hispanic and Italian Studies by April 1 of the student’s
| sophomore year and subsequent approval by the Depart-
| ment of the Honors Committee’s nomination. The program
requires a minimum of 35 credits including Spn 106 a, Spn

| pn 391 a and b, Spn 491, and at least three credits in
; literature courses at or above the 400 level.

, of Spn 101 aandb Elementary Spanish (4, 4)

Beginner’s course with audio-lingual approach; fundamentals of

language structure and sounds; emphasis on correct pronunciation
and oral expression; graded readings. Classes meet four times per
week; plus two required homework periods in the language labora-
tory. Prerequisite: For Spn 101 a, for beginners: none; for students

i with high school Spanish: placement; for Spn 101 b: 101 a or
placement.

145

| | placement,

_ J

| / Spn 10ic Intensive Elementary Spanish (8)

An intensive one-session elementary language course covering
both Spn 101 a and 101 b. Fundamental language skills with pri-
mary emphasis on audio-lingual skills. Meets ten hours per week,
including one hour of supervised laboratory work. Students required
fo make extensive additional use of laboratory facilities.

Prerequisites: For beginners: none; for students with high school
Spanish: placement.

Spn 102 a_ Intermediate Spanish (4)
Continued intensive work in language skills of listening, speaking,
reading, and writing, with special emphasis on reading and the

writing of short compositions. Prerequisite: Spn 10] b or 101 c¢ or

Spn 102 b_ Intermediate Spanish (3)

Continued work with the four skills as in Spn 102 a, emphasis
jon the reading of more difficult material. Short compositions and
i discussions in Spanish. Prerequisite: Spn 102 a or placement.

Spn 102 c_ Intensive Intermediate Spanish (7)

An intensive one-session intermediate language course covering
both Spn 102 a and 102 b. Primary focus on the development of
reading skills and the improvement of audio-lingual skills. Meets
eight hours per week, including one hour of supervised laboratory
work, Presentation and review of grammatical structures appropriate
to these skills. Prerequisite: Spn 101 b or 101 ec or placement.

Spn 105 Spanish for Native Speakers (4)

Especially designed for the native-speaker with little formal
study of the language. Topics will include reading, spelling,
grammar, composition, vocabulary building, with attention to in-

dividual needs. Five meetings per week including required labora-

tory. Prerequisite: Placement or consent of instructor.

Spn 106 a and b= Intermediate Conversation and Oral
Grammar (2, 2)
Primary emphasis on the active skill of speaking. To be taken
simultaneously with Spn 107 a and b. Either or both terms of this
course may be waived upon demonstration of sufficient oral skill.

. Prerequisite: For Spn 106 a: 102 b or 102 c or placement; for

Spn 106 b: 106 a or placement.

Spn 107 a and b_ Intermediate Composition and Written
Grammar (2, 2)

Primary emphasis on the active skill of writing. To be taken
simultaneously with Spn 106 a and b. Either or both terms of this
course may be waived upon demonstration of sufficient writing skill.
Prerequisite: For Spn 107 a: 102 b or 102 ec or placement; for
Spn 107 b: 107 a or placement.

Cwl 112 Hispanic Literature in English Translation (3)
See Cwl 112.

146

6 ee

ASC

“oa we

eon, eye,
cy J

Spn 123 Introduction to Literary Methods (3)
Textual exposition of readings, selected according to genre with
i an introduction to literary terminology and writing. Prerequisites:
| t Spn 102 b or 102 c or placement.

a el

J pn211a Representative Spanish Authors (3)

Survey of Spanish literature from its origins to the end of the
17th century. Prerequisite: Spn 123.

Sem ‘
= — 4

| Spn 2116 Representative Spanish Authors (3)
. Survey of Spanish literature from the beginning of the 18th
1 ee to the present, Prerequisite: Spn 123,

a ee
—=:

Spn 301 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3)
An intensive study of the language, with frequent short composi-
' tions. Either session. Prerequisite: Spn 106 b and Spn 107 b, or
| | pee
Spn 302 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3)
An intensive study of the language, with special atterxition to

nalysis of construction and to organization, expression and _ style
in themes, Either session. Prerequisite: Spn 301 or placement.

Te
i

Spn 305 Spanish Phonetics (2)
} Spanish speech sounds in prose and verse. Drill in conversational
| speech, intonation, and the analysis of sound production. Extensive
A use is made of recordings. Either session. Prerequisite: Spn 102 b

/* 102°¢ or placement.

\/ Spn 311 Readings in Early Spanish Literature (3)
t Selected readings in Spanish literature from the 12th through the
15th century, with emphasis on both language and literature.

_/ Prerequisite: Spn 123.
| | Spn 313. Spanish Civilization (3)

go study of the unique character of the Spanish peoples and an |
of amination of the various aspects of Spanish culture through the
S

eS aaa

9th century.

pn 314 a, b (Jst 3714 a, b) Lilerature of the Spanish-Portuguese

Jews and New Christians (3, 3)
Same as Jst 314 a, b.

ty,

fs Spn 315 Hispanic Civilization of the 20th Century (3)
A study of the cultural manifestations of the great political and
social changes which have taken place in Spain and Spanish

} America in the 20th century. A different country or group of coun-
a will be studied each session. May be repeated once for credit.

Spn 316 a Spanish American Literature to 1888 (3)
: Survey of literary movements in Spanish America. Selected
| readings, lectures, discussions, and reports on collateral readings.
Prerequisite: Spn 123.

147

gy 316 b Spanish American Literature from 1888 to 1940 (3)

Survey of literary movements in Spanish America from 1888 to

1940. Selected readings, lectures, discussions, and reports on col-
oon readings. Prerequisite: Spn 123.

Spn 317 Latin American Civilization (3)

: A study of Spanish American cultures and institutions from the
joe to the 20th century.

Spn 321 Spanish Drama (3)
Analysis of plays from various periods with emphasis on the

specific characteristics of the genre, Prerequisite: Spn 123.
_f Spn-323— Spanish_Poetry_(3)

| Spn 324 The Spanish Novel (3)
Analysis of novels from various periods with emphasis on the

fons characteristics of the genre, Prerequisite: Spn 123.
pees characteristics of the genre. Prerequisite: Spn 123.

Spn 325 Spanish Short Fiction (3)
Analysis of selections from various periods with emphasis on the
| specific characteristics of the genre. Prerequisite: Spn 123.

' Spn 333 Don Quijote de la Mancha (3)

A study of Don Quijote, including consideration of its importance
in world literature. Readings and discussion in English. Majors are
fexpected to read the novel in Spanish.

‘7 Spn-344—Womerr in-Hispanic-Literature-(3)

Analysis of poetry from various periods with emphasis on the

Images of women as reflected in diverse works in Hispanic
literature. Readings and discussions in English.

6pn_391a Junior Honors in Spanish (4)
Stucdty~of,. elected major works in Spanish literature _ in their en-

,, tirety and with re: ation to wae background of_their “futhors and
~ periods, Training in tech NGS of ii eranyMialysis, oriticng! :

research bymadliscussion ingauedO ng pibliogzaphicaleichiantaet

the writing of requltit”’s) tort papers. Rektei ¢. to junior Span 7
majors whelfive been admitted to the Honors 2, Acceptable
as a 400 level literature course for the major requiremen ;

h
S| Prerequisites: Spn 211 a* and 211 b*. First session.
=

Sen 391b Junior Honors in Spanish (4)

Readinewarogram in areas of Spanish literature ees
project or indivi Wet . Lim iad ; mbers of the Bpipish
Honors ¥ ETT iia reapers mE ees Ua bat ©: Sie zat VCcep ab 1 Titheria

; \400 level fférature course for the major"? rope gent, Second
| session. ,

| Spn 397 Independent Study in Spanish (1-4)
I Study by a student in an area of special interest not treated in
courses currently offered. Work performed under direction of a pro-
fessor chosen by the student on a topic approved by the department.

May be repeated once with special departmental approval.
Prerequisite: Spn 211 a or Spn 211 b.

148

1
7 J J |
| i Spn 401 Advanced Language (3) |
Designed to give students intensive practice in conversation,
diction and translation. Study of passages from modem Spanish

| authors for style and shades of expression, Either term.
| i Prerequisite: Spn 301* or 302 or placement. |

J spn 402 Spanish Linguistics: Morphology and Syntax (3)
zt A survey of the structure of the Spanish language in the light of
| | current linguistic theory. Emphasis will be on the fields of
morphology and syntax. Prerequisite: Spn 305 or consent of

instructor.
J C2)

| { Spn 403 Spanish for Teachers. 9)

f An intensive course in Spanish grammar with the needs of the
k beginning teacher in mind. Emphasis on those aspects of grammar |

-which cause the most difficulty to English-speaking students, A 1

quarter course. Meets four hours per week. Prerequisite: Spn 301 :

| f placement. (3)
| om i iC 3
Spn 404 Advanced 4 Sept ¢ pate ynow #1 ‘plomp

Spn 405 Evolution of the Spanish Language (3)

ry -Acivamecd~eonsovatin ‘actice based on topics of TTispinie 5? Bin
7 culturea.Attiarter cg rst Moots 1Wice weekly tor a-total of a
| poenerneses ante Spn 30L-or*placeme Newelearyo:

Development of modern Spanish from Vulgar Latin; medieval

| | re phonology and morphology.

pn 414 «Literature of the Hispanic Caribbean (3)
A study of selected major writers of Cuba, the Dominican Re-
public, and Puerto Rico of the 19th and 20th centuries. Special
; consideration of literature as a reflection of situations and problems

\ eculiar to the Hispanic Caribbean. Conducted in Spanish.
_ Prevost: Spn 123, | j

| Spn 416 Spanish American Literature 1940-present (3)
it Survey of literary movements in Spanish America from 1940 to |

present. Major emphasis on the most recent developments in |
: pom American literature. Prerequisite: Spn 211 a or 211 b.

Spn 420 20th Century Women Writers (3)

A study of the contributions of women writers to 20th Century :
Hispanic literatures. Special attention to the manner in which ;
| — -women -perceive— reality -in- a- male-oriented world.—Prerequisite:. ——.;

f ye 211 b.

Spn 444 Comedy and Satire in Hispanic Literature (3)
Study of comic and satiric literature. Discussion on the theory of

laughter, comedy, the absurd and the grotesque. Prerequisite: Spn
11 a or Spn 211 b.

—— a,
ape oe

Spn 445 The Anti-Hero in Hispanic Literature (3)
; A study of the anti-hero as a protagonist in Hispanic literature.
i Prerequisite; Spn 211 a or Spn 211 b.

149
e

JS |

Spn 446 Literature of Social Protest (3) : ; |
An examination of several major works of Hispanic literature

which are interesting as literature and also as expression of social
pe Prerequisite: Spn 211 a or Spn 211 b.
=)

pn 481 Spanish Literature of the 20th Century (3)
fh Study of the Generation of 798 within its historical and philo-/

ophiec context. Prerequisite: Spn 211 b.*

pn 482 Spanish Literature of the 20th Century (3)
J Study of contemporary Spanish ric from the Generation of

°98 until today. Prerequisite: Spn ATE |
Spi 4a Libs og ces nD, BEMPOAR (UY 12/77 :
“Wir me ol wba .eniOl_HOGetser ee STAG RGILeCHOR Li “membéts yb

AOU ty. Wi ivsrWac wel]. ALAS, ‘of the Spanish | Lowe’
Progaetf’who have completed Spn 391 b.* Either tem” /2 2/79

meme, 39> 7
DEPARTMENT OF HISTO |

FACULTY: T. Barker, G. Barker-Benfield, T. Beck, D.
Bin, K. Birr, A. Ekirch, M. Elbow, D, Ellinwood, L. |
Fields, J. Giovinco, J. Hahner, R. Hoffman, R. Kendall, :
f S. Kim, H, P. Krosby, D. Liedel, J. Monfasani, C. New-
: bold, H. Price, W. Reedy, W. Roberts, B. Solnick, I. Steen, Bf

C, Tucker, R. Wesser, L. Wittner, J. Zacek.

The objective of the department is to provide its stu-
i——dents-with-a_thorough grounding in our cultural heritage
seen from both social scientific and humanistic perspec-
tives, The department prepares undergraduates for gradu- |
ate work in history, professional schools such as law, sec-
ondary school teaching, and a variety of vocations which it
require a strong liberal education. \
To accomplish its objectives, the department offers full
programs leading to the B.A., the M.A., and the Ph.D. In
addition, it participates in several inter-departmental pro- * |
grams including Asian Studies, Social Studies, Urban Af- {|
fairs, Women’s Studies, Inter-American Area and Language
Studies and Russian and East European Studies. Students 1

{

interested in ancient history, African history, Afro-Amer-
ican history, Jewish history, or Puerto Rican history are
referred to the Classics Department, the Department of
African and Afro-American Studies, the Department of ii
Judaic Studies, and the program in Puerto Rican Studies, iy

* Grade of S, C or better is required for the prerequisite unless
waived by the chairman of the department.

150

See
i

a 4

: |
i.
§
L.
f
a

;

_14 — American, or. European history);.a minimum of six_credits. ___!
| I

Special Programs or Opportunities JS

The department encourages its majors to participate in
those international programs relevant to their particular
historical interests. For more detailed information, see
heading “Office of International Programs.”

Degree Requirements for the Major in History
General Program

B.A.: A minimum of 36 credits in history including: a
minimum of 18 credits in one of the designated fields of
concentration (American, Asian, Ibero-American, or Euro-
pean history); a minimum of six credits in courses at the
300 level or above outside the field of concentration; a
minimum of three credits in a history colloquium or His-
tory 498.

(Combined major and second field in Inter-American
Studies with emphasis in History); His 100 a and b, or 131
a and b, 366 a and b, and 12 additional credits of History
relating to Latin America as advised; three credits as ad-

dealing with Latin America; Ias 400; seven credits of in-

termediate and advanced conversational Spanish, Spn 316
a and b, Spn 317, and Por 101 a and b.

Teacher Education Program

B.A.: (Major in History and second field in Social Stud-
ies); 60 credits including: A major of 36 credits in history
including: a minimum of 18 credits in one of the desig-
nated fields of concentration (American, Asian, Ibero-

each in American history and European history; a mini-
mum of six credits in courses at the 300 level or above
outside the field of concentration; a minimum of three
credits in a history colloquium or History 498; A second
field of 24 credits including: Eco 100 a and b; Gog IOI or
102, and three additional credits of Geography; Soc 115
and three additional credits of Sociology or Anthropology;
six credits of Political Science as advised.

151

ised_from_courses_in_the-Social_Scieneos—orPhilosophy ——_

Other Degree Requirements

Students seriously interested in graduate work in history |
re strongly urged to develop a competency in at least one
modern foreign language. :
His 100 aand b American Political and Social History (3, 3) Z
A survey of American history from early times to the present
with emphasis on the development of our political, constitutional,

economic, social and cultural institutions. Either session may be
aken without the other.

His 131 aandb History of European Civilization (3, 3)
A survey of the political, economic, social, and cultural history of

he West-from-the—breakup-—of-the Roman. Empire-to the—present— -- -

+- out-the-other,

S wick the student to an analysis of the logic of historical thought.

his course is designed for freshmen, Either session may be taken
without the other.

His a’ éulteioomey Latin America (3)

A survey of Latin American backgrounds followed by study of
the social, economic, and political problems of Latin America since
World War II. Particular attention to the phenomena of social

His 176 a and b_ Introduction to Asian History (3, 3)

First session: An introduction to the cultures of South, Southeast,
and East Asia, and the development of their major institutions and
cultural patterns; interactions between cultures. Second session. The
changing nature of Asian societies since the 18th century, in inter-

frase economic nationalism, and revolution.

eee att ee

action with Europe and pe Either session may be taken with-

His 193 Introduction to History (3)

An examination of the analytical, non-speculative, problems of
historical inquiry, explanation, and argument. The topics of ques-
tion-framing, verification, generalization and narration are empha-
sized. Selected readings, discussion and critical papers will intro-

3
His eee Histo: a New York State to the Civil War (3)
A study of the social, economic, and political development of
New York State from the Revolution to the onset of the Civil War.

PaaG... Women in European History (3) 0, lobe 2/77
A survey PN Aend wgle..of women in major period eto n

rede CD

and social leadorsbiammaetetentiniial Tetemashins.. eno ¥

is 286 a and b (Aas 286 a and b) History of Africa (3,3)

First session: Africa from pre-historic times to 1800 with em-
phasis on sub-Saharan Africa, the development of indigenous states,
and their response to Western and Eastern contacts.

Second session: Africa since 1800: exploration, the end of the
slave trade, the development of interior states, European partition,
the Colonial period, and the rise of independent Africa. Either
session may be taken without the other.

ffs 220 - HisTORY of Amer. Medcing (3)

history with emphast Ol Oita Stall seamnaeemt” Iniience, o Vif

| a? : 4 B3OR- tisk. ef Garcuda, to 1906 (3)

AIS 326 B* 20" Cuntuny Conor (3)
48

Ais 293 History of Women in the Americas (3)

A historical survey of the role of women in the United States,
Canada, and Latin America from colonial times to the present, with
emphasis on 5123 intellectual, political developments, and feminist

394 (2
hn m4 soll Fence Approaches to History (3)

>i A study of selected topics in recent history which combines the
" traditional’ historical approach with whatever is applicable from
sociology, psychology, anthropology, and economics.

rw ee ey
po

~ CONCENTRATION IN THE HISTORY OF THE.
Lf f UNITED STATES
His

305 Colonial America to 1 763 (3)
A survey of major aspects and events in the colonial period, with
/ particular emphasis on the growth of uniquely American culture and

iistitutions.
Ar BER of Bmerican Revolution, 17 63- ee ile

A detailed survey of the American Revolution, the or unerne Yeas
constitutions, and the historic experiment in federal-republicanism;

| the clash of ideas and interest on the rapidly changing domestic

— /," foreign scenes; the search for unity in the new nation.

es.
—oooo

ee ee

., “His 307 Nationalism and Reform 1815-1848 (3) :
A survey of the growth of nationalism, the emergence of a reform |

| impulse, the age of individualism and egalitarianism, the develop- |
—_——ment-of-the second American party system, technological, cultural, i

Jn social change. | |
i
His 308 Division and Reunion 1848-1877 (3) 1
4 Causes of the American Civil War, the war on military and

divilian fronts, and Reconstruction and its aftermath.

Se Cer eee cee

/ | ~fHis 309 The Emergence of Modern America, 1877-1900 (3)
| A detailed survey of the complexity and diversity of the period
emphasizing the impact of industrialization, urbanization, and mass

immigration upon politics, diplomacy, agriculture, labor, religion,
_ fand thought,

His 310 aandb The United States in the 20th Century (3, 3)
An intensive survey of United States history from 1900 to the
_ present, with special emphasis on political and_ social. developments. _.. . -
—| — -First session: The Progressive Era, World War I, the Twenties, and |
| . the Great Depression. Second session: F,.D.R. oad the New Deal, |
World War II and the Cold War, McCarthyism, and politics and
society since the 1950’s, Either session may be taken without the

her
_ |
| | Aus 322 aandb American Social History (3, 3)
_ A historical survey and analysis of American society with atten-
tion to immigration, ethnic groups, labor problems, changing class
and family structure, population and mobility patterns. Either ses-
; is may be taken without the other.

IS 50 Tboriat hatin Amurica teiio’s) \ 3.
iv a6) Culture in the Belle Epoque (3) a

2 } Eavtallecs ak wv Cultured Wier |
Aus 36 » OF fos torn Europe :

Sus 325 The Quest for Equality in United States History (3)
An examination of social and political movements seeking a more
egalitarian social order, among them abolitionism, communitari-
anism, trade unionism, Populism, anarchism, socialism, racial egali-

f eo and feminism, 3
His 356 The World at War, 1939-45 (3) _

For description, see listing under Concentration in European —
History. |

12, Lh
His Sutatitaleas Bas, (277 of American Foreign Policy (3, 3) Ea
i A historical survey of our relations with other countries from the
4 Revolution to the present; the formulation of American foreign
i ~ policy and its execution by diplomatic and other means; the role of
domestic affairs and of social, cultural, and economic contacts_with ——.—-

other countries in shaping our foreign relations. Prerequisite:
His 100.

es rete

a a

. His 415 a and b American Economic History (3, 3)

/ The development of the American economy arid its impact on
American life and society. The first session carries the survey into
the second half of the 19th century. The second session carries

: own to the present. Prerequisite: His 100 or Eco 100.
|

Braeb 13/9 2? | | |
His sgieweqeres story of the American City (3, 3) }
A. chronological and topical survey of the American urban scene,
- with emphasis on the causes and consequences of urban growth, the ’
similariti¢s and differences among various cities, and the attempts
; . to fulfill the needs of an urban environment. The first session begins
id in the colonial period and traces developments to the second half of

__. the 19th century. The second _session_examines—the—urban—scene—————
i. yan the latter 19th century to the present. =

His 419 (Aas 419) Afro-American History (3) . | |
A. survey of Negro life and history in the United States; the con-

| tributions of Negroes to the development of American cultural and _

| | economic life; recént trends and social dynamics.

\ |

His 425 a American Intellectual History to 1860 (3) | t
Key ideas and significant patterns of thought in American life:
, Puritanism, the American Enlightenment, nationalism, transcen-

dentalism, democracy, and reform. Prerequisite: His 100 a and b or
' Eng 270 a. |

His 425 b American Intellectual History Since 1860 (3)

Key ideas and significant patterns of thought in American life: TT
the impact of economic expansion, Darwinian evolution, pragma- | |
tism, war and changing ideologies of liberalism, progressivism and ft

Soman ve Prerequisite: His 100 a and b or Eng 270 b.

His 426 Political and Social History of New York State | tf
Since 1875 (3) ;

The interaction of state and national political forces, parties, and
personalities will be examined against the background of the signifi-
cant social changes of the © period. Prerequisite: His 100 b, or 226 |:
at equivalent. | |

vhs 365 ath War +Sociedty (3,3) as

hm Cun trad Amor, + he |
IS 369 AT dies since 1870. (3) 12h |

HIS 37) ‘Seuih inmnica Since 1810

4 cor oad

| 7 /
| His 331 {2/77 of the American South (3)

’ The South from the Revolutionary Period to the present with

; © accent on the 19th century when the distinctive characteristics and

institutions were developed which influenced Southem attitudes
toward major questions of national policy.

The following colloquia are limited to undergraduate
| students and may be taken only with the consent of the
| | instructor, Specific topics to be ‘examined in the colloquia
_will be announced at the time the courses are offered, and
. Students may obtain a list of topics from the History De-

partment at the time of preregistration, Colloquia may be
repeated for credit.

whe 480 Colloquium in American History (3)

' wf is 484. Colloquium in Approaches to History (3)
"he 485 Colloquium in Comparative and Cross Cultural History (3)
i

| f is 497 Independent Study in History (2-4)
: : Directed reading and conferences on selected topics in history,
L + roroquiaite: consent of instructor and department chairman. Can

hi repeated for credit,

Sri 498 Introduction to Historical Research (3)
Introduction to methods of historical research. Conferences, dis-

| * cussions, and_a_research_paperPrerequisite:—consent—olinsttuctor,

CONCENTRATION IN EUROPEAN HISTORY

‘igshiG.gand b The Middle Ages (3, 3) Ve Keres
\ First Se otra mir Of Vides Mtrope during the Earl
eS iddle Ages, from ca, 50008 ca. "Pete in all gnajor aspects. Secon¢
| session: The Ligma@ynot Western Europe dure webbie Middl

ee OU to 1300; in all major aspects. MUNno deo il?a

' Mis 340 Europe 1648-1789 (3)

. The 17th century crisis; 18th century society and government;
| ; origins of the French Revolution.
V4

His 342 a Europe in the Age of Romanticism and Revolution (3).
The history of Europe during the early 19th century with em-
-f- -phasis: on the-struggle- against the -Métternich system and the part
' Jo by the romantic movement in this struggle.

His 342 b Europe During the Age of Realism (3)
The history of Europe during the late 19th century with empha-

[ sig on industrialism, realism in culture, Darwinism, nationalism, and
{
| iyhperialism.

is344a Europe, 1914-1939 (3)
_* The First World War and the peace treaties; reparations, war
| debts, inflation, and depression; the rise of social democracy,
| va ascism, and Communism; the international crises of the 1930's.

HIS 390 Topics in Amuérs Con Wrako rey 15K

| a 39) Tepics in European Wistory 27
His 494 Special Projues wm History |

re 344 b Europe Since 1939 (3)

The Second World War and postwar settlements; reonustracten
and refugee problems; divided Europe and the Cold War; common
markets and integration attempts; current social, economic, political,

and security problems.
J His 346 a and b The History of England (3, 3)

First session: The historical development of English society and
government from early times to the 17th century. Second session:
The history of the United Kingdom and of the British Empire and ©
Commonwealth from the 17th century to the present. Either ses-

J sion may be taken without the other,

His 349 a History of France to 1815 (3) |
France from—its-origins to _1815- with-an-emphasis- on™ — eee

of 1643, .
./ His 349 b History of France Since 1815 (3)

A survey of the history of France from 1815 to the Fifth Re-
, public, with attention to the political, social, economic, and cultural
Prone within France during this period.

“ His 351 aand b History of Germany (3, 3) : i
First session: Germany to 1806. The ancient Germans; the de- :
velopment and collapse of the Medieval Empire; the growth of
princely particularism; the Reformation; the Thirty Years’ War; the es
ise of Prussia; the Aufkldrung;.the end of the old order. Second cml
session: Germany since 1806, The wars of national liberation; Bis- aT
marck, unification, and the Wilhelminian Reich; World War I; the _
Weimar Republic; the Third Reich_and totalitarianism; the German

peers Par ag (ae t ie

ederal and German Democratic Republics. Either session my be ‘
aken without the other, |
|
His 353 a ane b History of Eastern Europe (3, 3)

The history, culture, and contemporary affairs of the people of
the Baltic, Danubian, and Balkan regions from éarliest times to the
present, The first session carries the survey to the early 19th cen- i |
ury; the second session carries it down to the present. Either °
| session may be taken without the other,

His 354 a and b History of Russia (3, 3) |
The evolution of Russia from Kievan origins, Tartar conquests ‘
and the emergence of the Grand Duchy of Muscovy to the Russian
Empire of the 18th and 19th centuries. The Revolution of 1905 ,
and: 1917, and the foundations, development, and expansion of {
Soviet Russia. Either session may be taken without the other.

| cite teeteeneet 2

His 356 The World at War, 1939-45 (3)
=. A political, diplomatic, military, economic, and social history of
. . the Second World War. Among the topics covered will be war ard
peace plans, the military campaigns in the European, Pacific, "and .
North African theaters of war, the plight of conquered nations, the
concentration camps, and the war crimes trials.

Pacem at

; 156

His 358 Revolution and Reaction in Modern Europe (3)

Popular and-~intellectual responses to the trauma of rapid social,
economic, and cultural change in the 19th and 20th centuries; stress
on social conflict. and on revolutionary movements and ideas, espe-

/.3 those of socialism and fascism.

3350. \2/77

His 468*@ Renaissance Europe (3) |

A survey of European history from 1300-1517 with emphasis on
the western monarchies, Germany, and Italy. The social and eco-
nomic bases of the Renaissance as it evolved in Italy and northern
ERTODSs the New Monarchies, and the state of the Renaissance

ich. Prerequisite: His 131.
335 13/79

s 466=b Europe in the Age of Reformation (3)
mm survey of European history from 1517-1648 with emphasis on
* the western monarchies, the Netherlands, and Germany. The rela-
- tionship between the Renaissance and the Reformation; the Refor-
mation as a.social,, economic, and political, as well as religious
Matt ol the religious wars. Prerequiiste: His 131.

77
be’ itt Eng [73 in the 18th Century (3)
English society and government under the first three Georges;

Augustan culture; the impact of the French Revolution on England;
the transition to Victorian times.

beubllalanyof Canada (3) 2/77
The history oF =" Dele £ J , ay
-— developmen w perenne | abit 1 ghttions,fmperiah oan
Inter-Aoaieieetations, ene Wh ener sgaxch for
> 7

| | rrr cu! ture. and identity
|

+;
I
o
| i
“

is 449 The French Revolution and Napoleon (3)

A. study of the French Revolution, its causes, events, and after-
math in the Napoleonic period. Attention will be given to the basic
European economic, social, political, and cultural forces in the
period: from the late 18th century to 1815 as they relate to the

oy ape Revolution, Prerequisite: His 131, (3)
wee
His 450s@eaadele History of Spain and Poriugal Peasy ¢ KOs 3

First session: Roman, Gothic, and Moslem Iberia; the orient e hd
of Portugal and the unification of Spain; Iberian overseas expansion;
the age of the Hapsburgs. Second session: The Enlightenment in

. _ Iberia; revolutions and the loss of Empires; the Iberian nations in __

the 19th and 20th centuries. Either session may be taken without
e other. .

ase lal widely 179 sustrie (3)

Austrian history from the time of Carolingian settlement to the
Second Republic. Particular attention will be paid to territorial

growth, nationality problems, and cultural development,
' Prerequisite: His 131.

157

a Pr |
His 46%a and b History of Italy (3, 3)

A survey of the history of the Italian peninsula from the collapse
of the Roman Empire to the present. Economic, social, and cultural

topics will be stressed within the framework of political develop-

ment. The first session will include the period from late Roman time
until the establishment of Spanish hegemony (1559), and the
OS im session succeeding eras. Prerequisite: His 131.

His 456 a Diplomatic History of Europe, 1871-1933 (3)

A study of European international politics in the age of im-
perialism; European alignments and alliances in the late 19th cen-
tury; the coming of World War I and wartime diplomacy; the post-
war settlement, the League of Nations, and the failure of collective

ecurity. _ “
i, His 456 b Diplomatic History of Europe Since 1933 (3)
The origins of World War IJ; wartime diplomacy and the origins
of the Cold War; postwar European security problems; the diplo-

”, a," es European integration.

His phd EP ete lena Economic History of Europe, 1760-1914 (3)
The transition from pre-industrial to industrial society in England

of and Ole
His . leh —_— Epmire, 300-1453 (3)

A survey of the domestic history and foreign relations of Byzan-
ium, from Constantinople to the Turks. Prerequisite: His 131 or
consent of rie _ 4 ¥

His 70 b The PZotkans Under Ottoman Rule (3)_

—The domestic. and foreign affairs of the Ottoman Empire ‘in
furope from the entrance of the Turks into Europe to the outbreak
of sea Ve) I, Prerequisite: His 131 or consent of instructor.

$
His aandb European Cultural and Intellectual History (3, 3)
Major developments in European thought, art, and letters, and

/ -; the relation of these to the social and economic conditions of their

times. The first session examines development from the Renaissance
to the Enlightenment; the second session continues on to the
present. Either session may be taken without the other.

For description, see listing under Concentration in Eyro-
/pean History.

“ /His 481 Colloquium in European History (3)
4 is 484 Colloquium in Approaches to History (3)

or Gpe. in Comparative and Cross Cultural History (3)
His ARG 4 of Nationalism (3)

The nature and development of nationalism; a study of the mean- ,

ing of nationalism, nationalist theorists, nationalist leaders, and
ationalist movements from the 18th century to the present.

vi 497 independent Study in History (2—4)
His 498 Introduction to Historical Research (3)

158

ee mee

CONCENTRATION IN IBERO-AMERICAN HISTORY
PDs Ass Latin, AmericancHistory*to“1825°(3) a why.
The,Kuropean and the native foundations of--Tdtin © American
Binstitutioifs.and culture; the discovery, exnlortijén. n, and conquest of

‘America by thésSpanish and Portuguese;
j fI ‘d derite.,

vers of Independen Ona és Ve 12. Fo
#His 366 b Latin Amerigan tifstory. Since

# The political, egotiomic, social,” and” voultupal evolution of? the

j Latin Amerigan™ ‘Republics fromp'independence to" thea present, with

emphasigeofi Mexico, Argentin and Brazil. prerequisite: 01 A His 366.8 i
or junior § standin gens nd nealeenseaniesseoae A SS

/His 450 aandb History of Spain and Portugal (3, 3)

. For description, see listing under Concentration in. European
History, .
! | His 469 History of Mexico (3)

Mexican civilization from its origins to the present: The Indian
| cultures; the Conquest, the Colonial Period, and the winning of
| - independence. Mexico since independence: the eras of Santa Anna,
Benito Jaurez, and Profirio Diaz; revolution and reform in the 20th
! gentury; current social and economic problems; Mexican-American

piers Prerequisite: His 366 a and b or consent of instructor.

| | \/His 472 History of Brazil (3)
- The development of Latin America’s largest nation from dis-
——__coeyery—_toe_the-present—Prerequisites:His-366—a—and—-b-or-consent—of

instructor.

| | For descriptions of the following colloquia, see the list-
' ing under Concentration in United States History.

His 482 Colloquium in Latin American History (3)
| r Jp 484 Colloquium in Approaches to History (3)
is 485 Colloquium in Comparative and Cross Cultural Hisory (3)
| | va 497 Independent Study in History (3-6)
| Hi

is 498 Introduction to Historical Research (3)

4 f _ — CONCENTRATION-IN- ASIAN-HISTORY.: —--- —-— ~~!

dis 356 The World at War, 1939~45 (3)
* ff For description, see listing under Concentration in European

listory.

| | “His 377 a and b History of South Asian Civilization (3, 3)
. First session: The development of the unique civilization of the
Indian subcontinent and the impact on it of invading peoples,
. through the Muslim period. Second session: Study of South Asia
| | from the 18th century, with emphasis upon changes brought about
i by British rule and by modernization; the creation of new nation
states. Either session may be taken without the other.

ii 159

vA 379 aandb History of China (3, 3)

First session: A topical study of Chinese history from historic

Ret eee et re

Chinese history with emphasis on the strengths and weaknesses of

' the traditional state and the solutions which the Chinese developed
in response to foreign aggression and intemal disintegration, Either
ession may be taken without the other.

His 380 History of Modern Japan 1868-1952 (3)
A problem approach to modern Japanese history, analyzing the
fo of the pre-modern state and its subsequent transformation.

His 382 aand b_ History of the Middle East (3, 3)

times to 1644 with particular emphasis on political, economic, and ,
social developments, Second session: A topical study of modern -

First session: Mohammed, Islam as a religion and a way of life;

F
Meee.

Ottoman Empire to 1789. Second session: The Ottomon Empire in
the 19th century; European imperialism in the Middle East; the
rise of nationalism; the World Wars; current political, social and
economic problems. Either session may be taken without the other.

His 458 a The Byzantine Empire 300-1453 (3)

For description, see listing under Concentration in European
History.

For descriptions of the following courses, see the listings
| ye Concentration in United States History.
|

His 483 Colloquium in Non-Western History (3)

the Umayyad, Abbasid, Byzantine; and Persian Empires, and the.

oo ee ee ms

Sri 484 Colloquium in Approaches to History (3)

¥ His 485 Colloquium in Comparative and Cross Cultural History (3)
His i. Independent Study in History (3-6)
498

CENTER FOR INTER-AMERICAN STUDIES

FACULTY: (Inter-departmental) Hispanic Studies: A.
Baker, A. Brakel, A. Carlos, F, Carrino, R. Castagnino,
} S. Schyfter; Anthropology: L. Campbell, R. Carmack, P.

' Furst, B, Isbell, D. Snow, D. Wallace; History: J. Hahner,
B. Solnick; Geography: S. Blount; Philosophy: W. Reese;
Political Science: A. Astiz; Sociology: A. Iwanska; Puerto
Rican Studies: E, Acosta, E. Christensen, J. Irizarry, J. Silén.

Introduction to Historical Research (3)

The objective of this program is to prepare candidates
for: (1) professional and research careers in thé Latin
American field, (2) domestic service with federal and state
governmental agencies, (3) careers in the Foreign Service

. of the United States, and (4) careers with business and

160

!
eamemmenaier ales 0

a ye
)

educational organizations engaged in developing, improv-
ing and promoting the economic, social, and political life
of the Latin American peoples. Upon completion of the
program requirements, candidates should possess a more-

_, than-basic knowledge of the major cultural, social, eco-

nomic, and historical forces that have shaped and con-
tinued to shape the destinies of the Latin Americans.

Special Programs or Opportunities:
Study-abroad programs are available to qualified candi-

dates in Cuernavaca and Guadalajara, Mexico, and in Me-

dellin, Colombia. All Inter-American Studies degree candi-
dates are encouraged to take the Foreign Service Examina-
tion given each year in early December. |

The Center for Inter-American Studies collaborates with
the Office of International Programs in offering study-
abroad opportunities at the University of Guadalajara and
at the CALE center (Centro de Artes y Lenguas) in Cuer-
navaca, Mexico. Programs also are available in Medellin,
Colombia, in the humanities, social sciences, education,

| et IS

Co a ee eg

health and management.

The program at Guadalajara, of one or two terms dura-
tion, was. initiated in the fall of 1967 and is based at the
Albany campus. Students enrolled in the Guadalajara pro-
gram are required to take an academic leave of absence
from their home campus, since the program is no longer
financed by SUNY. A major prerequisite for this program
is a good command of oral and written Spanish. The pro-

. gram at CALE, of one session duration, was initiated in
| 1971 and is administered through the Brockport campus.
. Students participating in this program need not have a

prior knowledge of Spanish, since most courses are offered

in English-and-intensive- Spanish language ‘instruction is” ~

available at all proficiency levels. The Medellin program,
administered through the Stony Brook campus and initia-
ted in 1974, also may be of one or two sessions duration.
Students with a good command of oral and written Spanish
may avail themselves of course work at a consortium of five
universities; University of Antioquia, National University
(branch unit), Universidad Pontificia Bolivariana, .Univer-
sity of Medellin and the Escuela de Administracién y Fi-
nanzas e Instituto Tecnol6gico.

161

These study-abroad programs have a two-fold purpose:
1) to provide an opportunity for qualified students to im-
merse themselves in a culture different from their own, and
2) to enable students to pursue academic programs within
their fields of interest. Students who can best profit from
these programs are those who possess a high degree of
self-confidence and self-direction and, at the same time,
are tolerant of an ethnological and academic setting con-
siderably different from their own, These programs are not
for students who expect to find the same conveniences,

academic resources, Organizational patterns and profes- >=

sional competencies available to them on their home
campuses.

The total costs for the programs are approximately the
same as or slightly more than one would pay for a session
or year of study living on campus.

Brochures and application forms for these programs may
be obtained by contacting the Office of Internationa] Pro-
grams, SS 322, State University of New York at Albany.

Degree Requirements for the Major
in-Inter-American-Studies

stream seme ne a

General Program

B.A.; with Spanish emphasis: Combined major and sec-
ond-field sequence in Inter-American Studies to include 27
credits of Spanish above Spn 102 b as advised, Por 101
a-b, and Jas 400. 18 credits of area studies to include: His
100 a-b or His 131 a-b, His 366 a-b, three additional cred-
its of Latin American History as advised, and three credits

as advised from related courses in social sciences or phi- |

losophy.

B.A.: with History emphasis: Combined major and sec-
ond-field sequence in Inter-American Studies to include:
His 100 a-b, or 131 a-b, 366 a-b, and 12 additional credits

of History relating to Latin America as advised; three

credits as advised from courses in the Social Sciences or :

Philosophy dealing with Latin America; Jas 400, seven

credits of intermediate and advanced conversational Span- °

ish, Spn 316 a-b, Spn 317, and Por 101 a-b.

*No degree will be awarded in this program after August, 1978.
162
|

ee ee re

eee

| |
Other Degree Requirements

Majors are encouraged to participate in at least one term
of study abroad at a Latin American university or appro-
priate study center, re ke ee 2 it a ee

400) Current Latin American Ideas (3)

American life and society. A central theme will be selected for each
semester’s work. Students are expected to read fiction and non-
| fiction materials in Spanish. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

| All other courses focusing on Latin America are listed in
' the Departments of Hispanic and Italian Studies, History,
Anthropology, Sociology, Philosophy, Puerto Rican Studies,
| Economics, and Political Science.

edge and encourage study of the Jewish people and cul-
[ ture, Toward that end, the department provides instruction
in the Hebrew and Yiddish languages and courses in the

irene seer .

| ;
DEPARTMENT OF JUDAIC STUDIES V

| FACULTY: J. Eckstein, S. Isser, S. D, Temkin, A. Yuter.

| The objective of this department is to transmit knowl-

| Political, economic, and cultural forces which tend to shape Latin Sef)

eontemporary—and—past—aspects—of—Jewish—Histery—Bible
Studies, Jewish Philosophy, and Hebrew and Yiddish Lit-
erature,

To accomplish its objectives, the department offers a full
program leading to a major in Judaic Studies.

Bee ee oe

Special Programs or Opportunities

The State University system has entered into arrange-

_ ments with the Hebrew University and Tel-Aviv University
' for students who desire to spend an academic year study-
| ing in Israel, and credits toward the major in Judaic Stud-
ies will be awarded for suitable courses. This program. is

t
' majors and non-majors alike,
{

Degree Requirements for the Major

in Judaic Studies

: General Program
| B.A.: The plan of study involves a combined major and

_ second field, 54 credits minimum. These are to be distrib-
' uted as follows:

7 163

{ ¥

4-; -administered. from-the. Albany- campus. and -available-for-—- ~~~ }

Modern Hebrew Language and Literature

Competence to the third year level, usually in the form
of at least 12 credits above Heb 101 a and b: Heb 201 (3),

Heb 202 (3),.Heb 307 (3), and. one course (3) from among
Heb 308, Heb 365, or Heb 366. Students beginning at the
100 level may apply Heb 101 a and/or Heb 101 b to the
elective requirement.

Judaic Life and Thought

possible, preferably in the freshman or sophomore year;
two courses (6) in Jewish History from among Jst 341, Jst
342, Jst 343, or Jst 344; five courses (15) in Bible, Jewish
Literature, and Philosophy—at least one in each area.

Electives

18 credits, of which at least 9 must be in 300- or 400

level courses. Of these advanced courses, at least 6 credits
must be in one of the following areas as advised: Hebrew
Language, Literature, Bible, History, Philosophy.

T Hebrew
Heb 101 aandb Elementary Hebrew (4, 4)

24-credits-as-follows:Jst-150-(3)-to-be- taken -as-early-as-— :

oat line if
Merrett tenet

Beginner’s course with audio-lingual approach; fundamentals of
language structure and sounds; emphasis on correct pronunciation
and oral expressions; graded readings. Classes meet four times per
week, plus two required periods in the language laboratory. For
beginners and those who have had only one year of Hebrew on the

re-college level. Students may enter Heb 101 b with consent of
department. Heb 101 a and b are now offered only as TV courses.

Heb 201 and 202 Intermediate Hebrew (3, 3)

Modern Hebrew readings; review of grammar, composition, and
conversation. Prerequisite: Heb 101 b or two years of pre-college
level Hebrew.

Heb 203 Biblical Hebrew (3)

Methods and research tools of modern Bible study. Grammar and
syntax of classical Hebrew for students familiar with modern
Iiebrew. Prerequisites: Hebrew 101 a and b.

eb 290 The Pentateuch (220) (3)

This course will critically analyze selected texts in the original.
The emphasis will be on the structure, style, placement, and au-
thenticity of each of these texts. Old and modern commentaries will
bee in and discussed. Prerequisites: Heb 202 or 208, and

st 280.

164

en ww wk
'
TET ae
1 3 J
|i f
| | Heb 307 Hebrew Composition and Conversation (3)

Intensive and extensive composition and conversation based on a
,, variety of modern Hebrew texts. Study of the structure of the lan-
| | guage and practice in speaking and writing with clarity and pre- :
| cision. Prerequisite: Heb 202 or three years of pre-college level

J Continuation of Hebrew 307. Prerequisite: Hebrew 307,
Heb 365 Introduction to Contemporary Hebrew Literature (3)
Textual exposition of readings selected according to genre with
an introduction to methods of literary analysis and its terminology.
| | Prerequisite: Heb 202, or 4 years of pre-college level Hebrew.
. ‘Heb 366 The Literature of the Hebrew Renaissance (380) (3)
Readings in the original and discussion of the works of Mendele,
. Feierberg, Brenner, Bialik and Tschemichovsky; their significance
| | in the development of the modern Hebrew language and in the
i relirth of Hebrew literature, Prerequisite: Heb 307.

Méb 391 The Three Major Prophets (321) (3)
; A critical analysis and reading of selected texts in the original
from the books of Isaiah, Jeremiah and Ezekiel. The emphasis will
‘ be on the structure, style, placement and authenticity of each of

‘ these texts. Leading ideas and concepts will be discussed.
vreauistes Heb 202 or 208, and Jst 281.

| | deb 431 Philosophic Aspects of the Talmud (3)
: Selected texts of the Talmud will be studied in the original.

pore
. Heb 308 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3)
1
i

a pn ere y

—— Special emphasis-will be placed-orr philosophic issues, but scientifia
and social scientific views will also be examined. Prerequistes:

i | Veen and Heb 307.

| * Heb 499 Topics in Hebrew Language and Literature (3) .

os Examination of specific linguistic or literary aspects of Hebrew,
e.g., studies of Hebrew philology, or poetry and prose readings on
major motifs in Hebrew literature. The course may be taken more
: | than once if different topics are examined. Prerequisite: consent of
'.: instructor.

Yid 101 aand b Elmentary Yiddish (4, 4)
- Beginner’s course in Yiddish: fundamentals of language structure
and sounds; emphasis on pronunciation and oral expression; and
]/ graded readings. Classes meet four timés per week, plus required ~~~
|: homework periods in the language laboratory. Students may enter
$4 ve 101 b with the consent of the department chairman.

_ Xi 1102 a intermediate Yiddish (3)
| | \Bome modern Yiddish readings, and a review of Yiddish grammar,
) , Cor position, and conversation. Prerequisite: Yid 101 b.

‘ ¥if 102 b Intermediate Yiddish (3)

Readings in Yiddish literature, with an emphasis on the modern

| : period and a minimum of grammatical explanation, Prerequisite:
| Yid 102 a.

f
"
‘

165

| Judaic Studies

Jst 150 Survey of Jewish Civilization (3)

A basic orientation into the Jewish tradition from the Biblical
period to the present. The history and philosophy of Jewish culture
and religion will be emphasized. This course is required for Jst
majors and is recommended preparation for other Jst courses in
history and philosophy.

Jst 171 (Cwl 171) Modern Yiddish Literature in Translation (3)
A survey of Jewish literature from the 18th century to the
present.

resent,

f A survey of Hebrew literature, from the 18th century to the

Jst 180 The Hebrew Bible, A Survey (Pentateuch, Prophets,
Writings) (170) (3)

A survey of the Hebrew seriptures considered in terms of their

literary, historical, sociological, and religious contents and settings.
The course is given in English.

Jst 280 Introduction to The Pentateuch (174) (3)

A general introduction to The Five Books of Moses (in English),
considered against a background of religious, social and philosophi-
cal aspects. The significance of the Torah in the development of

Jst_172_(Cwl 172)__Modern_Hebrew _Literature_in_Translation.(3)-—.—_ —- -

—

fe civilization will be studied.

;

|
J

rJst 281 Introduction to The Prophets (203) (3)

A survey course discussing the Prophets in general (in English),
emphasizing the moral and social role of the individual Prophet and
his impact upon Judaism and Western civilization.

Jst 314 a (Spn/Cwl 314 a) Literature of the Spanish-Portuguese
Jews and New Christians (3)
An analytical and descriptive survey of the literary, theological,
liturgical, philosophical productions of the Spanish and Portuguese
Jews from the Middle Ages to the middle of the 16th century.

Taught in English, some reading knowledge of Iberian languages
and Hebrew helpful.

Jst 314 b (Spn/Cwl 314 b) Literature of the Spanish-Portuguese
Jews and New Christians (3)

The ex-Marrano and Converso contribution to the history of
European thought (Isaac de la Pereyre; Samuel Usque; Isaac
Cardoso; Menasseh Ben Israel; Isaac Orobio de Castro; Uriel da
Costa; Spinoza). Taught in English, some reading knowledge of
Iberian languages helpful.

Jst 325 Talmudic Thought: An Introductory Analysis (360) (3)

One tractate of the Talmud will be studied in English translation.
Special emphasis. will be placed on philosophic issues, but scientific
and social scientific views will also be examined.

166

he
(2 - eee
f Studies in an individual Judaic Philosopher (340) (3) /
The philosopher studied is selected on the basis of faculty and
student interest. The course may be taken more than once if a

different philosopher’s work is examined. Consult fall and spring
schedules for specific philosopher analzed.

ee ae re
eager ee

een se oe
'
ee)

st 330 American Jewish Philosophy (3)

A survey of Jewish Philosophy as it has developed in the 20th
Renny Sn e United States,

@' Holocasot 1 Cl hvi¢ fraag carucl Seevesh Theol egy CR)

Nst 337 Ext stentia Jewish Philosophie

The philosophies of the 20th century European Judaic existen-
| . tialists will be examined. Particular emphasis will be placed on the

writings of Shestov, Rosenzweig and Buber. | dolele

ebay since tie 18y ce

i’ Euro

(isin
wtewiemmee tee

a een arm

_, “dst 339 Medieval Jewish Philosophy (3)
| A survey of Jewish Philosophy in the Middle Ages.
| ést 341 Early Israel and Biblical Civilization (200) (3)
The history and culture of ancient Israel from its beginnings to

the Persian Empire. A survey of the Hebrew Bible (in English) as
fo major source for the study of early Judaic religious and social
O

rms in the context of the Near East.

) |

“st 342 Hellenistic-Rabbinic Period of Jewish History (201) (3)
it The Jewish people under Greek, Roman, and Persian domination
| ; from the time of Alexander the Great until the decline of the
; . ancient world. Judea and the diaspora, cultural conflict and adapta-

tion, sectarianism, and the development of rabbinic thought and
‘institutions.

F
| Jet 343. The Medieval Period of Jewish History (300) (3)

,, The history of the exilic community from the Islamic period to
jthe Enlightenment.

| if Jst 344 The Modern Period of Jewish History (301). (3)
The history of the Jews from the Enlightenment to the present,

Bok

Jst 351 Development of a Particular Jewish Community (302) (3)

t city), to be specified, from the time of their settlement, indicating
! i the broader influences at work and comparing similar experiences

elsewhere. This course can be taken more than once if different
; oe are examined,

i — -The- history— ofthe -Jews-—in -a -particular—place -(region; country,- -— -- ----~

{352 Development of the American Jewish Community (303) (3)

A survey of the development of the American Jewish community
from the early settlement of Jews in the Americas through the
» contemporary era. Particular emphasis will be placed on a social
| analysis of the Jewish community.

|
ty

167

Jst 353 Development of Israeli Society (304) (3)

_ A survey of the history of Israeli society from the development of
the Jewish communities in Ottoman and Mandatory Palestine _ .

through the Zionist movement and the State of Israel from 1948 to — |

the present.

Jst 359 (Pos 359) Israeli Politics (3) *

Translation (3) a4

Same as Pos 359 ‘
Jst 370 (Cwl 370) Talmudic and Medieval Jewish Literature in “i |
y Selections from post-biblical and medieval literature.

Jst 373 (Cwi 373) The Literature of the Holocaust in

Translation (3) SS
Readings i in translation and discussion of memoirs, diaries, fiction,
and poetry written originally in Hebrew, Yiddish, and other lan-

guages, reflecting the ordeal of European Jewry during the Second | |
| World War.

Jst 375 (Cwl 375) Israeli Literature in English Translation (3)
Selected prose and poetry of contemporary Israeli writers such as “
Agnon, Alterman, and Shamir, chosen not only for their importance ;
in the development of modern Hebrew literature, but also for their :
| treatment of universal concepts and values.

Fs “1
Cai ome —« oro Sales

Jst 376 (Cwl 376) Studies in an Individual Judaic Writer (3) i:
The writer studied (in English) is selected on the basis of faculty | {

and student interest. The course may be taken more than once if a -
different _writex’s work is examined. Consult fall and_sprin ng_sched-____

u
Me alain eT ae ee

ules for specific writer analyzed.
| _ | |
.j <st381 The Book of Job and the Problem of Evil (306) (3) :
The Book of Job (in English) and its role in ancient and con-

: temporary Western and Jewish literature and thought.

f
J Jst 430 Maimonides and Spinoza (3)
An analysis of the philosophies of Maimonides and Spinoza, and {
an examination of the influence of the former on the latter.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

at en

ese ewe ms

J Jst 444 Zionism from Herzl to the State of Israel (3)
A discussion of the factors stimulating Jewish nationalism before
Herzl. The founding of the World Zionist Organization (189'7)—
its activities, problems and ideologies up to 1914. Developments, *
political and practical, in Europe, America and Palestine, during
World War I, between the wars, World War II, and the post-war .
fer Prerequisite: Jst 344,

Jst 445 Post-Holocaust Jewish World (3) i
Jewish population—numbers and distribution—before and after © |

World War II, including changes through destruction and migra- ~~

tion. Forces working for assimilation and integration; organization

of Jewish communities, the State of Israel and its relations with the © |

diaspora. Prerequisite: Jst 344. |

168
|
; | Jst 465 (Ant 465) Jewish Communities (3)

+ “Ist 497 a and b Independent Study in Judaic Studies (3-6), (3-6)

a one

ne err

Same as Ant 465.

| aa we
: Directed reading and conferences on selected topics in Judaic

Studjes

WA Topics in Judaic Studies (3)
A study in depth of selected topics in Jewish history, philosophy,
| literature, or Bible. The course may be taken more than once jf
different topics are examined, Prerequisite: consent of instructor.
, When the following course deals for the entire session with Ameri-
| can Jewish Literature it can be used for credit in Judaic Studies:
Eng 396 Literature of a Subculture

LINGUISTICS PROGRAM
(Interdisciplinary)

_. FACULTY: S. Barlau, C, A. Brakel, L. Campbell, S. Davis,

M. Finder, F, Frank, G. Hastings, R. Light, R. Thorstensen,
\ M. Williams.

The associate faculty includes additional faculty mem-
bers from the College of Arts and Sciences and the School

|
7
| of Education who regularly teach courses related to lin-

.
Pn
a. ey

5 erin”,

——————

. guistics in their own departments and occasionally teach a
» course in the linguistics program,

i The Linguistics Program provides a faculty-initiated in-
terdisciplinary major with a concentration in linguistics. It
is designed to provide students with a basic understanding
of the nature of human language and the principles and
methods of contemporary linguistic theories. The major
offers a liberal education which combines the approaches
of the humanities, the social sciences, and the sciences, It
' also provides appropriate preparation for those interested
| in pursuing graduate work in linguistics or related disci-

plines.

Special Programs or Opportunities:

The possibility of studying a foreign language not regu-
| larly taught at State University of New York at Albany is
| provided by Lin 289, Directed Study in Foreign Lan-
guages. This course is open to any undergraduate student
in the university. For more information, see the course
| description below.

169

a LT ee

Degree Requirements for the Interdisciplinary
Major with a Concentration in Linguistics

General Program

B.A.: 36 credits in the major field of study, including:
Lin 206, Lin 320, Lin 321, Lin 499; one year of a foreign
language, as advised;* additional credits, as advised, in-
cluding a minimum of six credits at the 300 level or above;
these are to be chosen from courses offered in the linguis-
tics program and from approved courses in other depart-

ments, (A list of approved courses is available from the

Lf
SS ee ee

director of the linguistics program.)

Other Degree Requirements

Language proficiency requirement: majors are expected
to demonstrate proficiency in a foreign language (other
than the language chosen to fulfill the one-year require-
ment). Proficiency is considered as equivalent to comple-
tion of the third year of skill courses in a foreign language
or the passing of the appropriate proficiency examination.
Credits earned for the proficiency requirement are addi-
tional to the 36 credit requirement described above.

Students—are—eneeuraged—to—eomplete—a—second—major
rather than a second field. This is facilitated by the flexi-
bility of the requirements, Where appropriate, certain

courses may be used to fulfill requirements in both majors.

Lin 206 (Ant 220/Eng 206) Introduction to Linguistics (3)

Introduction to the study of language, including examination of
the characteristics and structural principles of natural languages
with English as the prime example; survey of subdisciplines of
linguistics, such as historical linguistics and the comparative
method, psycholinguistics, sociolinguistics, dialectology, and animal
communication.

Lin 289 Directed Study In Foreign Language (4)

Study of a foreign language not regularly taught at SUNYA; in-
dependent work, with the guidance of a faculty member, using
recordings and other material; meetings with native speakers when
possible. A limited number of languages may be offered in any one

*This language should be of radically different structure from
the foreign language chosen for the proficiency requirement. Non
Indo-European languages are usally advised. Credits earned in
Lin 289 may be counted towards the 36 credit requirement only
if used to fulfill this one-year language requirement.

170

paneer

a A Ce
See et oo

I f
,
i
i J
i year. May be repeated, for a different language or for more ad-

vanced study in the same language. Prerequisite: consent of pro-
.-; gram director. 7a “
7 1 Er troducklon [
i | ‘Lin 320 (Ant 320) | Phonology (3)
sf Arm introdeetio sheng Siena

LALA)

stud

ve Tatar tel is. oy
' aan

The analysis and description of the grammatical systems of
_ languages; various current linguistic approaches will be included.
| vane Lin 206 or consent of instructor.

| |

“VLin 421 (Ant 421) Syntax and Semantics (3)

A survey of formal approaches to language such as transforma-
, tional grammars, generative semantics, cognitive linguistics, and
| mohtague grammar, with special emphasis on recent developments
| iy syntax and semantics. Prerequisite: Lin 321.

Lin 497 Independent Study in Linguistics (1-6)
aa Independent reading or research on a selected topic in linguistics,
| | under the direction of a faculty member. Normally taken for three
| eredits, but if the nature of the project warrants it, as many as six
credits may be earned in one session; may be taken a second time,
with’ approval, for a maximum total of 12 credits. Prerequisite:

| major or second field in linguistics, consent of instructor and
director of linguistics program.
4]

i
1
1
1

oe us |
in 321 (Ant 321) Morphology and Syntax (3) a

Lin 499 Seminar on Topics in Linguistics (3)

Seminar on selected topics in linguistic theory and methodology,
tt chosen on the basis of current interest; may be repeated for credit
with change of topic. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Courses in other departments approved for the linguis-
tics major. (Some of these courses may have prerequisites
within the departments offering them.)

Ant 325, Ant 424, Csi 201, Csi 202, Eng 306, Fre 306,
: 7 Fre 406, Fre 450 a, Ger 400, Phi 210, Phi 415, Phi 432,
| | Reo 265, Reo 362, Rus 303, Sau 201, Sau 202, Sau 210,
' ~~ Sau 440, Soc 460, Spn 305, Spn 402, Spn 405.

—ioaoe
raceme eter —]

171

i
Je a, sl one | - “

spell een seems

J DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS

FACULTY: G. Allaud, L. Brickman, H. Brown, C, Chen, -
L. Childs, V. Cowling, E. Davis, M. Ellis, N. Friedman, —
R. Goldstein, H. Gordon, W. Haboush, R. Hall, W. Ham- ;
mond, R. Hornblower, B. Jamison, J. Jenkins, M. Katz,
T. Lance, V, Lamey, L. Lininger, R. Luippold, T. Mac- |
Gregor, G. Mangano, G. Martin, J. Myers, R. Nirenberg, — |
E. Nussbaum, H, Ogawa, R. O’Neil, G. Pecelli, R. Regal,
R. Rupp, M. Sherman, M. Smiley, H. Stratton, J. Therrien,
E, Thomas, E. Tumer, N. Uy, D. Wilken.

Qe were

~The obective of the Department of Mathematics is pri- *
marily to serve the needs of those students aspiring to
careers which require mathematical background: physical, |
biological, social and management sciences, statistics, actu- = |
arial work, computer science, applied mathematics, sec-
ondary school teaching, graduate work and research in .
mathematics, |

The department also welcomes students who feel the -
need for studying mathematics as part of a traditional
liberal arts program. if

| ; |
j -

Degree Requirements for the Major i Mathematics
General Program —— | |

B.A.: All mathematics majors are required to take a total .__-
of 33 credits of mathematics courses numbered 110 or 7}
above, of which 12 credits must be of the 300 level or © |
above. All majors are required to take 112, 113, 212, and °?
213. (Mat 212 and Mat 213 replace the former required _ .
courses: Mat 214 and Mat 220.) Mathematics majors in the |
Teacher Education program are required to take a course ! |
numbered 300 or above in each of the four areas: algebra,
analysis, geometry/topology, and probability/statistics. For —
the B.S. degree, the second field must be in the natural | |
sciences, computer science or business. oo

Honors Program |

The Honors Program requires a minimum of 33 credits
of mathematics courses, including calculus and linear alge- © |
bra, and, additionally, at least six credits selected from |

172 va =
Advanced Calculus (411), Algebra (420), Differential Top- |
ji ology (440), Probability Theory (464), junior-senior semi-
| | nars, independent study and introductory graduate courses. |
‘The student works in consultation with a member of the
_, Department Honors Committee to design a program suited
| to the student’s individual needs. This program and the
i | student’s overall progress will be periodically evaluated by

the Department Honors Committee.

Departmental Program

The departmental program is open to mathematics ma-
. , jors in the General and Teacher Education Programs for
| | the B.A. and B.S. degrees. No second’ field is required. A
: | student may have a second field or’second major if desired.
Students may enter the program any time prior to their
| | junior year, and receive an adviser from the mathematics
{
t 5

fa ulty. The_ specific: programs, will be arranged with ‘the
aglviser.

; } “Mat 100 Elements of Mathematics:(3)i0 27 we. oy
| : Review of basic algebra; linear, "quadratio, expontial, and |
H | logarithmic functions; cartesian coordinates and graphing; trigono-

plane geometry, Ne ae

EER: SPE EAEPT
PHA ppaane righ PET SH ert ene lial reer ae:

metric functions, finite series. Prerequisite: a algebra and. Ag

Mat 102 Fundamentals of Modern Mathematics (3) ee |
A nontechnical view of top| és -in mathematies the~topics dis-* 4

athematica

co sgiences, theovy a of games, and eee nt] mathomat Mat

190 o¥Mat/1].from.high school.
an

Me arse,
» CR Dae ce Nes re tee NEN PER DY ete
Lh! eon:

| at 105 Finite Mathematics (3) 3 ClewA / rere
| | ee aa © ews hasta amy: the--so

fal oy;
' sciences; partitions” and/counting, seni vectO}s ane atrices, / :

‘an mathématics weet} r td, stugénts C> |
_23_W H_credit_in_ qualitative. thethotde cous es in_the- "Social “Sciences, ~~ tl
| | Pferequisiter-Mat” “100-or-equivalent-thereof,

* » “Mat106 Elementary Calculus (3)
jh An intuitive approach to differentiation and integration of alge-
‘ raic and transcendental functions with emphasis on applications. SY
ay not be taken for credit by students with credit in Mat 107 or [
‘ Mat 112. Prerequisite: Moe -or-placement™by by-examinatio:
Duck C2 Fe

I Pouk For aig ei mp #700 «

Mat 107° Ap (dks loulus t TP) Business and

[| Economies (3) 2, 7 eo

| | Applications of differential and aeoked Lae to the analysis a
‘of: marginal cost and revenue, effect of taxation, revenue from

173

CI STIAL ANOS IS ses eg aA
pepe RRR S CS RS he A EASES BERTIE OTTER area et Th
see

~ “taxation, profits, inventory control, capital budgeting, producer’¥ and
vo consumey’s surplus. May not be taken for credit by students with
credit for Mat a2 or Mat 112. Prerequisite: Mat~l00~or-placement.

ya\TT DescsiPh- mem, 3/3/97 p=

Mat 108 Elementary Statistics (3)
Frequency distributions, measures of central tendency and dis-

persion, probability and sampling, estimation, testing of hypotheses,
linear regression and correlation. Prerequisite: Mat 100 or inter-

fone sos algebra
Mat 109 Applied Matrix Algebra (3)

V7 MAY WAS CAEMLUS © C4) 1a/77 Memo 8/yfo.

Ke amination Plone Qtr Eakevnn Cp bas y Matos

Matrix algebra as applied to solving systems of linear equations,
ie ..Markov—chains;—linear -programming. Calculations and ee

ill be emphasized rather than theory, Prerequisite: 10Q,;03
‘s at oy rl Cale db. f.a

fable: limits, continuity, differentiation of
‘rational functions, the definite integ ral, logarithmic ane § ntial
, — wiadintatinanet -f Vi é

cr evar. :
Continuation of Calculus I; f suenege and ‘MBonometric Functions,

4 ry techniques of wea and series. Prerequisite:
a fe )

| 0 it By at 114 Actuarial Calculus s|(1) anne problem, Sclotue. Ua’

cations=to—2et ver SGIEHCES.

7 112ponei bin OF A$ 0} Lae (Matim okie”

Rractiee--in-ealoulis~app
> eit seer er gee ar eee ts
PVE REN A Post {o ta /\ So Crete Stuer 2 Qamnotnnn
Hint 116 a and “cs paul (5, Sow» of Ack

Atsaccelerated co ape che a ea be in Mat 112,

113, atid, 214, Prerequisi nee Parsee ofthe departinenit; 116 a is
rerequisitefor 116 b.

i Mat 117 Applications of Computing to Calculus I (1)
oy Introduction to the BASIC programming language. Numerical

| ok solution of problems from Calculus I. Corequisite: Mat 112 or
Z| ~\ consent of instructox.
\

Introduction to the BASIC programming language. Numerical
solution of problems from Calculus II, Corequisite: Mat 113 or

yy Mat 118 Applications of Computing to Calculus Il (1)
in «3 consent of instructor. Mat 117 is not a prerequisite for Mat 118.

Y Mat 208 Topics in Statistical Inference (3)

Various statistical techniques such as x*—tests, multiple regres-
sion and correlation, non-parametric statistics and the analysis of
elanoe as applied to physical, biological and social sciences.

OF SPE ex eu tan Cornenicod Crwpulalon C.)

Cleameu
stet Be Multivariate Mathematics | (4)

} Introduction to linear algebra, functions of several variables and
differential equations. Will include pe artial differentiation and multi-
ple integration, Prerequisites: Mat d-b2--and- 113.

174 Shh (FEO

Rrenef Amos, tee |

i en nme seve

=*
ee ee

i
Aret 213 Multivariate Mathematics II (4)
Continuation of Mat 212. Further topics in linear algebra, linear

: Cr nd first order systemg of differential equations, ata theory.
Ni

pauisite Mat 212% _ ett 7:

to) pen (Student, Gf rad
at ota Calculus Ill (4 _
j Multivaricitiv ive caldulus:~ Slid analytic geometry, partial differen-
' tiation, multiple integration. Prerequisite: Mat 113.
Mat 220 Linear Alg don (3)
‘Ey of finite! mess ional Mettor--spaces;” linear, dependence
rmMin

[ and

ension, , ear m ea, s, linear equations, matrises~-and f

e ts. Eu¢lidean spaces. Normally taken at the completion 12f7F
‘ Sot the calc ulus 5 oor Al

PRS teen gts ITAA GE

tists 2 kinege A letvo,. a difley
at226 Classical Algebya (3) ec a

and divisibility..fox" integers and polynofhials; the complex numbers
and applieations of the Fundariiental Theorem-vf 1 Algebra. May Boe GLIAL

=—

eit.a Ke a " AW |

The. ~natural.-numberssand-—mat A GAA factorization ye, |

be, taken by students~ owith credit in, Mat’ 3 6. recommended fone ath
: vhathematies-ed J tion=malatied earce aah? 4
4 Pre. Ma tig or tas § “3/3 WF

Ala wines .

t |
ig {299 Independent Study in Mathematics (1-3) Ate Aeotee t

> alte ee me

'
a Anat 312 Basic Analysis (3) “ew cltoen v v Pune ft nf FA}

t 231 Transformation Geometry )
Classical. theorems of Menelaus, Ceva, Desargues and Pappus. ™
| Tometiios, similarities and affine transformations for Euclidean

May-be-zepeated-for_credit.

|” Mat 301 Theory of Interest (3 ay
. The basic measures of intéresf, annuities, sinking funds, amo

zation ETT bonds and installment one rea yy

| Mat 311 Topics in Differential Equations oa of
Series solutions, special functions of mathematical physics, intro-

Fonotiors; real niribers;zcontinuity;~unifonn™dontinuidy?unitor

r -convergenee;” initéichange-of- order’6f “limit -enerators?Prérequisites
reg ‘Tculus.sequence..and “linear.algebra.

eff
Mat 320 Elementary Abstract Algebra (3) JCédusclecry w PAO 72
‘Phe-integerss“grolips, rings; fields; polyromials, “preveal {site P"al-
Shon emer

clit 332 Foundations of Geometry (3)

2) Axiomatic development of absolute geometry, theory of parallels,

introduction to non-Euclidean geometry, isometries of the | Bolyai-

Ces sky plane. Prerequisites: Mat 213 or Mat Sa
(2 2238,

“Mat 226; = . |
OH (tF G 175

“
duction to qualitative theory. Further selected topics. Not open to os
students with credit for Mat 310. Prerequisite: Mat 213,6v Mat 225

ONagpe*

Mat 333 Convex Geometry (3)

An introduction to geometric ideas in Euclidean n-space with
| emphasis on the notion of convexity. Topics are selected from the
following: basic properties of convex bodies, Helly’s theorem, geo-
| ge ¢ metric extremal problems, Minkowski geometry, geometry of
ta mbers, packing and covering theorems, and integral geometry.
rerequisite: one-year-of-caleulus. gt f 8. ELE

Point-set"topology; wetric spaces. Prerequisites: ca

ulus sequence
KC linear-algebra:

ow ee ats

K\ spat 350 Elementary Set Theory (3)

Mat 342 Elementary Topology (3)_ row l betayo 1 rary fof v2 rR :

Vc of cardinal and ordinal arithmetic.

| we 362 Probability (3)
Introduction to probability theory and random variables. Elemen-

Mat 363 Statistics (3). .

( yt Hypothesis testing, point: estimation: confidence intervals. Intro-

aa €tion to the analysis of a Prerequisite: Mat 362.
vy Probooils fy Qa

y at 364 Actuarla Statistics (1) (1)
Ves

‘Practicein_statistical.applications-to~atttarial sciences.
requisite;-Mat~863~ox-taken-concurrently-with~Mat-863.

ie
} Mat 372 Elements of Game Theory and Linear Programming_(3)

——Sets and maps, construction of real and complex numbers, essen- ~

yf
a.
ik

tary limit theorems. Prerequisite: Mat 212¢o:—-Mat—2.1-4,. GFE IRF 1?

Fundamental theorem of game theory for two-person zero-sum
5 < ‘matrix games. Games in extensive form. Equivalence of linear pro-
eh“ + gramming problems to matrix games. Theory and application of

: é ‘+. the simplex method of solving linear programming nD an,
: iy ees caleulus~sequenceanrd“linear-algebra. Mafr21$
} ge

Mat 380 Systems Theory (3)

| Dynamical behavior of continuous and discrete systems. Observ-

~ +4 ability, stability and transforms. Introduction to feedback control.
am | : rere pie iho at-2412-and“Mart 2130"
he “i » 21% yal per?

Mat 401 a SALA Analysis (a) (3)

0% Error analysis, finite differences, interpolation theory with both
“a equal and unequal intervals (formulas of Newton, i see Stirling,

i. at Bessel, Everett, Lagrange), theory of sumamatio- re) sites:
Mey Mat-220=and=8d0~er Mat 212 and Mat = pm E day

fia 401 b Numerical Analysis (b) (3)
| Approximate differentiation and integration, difference equations,

Or numerical solution of differential equations, iterative techniques,
eX reas matrix mil numerical approaches to linear systems of

\ a uations, Ps ray ine Ae 1 obigois Gud a my , c Til i

at 402 Actuaria Brain |-Met eae [ ) ae nee a

(ov rPracticeiir’ numericar~mett sired ii-wWiatusadltll-estbitOal:
iN JM Prerequisites:-Mat-40.-a-or-Mat 401 6 takeir concunzently.

ahd Swern?

: /

wy, Mat 403 a_ Life Contingencies (a) (3)
| F A treatment of the contingencies of a single life covering the

following topics: Mortality functions, life annuities, life insurance
functions, annual premiums, net evel premium reserves, the ex-
pense factor, more complex benefits aac ites: ee Pp i,

t 362,

4 a 1@ C -| CE pf #7 > “|

| | Mat 403 b Life Contingencies (b) (3)
i Expansion of the theory of ‘ife-@ sac

SOMETES SeRore emphasis
on two or more lives in combination an multiple causes of
decrement. Topics include population theory, multi-life statuses,

/ multi-life functions, reversionary annuities, multiple-decrement func-
tions, primary and secondary decrements, applications of multiple-
decrement cal Top visites: Mat~30T, Mut-862-—and—Mat=

8a SH 2] et

| Mat 409 Vector aan (3)
| Classical vector analysis presented heuristically and in physical
terms. Topics will include the integral theorems of Gauss, Green si °

k ite: hawadl ree Mat 212. fi
| | vA ede ASinaagcl TeROUW ED Coondt wlmatsog, Pf

Mat 410 Partial Calaacect Equations for Applications (3)
The partial differential equations of classical mathematical |
physics. Topics will include boundary and eigenvalue problems,

“s Fourier series and other orthogonal rakes rerequisite:~Mat,,. :
| | 113,-or-Mat-214~and-Mat-810. & Mat 128. ag BE 2) ) \

Mipee vite.

i \/ Mat-4141-a-and- b—Advanced-Calculus-(3,-3)—
Gonvergence~ and-compacéthéss, sequences an

THAT CRO, 7 an
series ot tidnis,

unifafm continuity and uniform conyérgence, -ititegration,.ang differ-
| entiAtion of functions” in one and* several va a ples.” Preréquisite:

dt 312 ox-econsent of instructor.- “Mat 411 &is prerequisite for
Erber do~]ye

) Mat 412 Complex Variables for Applications (3)
| The elementary functions, differentiation, conformal transforma-
1 : ~ tions, power series, integral theorems, Taylor’s theorems, Taylor’s

and Laurent’s expansions, application of residues..Prerequisite:
; Tas-eoquonee. Mates 9 Watr223,.7 fb oF npr Gin. ht, |
7 vA Aestract Algebra. rh | -("F
Mat 420 troduction.to-Algebra (3)

‘- Group theory, rings; modules, tensor products, field extensions
and Galois theory, valuation rings. Prerequisite: Mat S20 or con-

-'-} — sent of instructor, co —- ga aff
- ue 424 Advanced Linear Algebra ay Keweleooye v rar. WED) |
4 > ?),

/ ms, ange rect spaces, ands eee ral “Yttadratig “,

Te Panta q

forms, innex-prodtict spaces, and si ilarity, theory” Of linear~transfor-

| nations, Prerequisites... Mat.220..or$Mat. 21> or consent of Oia: fr
|| «/Mat 425 Number Theory (3) - CLC AK 2/7.
red resource ixce course..Wi Lat.525,-Divisib: 2 ened

qywadratic reciprocity, _diophantine” : “equations, suype-of- squares. ve)
ubes, ete, contintéd” | fractions, aegbraic, inte#érs. May not be
taken by “students with credit for Mat 3247"Prerequisites: Any 300

levelor-higher.course_in algebra.
177

7, 2

Mat 426 Algebraic Equations and Geometric Constructions (3)*
An inquiry into the relationships among ruler and compass con-
structions, solutions of polynomial equations and the theory of num-

\,bers.. Prerequisite: one course in algebra or number theory at the
300-level.

Mat 432 Advanced Plane Geometry (3)
The advanced Euclidean plane geometry of the triangle and
circle, Prerequisites: calculus sequence and linear algebra.

Mat 433 Complex Numbers in Geometry (3)

Complex number systems and their geometric interpretation.
oebius transformations, models of non-Euclidean_ geometries. —

‘Prerequisites Mat 332 or consent of instructor.

/Mtat 440 Differential Topology (3)

Manifolds, differential forms, De Rham’s Theorem, duality.
Prerequisite: Mat 312 or consent of instructor.

Mat 441 Introduction to Differential Geometry (3)

An introduction to the geometry of curves and surfaces. Topics
include torsion, Frenet formulae, metrics, curvature and classical
theorems in these areas. Selected topics from modern differenti jah

of eee Prerequisites: Mat-244-anckMat220>0r-Mat 213497 M

ronald

at 452 History of Mathematics (3)
History of the development of mathematics, emphasizing the con-

ribution of outstanding men and civilizations. Py C reg SHES: rato,

Mato spate ee ontdctsye yvuct as STA MAT SS 4

Mat 456 Foundations of Mathematics (

Axiomatics, infinite sets, axiom of choice, Zorm’s lemma, ordinal
numbers, the continuum, logical calculi. Intuitionism and other
viewpoints on foundations. Prerequisites: caleulus...sequence...ancd

sneer Steeniny. Wat 2-130 mM af-.2—2.. 3

Mat 464.a and b Probability Theory (3, 3) Yeewcleccrsp » 1
p feet ,

Rigorous~trentinent of ‘discrete--probability--theory;
theory, xaridom walks and, Audttiatibn theorys"¥écprrent events and
arkév chains. P€ requisites: cal ulus..seéquence And linear algebra
nd-- ean OL instructor. "Mar 4eé Fite prerequisite-for- Mat-464-b>

at 405 ' eames Methods (3),

Sampling-theo: se gtosson tad conelation n,-principles~andglagsi= _

fication, of°8xperimental__.dest@ns, randomizetl™ artd blaek designss-"~

analysis. of varianee*” non-par tric” methods, _Prétequisite: Mat
“a Oy Mat 202-thd consent oF imatructor, ae

y ih 481 aandb Junior-Senior Analysis Seminar (3, 3)

Study of topics in analysis, chosen at the discretion of the in-
tructor. Prerequisite: consent of instructor,

Mat 482 aandb_ Junior-Senior Algebra Seminar (3, 3)
Study of topics in algebra, chosen at the discretion of the in-
structor, Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

178

1, Le
el
at 483 aand b Junior-Senior Geometry and Topology

Seminar (3, 3)
fs Study of topics in geometry and topology, chosen at the discretion
O

1
— ee pnd

f the instructor. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Mat 499 Independent Study in Mathematics (1-3)
2 EL May~be~repeated-for-eredit, Mew Oleac MAYO Vv pu. i

~ ?
| eft € DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC

. FACULTY: R. Albagli, J. Chadabe, A. Ciompi, D, Cobb,

| R. F. Cockrell, G. R. Ellis, P. Ennis, 1. Farrell, M. Fuller,
D, Gibson, I. Gilman, N. Gottschalk, K, D. Hartzell, Jr.,
R. Hester, P. Knott, B. Levy, M. Morgenstern, J. Morris,
| | - §, Osmond, K. Peterson, R. Rowe.

The objective of the Department of Music is to provide
university students with opportunities to study music as an
- aspect of a liberal arts education, as knowledgeable listen-
| ers or trained participants. The department also provides

preparation for graduate studies through broad training in
musicanship and practicing the musical arts.

| | Degree Requirements for the Major in Music

General Program

[ B.A.: 36. credits to be distributed as follows: Mus 245,

| 246, 330 a and b, 345, 346, and 14 credits in major music

courses, All music majors must include at least 12 credits

. of courses at the 300 level or above. Explanatory supple-

| | ment: General Program Music Major students will be ac-

: cepted on the basis of admission requirements established

by the department—tests, written and oral, after the stu-

| dent has been admitted to the university. Performance

| study may be available for credit by consent of the in-
structor and chairman,

| | Departmental Programs ——~™” a

B.A.: 66 credits to be distributed as follows: Mus 245,

. 246, 330 a and b, 345, 346, 176, 177, 276, 277 (or pro-
| | ficiency), performing groups, and 32-36 credits in an area
7 of concentration and related music courses as advised. The
program is designed to give students a broad coverage of

; music study and an opportunity for concentration and in-

| | tensive study in Composition, Electronic Music, History,
3 Performance or Theory. This program permits a course of

179

Ware Saesae renter

study that will shape each student’s individual objective.
All music majors. must include at least 12 credits of courses
at the 300 level or above.

Explanatory supplement: Students accepted into this
program must declare an area of concentration—Composi-
tion, Electronic Music, History, Performance or Theory.

Admission to this program will be established by the de-
partment, tests (written and oral) and performance audition
after the student has been admitted to the university.

Major orchestral instrumentalists, and voice majors will

;+——be-required-to- participate-in- symphonic wind ensemble,

chorus or orchestra for eight sessions,

Pianists may meet this requirement by four sessions in
any ensemble,

Composition, History and Theory majors who achieve a
satisfactory performance level may be assigned to Major
Performance Study by consent of the instructor and chair-
man.

Performance majors will be required to take eight ses-
sions of Major Performance Study and to give a satisfac-
tory public recital,

Fach student accepted into the Departmental Program
in_Music_will be_assigned_to_a_-music_faculty_adviser.

semen om

General Courses
Intended for non-majors

Mus 100 Introduction to Music (3)

Understanding the art of music through directed listening em-
_phasizing the many uses of musical material. Using numerous illus-
;trations accenting the criteria which determine quality. Closed to
students with credit in Mus 102.

Mus 102 Masterpieces of Music (2)

Comparative analysis of major works representing different forms,
styles, and periods. Approaching the musical elements through the
detailed study of a particular masterwork of a significant composer
each lecture. Closed to students with credit in Mus 100.

Mus 108 Keyboard Masters (3)

Understanding the art of music through directed listening to
compositions written for harpsichord and piano. Examples are taken
from the works of significant composers in historical order, starting

wi the English virginalists and ending in the mid-20th century.

Mus 110 Basic Music Theory (3)
Consideration of the rhythmic, melodic, and harmonic elements
of music through writing, dictation and analysis of rhythm, modes,

180

Unt eet ies
ete ethene Sa ahr

eRe A Sa

_[onenently in Mus 111. Offered during the summer session only.

pee

Vins 11 m1 Furcdamentals of ewuina § and Performing & Musto °@)

aa mee |
J Mus 112 Vee Ms cme wake i

composers, and performers to the Classic period.

intervals, keys, scales, triads in progression and form, Analysis of a
variety of musical styles, Previous musical experience helpful but |
not necessary. Limited to students who are not music majors. 4

Creative musical projects assigned at Phe level of the individual
student, Discussion and evaluation of creative work, including that
by visiting musicians. Limited enrollment; open only to students

Mus 201 Musical Instruments (3)

The evolution of musical instruments in western culture, The H
classifications, acoustical principles, techniques, and contemporary :
developments, with examples from the literature and orchestration.

Mus 205 (105) History of Music (3)
Contributions of the earlier periods of music with their influences
on later developments, The study of musical literature, instruments,

Mus 206 (106) History of Music (3)

et ee ee

eaten

i ‘The-development-of-musie-from-the-Classie-and—-Rom antic-periods———t
t {
Vv

! ee through history and its function as a dramatic art form.

- — — The-deyelopment-of_both -sacred_and_secular_vocal_literature, in- ___

o the present.

Mus 207 (202) Composers (3)

Study of representative scores of one composer in regard to form,
style and historical contribution. One major composer such as Bach,
Mozart, Beethoven, Stravinsky is studied per session. Prerequisites:
Mus 110 or Mus 245 or a reading knowledge of music and one of 4
the following: Mus 100, Mus 102, Mus 205, Mus 206, or Mus 208. |
May be repeated for credit with consent of instructor.

Mus 208 (107) Introduction to Opera (3)
Defining the medium, its premises and problems, its gradual for-

us 209 (204) The Solo Song (3)

cluding the folk song, the art song, and the aria. Prerequisite:
us. 100, 205, 206, or 208,

us 210 (205) Survey of Choral Music (3)
Both sacred and secular choral literature, including the oratorio,
i. 380, Mass, ‘and’other large choral forms. Prerequisite: Mus 100,

5, 206,.or 208.. me

us 211 (206) The Concerto (3)
The development of the concerto grosso and solo concerto from

the 17th century:. onward, The classical forms and thé variations

which resulted, Prerequisite: Mus 100, 205, 206, or 245." “ =

“

igi
J Mus 212 (207) Chamber Music (3)

The history of the musical literature for the small instrumental
ensembles; the trio sonata, the divertimento, the string quartet, and
‘other forms of chamber music, Prerequisite: Mus 100, 205, 206, or

[8
Mus 213 (208) Survey of Symphonic Music
' The study of symphonic literature. The growth of the orchestra,

symphonic forms, the major symphonies. Prerequisite: Mus 100,
205, 206, or 245,

J Mus 214 (209) American Music (3)
The study of American music from 1620 to the present.
Prerequisite: Mus 205 or 206 or consent of instructor, ;

Mus 215 (210) Jazz (3)

A study of Jazz from its origin to current expression. Important
musicians and influences are examined through recorded examples
of Blues, Dixieland, Swing, Bop, Progressive Jazz, and Third
Stream. Prerequisite: Mus 100, 102, 110, 205, or 206.

Mus 216 (118) Performing Technique (1)

: Coaching of qualiffed students from the performing ensembles.
| Development of individual technical proficiency. May be repeated
h for credit. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Courses Intended for Music Majors

Tt | Composition
Mus 220

Introduction to Composition (2)
Techniques of musical composition, notational problems, an ex-

amination of creative work. Prerequisite: Mus 246 or consent of
instructor,

{ Mus 315 Music and Science: An Interactive Study (3)

A non-technical consideration of structure and design in music
L and related scientific disciplines. Emphasis will be on methodologies
extracted from fhe sciences for- developing non-tradi ional ap-

bret mem ~— ae conn ww on
r see Mus 320 Composition Seminar f (3)
i Evaluation and discussion of individual creative work in instru-
mental emiyteretiewmerie media. Prerequisites: tdi Mus

346, and consent of instructor,

" Mus 321 Composition Seminar II (3)
Evaluation and discussion of individual creative work in instru-

mental m—e_ehessesse media, Prerequisites: damier Mus

346, and consent of instructor.

ius 420 Advanced Compostion Seminar I {3) Mus 340,
Evaluation and discussion of individual cstesig Mua, in instru-

mental ancceaigamy entciocnicons media, Prerequisites: {/ Mus 320 verbs
demebieie and consent of instructor.

BUT Electron ie Maric Seminar L G)

tie: a
een
_

! tus 421 Advanced Composition Seminar Il we 34 ©

Evaluation and discussion of individual creative work inf instru-
frentel eaadecnebwetuanie media. Poo anlatons Mus :

and consen} dye ctor, Muses
| Mus dao A Eleven nict BETES G) @). 12): al Te to
Aus 423 aa sk
i Mus 235 Keyboard Literature I (2) i cas rt

Keyboard music from the English virginalists through Haydn and
Mozart. Form, styles, performing technique and the development of
the instrument. Study based on scores, recordings and performances

by students and instructor. Prerequisite: Mus 178 or pianists with
consent of instructor.

pl eee
ooo

ee
ee

Mus 236 Keyboard Literature II (2)
Keyboard music from Beethoven and Schubert to the present,
Form, styles, recordings and performances by students and _ in-

structor. Prerequisite: Mus 178 or pianists with consent of
| | pe

Fieonmey

J rus 330 a and b (230 a and b) Music History (3, 3) mt
An intensive study of the music of western civilization traced 3"

rom the primitive sources to the present. Prerequisites: Music ee

major and Mus 246 or consent of instructor. Mus 330 a is a pre- ae :
AAs for Mus ‘Brecto — b.

Xe 3.1, ecto Music of Vnfante tsa an Frackices in Eau Eanly Music Q) 1 be

From the beginning of the Christian era through Palestrina. in-

|| JS Geet song, early polyphony, the motet and allied

_ forms, Ars Nova and the Renaissance, English and continental vocal :

| | and instrumental music. Prerequisite: Mus 330 or consent of |
f

instructor,
rus 432 (332) Music of the Baroque Period (3)
, Study of the music of the period, approximately 1600-1750,
| fom the invention’ of opera through the works of J. S. Bach and

andel. Prerequisite: Mus 330 or consent of instructor.

/ Mus 433 (333) Music of the Classical Period (3) :

| An intensive study of the music and the composers from 1730 to
| 1830, emphasizing the various forms and the emergence of the
homophonic texture from the polyphonic techniques of the Baroque

era. The significant works of Bach’s sons, Haydn, Mozart, Gluck,
Pergolesi, Beethoven, and._others, Prerequisite: Mus -330_or_consent-—-—- |-

f instructor,

Mus 434 (334) Music of the Romantic Period (3) |

A study of the influence of romanticism upon 19th century music
pe Beethoven through Debussy, including the nationalistic

eel
werent con

eee
tte rte

chools, the literature of the principal media, the masterworks.
Prerequisite: Mus 330 or consent of instructor.

ee
—_

Mus 435 (335) Music of the 20th Century (3)

A study of music in the present century showing~xeactions to
and progressions from the 19th century as reflected by the ‘signifi- ~

183

ait

~~
tenet ee

cant composers and schools of composition, Prerequisite: Mus 330
or consent of instructor,

‘ Wlus 440 a and b (340 a, b) Seminar in Music History and —
Literature (2, 2).

An intensive study of the “basic reference: materials and se se-
lected areas of music history. Discussion of general historical and
I stylistic trends. Individual projects of musical research and investi-
gation with emphasis on the technique of research in music history
will be assigned. Prerequisites: Mus 330 and 345. Mus 440 a is a
prerequisite for Mus 440 b.

}

us 245 (145) Theory and Practice of Music I (4)

Fundamental materials of acoustics, melody, rhythm, harmony
and musical structure in various styles. Intensive drill in aural per-
ception, writing, keyboard harmony and sight singing. Prerequisite:

| Music major or consent of instructor. Five class hours per week.

: ff Music Theory
+f

: Mus 246 (146) Theory and Practice of Music fl (4)

Further exploration of harmony, melody, elements of counter-
: point and concepts of musical structure, including traditional har-
mony up to modulation. Writing experiments in various styles and
continued development of the skills: of ‘dural: perception, sight-

singing and keyboard harmony. Prerequisite: Mus 245 or equivalent.
Five class hours per week.

Mus-254-a-and-b—Electronic Music (3, 3)

An integrated approach to the techniques, theories, and aesthetics
of electronic music, including essential electronics and acoustics,
with a stress on developing studio skills as they apply to the voltage-

ki controlled synthesizer. Prerequisite: music major or consent of
instructor.

hus 345 (245) Theory and Practice of Music III (4)

Advanced study of harmony, principles of contrapuntal writing,
20th century practices and musical structure with an emphasis on
the larger forms, Analysis of selected scores. Writing experiments
and continued development of aural skills and sight reading.
7 Mus 246 or equivalent. Five class hours per week.

«Mus 346 (246) Theory and Practice of Music IV (4)

Continued advanced study of harmony and counterpoint. Empha-
sis on 20th century techniques. Related problems of aural percep-
ception and intensive work in musical analysis. Prerequisite: Mus

fe or equivalent. Five class hours per week.

Mus 347 Orchestration | (3)

Study of basic instrumental techniques, principles of orchestra-
tion and scoring for various instrumental ensembles, Prerequisite:

Mus 345.
184
J |
1,
{ , “Mus 348 Orchestration II (3)

Advanced scoring for both large and small ensembles with em-

. ; phasis on contemporary instrumental usage. Study of appropriate H
| literature. Prerequisite: Mus 347 or consent of instructor. |
}

us 445 (345) Analysis of Styles (3) |
Technical analysis of the works of composers from Haydn to
Debussy. Written assignments in those styles. Prerequisite:

os oy

Mys 345
“yh 446 a and b (346 a, b) Contemporary Techniques (3, 3)
Analysis of 20th century music from Debussy to the present.
| | Prerequisites; Mus 330 a and b and 346 or consent of instructor
| . Mus 446 a. Mus 446 a or consent of instructor for Mus 446 b,
| u

s 450 (350) Tonal Counterpoint (2)
Study of tonal counterpoint, primarily of the 18th and 19th cen-
jee, through writing and analysis, Prerequisite: Mus 345.
M

Mus 451 (351) Modal Counterpoint (2)

Study of the sacred style of the 16th century, as embodied in
; the motet and Mass, through analysis and writing in two and three
| | pe Prerequisite: Mus 246,

vMus 457 Seminar in Music Theory (2-3)

The seminar topic for each session will vary and be announced
in advance. May be repeated for credit provided any particular
| subject matter is not repeated. Among the topics will be: Readings

t in Music Theory, Individual Composers, Analytic Technique of

Heinrich Schenker, Harmony in the (Late J9th and Early 20th
_ va Tonal Practice in the 20th Century, and Serialism.

| f Mus 459 Senior Project in Music Theory (4)
3 Research on topics approved by the theory faculty leading to a
senior paper in music theory. For qualified music majors.

‘Prerequisites: Mus 445, Mus 457, and either Mus 446 a, 446 b, !
450, or 451.

ce Re

a
bey Ye

Performance Study

. A |
1 = 172 Voice Class(1) oe _
Study of the fundamentals of vocal production through vocalises

_; .. and songs. Classes are limited to small groups to allow individual
| ork. Admission only with consent of instructor.

,
I
}
f

Mis 216 Performing Techniques (1)
(Description under General Courses in music.)

| ‘Mus 260 Conducting I (2)
‘ An introduction to the elements of conducing, including score-
: reading, baton technique, and aural perception, Emphasis will be
on choral and orchestral literature of the 18th and 19th century.
[i Concurrent participation in a university ensemble is required,
| | Prerequisite: Mus 246 or consent of instructor. |

185

/ Mus 263 Elements of Singing Pronunciation (3) J

An introduction to the principles and practice of standard singing
pronunciation of French, German, and Italian. Basie concepts. of
phonetics, intensive practice with examples from the standard reper-
toire and references to the best recorded models. Intended mainly
for singers and keyboard players interested in vocal coaching.
Prerequisite: Limited to music majors who have had at least one
year collegiate study or the equivalent, of French, German, or
Italian,

| Mus 360 Conducting II (2)

including music of the 20th century, Prerequisite: Mus 260.

| A continuation of Mus 260 with emphasis on rehearsal techniques, |

J anus 371 Woodwind Instruments (2)

Performance of the woodwind instruments: the basic techniques

| and the fundamental problems involved in playing and teaching the

flute, the single reeds and the double reeds, Prerequisite: Music
major.

Mus 372 Brass Instruments (2)

Performance of the brass instruments; the basic techniques and

: the fundamental problems involved in playing and teaching the
French horn, trumpet, trombone, baritone, and tuba. Prerequisite:
Music major.

qa ee mee

NMus-373— String Instruments (2)

Performance of the string instruments: the basic techniques and
the fundamental problems involved in playing and teaching the

i viola, cello, and contrabass. Prerequisite: Music major.

Mus 387 Opera Workshop (1-3)

A practical study of the methods and techniques of music-
theatre leading to public performances. Activities include acting,
vocal coaching, and body movement. May be repeated for credit.

| Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 3/32

MUS Uy}? WorkShop Onrat Music Ct»)

+ The study and performance of repertoire for piano. 5 NAA of
technique; interpretation and performance practices will be included.
May be repeated for credit. Offered during the summer session only,
| Prerequisite: consent of instructor,

T
t

f Mus 482 Jazz Workshop (3)

The applications of American jazz to actual performance. Explor-
ing techniques of ensemble playing, styles, improvisation and teach-
ing. Visiting artists will participate. Offered during the summer
session only. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

At us #08 Vocal Chamber Maasc. Ci-2)
[meno (2/14/70.

J Mus 481 Plano Workshop (1-2) L Memo {afir/x F191 7/ 7

ee’
|! ; J

3 Secondary Performance Study

The study of piano or orchestral instruments to meet
the secondary requirement in performance study. Limited
to music majors with the consent of the department chair-

| an
ii
Mus 176 Secondary Performance Study I (1)

ti | Mus 177 Secondary Performance Study Il (1)

| | { Prerequisite: Mus 176.

y us 276 Secondary Performance Study HI (1)
Prerequisite: Mus 177,

‘ee
| | jMus 277 Secondary Performance Study IV (1)
} % Prerequisite: Mus 276.

| Major Performance Study

Individual study of voice, piano, orchestral instruments.
Limited to music majors with consent of the department
| {| ghairman.

L |

_ 178 Major Performance Study 1 (3)

_ Mus 179 Major Performance Study If! (3)
| i Prerequisite: Mus 178.

(Mus 278 Major Performance Study Ill (3)
| Prerequisite: Mus 179,

| | “/Mus 279 Major Performance Study IV (3)
| | Prerequisite: 278.

4 4

JMus 378 Major Performance Study V (3)
f { Prerequisite: Mus 279,

| | “ius 379 Major Performance Study VI (3)
| ! Prerequisite: Mus 378,

it _\iMus.478 Major. Performance-Study-VII-(3) —---—-- —-- ——~-~
| 1 Prerequisite: Mus 379.

Mus 479 Major Performance Study VIII (3)
| Prerequisite: Mus 478.
7 Performance Study is available in the following sub-
ject areas: Piano; Harpsichord; Trumpet; Voice; Flute;
Oboe; Clarinet; Bassoon; French horn; Trumpet; Trom-
| | bone; Tuba; Percussion; Harp; Violin; Violoncella, String
bass,

187

/ S
Mus 180 Chamber Ensembles (1)

' Performance of chamber music reppertoire. Open to music majors
with consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit.

Mus 084 Repertory Chorus (0)
Development of reading and aural skills through survey of choral
literature. Open to singers on non-credit basis. May be repeated.

Mus 284 University Chorale (1)
Study and performance of choral literature with emphasis on
large works. Admission by audition. May be repeated for credit.

| Prerequisite: consent of instructor,

Mus 384 University Singers (1)

Highly select chorus to perform extensive and complex reper-
toire. Admission by audition. May be repeated for credit.
Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

~~“ Mus 086 Repertory Band (0).
¢ Development of reading and performing skills through reading

: of band and wind ensemble repertory. Open to performers on non-
.,/ credit basis. May be repeated.

Mus 186 University Wind Ensembles (1)
Woodwind, brass, and percussion players organized into both

large and small ensembles to study and perform music from the
enaissance to the 20th century. Open to all students by audition.
pMay be repeated for credit,

Mus 088 Repertory Orchestra (0)
Development of reading and performance skills through reading
of symphonic repertory. Open to performers on non-credit basis.

fe be repeated.
Mus 188 University Symphony Orchestra (1)
Study and performance of symphonic repertory. May be. repeated
for credit. Prerequisite: admission by audition.

} Additional Major Course Areas

Mus 390 The Traditions of Harpsichord and Clavichord Making (2)
The traditions of harpischord and clavichord making, traced
through the European centers of activity from the 16th century to
the present. The evolution of keyboard instrument making as seen
from the maker’s point of view. Lectures, slides, mechanical ex-
_ amples, and museum visitation. May be taken concurrently with

| Mus 392. Prerequisite: Mus 330 a and b or consent of instructor.
‘a,

Mus 391 The Traditions of Piano Making (2)
The traditions of piano-making from the decline of the harpsi-

chord to the present. Comparative examination of the instrument.

and its construction from Mozart’s time to the 20th century ap-
proached from a musical and technical point of view. May be taken

188
'
i

concurrently with Mus 392. Prerequisite: Mus 330 b or consent of

A erie
nine

Mus 392 Keyboard Workshop Seminar (1) :
A seminar in the handwork methods involved in keyboard instru-

ment making. Actual work in the construction, rebuilding, regula-

’ tion, and tuning of keyboard instruments covered in Mus 890 and

; 391. Enrollment limited. May be repeated for credit. Prerequisite:

consent of instructor. Initial enrollment must be concurrent with
us 390 or 391.

; | «/Mus 497 Independent Study (1-4)

f Intensive study in areas of specific interest to the music major.
This restricted offering represents a culmination of concentration in
one of the designated programs and serves as a basis for further
study at the graduate level. The project report is completed under

| | the direction of a staff member, Consent of the department chair-
; man required. May be repeated for credit.

DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY | vA

FACULTY: W. Cadbury, R. Creegan, 8. Davis, R. Fullin-
wider, R. Garvin, J. Gould, Jr., W. Grimes, Jr., R. Howell,
J. Kekes, W. Leue, T. Martland, R. Meyers, H. Meyn,
| | H. Morick, W. Reese, K, Stern, J. Thomas, C, Whitbeck.

ere en)
—_— a

re
eo

— ae ee ney

The_Department_ofPhilosophy—ofters—diversified—and.
flexible programs leading to the B.A,, M.A., and Ph.D, 3
|; degrees. Through lectures, seminars, tutorials, guided re-
: search, undergraduate and graduate colloquia, a student
philosophy club, inter-disciplinary and special studies pro-
grams, and visiting philosophers, a challenging and bal- |
anced context for philosophical development is provided |
}; for major and non-major alike,

Degree Requirements for the Major in Philosophy
General Program

tls
ee eu wero

B.A.: At least 30 credits in Philosophy, including one
+ i— -and only~one introductory course (Phi 110,112, 114 or
| | 116), 210, 212, 310, 312, and from the following groups
‘* at least one course from each group and at least two
_ courses from one group.
| ' Group I (Systematic) Phi 336, 412, 415, 418, 422, 432,
: 510, 512, 515, 516, 518, 520, 522, 538, 540, 542
Group II (Historical) Phi 311, 314, 315, 328, 329, 334,
i 530, 542, 544, 546, 548, 550, 552, 554, 556
| Group III (Axiological) Phi 318, 320, 322, 324, 425, 526,
528, 558

Bee --

189

Smee
a re |

A survey of representative problems in some of the major areas
jof philosophy; topies such as free will, morality, justice and social
/ order, knowledge and truth, God and religion, art and beauty.

4 Phi 110 Introduction to the Problems of Philosophy (3)

Phi 112 Introduction to Reasoning and Analysis (3)
A study of selected philosophical problems with emphasis placed
on the methods and techniques for the analysis of concepts and
_ arguments, on the recognition and discrimination of deduction and
; induction, cause and effect, rational decision-making, and on the

| resolution of confusions, ambiguities and informal fallacies.

Phi 114 Values in a Changing World (3)

—A-study-of-selected-philosophical-problems with- emphasis-placed- — :-:

on the understanding and appreciation of alternative ideals of indi-
vidual and social life and on the relevance of these ideals to cur-
rent pressing human problems.

Phi116 Our Philosophical Heritage (3)

A search, by an analysis of our philosophical past, for the roots
of such current human problems as the functions and limits of
science in guiding human life, the place of religion in human ex-
perience, and quests for freedom and identity, and the present
conflicts among loyalties and values.

\/ Phi 210 Introduction to Logic (3) |

An introduction to classical and modern logic with an emphasis |

on the theory and application of truth functions. Introduction to
quantification; and discussion of the structure and properties of

Fae re ree

| :

| a 214 Comparative Religion (3)

formal systems of logic. ,

Phi 212 Introduction to Ethical Theory (3) .
An introduction to the dimensions of ethical experience, the fac. ~*~
tors in value judgments, and alternative theories and methods of

reasoning about such notions as right and wrong, obligations, moral |

- codes, moral conflicts, and responsibility. !

A survey of institutions, practices, and beliefs in the major world
religions.

ia baentt

Phi 216 Existential Thought in Literature and Religion (3)
Exploratory and critical studies of existentialism as a cultural

movement of protest, criticism, and vision, with concentration on

the writings of such authors as Pascal, Kierkegaard, Nietzsche,

‘Dostoevsky, Berdyaev, Unamuno, Kafka, and Tillich. ha

Phi 310 History of Ancient Philosophy (3)

i A critical study of the philosophies of representative thinkers of
he West from. the pre-Socratics to Plotinus. Prerequisite: a 100 or
00 level course in philosophy.

Phi 311 History of Medieval Philosophy (3) |
A critical study of the philosophies of representative thinkers of

the West from Plotinus to Descartes. Prerequisite: a 100 or 200
level course in philosophy.

190

to
: J

i vA
Phi 312 History of Early Modern Philosophy (3)

: A critical study of the development of modern thought from its
| Medieval and Renaissance background and concentrating on some
| 3 of the principal European philosophies from Descartes through Kant.
a _Prreanisites a 100 or 200 level course in philosophy.
P

hi 314 History of Nineteenth Century Philosophy (3)

| A critical study of the philosophies of some representative Conti-
| nental, British, and American thinkers from the Kantian period to
the end of the century. Prerequisite: a 100 or 200 leevl course in

oS,
teeny

hilosophy
| fom 315. Contemporary Philosophy (3)

: A critical study of contrasting philosophical movements in the
20th century, emphasizing divergent tendencies in the United States;
Britain, and on the European continent. Prerequisite: a 100 or 200

| | pe course in philosophy,

Phi 318 Social Ethics (3)
_ The application of ethical theories to the analysis of problems of
| i conduct encountered in business, the professions, and the political

process, Social criticism and its standards. Prerequisite: a 100 or
| 900 level course in philosophy.
a

~» “Phi 320 Political and Social Philosophy (3)
| | The philosophical bases for social and political institutions and

practices. Such issues as the following: the nature of the state;

—+_—tustice-and-taw- s-rights-and-natural-rights;-equality;-social-utility-and
pe interest, Prerequisite: a 100 or 200 level course in philosophy.

| | VY Phi322 Philosophy of Religion (3)

: Philosophical analysis of selected religious concepts and programs,
based upon the writings of representative philosophers and theolo-
gians, The Judeo-Christian tradition will provide the chief focus of
pe Prerequisite: a 100 or 200 level course in philosophy.

aA
a orematreerres

Phi 324 Aesthetics (3)

Philosophical analysis of concepts and sentiments pertaining to
creation, appreciation, and criticism of the arts in the generic sense
vi the term. Prerequisite: a 100 or 200 level course in philosophy.

Phi 325 Philosophy of Law (3)

Le. A study of the nature and function of law, the relation of law to_

orality, standards of judicial reasoning, and the limits of law.
| _Prevoaisite a 100 or 200 level course in philosophy.

Phi 328 American Philosophy I (3)

A historical survey of philosophy in America up to the Civil War
1 | with an emphasis on the relation between philosophy and American
van Prerequisite; a 100 or 200 level course in philosophy.

. hi 329 American Philosophy II (3)

A critical survey of “the Golden Age” of American philosophy

' with an emphasis on Peirce, James, Royce, and Dewey. Prerequisite:
a 100 or 200 level course in philosophy.

} 19]

mre ved RP ames to tenes

ee Seek ee

op
u j
; a 4
a
:
i

| Phi 334 Asian Philosophy (3)
An intensive introductory and critical study of representative

Philosophies of such Asian countries as China, India, Iran, and
Japan. Prerequisite: a 100 or 200 level course in philosdphy.

22 ee eres

Phi 336 Existentialist Philosophies (3)

Critical study of existentialist thinking as approached through the Sf
writings of representative authors such as Heidegger, Sartre, Jaspers, |
and Merleau-Ponti. Prerequisite: a 100 or 200 level course in ; |
philosophy.

Phi 338 Philosophy of Medicine (3) i |
An introduction to the philosophy of the health sciences and an
medical ethics. Examination of the historical and contemporary con- ~*~

cepts of disease and their relation to such concepts as “‘symptom,”’

“syndrome,” and “etiology” and the definitions of “person”? and sf
“human rights,” and their bearing upon such a question as the |
justification of euthanasia. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. |

Phi 412 Metaphysics (3)

A systematic examination of such philosophical concepts as. exis- ia
f tence, essence, causality, purpose, value, mind, freedom, unity. |
f Prerequisites: Phi 210 and a 300-level course in philosophy. Ht

1 fen 415 Philosophy of Language (3)

An investigation of the structure and properties of language with
regard to philosophical issues. Problems of meaning, reference,
analyticity, truth, or ontological commitment, will be examined in
| -the-context-of-the-contemporary-theories-of-meaning-and-linguistio———-
Structure. Prerequisites: Phi 210 and a 300-level course in {
: philosophy. : Lt

ae 2 teeue

re on

Phi 418 Philosophy of Science (3)
A critical survey of basic issues in philosophy of science’, such as im
the nature of laws and theories, verifiability and confirmation, expla- |
snation and prediction, statistics and probability. Prerequisites: Phi 1%
| Jo and a 300-level course in philosophy.

Phi 420 Senior Seminar in Philosophy (3) |
This course includes tutorial conferences, guided research, and

the defense of a seminar paper on some historical or systematic
topic.

«$ Phi 422 Theory of Knowledge (3) rt

A systematic study of theories of knowledge, including such I
topics as theories of perception, the character and value of logical

systems, theories of the nature of truth and of the nature of proof. ft

, rerequisites: Phi 210 and a 300-level course in philosophy. |

‘y hi 425 Contemporary Ethical Theory (3)
Examination of selected normative and meta-ethical theories, with
emphasis on issues of interest in contemporary discussions of values

and the nature of valuation. Prerequisites: Phi 212 and a 300-level
course in Philosophy. :

192 ot

i J

Phi 432 Symbolic Logic (3)
An examination of the principles underlying valid deductive in-

: : ference. Construction of a single system of sentential and first-order

| quantificational logic. Discussion of the structure and properties of

'_| formal systems of logic. No prerequisite, but Phi 210 is recom-

nded..

\ : ‘Phi 440 Topics in Philosophy (3)

atten =
. -

Consideration of problems selected on the basis of faculty and
student interest. May be taken more than. once with different con-
tent. Consult fall and spring schedules for specific topics.
en a 300-level course in philosophy.

hi 450 Philosophy Practicum (4)

This course provides the opportunity for qualified seniors with a
strong philosophy background to receive undergraduate credit for
* teaching experience. The student is enabled to teach other students
under controlled situations and under the supervision of faculty,

The’ course may be repeated once, but only four credits may be
Ga toward satisfaction of the philosophy major requirements.
i

; Phi 497 Independent Study and Research (1—4)

| Guided research and writing on a selected problem in philosophy
* on a tutorial basis. May be repeated more than once with different
content. Prerequisites: a 300 level course in philosophy and the
approval of the individual faculty member acting as project super-

visor and of the departmental undergraduate —

DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS

. FACULTY: C, L. Andrews, H. Bakhru, R. Benenson, H.
i : Chessin, B, Chi, S. Chui, J. Corbett, N. Cue, T. P. Das,
J. Garg, W. Gibson, A. Inomata, R. Lanni, A. Levitas,
- B. Marsh, A. Oliver, K. Ratcliff, T. S. Renzema, G. W.

| | Reynolds, Jr., N. Rosenzweig, L. Roth, C. Scholes, W.

Scholz, J. Smith, H, Story, C. R. Sun.

The objective of the department is to provide students
a solid foundation in both classical and modern physics.
Students are prepared either to undertake graduate study
in physics, to apply physics principles and techniques suc-

ee ee ee

pam ee,

[eewern oo wait

2 a ena al

cessfully for advanced work in other disciplines, to enter
industry usefully, or to teach in the secondary schools.
Along with courses in classical mechanics, electromagnetic
theory, atomic and nuclear physics, and thermal physics,
students learn modern electronic techniques, principles of
' quantum mechanics and applications. Elective courses in
other sciences and independent study with faculty mem-
bers in the active research fields of the department are
encouraged as part of the practical emphasis. Courses in

193

: environmental problems, applications of nuclear physics,
and physics in the arts bring physics concepts to the non-
major.

Special Programs or Opportunities:

One-to-one student faculty interaction is possible and is
encouraged by the department. Computer use at all levels
of instruction is afforded by means of teletype terminals in
the Physics Building. Very modern equipment is available
| in all laboratories. Opportunities for valuable experience,
training, and occasionally financial support exist_in_ the

form of undergraduate assistantships in the research and
teaching laboratories. The Society of Physics Students
sponsors popular talks, tours to nearby laboratories and
social events. It offers tutorial services, slide rule and com-
puter clinics and has its own library. It conducts tours of
our facilities for students and the general public, It con-
ducts course and teacher evaluations and also supplies in-
formation on opportunities after the B.S. degree. The de-

partment has a chapter of Sigma Pi Sigma, the national
physics honor society.

Degree Requiremenis for the Major in Physics

“General Program

B.S.: (Combined major and second field sequence total-
ing 65 credits): an introductory sequence of Phy 120, 121,
124, 125, 220, 221, 224, 295; Phy 260, 315, 321, 332, 344,
403, 421, 431; Mat 112, 113, 212; Chm 12] a and b, 122
a and b and three credits advised from the fields of science
and mathematics.

The department renumbered several courses two years
ago. Numbers in parentheses represent the old numbering
system and are included for students’ convenience.

Teacher Education Program

B.S.: Combined major and second field sequence total-
ing 65 credits): an introductory sequence of Phy 120, 121,
124, 125, 220, 221, 224, 225; Phy 321, Phy 250 or 315 or
403, and eight credits of electives in physics at the 300
level or higher, Bio 101 a and b or 102 a and b; Chm 121
a and b; Chm 122 a and b; Mat 112, 118, 212 and six
credits selected from Asy 123, Atm 300, Atm 407, and
Geo 200,

194
Sie SR

er ee co

oor

!
Set ep ee.

vA 105 aandb General Physics (3, 3)
Mechanics, thermodynamics, electricity, magnetism, optics, rela-

tivity, atomic and nuclear phenomena, Three class periods each

week. Prerequisite: Three years of high school mathematics. Co-
ariciatian: Phy 106 a and b.

Phy 106 a and b General Physics Lab (1, 1)

Laboratory experiments to complement the topics being studied
in Phy 105 a and b. One laboratory period each week. Corequisites:

an a and b

‘Phy 107 aand b Problem Solving: General Physics (1, 1)
Applications of the principles and methods studied in General

Physics. Assignments will be selected with the aim of aiding the

student in developing a more thorough understanding of the sub-

ject mpatter of General Physics. Individual assignments can be ar-

ran Ve for students with special needs or interests. Corequisites:

Wi 105 a and b.
hy 120 (Phy 111) Introductory Physics (3)

A study of fundamental physical phenomena. Topics include
kinematics and dynamics of particles and rigid bodies. Three class

pugiods each week. May be taken either session. Prerequisites:
fat 112 or concurrent registration.

Phy 121 Introductory Physics I Lab (1).
Laboratory experiments to complement the topics being studied
in Phy 120, One laboratory period each week. May be taken either

———-session-Corequisite:-Phy-120:

——- 2

nr «

| ‘
‘

’ u

|
f

b ypeee— -

a erry

aly 122 Problem Solving: Introductory Physics | (1)

Application of the principles and methods studied in Introduc-
tory Physics I (Phy 120). The assignments will be selected with
the aim of aiding the student in developing ‘a more thorough under-
standing of the subject matter in Phy 120, Individual assignments

if a be arranged for students with special needs or interests, Offered
ery session. Corequisite: Phy 120,

Phy 124 (Phy 112) Introductory Physics If (3)
A study of fundamental physical phenomena. Topics include wave
motion, heat and thermodynamics, and kinetic theory of gases,

rerequisites;: Mat 113 or concurrent registration, Phy 120.

Ra class periods each week. May be taken either session.

~Phy 125 —Introductory-Physics-|II-Lab-(1)-— — aa
aboratory experiments to complement the topics being studied

infPhy 124, One laboratory period each week. May be taken either
sfssion. Corequisite: Phy 124.

Phy 126 Problem Solving: Introductory Physics !I (1)

Application of the principles and methods studied in Introductory
Physics II (Phy 124). The assignments will be selected with the
aim of aiding the student in developing a more thorough under-
standing of the subject matter in Phy 124. Individual assignments
can be arranged for students with special needs or interests,
Corequisite: Phy 124, Offered every session.

195

+ ———F-second-session- only. Prerequisite: "Phy 220-

I. a 220 (Phy 213) Introductory Physics III (3)

A study of fundamental physical phenomena. Topics include
electricity, magnetism, and optics. Three class periods each week.
May be taken either session. Prerequisite: Phy 124.

Phy 221 Introductory Physics Ill Lab (1)

Laboratory experiments to complement the topics being studied
in Phy 220. One laboratory period each week. May be taken either
session. Corequisite: Phy 220.

Phy 224 (Phy 214) Introductory Physics IV (3)

A study of fundamental physical phenomena. Topics include rela-~
tivity and quantum theory with applications to atomic, nuclear, and
Solid state physics. Three class periods each week. May be taken

Phy 225 Introductory Physics IV Lab (1)
Laboratory experiments to complement the topics being studied

in Phy 224, One laboratory period each week, May be taken second
_pessen only. Corequisite: Phy 224,
P

hy 227 Acoustics and Aural Arts (3)

Physical principles of production, transmission and reception of
sound. For non-scientists. Live and reproduced sound in music, in
nature, noise pollution. Fidelity: stereo in multi-channel systems,
Lecture/demonstration meetings and individualized learning.

\/ Phy 228 Acoustics: Projects (1-2)
Laboratory or other special investigation of selected topic(s) in
a Activity and credit arranged with instructor. Prerequisite

Yr corequisite: Phy 227 or introductory college physics.

1
ate

pry 230 Physics of Light and Art (3)
Physical principles and techniques used by physicists as applied
to the visual arts. Newton’s Laws applied to mobiles (L), bridges,
dancers; symmetry in physics and arts, optics (I.) and the camera
{L.), waves and holography (I), color effects (LL), lasers, light
quanta. Techniques: surface coating and computer graphics (LL).

{ = demonstrations plus laboratory, Non-mathematical course de-
igned for non-majors.

Nu hy 231 Constructive and Destructive Nuclear Energy (3)

The history of the nuclear reactor and A-bomb development,
both human and technical, decisions regarding A-bomb use, princi-
ples of the H-bomb and ballistic missiles, electric power from fis-
sion reactors, prospects of controlled thermonuclear power, and
medical use of nuclear particles and isotopes. Non-mathematical;
‘for scientists and non-scientists. Two hours per week of lecture;

| one hour for discussion of technical or moral questions.

Phy 250 (Phy 217) Alternating Current and Electronics (3)

Alternating currents, electron tubes, and transistors. Electronic
circuits including rectifiers, amplifiers, oscillators, and logic cir-
cuits. Theory developed and practical experience achieved by means
of laboratory projects built by the student. Two class-laboratory
periods per week, May be taken first session only. Prerequisite: one
year of college physics or consent of instructor,

196

= +R

es, |
1

1
ie ener me

et mer ne

oo eee

Phy 251 Principles of Bio/ Medical Electronic Instrumentation I (4)

Principles of modern electronic instrumentation techniques as
applied to the bio/medical field. Topics include electrocardiography,
blood pressure, respiration rate and temperature. Modules. such as
operational amplifiers, multivibrators, power amplifiers, etc., are
studied individually and then assembled with appropriate trans-
ducers into working measuring instruments. Practical laboratory
wor 4 is emphasized. T'wo class-laboratories per week. Pyrerequsite:
Oo year of Physics ox permission of instructor,

tg: reve P<

Phy 260 Waves (3)

Study of basic wave coricepts with emphasis on similarities and
analogies between different wave phenomena. Topics include free
and forced oscillations, interference, diffraction, polarization, geo-
metrical’ optics, matter waves, Schroedinger wave equation. Three
class periods each week, May be taken second session only.
van Phy 220.

hy 302 (Env 302) (Phy 301) Urban and Environmental Physics
Problems (3)

A physicist’s approach to the collection, evaluation, and interpre-
tation of data and opinions on selected urban and environmental
problems. Topics will include mass transportation systems, com-
parison of various energy sources such as nuclear and fossil fuel,
and effective utilization of natural resources. Three class periods
eatgh week. May be taken either session. Prerequisite: Algebra.

hy 305 Physics Principles in Nuclear Medicine (3)

eee are

Basic physics in Nuclear Medicine;_radioaetive-nuclides;radionu=

clide scanning; radiation chemistry; biological effects of radiation,
radiopharmaceuticals; clinical radiation pathology; radiation hazards
d safety; waste disposal. Three class periods a week. May be taken
\ ot session only. Prerequisite: Phy 105 b or Phy 224 or equivalent.

Phy 307 Acoustics (3)
Phenomenological and mathematical analyses of the generation,
transmission and reception of sound waves. Basic principles and
applications. Three class periods a week. Prerequisites: Phy 220
vy, Mat 212 or consent of instructor.
h

y 315 Electronics (3)

ee ee

|
t
| | Transistors and their characteristics; electronic circuits, field

effect transistors and applications; amplifiers, low and high fre-
quency response; operational amplifiers; consideration of control-

‘_ circuit_design; -fast-switching—and-counting devices; integrated cir-
/ cuits and their designs. Two class periods and one three-hour labo-
| ey each week. May be taken first session only. Prerequisite:

vid 224 or Phy 260,
h

y 316 Electronics: Projects (3)

Independent projects involving laboratory work in the study of
electronic circuits using linear and/or digital devices. (Each stu-
dent is expected to undertake a project which requires originality
and broadens knowledge of the area.) Special attention is paid to
counters, registers, encoding, decoders; and digital applications.
| May be taken second session only, Prerequisite: Phy 315.

197

a ‘Prerequisite :--Phy-321-_or-consent-of-instructor.

Phy 321 Intermediate Mechanics (4)

Fundamentals of Newtonian mechanics, conservation theorems,
central force motion, gravitation, the special theory of relativity,
rigid-body problems, kinematics of two-particle collisions, motion
in a non-inertial reference frame, Lagrange equations, Hamilton’s

equations. Four class periods each week. Prerequisites or corequi-
sites: Phy 224 or Phy 260, Mat 212,

Phy 332 Intermediate Electricity and Magnetism (4).
Electrostatics and magnetostatics: sources, fields in various ma-
terials and configurations, Maxwell’s equations: their bases and
application induction and the behavior and propagation of fields in
uides and various unbounded media. Four class periods each week.

Phy 344 Introductory Quantum Mechanics (3)

An introduction to the quantum mechanical descriptions of sim-
ple physical systems. Topics include the particle-wave quality of
matter, the uncertainty principle, the Schroedinger equation, Her-
mitian operators, angular momentum, one dimensional harmonic

scillator, the hydrogen atom and molecule, perturbation theory.

hree class periods per week. Prerequisite: Phy 321.

Phy 401 History of Physics (3) \

Designed to give a perspective on the development of physics
through a study of the sources. Three class periods each week. May
be taken first session only. Prerequisite: 12 credits of college physics.

Phy 403 Intermediate Physics Laboratory | (3)

ae ee

Selected experiments to complement the intermediate courses;
includes laboratories in the areas of electronics, electricity and
magnetism, and modern physics, Methods of physical measurements
and error analysis are emphasized. The student is given the oppor-
tunity and shown the need to use the computer in data analysis.
Special projects can be arranged for advanced students. Two three-

hour laboratory periods each week. May be taken either session.
{ Prerequisite: Phy 250 or Phy 332 or consent of instructor.

Phy 404 tntermediate Physics Laboratory Il (3)

An extension of Phy 403 in which measurements are carried out
on experiments which have not been performed by the student as
part of Phy 403 and for which equipment is available. A portion of
the term will be devoted to project-type experiments, either in the
development of a portion of a new experiment or improvement of an
existing one. Two three-hour laboratory periods each week. May be
taken either session. Prerequisite: Phy 403.

Phy 421 Modern Physics | (3)

Introduction to atomic, nuclear and particle physics. Topics in-
clude hyperfine structure in hydrogen, atomic structure and spectra;
two nucleon system, bulk properties of nuclei, nuclear models and
reactions, radioactivity, classification of elementary particles, sym-
metries, conservation laws, models, Three class periods each week.
May be taken first session only. Prerequisite: Phy 344,

198

otk SD
'
core eeenrenpan at

Taine: = 7 aed
err te ras
1A v

| | Phy 422 Modern Physics II (3)
Introduction to physics of molecules and solids. Topics include
. . molecular structure, molecular spectra, quantum statistics, thermal
properties of solids, band theory, magnetism, phonons in solids,
masers and lasers. Three class periods each week. May be taken
second session only. Prerequisite: Phy 421.

Thermodynamic systems and variables; the laws of thermody-
namics; thermodynamic potentials and applications; ideal and real
| | gas relations; changes of phase, introduction to probability theory;

t
| Xo Thermodynamics and Statistical Physics (3)

. elementary kinetic theory of gases; micro- and macro-states of
| simple quantum-mechanical systems; Fermi-Dirac, Bose-Einstein
and, Maxwell-Boltzmann statistics, Three class periods each week.

May be taken second session only. Prerequisites: Mat 212 and
| | Phy 224.

Ks Projects Laboratory (3)

Measurements at the level of Phy 408 are carried out using ap-
| | paratus and techniques developed as part of the course. The course
_}| is unstructured and requires considerable independence on the part
of the student but allows considerable time freedom. Following
suggestions of the instructor, the student carries out one or more
measurements of physical quantities in fields of physics of mutual
/ interest. Written reports are required. Nominally six hours per

I
|

week.—_May—be—taken—either-session;—Prerequisite;—_Phy—408—or-com
sent of the instructor,

| |

: ‘Phy 460 Radiation Physics (3)
A survey of the types of nuclear reactions commonly observed
' including elastic scattering, fast and slow neutron-induced; different
| | types of high energy particle reactions; heavy-ion and photonuclear
reactions; the techniques and terminology of radioactive decay,
absorption and attenuation measurements, dose rates, build up
_ rates, shielding principles and biological effects of radiation; meth-
| ods of producing activation and activation analysis, fission detection
| methods, dosimetry and health physics. Three class periods each
k

week.,May be taken second session only, Prerequisite: consent of
instrtictor,

Phy 497 (Phy 498) Independent Study in Physics (1-3)
The student will pursue independent study under the direction
- of a faculty member with whom he/she has made arrangements.
| ' After one or more hourly meetings per week, the student will read
: and discuss specialized material beyond that normally covered in a
' * eourse, or carry out experiments and/or calculations in which inde-
pendence is required, A written report will be submitted on the
| | work of each session, Not limited to seniors. May be repeated for
i credit,

199

| . DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY

FACULTY: J. Bowen, S. Brown, D. Doty, R, Eisenberger,

M. Eson, G. G. Gallup, Jr., N. Greenfeld, R. Hicks, A.

israel, B. Layton, A. Luchins, J. Mancuso, N. B. McCutch-

eon, R. Oesterreich, E. Riley, W. Simmons, J. Suls, J.

Tedeschi, R. Teevan, H. Tennen, J. Tucker, C. Waterman,
W, Whitten II, H. J. Wilkinson.

graduate students with a broad, general background in
scientific psychology. The program is designed to prepare

| The objective of the department is to provide under-

+----— —students for graduate study in psychology as well as a
diversity of other fields requiring knowledge of psycho-

become well-versed in the theories, research, and applica-
tions of the discipline.

The department offers a full program leading to the
B.A.; a graduate program leading to the Ph.D. with several
major areas of concentration and a clinical training pro-
gram; and, in cooperation with the Department of Educa-
tional Psychology and Statistics in the School of Educa-
tion, the University Certificate in School Psychology.

a ny

logical principles. The department expects its students to |

t -Special Programs or Opportunities:

! The department offers opportunities for independent
study and research beginning in the sophomore year, Stu-
dents involved in research activities have supervised access
to the department’s animal behavior laboratory, social psy-
chology laboratory, and off-campus professional agencies.
The department sponsors an undergraduate student asso-
ciation and a local chapter of Psi Chi, the national under-
graduate psychology honorary,

Degree Requirements for the Major in Psychology
General Program

B.A.: The program in Psychology is a combined major
and second field sequence requiring a minimum of 51
credits: 27 credits in Psychology including Psy 101,
Psy 211, Psy 212 and 18 credits of Psychology electives
including 12 credits of courses numbered 300 or above;
and 24 credits in the interdepartmental second field in-
cluding a minimum of six credits in Mathematics, a mini-

200
mum of six credits in Natural Sciences (Biology, Chemis-
try, Physics), a minimum of six credits in Social Sciences
' | (excluding Psychology) and six additional credits distrib-
+ uted among these three areas to yield a concentration of
nine credits in a single department. Csi 201 and Phi 210
pay be substituted for Mathematics credit.

| | Psy 101 Introduction to Psychology (3)

; The basic methods and points of view in the scientific study of
human behavior. Topics include biological bases of behavior, per-
sonality organization, intelligence, motivation, emotions, learning,

| | ee social relations.
"Psy 203 Psychology of Child Development (3)

The genesis of various behavior forms; social, emotional, and in-
tellectual developments in contemporary society; the relationship
between childhood experience and personality development.

Ve
Psy 204 Applied Psychology (3)
! The application of psychological principles to business, industry,
3 va political and social institutions, Prerequisite: Psy 101.
Psy 209 Psychology Testing (3)

Prerequisite: Psy 101,

i cal ba methods of psychological assessment, including their histori-
| | background and an emphasis on evaluation of the reliability
1} ofa validity of psychological tests. Prerequisite: Psy 101.

Psy 211 Introduction to Experimental Psychology (3)
an ‘The empirical study of the following psychological processes:
| sensation, perception, learning, emotions, and motivation. Two lec-
t tures, one lab each week. Prerequisite: Psy 101.

Ypsy 212 Statistical Methods in Psychology (3)
Methods of analyzing quantitative data in psychology and the
| _ behavioral sciences. The relation of each of the various methods to
e fe design of experiments. Prerequisite; Psy 101.

An introduction to basic neurophysiology followed by a study of
the biological bases of sensation and perception and language func-
tion. Not recommended for biology majors. Optional laboratory for
one credit (Psy 315), Prerequisites: Psy 101 and Bio 101 a and b

| | Psy 214 Biological Bases of Sensation (3)

‘a consent of instructor. a

“Psy 270 (Soc 260) Social Psychology (3)

The relation between the individual and the group, the influence
‘of culture and of institutions on human personality, the nature and
types of leadership, factors in the development of social attitudes,
Fe psychology of mass movements and of social decisions.

!
— i, ——————
aaaemeun a

rerequisite: Psy 101 or Soc. 115.

Psy 297 Directed Study in Psychology (3)
The course provides the opportunity for a sophomore student to
work on a research project under the supervision of a faculty mem-

201

ry
l
il
i; ¢
‘4

ber. Open to majors and non-majors with consent of department
chairman. May be repeated, once, for up to a total of six credits.
(Majors may apply only six credits of total credits earned in 297,

| and 497 to 27 credits required in psychology), Prerequisite; |

sy 101.

Psy 310 History of Psychology (3)
A critical analysis of basic writings which have contributed to * |
fs historical development of psychology as a science. Prerequisite: |
sy 101. 4

Psy 314 Biological Bases of Behavior (3)

The psychophysiology of sleep and arousal, reward and punish- |
, ment, biological drives and learning and memory. Optional labora- * ;
-f-——-_— } tory: for-one-credit- (Psy-315).Prerequisite: Psy 10l-and Psy 214° ="
| or Bio 410 or Bio 417.

Psy 315 Biological Bases of Behavior Laboratory (1)
Instruction in gross neuroanatomy, electrical recording and surgi- |< |
cal techniques will be followed by student projects such as brain ~ |
‘stimulation and lesions in animals or EEG studies in humans.
[ Prerequisite or corequisite: Psy 214 or Psy 314.

Psy 327 Personality (3)

Biological and social determinants of personality and its develop-
| ment; methods of studying personality; the various systems of psy-
| chology and their interpretations of personality structure. 4
Prerequisite: Psy 101.

t J Psy 338 Abnormal Psychology (3)
A-survey—ofthe-behavior-disorders; including the psychoses, psy-__;
choneuroses, mental deficiencies, and other forms of psycho- |
J pathology. Prerequisites: Psy 101, and 203 or 327. it

Psy 340 The Psychology of Human Sexuality (3)

An in-depth coverage of research and theory on: biological and
social causes of sex differences in behavior, attraction and love,
marriage and alternatives, sexual behavior, personality variables | ,
pa to sexual responsiveness, sexual dysfunction, sexual devia-

t
i i
T
t

ions, effects of erotica, and birth control. Prerequisite: Psy 101. * 3

Psy 380 Learning (3) 1 |
Analysis of basic problems in learning. Consideration of data re-

fulting from human and animal experimentation. Prerequisite: six

redits in psychology. h—

,f Psy 382 Perception (3)

A consideration of how man gains knowledge of the world
j through his senses, and of the organization and stability of man’s
perceptual world, Prerequisite: six credits in psychology. 14

»/ Psy 384 Motivation (3)

Various theories of motivation will be evaluated in the light of
relevant evidence. Prerequisite: Psy 101.

; TSU, 3t6 Evo Inbionaay Psychology (a)
202 12179

tyr
es PTA

'
ee ee
.

|
|

i
}

——s
ee 0

/ /
‘ey 397 Directed Research in Psychology (3)

The course provides the opportunity for a junior student to work
on a research project under the supervision of a faculty member.
Open to majors and non-majors with consent of department chair-
man. May be repeated, once, for up to a total of six credits.
(Majors may apply only six credits of total credits earned in 297,

9 and 497 to 27 credits required in psychology.) Prerequisite:
Psy 101.

7 sy 450 Selected Topics in Psychology (3)

Selected topics from the current literature bearing on issues
which define the specified fields. Specific areas to be announced at

ioe of offering. May be repeated once for credit. Prerequisite: Psy
and consent of instructor,

19
vA 497 Independent Study and Research (1-6)

Survey of the research literature and/or conduct of a research
project on a selected methodological, theoretical, or applied prob-
lem.'Each student must have a faculty advisor. Open to majors and
non-majors with consent of department chairman. May be repeated,
once, for credit. (Majors may apply only six credits of total credits
earned in Psy 297, Psy 397, and Psy 497 to the 27 credits required
in psychology. Prerequisites: Psy 10] and 12 additional credits ip
psychology. Psy 211 and Psy 212 recommended.

DEPARTMENT OF PUERTO RICAN STUDIES

ee ee he —— — - --—-=

— eS

——es

FACULTY: E, Acosta-Belén, E. Christensen, J. E. Irizarry,
J. A. Silén

The curriculum of the Puerto Rican Studies Department
has been designed to provide students with an opportu-
nity for intensive interdisciplinary exploration of many dif-
ferent areas of the Puerto Rican experience as a minority
group in the United States, In addition, it provides an
integrated broad-based knowledge of the island, and its
relation to the Caribbean, the rest of Latin America, and
the United States. Courses deal intensively with many as-
pects of the life of the Puerto Ricans—cultural, political,

social and economic processes, language, literature, art,
music, and education, These areas will be studied from the
perspective of contemporary forms: cultural pluralism, bi-
lingualism, the immigrant’s United States experience, as
well as the historical attempt by the Puerto Rican people
to achieve an individualized national personality.

Students majoring in Puerto Rican Studies may wish to
spend a term in Puerto Rico under a program sponsored

by SUNY Buffalo, This program affords qualified students _

an opportunity to spend a term in Puerto Rico, to engage

203 ©

wee ese releee—- = :
'

in independent study, workshops, formal classes, and field
work relating to Puerto Rican culture and institutions, The
program is staffed by leading Puerto Rican writers, artists,
and scholars. Prior permission of the chairperson is re-
quired,

Degree Requirements for the Major
in Puerto Rican Studies

General Program

—--B,As+ A-total of -33-credits in-Puerto Rican-Studies: 18- -

credits of required course work to include Prs 101, Prs 143,
Prs 150, Prs 329, Prs 346, Prs 490, plus at least three addi-
tional credits 300 level or above. Twelve additional credits
in Puerto Rican Studies as advised by the faculty of the
department. Courses that are offered by other departments
that have been officially cross-listed with the Puerto Rican
Studies Department will be accepted to fulfill this require-
ment.

Other Degree Requirements

A second major or second field as advised by the faculty

ae awe ee ph nt ont

ene

Spy aeieesiees ee ausceomsecee

of the department.

+e ee

Upon completion of the program requirements, candi-
dates should possess a reading and writing knowledge of

Peas
V Prs 101 History of Puerto Rico (3)

A survey of Puerto Rican history from the pre-Hispanic era to the
present. Emphasis on transition from domination by Spain to present
status.

J Prs 143 Survey of Puerto Rican Literature (3)

A study of the major literary trends in Puerto Rico. The course
deals with literature written in both Spanish and English.
rerequisite: reading knowledge of Spanish.

‘Prs 150 Puerto Rican Culture (3)
A survey of contemporary Puerto Rican culture. Problems of
Puerto Rican identity on the U.S. mainland as well as patterns of
uerto Rican migrations to urban centers. Prerequisite: An intro-
ductory course in either Anthropology, Sociology, Psychology, or
History, and consent of instructor.

Prs 200 Puerto Rican Political and Social Writers (3)

Study of major Puerto Rican essay writers; special consideration
of the political and social realities of Puerto Rico reflected in their
thought, This course will be conducted in Spanish.

204

Dawe
Bf /

| | "Brg 201 Puerto Rican Art (3)
A survey of Puerto Rican art from pre-columbian times to the

present. Emphasis will be placed on the Taino and African elements
of Puerto Rican art and on contemporary art of protest.

!
{ Ve

231 (Aas 231) Dynamics of Racism (3)
rr Sane as Aas 231)

| “Prs250 Puerto Rican Politics and Power Structure (3)

| An examination of Puerto Rican political parties. The emergence
of, power groups in Puerto Rico and the U.S. and their effects on
political change. Prerequisite: Prs 150 or Pos 120.

| | Yprs 282 (Soc 282) Minority Groups (3)
| ‘Same as Soc 282.

,Prs 289 (Soc 289) Special Topics in Ethnicity (3)
| | same as Soc 289.

rs 301 (Aas 301) Puerto Rico and the Caribbean (3) |

A comparative study of the socio-historic development of Puerto

} Rico and the major Caribbean islands from the colonial period to

| ' the present, with special reference to the slavery systems, planta-

tion societies, colonial policies, and the rise of nationalism in the
Garibbean basin.

- fy rs 329 (Soc 379) Urban ie eo roca
| Pee SamerassSue07 9, ety deot,

Mmdimne
_¥ “A psychodynamic analysis of the formation of eer and

| | processes of identification as related to the Puerto Rican experience
and the anthropological make-up of the Puerto Rican people.
Prerequisites: Prs 150 and Prs 329.

\brs 380 (Soc 380) Sociology of Poverty
/ Same as Soc 380.

| brs 400 {las 400) Current Latin American Ideas (3)
Same as Ias 400.
_ 7,
j
r

Doe bal ie | 7h sh ed

s 401 History of the Puerto Rican Labor Movement (3)
[i A study of the development of the Puerto Rican labor move-

meht from its 19th century origins to the present. Prerequisite:
Py ‘101 or Prs 150,

4 i —

| prs 414 (Spn 414) Literature of the Hispanic Caribbean (3)
A study of selected major writers of Cuba, the Dominican Re-
public, and Puerto Rico of the 19th and 20th centuries. Special
| ; copiideration of literature as a reflection of situations and problems

! culiar to the hispanic Caribbean. Conducted in Spanish.
| Ple erequisite: Spn 123,

Prs 415 Puerto Rican Literature of the 20th Century: Prose (3)
i A study of modern and contemporary Puerto Rican prose writers

' with emphasis on the short story and the novel. Prerequisite: Prs
| 1438.

205

cyt | :
© 320 ygrto uerto seks OR Ne (3) 3— bie

|
T

wi ele be
The Revto Rican Communrty in try. U.5. (80 | |

W4 Prs 429 HOt eoel-Glnuchsiacbithar@ecie re Riore teraabealbiLay- As ~ I
An examination of internal structures of the Puerto Rican com-

munity in the U.S. and their relationship to structures outside the _
community. Current problems concerning the Puerto Rican com- ¢ |

: munity will be studied and analyzed. Special emphasis on housing, |

public education, welfare, community health and race relations.
[as Prs 150 or Soc 115.

Prs 431 (Aas 431) Third World Concept (3) a
Same as Aas 431. i:

Prs 448 (Soc 448) Social Change in Latin America (3)

| J. Same as Soc 448 i

; —— 7 Prs 450 (Aas 450) ~ Minority Children in the U.S. School System (3) OS
A study of the effects of the U.S. school system on the cultural,

psychological, and linguistic make-up of minority children, with © -

emphasis on the Puerto Rican child. An analysis of bilingualism,

bidialectalism, and cultural pluralism as a means of dealing with

the conflicts created within the present school system. Prerequisite:

le 150. _
' 2
| ¥ Prs 490 Senior Seminar In Puerto Rican Studies (3-6) : |
; Critical examination and discussion of major contemporary topics ~ :
in the area of Puerto Rican Studies. Emphasis on the development
; _ of research and bibliographical techniques. Prerequisite: majors in
: | senior year. Can be repeated by seniors only, for up to six credits.

-Prs 491 (Ant 481) Research Projects (3-6).

An introduction to basic research skills required to answer _ques-
tions on human behavior, with special emphasis on cross-cultural f
interaction. Students will be involved in a specific research project . |
and this will provide them with the basic research methods to in- < |
clude data collection, processing, and analysis. Prerequisite: Junior
or Senior standing or consent of the instructor.

{ Prs 497 Independent Study (3-6) 4 |
Independent study in an area of special interest to the student ‘-"
under the supervision of the sponsoring faculty member. May be

repeated for up to six credits. Prerequisites: the consent of in- hi
! structor and department chairperson. !

socal

eer oe eee

a3)
ito

206

}

DEPARTMENT OF RHETORIC AND vi
COMMUNICATION

| FACULTY: W. Carleton, T, Conley, K. Kendall, L. Lich-
' | tig, M. Rudden, L. St. Clair, R. Sanders, D. Switzer, S.
Taylor, P. Tompkins, R. Wilkie.

Study in Rhetoric and Communication reflects the gen-
~* eral goals of liberal and humanistic education. The depart-
_ ment offers a broad ‘range of courses which focus on de-
| | scribing, analyzing, and explaining human communication.

. These courses examine different settings, forms, and media

of communication from a variety of perspectives.
| The department's courses are organized into four major
| | areas of study, as follows:

Communication Arts: Reo 201, 203, 204, 206, 208, 212,
214, 303, 304, 308, and 312.
| History and Criticism: Reo 235, 237, 238, 335, 336, 337,
430, and 439.

Rhetorical Theory: Reo 262, 362, and 462,

| Communication Theory: Reo 265, 367, 368, 369, 465,
| ' and 470.

In addition, the department offers an introductory course,

Reo 100, which provides students with insights into mat-
| , ters of concern in each of the four areas of study.

Degree Requirements for the Major
in Rhetoric and Communication
General Program

B.A.: A minimum of 36 credits in the Department of
Rhetoric and Communication including Reo 100, 235, 262,

Spaeecee eipiemiges

and 265, and at least 12 credits in courses .on or above the
ay _f00-evel

| : Rco 100 Explorations in Rhetoric and Communication (3)

An introduction to the study of rhetoric and human communica-

tion. Lectures and discussions exploring various characteristics,

| + functions, and modes of rhetoric and communication in contempo-
I

vil situations,
- Reo 201 Interpersonal Communication (3)
' An introduction to those aspects of communication which typify
{ | interpersonal relationships. Included are experientially acquired in-
| sights into, and theoretical considerations of, interpersonal commu-
| _: nication,

207

* ;
i
sf
ea ; {

Reco 203 Speech Composition and Presentation (3) .
An introduction to the composition and presentation of speeches.
Guided practice in topic selection, organization, and the oral pre-

J sentation of various kinds of speeches. 4

Reco 204 Group Communication (3) |
| , . The theory and practice of small group interaction. Examination
| of both group dynamics and cognitive processes, as they relate to

| group deliberation.

Reo 206 Parlimentary Procedure (2)
A practical introduction to parliamentary procedure, wtih experi-
t ence in chairing meetings and rulings on parliamentary questions.

Theory and practice in determining and conveying the meaning
of literary works. Special emphasis upon reading literary works in
terms of their rhetorical design (i.e., their intention, structtre, and
effect on the audience).

: f sis upon skills needed in oral argumentation. | i

Rco 214 Communication Through Mass Media (3) |
Theory and practice of creating radio and television broadcasts, ~*~ ;
with a consideration of the relevant technical features of these — ji

media. Prerequisite: Reo 238, consent of instructor, and no previous
production experience.
Sale

f os —__—— .
| 7 Reo 26 Rhetorical Criticism (3) =
. Introductory study of the rhetorical approach in criticism, with jj |
consideration of the critical methods developed by such writers as ~*~
Aristotle, Baird, Black, and Burke. Lectures and guided practice in
writing and evaluating rhetorical criticism. a

‘Reoe-237-(Gwh-—Public-Address-in-History (3) delete Fae? 7F
An examinati {_historically--styrilfitant’ rhetoricar-documenys,
a thurs ia thewore Do

Rco 238 Rhetoric of Mass Media (3) 5
An introduction to radio, television, film, and selected popular °
arts considered as rhetorical forms. Consideration of the history and

special properties of each medium, with emphasis on approaches to =

| { research and criticism. |
Reo 2A2 Introduction to Rhetorical Theory (3)
An examination of the writings of major theorists, from Isocrates
o figures of the twentieth century,

wh ees

A survey of empirical approaches to the study of human com-
munication. Consideration of major research findings, methods, and ,
t conceptualizations in such areas as persuasive communication, e |
, group communication, and mass communication, :

208

| Reo ae Introduction to Communication Theory (3) if

1
stereo

; /

Sreo 303 Advanced Speech Composition (3)
Study and exercises in the methods and procedures of speechwrit-
ing. This course presumes a mastery of basic public speaking skills.
Pyerequisite: Reo 203 or consent of instructor,

manors

Rco 304 Conference and Group Leadership (3)
7 Advanced study of small group deliberation, with special empha-
i sis upon theories of group leadership as they apply in business and
| | professional group communication settings. Prerequisite: Reco 204

or consent of instructor. De 0 ote od 0 4 ¥

08-—Rhetoricat ntérpretation of titer:
Advanced study of the means of determining and conveying

eaning of literary works. From term_to term, the—sour cus

¥ill vary, to consider different genres, periods, and problems. May

e repeated for a total of nine credits with changes in topic:
r : -208~or-eonsentofhirste

-Eundamentals of radio. production,_with emphasis upon m the oe
ECR Re reetn scene 2-2

tive process involved in giving aural form to program’ idéas-

uided practice in the use of studio and cont

uisite+-Ree—-268~ox-consent—af_ instructor.

Rco 312 Advanced Argumentation and Debate (3) |
Advanced study of the theory and practice of rhetorical argument.

| [ Special attention to theories of argument as they relate to oral
debate. Prerequisite: Reo 212 or consent of instructor.

Reo-sts—Television Broadcasting Production (3). OCC CLV te 27
T Techniques__of...television—produetion—with-—practice.. ri
producing, directing, staging, and lighting. Prerequisite: Beco 238 gr
! sonsent-of Institictor.

Reo 335 Studies in the History of Public Address (3)
Study of a selected period, region, genre, or figure in historical
1

public address; e.g., Rhetoric of the American Revolution, Civil
War Oratory, Churchill’s speeches. May be repeated for a total of

njhe credits with changes in topic, Prerequisite: Reo 288 or consent |
ff instructor. (EES
R

co 336 Studies in Contemporary Public Address (3)

Study of a selected region, genre, or figure in contemporary pub-
lic address; e.g., Black Rhetoric, campaign oratory, speaking in the
. ritish Parliament. May be repeated for a total of nine credits with i.
17 fehanges in topic. Prerequisite: Gas consent of instructor.

320 >
Rco 337 The Rhetoric of Propaga daw vements (3)
Consideration of the theories of mass persuasion, with application
| : to examples of se use of propaganda in selected movements.
{

! we Rec (230) consent of instructor.

._fReo 362 (Cwl 36 ontemporary Rhetorical Theory (3)
An examination of current rhetorical concerns, as embodied in
the writings of such theorists as I. A. Richards, Richard Weaver,
| Kenneth Burke, and Chaim Perelman. Prerequisite: Reo SG: or

| | consent of instructor. “* }

$
|
|
t
{
h

|
{
i

i
{
i

}

|______Study of a_particnlar_topic_or_method_of_rhetorical_criticism. A

eee

¥ Reo 367 Theories of Interpersonal and Small Group
| Communication (3)
An examination of the theories, research methods, and repre-
sentative research findings related to experimental and observational
studies of communication in interpersonal and small group settings.

J Prerequisite: Reo 201 or 204, and “Goes of instructor.
Reo 368 Empirical Studies of Persuasion- SOP

Study of empirical approaches to attitude and behavior change
brought about by communication. Prerequisite: Reco Bes or consent
Blo

? of instructor. S>

Reo 369 Theories of Organizational Communication (3)

|___Theoretical__models _and __empirical_ studies_ of _communication _

i within complex organizations. In-depth case study of one or more
¥ organizations. Prerequisite: Reco (e5. consent of instructor.

t ?
\¥ Reo 397 Independent Study an rk arch in Rhetoric and

Communication (1-3) |
Directed reading and conferences on selected topics, Course may
be repeated for a total of six credits. Prerequisite: consent of in-

structor and iesisiiaiaaailh chairman. bel fy
— on

2 fA gabvtitndtitanot a dawela pment.and refinement of the filmed) -

ocumentary, with emphasis on the uses of docu
f d..te-persuade-Erereqtuisite:—Ree-238_o2-Art.290,

Reco 439 Seminar in Rhetorical Criticism (3)

major research paper will be required. May be repeated for a total
of nine credits with changes in topic. Prerequisite: consent of

nstructor,
ff Rco 462 Studies in Rhetorical Theory (3)

Study of a selected topic in rhetorical theory; e.g., the nature of
the enthymeme, Ciceronian rhetorical theory in the Renaissance,
rhetorical ethos, May be repeated for a total of nine credits with
changes in topic. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Reco 465 Studies in Communication Theory (3)
Study of a selected topic in communication theory; e.g., nonverbal
communication, consistency theory, mass communication, May be

Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

| [reves for a total of nine credits with changes in topic.

Reco 470 Methods of Communication Research (3)

Study of research strategies, design of experiments, and conduct
of observational studies of human communication. Preparation of a
research proposal. Prerequisite: Reo 265 or consent of instructor.

210

as |
a
= - a

PROGRAM IN RUSSIAN AND
EAST EUROPEAN STUDIES

(Interdisciplinary)

FACULTY: H. Andersen, A, Andreyewsky, H. Baran, T.

Barker, J. Burian, K. Chen, T. Clyman, L. Fields, G, Fran-

gos, M. Frinta, W. Heiser, E. Hoffman, A. Iwanska, S.

Katz, N. Kisseleff, R. Patterson, K. Shaffer, A. Shane, J.

Symons, J, Szoverffy, S. Temkin, C. Tucker, J. Zacek, W.
Zenner, M. Zych.

The interdisciplinary major-second field with a concen-
tration in Russian and East European Studies offers stu-
dents the opportunity to receive expert guidance in acquir-
ing a broad, relevant experience in this field, to develop
necessary language skills for this field, to choose between a
concentration in literature and one in history and civiliza-
tion, and, finally, to acquire a comprehensive view of Rus-
sian and East European civilization instead of the narrower
perspective of a single discipline.

Degree Requirements for the Interdisciplinary

Major-Second Field with a Concentration

in Russian and East European Studies
B.A. History Track

Rus 253; 24 credits in history including His 353 a and b,

His 354 a and b, His 481 and 9 elective credits in history
including one course chosen from His 452, His 458 a and
b, His 554 a or b; 18 credits in language. Students begin-
ning a language at the 100 or 200 level must take all 18

~ credits in one Slavic language, Students certified by the
department of Slavic Languages and Literatures as having
achieved proficiency in a Slavic language before having

quirement from a second language; 6 credits of approved
related courses from disciplines other than history; and Res
498, Total credit requirements: 54 credits.

B.A. Language and Literature Track

Rus 253; 27 credits of language and literature including
14 credits in Russian language above Rus 201, Rus 311,
and 3 credits in Russian literature, and 7 credits in elec-

211

‘ — —completed -18-credits-may-elect-the-remainder of-the re-—}

| tives offered by the Department of Slavic Languages and
Literatures (preferably in courses other than Russian); 15
| credits in History including His 353 a or His 353 b, His
354 a or His 354 b, His 481, 6 credits of approved history
eléctives; 6 credits of approved related courses from disci-
ines other than Slavic Languages and Literatures; and
3 es 498. Total credit requirements: 54 credits.

Res 498 Senior Seminar in Russian and East European

Studies (3)
| Senior research project done under the direction of a faculty
|

member participating in the Russian and East European study pro-
gram. Project must be approved by the Committee on Slavic and
East European Studies. Prerequisite: Reading knowledge of a Slavic
language.

DEPARTMENT OF SLAVIC LANGUAGES
AND LITERATURE

FACULTY: H. Baran, T. Clyman, H. Goldblatt, N. Kis-
seleff, M. Lazic, R. Patterson, E. Scatton, A. Shane.

Proficiency in the foreign language and a mastery of the
literature are treated both as an end in themselves and as
a means to better acquaint the student with the foreign
country, its culture, and ultimately himself. In addition to

i a_variety_of language and literature courses taught in the

soe tgiatot ise sts
tg

language, the department also offers a series of literature
courses in English translation which make Slavic litera-
tures, including the great treasury of Russian literature,
accessible to all undergraduate students regardless of Jan-
guage proficiency. Extracurricular opportunities of practic-
ing the foreign language are afforded by language clubs
and language tables.

Degree Requirements for the Major in Russian

| General Program

| B.A.; A minimum of 35 credits of Russian above Rus
201, including Rus 202, 253, 301, 302, 311, and two ad-
ditional courses from each of the following three groups.

Group I (Language): 208, 303, 306, 307, 407.

Group II (Literature): 334, 435, 438.

Group III (Literature in Translation): 254, 255, 256, 257,

259, 341, 342, 353, 354, 356, 357, 358, 359.

No more than nine credits for courses in translation
(Group III) may be applied toward fulfillment of the 35
| credits.

212

{ !
|
ba Teacher Education Program
‘ B.A.: 35 credits of Russian above Rus 201, including
| | Rus 202, 253, 301, 302, 303, 311, at least one additional
: course from each of the three groups listed above, and Lin
7 206. No more than nine credits for courses in translation
t; (Group III)’ may be applied toward fulfillment of the 35
| credits,
All students wishing to enter elementary, intermediate,
, or advanced language courses must take the placement ex-
| | amination administered by the department. Previous ex-
perience has indicated that students with one year of high
school Russian will usually place in Rus 101, two years in
{| Rus 102, three years in Rus 201, and four years in Rus 202.
| Students are reminded that placement is contingent upon
_ examination results and consultation with a department
adviser. ’

|
|
| 4 J Russian
R

us 10 a Elementary Russian for Graduate Students (0)
| An intensive study of the basic structure of Russian, supplemented
| by/ graded readings. This course is limited to a reading objective.

ee ey,
’

us 10 b Elementary Russian for Graduate Students (0)
: Continued study of the structure of Russian. Careful reading of
| 7 materials chosen from a wide variety of subject areas. This course

limited to a reading objective. Prerequisite: Rus 10 a or the
_frsivtet

| Rus 101 Elementary Russian (5)

| Pg eel s course with audio-lingual approach; fundamentals of
the language structure and sounds; emphasis on correct pronuncia-

| Re and oral expression. Five classes, two laboratories each week.

Rus 102 Elementary Russian (5)

| | Beginner’s course with audio-lingual approach. Fundamentals of
: the language structure: the introduction of graded readings. Five

lasses, two laboratories each week. Prerequisite: Rus 101 or

_i__ _fequivalent._-

Rus 150 Russian Masterpieces in English Translation (3)

Reading of important literary works of nineteenth and twentieth-
century Russia, chosen for their intrinsic value and significance in
| the development of Russian literature and thought. Course may not

e used to fulfill the requirements of the major in Russian. Con-
ucted in English. Offered in alternate years.

Study of major works by Russia’s greatest poets of the 20th
| | century such as Blok, Mayakovsky, Pasternak, Akhmatova, and

213

| Rus 160 Russian Poets in English Translation (3)

= oF ioe
‘

others, Conducted in English. Course may not be used to fulfill

f e requirements of the major in Russian. Offered in alternate years.

Rus 201 Intermediate Russian (5)
Completion and review of basic Russian grammar with emphasis
on the active skills of speaking and writing, Five classes,each week.

Prerequisite: Rus 102 or equivalent. 4s GbE Ce bore fory

Rus 202 Intermediate Russian (5)
Intensive practice in conversation based on everyday subjects and

materials. Prerequisite: Rus 201 or equivalent.

f reading and composition based on a variety of contemporary

Rus 208 Scientific Russian (3)

from contemporary books and journals in the fields of the physical,

biological, and social sciences. Prerequisite: Rus 201 or consent of

/ instructor.

Rus 253 Russian Civilization (3)

The cultural and ideological development of Russia from the
inheritance of the Byzantine Empire to the establishment of Soviet
power. Audio-visual materials are used to familiarize students with

Presse aspects of Russian culture. Conducted in English.

Rus 254 Soviet Society and Culture (3)

An interdisciplinary study of contemporary Soviet Russian society
and culture. Audio-visual materials are used extensively to provide

Scientific and technological terminology. Reading and translation

cone tee set! eam = Epa ery

fas 32 with a graphic image of the USSR. Conducted in English.

Russ 255 Russian Science Fiction in English Translation (3)

The development of science fiction in Russian and other selected
Slavic countries with readings in writers such as E, Zamiatin, A.
Tolstoy, Strugatsky Brothers, S.. Lem and K. Capek, Conducted in
English. Offered in alternate years.

Rus 256 Russian Literature in Revolt and Expatriation (3)

A study of leading Russian writers who clashed with their Church
and Government and the societal and literary norms of their day.
Readings from the works of such writers as Avakum, Chaadaev,
Pushkin, Tolstoy, Bunin, Solzhenitsyn and Brodsky. Conducted in
English. Offered in alternate years.

Rus 257 The Comic in Russia (3)

Types of the comic in Russian culture and literature. Topics in-
clude: the carnival element in folklore, the comedies in Griboedov,
Gogol, and Chekhov, the humor of Dostoevsky, and the comic
novel in the Soviet Union. Conducted in English. Offered in alter-

te years,
fos 259 Russian Drama in English Translation (3).

From the comedies of Fonvizin and Griboedov satirizing the
Russian gocial scene to the twilight melancholy of Chekhov and
the theater of 20th-century Soviet Russia, the course surveys major
trends in Russian drama and analyzes major works. Conducted in
English. Offered in alternate years,

214
| , Pom 301 Advanced Russian (3)

The study of advanced grammar including word formation with
intensive practice in speech and writing. Prerequisite: Rus 202.

Rus 302 Advanced Russian (3)
The study of advanced grammar with intensive practice in speech
vi writing, and the reading of cultural texts. Prerequisite: Rus 301.

Rus 303 Russian Phonology (3)

r ‘Introduction to. articulatory phonetics and phonemics with inten- f
. sive drill in pronunciation and intonation; extensive use of tapes
Ye records, Prerequisite: Rus 202 or consent of instructor. |

Rus 306 Advanced Conversation (3)
Intensive conversational practice and discussion based on current ,
J) events and contemporary texts, Prerequisite: Rus 202.

A
ee

ee,

ne a

Rus 307 Contemporary Russian Press (3)
Reading of Russian language newpapers and periodicals.

'
aa ee

Rus 311 Introduction to Genres (3)

An introduction to literary terminology and basic prose genres
of modern Russian literature. Textual exposition and literary analysis
of individual works representative of specific genres of movements.

van Rus 202. i

Rus 334 Russian Short Story (3)
A historical survey of the Russian short story from its eighteenth-
century origins to the present. Representative readings from Karam-—_1

" eet ore rte at

et ———
’ |
caiepaaencrspoecal os as uapinnienises

in, Pushkin, Gogol, Turgenev, Chekhov, Bunin, Babel, and others.
rerequisite: Rus 202,

Rus 341 History of Russian Literature in English Translation | (3)

History of Russian literature from its beginnings to 1861. Con-
ducted in English. Offered in alternate years.

—— ee
een

Rus 342 History of Russian Literature in English Translation Il (3)
; History of Russian literature from 1861 to present. Conducted in
vi

2
nd

nglish. Offered in alternate years. !

! us 353 19th Century Russian Novel in English Translation (3)
| The development of the Russian novelistic tradition from Push-
kin, Lermontov, and Gogol through Tolstoy and Dostoevsky, ex- |

amined against the social and historical background of the times.
Conducted in English. Offered_in. alternate_years,—-- a =e

om
t
~~» 408

& J nus 354 20th Century Russian Novel in English Translation (3)
ua The modern Russian novel of Critical Realists, Symbolists, and
ocialist Realists, including the masterworks of Bely, Gorky, Sholos-

hov, and Stalin Prize winners. Conducted in English, Offered in
alternate years.

Rus 356 (Cwl 356) Tolstoy in English Transiation (3)
_ A study of Leo Tolstoy’s literary evolution and contributions in
| fiction’ with attention to his moral quest for self-perfection, views
on women’s liberation, civil disobedience and rejection of Church.

215

epresentative novels, short stories, and essays will be read. Con-
lucted in English.

Rus 357 (Cwl 357) Dostoevsky In English Translation (3)

A critical study of Dostoevsky, his life, times, and works and
influences as a novelist, psychologist, religious philosopher, and so-
“ial theoretician, with special reference to problems of the present
time. Conducted in English.

Rus 358 Solzhenitsynesa) {9 Su oh Trams

In-depth reading and discussion of*the literary, historical, psych (2)
logical, and other aspects of the work of the contemporary Russian
writer Solzhenitsyn, Conducted in English.

Rus 359 Chekhov in English Translation (3) ~~~ —~ — a

An examination of Chekhov’s stories and plays with emphasis on
social, psychological and philosophical insights. Special attention to
- Chekhov’s role in the development of the short story and drama,
Conducted in English, Offered in alternate years.

Rus 397 Independent Study (2-6)

Directed reading and conferences on selected topics. May be re-
peated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of instructor and depart-
ment chairman.

us 407 Literary Translation (3)

/ Introduction to “translation theory and practice in translating
/ Ktorary texts into stylistically equivalent idiomatic ein
| Ores Rus 302 or consent of instructor, (4) aoe

comms earn ai aaa PSE cer estes

Fl tole ee eT

IN) nN T 7
| rare os OF tal SONS an Stee!
_

An introduction to i versification and a aot survey
of Russian verse with emphasis on the Golden and Silver Ages of
/ the early 19th and early 20th centuries. Prerequisite: Rus 202.

Rus 438 Russian Drama

A historical survey of the Russian theater and the development
of Russian drama from its origins to the present. Readings in 19th
and 20th century plays. Prerequisite: Rus 202.

Graduate courses on the 500-level in the Department of
Slavic Languages and Literatures are open to qualified
seniors (see Bulletin of College of Arts and Sciences for
course descriptions).

Polish

Pol 101 Elementary Polish (4)

_ Beginner’s course with audio-lingual approach; fundamentals of
language structure and sounds; emphasis on correct pronunciation.
Four classes, two laboratories each week.

216

<i pee
—e
to x

A et re

ene

Pol 102 Elementary Polish (4)

After completion of structural study, emphasis is given to reading
in conjunction with a continuation of the audio-lingual method.

jour classes, two laboratories each week. Prerequisite: Pol 101 or

J /

eer eee,

Louivalent.
J Pol 201 Intermediate Polish (3)
Review of grammar and syntax, followed by literary readings in
conjunction with a continuation of the audio-lingual method, Three
passes, one laboratory each week, Prerequisite: Pol 102 or equiva-

J ent.
Pol 202 Intermediate Polish (3)

Continued literary readings in conjunction with a continued em-
a? on the audio-lingual method. Three classes, one laboratory
v tach week. Prerequisite: Pol 201 or equivalent.

a |

ee
ee z

Pol 256 Masterpieces of Polish Literature (3) |
An introduction to major Polish writers with a critical study of
outstanding works representative of literary trends examined in the

pars context of Polish cultural development. Knowledge of Polish

yot required. Offered in alternate years.

i" Pol 397 Independent Study (2-6)
Directed reading and conferences on selected topics. May be

repeated for credit. Prerequisite: consent of instructor and depart-
ment chairman,

JS Slavic
S } i

: la 101 Elementary Serbo-Croatian (4)

t Beginner’s course; fundamentals of language structure and sounds
with emphasis on oral practice of the basic grammatical structure,

1 a as a spoken and written language.

Sla 102 Elementary Serbo-Croatian (4)
Beginner’s course; fundamentals of language structure and sounds
with emphasis on oral practice of the basic grammatical structure.

pelo as a spoken and written language. Prerequisite:
Ja 101.

Sla 150 Ukrainian Language and Culture (4)
An intensive introductory course, with emphasis on the rapid
rp possi. of the fundamentals__of —_grammar—and— conversational

ractice. Readings in Ukrainian culture and civilization.

-Sla 257 20th Century Slavic Literature (3)

An introduction to major contemporary writers of Poland,

Czechoslovakia, Yugoslavia, and the Ukraine such as Gombrowicz,
Capek, Andric and Stefanyk,
|

217

SOCIAL STUDIES PROGRAM i.
Kendall Birr, Director

The Social Studies Program offers two plans leading to
provisional certification as a Social Studies teacher in the a
secondary schools of New York State. Both plans require
the same basic 42 credit program in Social Studies, but !
differ in the choice of a second field. The first program -
(Second Field in other than Social Studies) permits the
development of a second field in any approved subject - 3
offered by the university. The second program (Combined ei

~~ ""~Major and Second Field im Social Studies) permits-a-con-— ~ =
centration in one of the Social Studies. An M.A. program
leading to permanent certification is available to provi- *|
sionally certified teachers. :

Degree Requirements for the Major
in Social Studies

Teacher Education Program

B.A.: (Major in Social Studies) (Second Field in other

than Social Studies): 42 credits including six credits in

| American History, six credits in European [istory, and six
additional credits of History; Eco 100 a and b; Gog IOI or 7
102, and three additional credits of Geography; Soc 115 : |
and three additional credits of Sociology or Anthropology; 3
and six credits of Political Science as advised.

(Combined Major and Second Field in Social Studies):

54 credits including six credits in American History, six
credits in European History, and six additional credits of
History; Eco 100 a and b; Gog 101 or 102 and three addi- T
tional credits of Geography; Soc 115 and three additional 4
credits of Sociology or Anthropology; six credits of Politi- 7
cal Science as advised; and twelve additional credits in
one of the following Social Studies: Anthropology, Eco- a
nomics, Geography, Political Science or Sociology. 7

Students with a Second Field in History should complete
the requirements through the Teacher Education Major
offered by that department.

This program also requires 21 credits in Education
courses of which three credits are in Teaching Methods
for Social Studies (E Sst 401) and nine credits are in Stu- |
dent Teaching (E Sst 490), -

218

.
Gm ae phortee

et en cary

Other Degree Requirements

The College of Arts and Sciences requires that all majors

| mpest include 12 credits in courses numbered 300 and
ibove.,

6 ante ee

i bs 400 Selected Problems in the Social Studies (3)

A critical analysis of selected problems of concern to historians
{3 and social scientists. The approach is historical, with an attempt
to integrate the major theories and techniques of the social studies

_ as applied to some of the problems of the modern world. For seniprs

| | in the Teacher Education Program during their professional “a n.

DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY

i | FACULTY: R. Farrell, R. Felson, R. Forer, A. Foster, A.

| | Higgins, A. Iwanska, M. La Gory, M. Levy, N. Lin, A.

‘* Liska, P. Meadows, J. Nelson, A. Richardson, M. Richter,
Jr., H. Steadman, R. Ward, P. Wheeler, W. Yoels.

| | The revised undergraduate program offers students a
broad, diversified set of courses in the various substantive
. areas of the discipline. These curricular areas are listed
| ' below, and courses falling within each area may be iden-

tified by the middle number which corresponds with the _

appropriate curricular area number (e.g., Soc 430, Origins
, of Sociology, from curricular area #3, Theory and Sys-
| | tems). Students may use the area and course designations

to select a program most suitable for their own personal
and vocational goals,

| Number Curricular Area Content

| General

Research Methods and Methodology
Theory and Systems
Social Organization and Change
Institutions

_ Social Psychology

|
1
i

Urban Sociology

Social Deviance and Disorganization
Special Courses

Oo wd oh wb

: Because of the extensive renumbering of courses, course
numbers from the old numbering system are listed in
parentheses and are included for the students’ convenience.

219

' /
i
1 Jf, 430 Children’s Theatre Touring Ensemble (6)
Study of the principles of play selection, production planning, and
+ performances for young people. Participation in all aspects of pro-
| ' duction work through mounting, rehearsing, and performing of plays

| | for touring to area schools, community centers, and other service
gencies. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

fy | Thr 440 Advanced Acting (3)

{ The application of acting principles to complex and extended
haracter development. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

ne aa Seminar in Comedy (3)

| A study of comic dramas and theories of comedy from the Greeks
to the present,

yfhr 442 Seminar in Tragedy (3)
Pi study of tragic dramas and theories of tragedy from the Greeks
t
'
h

tq the present.

de 455 Seminar in Theatre History (3)

-f{ eag¢h semester. Prerequisite: consent of instructor, $
— BHR UFO DRAMA® 1 PRabuctron C3 3)~
Summer Program of Theatre Study in priteie”

r | The Department of Theatre, in cooperation with the As-
sociation for Cultural Exchange in England, offers an eight-

Zonsideration of a particular research topic in ye

__ | week summer_study/tour_program—in—Great—Britain Six
_ weeks of the period are devoted to course work in London
| and in other important theatre centers in Britain while two
| | weeks are free for touring. The academic program is drawn
from the following courses, The program is not offered

ery year
| dh 305 Creative Drama in England (3)
: Philosophies and techniques of innovative British developments in
the creative use of drama in the community generally and for young
| persons in particular with practical applications in schools and com-
; munity theatres. Direct and filmed observations; discussions of the
approaches of Slade, Way, Heathcote, and others; visits to leading
studios and Theatre-in-Education units. Offered only in Great

| | theatre study abroad.

1 _ in connection with the_university’s_summer—program—of--
t

hr 320 The British Dramatic Tradition (6)
An investigation of those social and cultural factors that have
[ most affected the evolution of drama in Britain from its Medieval
| | origins to the Second World War and of the impact of these forces
t upon the most influential British playwrights. Offered only in Great

Britain in connection with the University’s Junior Term of Theatre
Studies in Great Britain.

231

ait. i

Thr 326 The Dramatic Art of Pre-Restoration England (3)

Investigation into the complex literary, aesthetic, religious, and
architectural influences shaping the form of the living theatre in the
important English dramatic epochs prior to 1660. Research
materials drawn from major British libraries, museums, and monu-
ments and from actual productions. Offered only in Great Britain
in connection with the university’s summer program of theatre study
abroad.

Thr 339 Dramatic Media in Contemporary Britain (6)

A comparative study of divergent dramatic forms—theatre, radio,
television, film—examining the specific technological innovations,
design concepts, conventions, and acting techniques of these forms.
Offered only in Great Britain in connection with the University’s

‘Junior Term of Theatre Studies in Great Britain.

Thr 345 Theatre Workshop (3)

Theoretical and practical training in interpretative acting tech-
niques for the traditional and contemporary British play. Intensive
work in voice, movement, improvisation, and scene study with

studio productions of selected scenes. Offered only in Great Britain

at the Central School of Speech and Drama, London, by members
of the Central School staff in connection with the university’s
summer program of theatre study abroad.

Thr 390 The Contemporary British Theatre (3)

An evaluation of current trends in British playwriting and
dramatic production drawn from class discussions, lectures by lead-
ing British theatre practitioners, and direct observation of approxi-

Stratford, and other theatre centers in Great Britain. Offered only in
Great Britain in connection with the university’s summer program
of theatre study abroad.

232

4
T

“i

mately _twenty_significant_plays_currently_being_produced_in_London,
|

bik ae
School of Business

i | William K. Holstein, Dean

| Donald D, Bourque, Associate Dean
“A Gerald W, Parker, Assistant Dean
Helen Pelersi, Assistant to the Dean

. | FACULTY: T. Anderson, D, Arnold, D. Bishko, I. Bona-
'" witz, D. Bourque, W. Bray, C. Buss, H, Cannon, T. Dan-
dridge, W. Diamond, R. Dillon, H. Farley, J. Fisk, J.
| | Fonseca, R. Forbes, A. Frankle, A. Hierl, J. Hlavacek,
‘| J. Hoagland, W. Holstein, B. Ismail, R. Kaiser, R. Klages,
F’. Kolmin, H. Lee, J. Louderback, J. Meehan, J. Miller,
| R, Minch, L. Mohan, W. Nemeroff, B. Oliver, J, O’Connor,
| | H. Pazer, E. Petri, 1. Sabghir, P. Seagle, M. Sewall,. W.
| Sheehan, H. Smith, L. Solnick, A. Sweetser, D. Williams,
L. Wright.
| ADJUNCT FACULTY: T. Bravos, R. Frey.

The School of Business offers degree programs at the
undergraduate and graduate level which prepare students

| to enter managerial and professional careers. All programs
| are accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate

—__—_—§ehools—of Business:

| At the undergraduate level, the School offers Bachelor

| | Of Science degrees in Accounting and in Business Admin-

‘ istration, Admission to the school at the undergraduate

Jevel is by formal application and is open to the best quali-

fied students who have completed 56 or more degree ap-

| plicable credits with five of the following courses or their

equivalent (1) Acc 211, (2) Eco 100 a, (3) Eco 100 b, (4)

| Msi 215, (5) Msi 220, (6) Psy 101 or Soc 115, Contact the

| Office of the Associate Dean for information and forms
necessary for application.

At the graduate level, the school offers a Master of Busi- —__

| | “ness Administration (M. B.A.) and Master of Science in
| Accounting (MS), The M.B.A. is a two year program open
primarily to non-business undergraduates. A combined

| BS/MBA program (five years) is available to business stu-
dents (Preprofessional Program) and a similar program is
available to selected non-business undergraduate majors.
The M.S. program is a one year program for those students
| | with undergraduate degrees in accounting and a two year
| | program for those with non-accounting undergraduate de-

233

grees, Consult the School of Business graduate bulletin for
details on graduate programs and courses.

The following undergraduate courses offered by the
School of Business are considered liberal arts and sciences
courses for purpose of degree requirements for the B.A. or
B.S. degrees: Law 200, 220, 320, 427; Met 341, 343, 354;
Msi 215, 220, 435; Mkt 351. Only six credits from these
courses may be treated as liberal arts credits by accounting
or business majors.

In the School of Business, course grading is based upon

comprehension of specific course content as well as the |

% z
Pew.

ability-to-effectively communicate orally and in writing,
Junior standing is normally required to take courses num-
bered 300 and above. Business core courses numbered 200
are a general prerequisite for courses in the School num-
bered 300 or above,

All courses listed in this section are preceded by the
school’s letter “B’.

ACCOUNTING PROGRAMS

Two accounting programs prepare students for careers in
professional accounting. The accounting major is open to

juniors-entering-the School of Business. The Departmental
Program is a very selective program open only to a smal]
number of freshmen. Both programs are registered with
the Division of Professional Education, State Education
Department and meet the educational requirements to be-
come a Certified Public Accountant.

Degree Requirements for the Major in Accounting

Bachelor of Science

Liberal Arts Requirements: Credits
English
» Eng 100 English Composition for
Freshmen .............-. 3
+ Eng 112, Reading in Prose or
or 113 Drama .............0005. 3
‘Reo. 203, Speech, Argumentation, and
or 212 Debate .............005- 3 9

234

we
——.- ge!
Social and Behavioral Sciences

| ! *Msi 230a and b may be substituted for Msi 215, 220, 330.
|

235

i ‘Psy 101 Introduction to Psychology. 3
| ¢Soc 115 Introduction to Sociology .. 3 6
‘Eco 100a&b Principles of Economics .... 6
Eco’ 300 Intermediate Theory I:
| Microeconomics ........ 3
| Eco Elective three credits from:
fs Eco 301 Intermediate
Theory II:
Macroeconomics .... 8
Eco 350 Money
+i and Banking ..... 3
Eco 355 Public
; f Finance ......... 3°43 12
| Mathematics and Computer Science
Calculus (Mat 106, 107, |
. | 112, or 116) 1.0... le, 3
| r Csi 203 Data Processing .......... 3 6
| Met 341 Behavioral Science for
Organizations .......... 3 3
| Liberal Arts Electives ........ ne 2.4,
| | °°
Business Core Requirements: i
‘ Acc 211-222 Financial and Managerial i
| Accounting ..........., 6
a * Msi 215* Computer Applications in
. Business .............. 3 |
| ' Law 220 Business Law ....,....... 3 .
i « Msi “ 220* Introduction to Business
it ) Statistics .............. 8
- Fin 300 Financial Management .... 3
{ : Fin Elective in Finance ....... 3 |
| | \ Mkt 310 Marketing Principles and
| Policies ........ hove, 3 |
‘* Law 321 Law of Business
\ 0 | : /— — Organization- —— asns; O
| ‘Msi 330* Operations Research
Applications ......... .. (8
Met 481 Problems in Business Policy. 3
{ ‘“ Msi 322 Statistics for Business
| | Research .............., 3 |
. 36

| Additional Accounting Requirements:

Ace 311-312 Financial Accounting

Theory ..,........ aoa oo
Ace 331 Cost Accounting .......... 3
Ace 4ll Advanced Accounting ..... 3
Ace 441 Income Tax Accounting ... 3
Acc 46] Auditing ................ 3
Electives in Accounting ... 6

Total Business Credits .............. 60

Total_credits_(minimum)— —120

DEPARTMENTAL PROGRAM IN ACCOUNTING

A program open to selected students wishing to concen-
trate in professional accounting starting in their freshman

Degree Requirements for the
Departmental Program in Accounting

Bachelor of Science

Liberal Arts Requirements: Credits
Eng 100 English Composition ...... 3
Eng 200 Intermediate Composition .. 3
Rco 203 Public Speaking or

or 212 Argumentation & Debate 3
Philosophy, logic, or ethics .............. 3
Mat 112 Ciiouins © om ss cs sieaaee es 4
Mat 113 Calealis TT cau csgwesg paws 4
Mat 108 Statistics 2.0 ..........005 3
Mat 109 Applied Matrix Algebra ... 3
Csi 201 Computer Science ........ 4
Csi 208 Data Processing .......... 3
Eco 100a~—b Principles of Economics ... 6
Eco 300,301 Intermediate Economics ... 6
Eco 350 Money and Banking ...... 3
Fico 355 Public Finance ........... 3
Psy 101 or Introduction to Psy or Soc.. 38
Soc 115
Additional Psy, Soc, or Anthro ......,.... 3
Bllective . 0... ee eee 3

TOTAL LIBERAL ARTS .......... 60

2:36
|| J
V Business Core Requirements: Credits
Acc 211-222 Financial & Managerial |

| | Accounting ..........., 6
| Mkt 310 Principles of Marketing ... 3
Met 341 Behavioral Science for
ay Organization .......... 3
| | Fin 300 Financial Management .... 3
| Fin —— Finance Elective ......... 3
Law 220 Business Law ..... eae 3
_ Law 321 Law of Organizations ..... 3
1 | Met 481 Problems in Business Policy 3
im Msi 322 Statistics for Business ..... 3
30
| Accounting Requirements:
L Ace 311-312 Financial Accounting
: Theory .............0, 6
Ace 33] Cost Accounting ......... 3
| Ace 41] Advanced Accounting .... 3
Acc 44]—442 Taxation ................ 6
Ace 461 Auditing ..........., ae 3 21.
| : Unrestricted Electives ..... 00.00, 9
Total Business and Accounting ....... 60

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAM

, The programs in Business Administration, combining a
: major-second field sequence, are designed for students

planning careers in general management, management sci-
ence, marketing, and finance.

SN Se a ne
1

cee se eS
an iy

237

| Degree Requirements for the Major
in Business Administration

Bachelor of Science

Liberal Arts Requirements: Credits
Electives 2... 0. eee ees 42. |
Required as part of major: -

Calculus* (Mat 106, 107, 112, or 116) ..... 3 |
A Psy 101 Introduction to Psychology, or

A Soc 115 Introduction to Sociology ..... 3 -
English (Report Writing) ................ 3 |

A Eco l100a&b_ Principles ‘of Economics, .__ 6 : _—

Economics Elective at the 300 level or
above where Eco 100 a and b are

| prerequisites .7......, ree Lees ( 3) 18
Total Liberal Arts ................. 60
Business Core Requirements: Credits
¥ Mkt 310. . Marketing Principles and |
| | Policies... 0.0. eee e eee 3 |
; ‘ Law 200** Legal Environment of
Business .......0..000. 3 es
‘Msi 215*#** Computer Applications in i!
| ~~ Business .............4. 3 |
\ Msi 220*** Introduction to Business
~ Statistics_—_—_._---5 SS 4
! “Ace 211 Financial Accounting ..... 3 wo
| - Fin 300 Financial Management..... 3 :
. Ace 222, Managerial Accounting .... 3
Msi 330*** Operations Research 7
‘ Applications ...... ee 8 , i
Met 341 Behavioral Science for | : |
Organizations .......... 3
Met 48] Problems in Business Policy 3 7
30.

Approved Concentration:
Management, Marketing, Finance,

Management Science, or Combined ..... 15-18
Business Elective ........ Pye sa eennbneene 3 :
Unrestricted Electives ............. 0005. 9~12

60
Total credits (minimum) ...... rn 120 7

*It is recommended that students concentrating in Management
Science complete at least A Mat 113.

**Tt is recommended that a student take Law 200. Law 220 will
be accepted as a substitute if a student has taken the course
prior to declaring Business Administration as a major.

##4# Msi 230 a and b may be substituted for Msi 215, 220, 330,
—_e

PREPROFESSIONAL PROGRAM

This program is designed for outstanding students who

: wish to obtain the M.B.A. degree in five years. A formal

application to the coordinated senior year should be sub-
mitted during the second term of the junior year, Students
must submit a Graduate Management Admission Test score
as a part of their application. Those interested in this pro-
gram should consult with the Director of the M.B.A. pro-
gram concerning their eligibility for the program. A similar
program has been developed for those in Mathematics in-
terested in obtaining a B.S. and M.B.A. in 5 years.

Liberal Arts Requirement:
Credits
60

Students should complete the following Liberal Arts
courses to be considered for admission to the program:
A Eco 100 a and b (6), A Mat 107 (3), A Psy 101 or
A Soc 115 (8).

30
#Msi 230 a and b may be substituted for Msi 215, 220, 330. -.

239

i | Business Core Requirements: Credits
| Msi 322 Statistics for Business :
Research 3 |
a Mkt 310 Marketing Principles and t
| Policies ........ 00.0005 3 |
1 3 Law 200 Legal Environment of :
Business ....,....... 2. 8
i Msi 215* Computer Applications in '
| Business ....... cen 3
I Msi 220* Introduction to Business 4
Statistics ...........04, 3
Oo Acc 211 Financial Accounting ...... 3 |
| ! Fin 300 Financial Management ..,. 3
[ Acc 222 Managerial Accounting .... 3
Msi 330* Operations Research
a | _______ Applications ........ a 8
{ Met 341 Behavioral Science for.
| | Organizations .......... 3

Additional Business Requirements:

Bus. 527 Labor Relations .......... 1
Bus 522 Organizational Decision
MASKING <u sameiauemeris i
Bus 511 Organization Theory ...... 1
Bus 515 Bayesian Statistics ........ 1
Bus 523 Forecasting .....,....... 1
Bus 582 Business Simulation Models 1
6
TOW) ssakiwmeswecrs 36
Uprestricted Mlectivas 55 eee as os
105
Second Term of M.B.A. Program ......... 15
Second Year of M.B.A. Program ......... 30 45
Total credits (minimum) ............ 150
if
/ Accounting

»Ace 211. Financial Accounting (3)
f Basie principles of accounting theory and practice, nature of

j assets and equity; income measurement and statement preparation.

Acc 222 Managerial Accounting (3)

Emphasis on the uses of accounting data by management. Bud-
geting, cost concepts and analysis, accounting systems, price level
pomonses, cost-volume-profit relationships and funds flow analysis.
i Prerequisite: Acc 211.

\/ Acc 311 Financial Accounting Theory ! (3)
An intensive study of basic accounting theory and practices with
emphasis on balance sheet accounts and their interrelationship with

income statement accounts with appropriate reference to applicable
mn and FASB opinions. Prerequisite: Acc 222,

Acc 312 Financial Accounting Theory II (3)

Accounting theory relating to the measurement of assets, liabili-
ties, and capital structure; their presentation in statements of finan-
cial position and their interrelationship with income statement
accounts, Analysis of changes in financial position and review of
applicable APB and FASB opinions. Prerequisite: Acc 311.

Acc 331 Cost Accounting (3)

Cost accounting theory and practice including job order, process
and standard cost systems. Joint and by-product costing.
Prerequisite: Acc 222, Msi 215 and 220,

** Suggested electives Msi 361 and Eco 350.
240

— e

eee]

qpemsow ot ~
1 MA

f
i J
I

|
he 411 Advanced Accounting (3)

Problems in accounting for price-level changes, estate administra-
tion and trusts, statement of affairs, receivership accounting, and
pdrtnerships; introduction to consolidations. Prerequisite: Ace 312,

cc 413 Advanced Accounting—Consolidations (3)

Problems involving intercompany profits, changes in equity,
reciprocal affiliations, international accounting, and alternative
treatments of acquisitions (purchase vs. pooling). The impact of
SEC reporting and financial disclosures of multientity corporations.
Prérequisite: Ace 411.

] Acc 415 Selected Topics in Accounting Theory (3)

A critical examination of selected topics in accounting. theory
hrough intensive study of current literature and official releases of
forofessional and regulatory bodies. Prerequisite: Ace 312.

Acc 441 Income Tax Accounting I (3)

Concepts of taxation and of taxable income. Interpretation and

application of present tax laws as they pertain to taxpayers. Tax

pings and planning. Prerequisite: Acc 211 and Senior Standing or
ermission of instructor.

Acc 442. Income Tax Accounting II (3)
Theory and practice of taxation as applied to partnerships, cor-

- pee entities, and fiduciaries, Prerequisite: Acc 441.

Acc 451 Governmental Accounting (3)

A_ study of accounting for—all_levels—of-government—and related

institutions; application of basic principles and modern concepts of
: dofible entry; incorporation of budget accounts into the accounting
system. Prerequisite: Acc 211.

fAcc 461 Auditing (3)

. A fundamental’ analysis of auditing and its contribution to finan-
cial reporting, with primary emphasis upon the independent public
accountant’s attest function. The application of audit tools, i.e.,
systems flowcharting, statistical sampling, and EDP, is integrated
with the coverage of audit working papers. Problems of legal lia-
ility are introduced and analyzed. Prerequisites; 12 credits of
ccounting and senior standing.

Acc 481 Financial Information Systems (3)
Analyzing, designing, implementing and evaluating computer-

. __— based~and-noncomputer-based financial information systems. Blend-

ing and combining accounting, computers, information,. management
and organization and the systems approach into a unified body of
knowledge and practice. Prerequisites: Acc 222 and Msi 215 or
equivalent.

241

BO Co hee) Se

js nance

Fin 300 Financial Management (3) |

Emphasis on the management of funds flow within the corporate
framework, Topics include the management of working capital and
the evaluation of long-term investment decisions including mergers
ee acquisitions. Course provides a comprehensive introduction to

managerial finance. Prerequisite: Acc 222,

Fin 301 Corporate Financial Policy and Strategy (3)

The overall orientation of Fin 300 is continued with this course
but. the focus is on the long-term operation of the firm and on
episodic events. Topics include a continuation of capital budgeting
with added emphasis of financing for growth, bargaining for funds,

~~ ind-the-capital-structure, This is-a case course supplemented with
eadings, decision analysis, and computer simulation. Prerequisites:
| Fin 300 and Msi 330.

Fin 333 Investment Management (3)

The principles and techniques of security analysis and investment
timing; the formulation of investment policies for individuals and
‘institutions. Prerequisite: Fin 300.

Fin 375 Money and Capital Markets (3)

_ This course provides an analytical framework for understanding
the dynamics of financial markets and the role of financial inter-
| mediaries in allocating funds in these markets. The use of flow-of-
j funds analysis in interest-rate determination is developed, and some
; emphasis is placed upon the structure and impact of the monetary

process, including the role of the Federal Reserve. Managerial aspects

<
z

a bank-simulation model. Prerequisites: Fin 300 and A Eco 100 b.

Fin 436 Securities Analysis and Portfolio Management (3)

Intensive study of the methods, standards, and techniques of
appraising stocks and bonds. Principles governing the management
of investment funds and portfolios are developed through case
7 | studies. Prerequisite: Fin 333 or permission of instructor.

Fin 455 Corporate Risks and Responsibilities (3)

A study of the preventive mitigation of losses resulting from
asset destruction, devaluation, and obsolescence, and from exposures.
arising from long-term performance contracts. Identification of and
protection against wholly or partly transferable risks such as casual-
ties; defalcations; and public, product, and service liabilities,
Methods of assuring survival and growth of the organization and
development of policies to implement the corporation’s social
esponsibilities.

Fin 475 Management of Financial Institutions (3)

Attention is devoted toa managerial approach to the problems of
various financial intermediaries, including savings and loan associa-
tions, insurance companies, mutual funds, and investment banking
firms, The interrelationship between these intermediaries and the
nature and structure of specific markets, such as the bond market,
the stock market, and the mortgage market, are considered in depth,
Prerequisite: Fin 375.

242

[Js bankeimulation model: Preval dueed-through-—case—studies-and———_
, a,

SL. Law

i i Law 200 Legal Environment of Business (3)

| | The basic legal concepts around which our society is structured
will be stressed. The primary objective of the course is to acquaint
students with legal concepts and their applications in modern busi-
éss society. Students should become familiar with concepts, legal
Fanci ey terminology and legal principles in operation.

aint osm OTF 5
'
- oe

i! Law 220 Business Law (3)
_The legal principles underlying business relations, including con-
pfacts, commercial paper, significant articles of the Uniform Com-
ercial Code and government and business.

Law 320 Environmental Law (3)
An overview of legal problems in environmental management
» with emphasis on principles of effective resource management in an
industrial society. Prerequisite: Law 200 or Law 220-or consent of
instructor,

Law 321 Law of Business Organization (3)
The legal concept of agency, partnership, corporations and bank-
fms Uniform Partnership Act and Business Corporation Law.

Law 421 Law of Property (3)
The law of real and personal property, including mortgages and
conveyances, landlord and tenant relationships. Prerequisite: Law

—_—_— —
'
arn ee ees = _—=

20,
Law 422 Trust and Estate Law (3)

pape eee

Covers presentation of material concerning living and testamen-
tary trusts; analysis of the requirements of a will, including its
preparation, execution, and probate; administration of estates of
individuals dying with and without wills.

——$——
| ——

“Law 427 Seminar in Business Law (3)
Basic legal reports used in New York State are analyzed. Land-
mark cases are examined and topics of major interest are discussed.

i
:
i

——
=

) Management

| A Mgt 341 Behavioral Sciences for Organizational Administration (3)
A theoretical and experiential foundation for constructive admini-
stration and leadership is developed through an improved under-
standing and application of the behavioral sciences. Individual,

i — — dyadic, group and inter-group behavior are explored within the
contest of organizational structure, change and development.
: Prerequisite: A Psy 101 or A Soc 115. Students with backgrounds
tin Organizational Psychology or Organizational Behavior admitted

only with the consent of the instructor.

Mgt 343. Human Resources Management (3)

Study of human resources in work organizations, emphasizing
social psychological perspective. Manpower planning, personnel
selection, management development, and compensation processes,
Related theories of individual and group motivation and behavior.
Prerequisite: Mgt 341.

en, ——_——— —
<= eee ae P= Ap emer eens ‘ oe eee

243

—
ee Spe

|
4

Las

Mgt 354 Labor Relations in American Society (3)

A broad study of American labor-management relations aimed at
developing the ability to understand and interpret contemporary
labor developments. Particular emphasis on: the growth of labor
organizations; comparison of craft and industrial unions; and
overnmental policy as expressed through legislation as well as
administrative and judicial actions.

Mgt 380 Comparative Administration (3)

Study of management processes in various types of organizations,
including manufacturing, public and service institutions. Organiza-
tional design, planning, control, human resources management and

cultural framework. Prerequisite: Mgt 341. |

omen eee

cisst Fam with comparable approaches in an intra- and cross-

Mgt 441 Rewards and Motivation Systems (3)

An examination of processes for relating organizational member-
ship, productivity and rewards both extrinsic and intrinsic. This
course will focus on methods for evaluation and comparison of
employees at all organization levels. Prerequisite: Mgt 343,

Mgt 443 Manpower Planning (3)

Study of the quality, quantity and utilization of human resources
in the public and private sectors of the economy, relating the human

manpower forecasting and organizational planning. Prerequisites:
Met 343 and Mgt 354.

Mgt 455 Collective Bargaining (3)

resources Within ‘organizations to external work force characteristics,

are:

pm eedlay JF
5, ee

Analysis of the collective bargaining process through the_study_of

casés. déaling with contemporary developments and basic issues
such as adjustment to technological change, promotion of labor-
onan nent cooperation, discipline, job assignment and _ senority.
/ rerequisite: Mgt 354.
“ Mgt 480 Contemporary Problems in Management (3)

Intensive study of contemporary problems. Topics are drawn
from managerial problems of technology, organizational design and
change, analysis of organizational effectiveness, conflict resolution,
management of professional and multinational organizations, and

firrent issues in individual, group and organizational behavior.
_premeauinte Met 343.

Mgt 481 Problems in Business Policy (3)

Development of an overall management viewpoint, integrating
various specialized functions of intemal organization with the ex-
ternal economic, social, political and technological environment.

Case analysis in strategy formulation and implementation. Business
Game. Prerequisite: senior standing required.

244

Eon ey tm ew
en

Se we aeen te
wee tie
r -
| |
H a

i
3 }
3

L Management Science
MI

| si 215 Computer Applications in Business (3)

| Concepts of computer systems; hardware and software; the role

of computers in business. Systems and program flowcharting; matrix
algebra operations; the use of canned programs. Emphasis on pro-

Ro? gramming business-oriented applications in the BASIC language.

a va open to students with credit in A Csi 201 or equivalent.

Msi 220 introduction to Business Statistics (3)

Fundamentals of statistical analysis oriented toward business
| problems. Elementary probability theory, frequency distributions,
|

——

central measures and dispersion, sampling distributions. Classical

1 and Bayesian decision-making, estimation and tests of hypotheses.

Prerequisites: Intermediate Algebra or A Mat 100. Not open to
Ee with credit for A Eco 220 or A Mat 108,

| Msi 230 a &b Quantitative Foundations for Business (3, 3)

H An accelerated course encompassing all the materials covered in
Msi 215, 220 and 330, Prerequisites: permission of the instructor

| based on satisfactory mathematics SAT score or grade in calculus.

he 230 a is a prerequisite for Msi 230 b.

Msi 322 Statistics for Business Research (3)

A survey of many statistical techniques in a business setting.
_ Probability and sampling distributions. Tests for multiple means
| { and variances, Regression and correlation, Non-parametric methods.

{ Prerequisites: A Mat 107, Msi 220, and Msi 215 or_ their

jae
f Msi 330 Operations Research Applications | (3)
| Use of operations research models to solve problems in produc-
tion and distribution. Included will be linear programming, trans-

portation methods, scheduling algorithms, network models, inven-

r tory models and forecasting models. Computer. based solutions will
|

bé employed. Prerequisites: A Mat 107 and Msi 215 or their.

quivalent.

Msi 331 Operations Research Applications II (3)
i; Use of analytic models in selected functional areas—finance,
| marketing, human resources. Topics include calculus-based tech-
_ niques, simulation, decision-making under uncertainty, heuristic
and dynamic models. Prerequisites: Msi 220 and 330 or their
po equivalent.

re na te te Rees: mae yee aad

| # Msi 361 Economics of Business Decisions (3)

A study of the application of economic analysis to problems of
business decisions, The topics include cost and demand functions,

i production functions, market structure, price determination, capital

i budgeting and optimization of operations under conditions of un-

id certainty. Special attention is given business forecasts and_ their

relation to policy development and change. Prerequisites: A Eco
100, Msi 220 and Msi 3380.

245

]

Msi 412 Operations Management (3)
| Description and study of the methods of planning and controlling
operations. The general applicability of the principles of manage-

‘ment science to production and service organizations, Prerequisites:
Msi 220, Msi 330 and A Mat 107 or equivalent.

Msi 434 Advanced Deterministic Models (3)
Special topics in linear programming, nonlinear programming,
dynamic programming and deterministic inventory theory with ap-

plications in the functional disciplines, Prerequisites: Msi 330 and
si 331.

Msi 435 Advanced Probabilistic Models (3)

Special topics in queuing theory, replacement theory, probabilistic.

— inventory theory, Markov chains, simulation and stochastic pyro-
gramming with applications in the functional disciplines.
Prerequisites: Msi 322, Msi 330 and Msi 331.

a Marketing

Mkt 310 Marketing Principles and Policies (3)

An analytical survey of problems encountered by firms in market-
ing goods and services; takes a marketing management approach to
the solving of problems related to the structure and operation of our
parkoting mechanism and the functioning of its various parts,
Prerequisite: A Eco 100 a.

{
| J Mkt 312 Marketing Research (3)

Rescarch process as an aid in decision-making in marketing man-

logo ee cee

lotteries «=F
i ee

./ Mkt 351 Buyer Behavior (3)

Analysis of the theoretical foundations of buyer behavior, Em-
phasis on decision-making processes incorporating fundamental
psychological functions, sociological interactions, and consideration
of consumer and industrial buyer decision-making as it applies to
marketing management. Should be taken concurrently with Mkt

, §312, Prerequisites: Mkt 310 and A Psy 101 or A Soc 115.

Mkt 411 Marketing Management (3)
Marketing policies and strategies with special emphasis placed
on: the integration of product planning, pricing, distribution, promo-

ton, and service in management decisions. The case approach is
tilized extensively, Prerequisite: Mkt 351.

# Mkt 430 Sales Management (3)

Organization of the sales department, developing and training a
sales force, sales planning and forecasting, quotas, territories, per-
formance standards, and analysis and control of selling costs.
Prerequisites: Mkt 312,

246

+ agement, Specific attention is paid to the planning of réséarch and 1
ese and intepretation of data. Prerequisite: Mkt 310 and |
Msi 220, :
F

[Oo ee ee FE

Tce eed
Makes eee oe

\ Mkt 432 Advertising Management and Strategy (3)

The development of mass communication strategy. Emphasis on
integration of advertising and public relations activities with the
firm’s over-all marketing efforts. Prerequisites; Mkt 312 and Mkt

ve or consent of:instructor.
_ Mkt 436 ‘Channels of Distribution (3)
| Provides an integrated overview of alternative linkups of pro-
ducers and middlemen, the institutions involved, and the strategies
: and control of their relationships and key functions performed by
them in their role as channel members. Both theory of channel

structure and relationships and management decisions necessary for
effective organization are stressed. Prerequisite: Mkt 312.

Ses ree eet

“
eee ee

Mkt 442 Marketing Research Design (3)
_ Exploration in depth of the application of experimental designs

[ to the explanation of marketing phenomena. Topics covered proceed
from simple classical design of proof through Latin square and
factorial experiments. Associated data analysis methods are con-
sidered. Student design of research is emphasized. Prerequisites:
| kt 312 and Mkt 351 or consent of instructor.

}

Mkt 446 Models in Marketing (3)

Applications of analytic models and decision-sciences techniques
to marketing management problems. The design and application of
| models are examined through case examples and conversational -

| computer programs. Programming language skills are not a prere-
Auisite. Prerequisite: Mkt 312,

(iN a Mkt 452 Topics in Consumer Behavior (3)

| An in-depth study of several areas of contemporary consumer
behavior research. The course involves analysis and comparison of

related field and laboratory research: the price-quality controversy,

attitude measurement and change, physiological measurement, per-

: sonality, diffusion and communication theories, consumer dynamics,
| Prerequisite: Mkt 351.

x VA Mkt 476 Internatlonal Marketing (3)
7 Extension of business activities into international markets, cul-

| tural, economic and political influences on global business opera-
tibus, Prerequisite; Mkt 310,

elon

i | ——Special- Courses Ef Fa.0h 302.
-bue-202—Group-Profecte-in-Bushnese (1215) ——_ —_

Experimental group projects of limited size, for ac tudy
ordinarily falling within the purview of the scpook Each projec
must have a director responsible for its coordination, and sufficient

faculty time available for its "made th cation, including a de-

tailed project prospectus, to be ma o the appropriate committee
of the school. Approval of releVant areas may also be require
when appropriate. Project-approval may be continued for a sec
erm, but further contifiuation will require acceptance by the a
iate..committee of the school.

Bus 495 Independent Study in Business ! (1-3)

An individual study plan in a selected area as approved by the
nstructor and the dean in conference with the student. Written and -
ral progress reports required, Open only to qualified students, Mayr@__ ' |
ed-foxr-eredit-on-different-topies:C___. 2/97

i
Bus 496 Independent Study in Business II (1-3) Memo 3p aa _

An advanced or expanded individual study plan in a selected area fy
as approved by the instructor and the dean in conference with the |
student. Written and oral progress reports required. Successful com- aa
pletion of Bus 495 required.

oi *
t
; «
'
( 2
4 _ —_
t ra =
f se Se
{ H
; |
t 1
\ H
'
{
t
he
i ; |
f .
4
¥ i
L
nr
; to
a
7
B ” .
i
F
;
rt
:
| |
i
| |
yf
tt 4
ie bse
| f
1 ij
|!

pee eg

248
——_,
omer -

School of Criminal Justice

Vincent O’Leary, Dean
John E. Morgan, Assistant Dean

FACULTY: W. Brown, F. Cohen, R. Hardt, N. Hindelang,
| J. Kress, D. Newman, G, Newman, F. Redl, L. Sherman,
| H. Toch, R. Warren, L. Wilkins.

eed
i
‘eae nan es

_ All aspects of crime and society’s reaction to crime are
| the concern of the School of Criminal Justice. Considered
| are the nature of crime and the social or personal patterns

that produce or define it; the logic behind the choice of

| the conduct that will be handled by criminal justice pro-
| | cess as only one of the many social control mechanisms;
| organization and operation of criminal justice system agen-
cies (police, prosecution, courts, correction and rehabilita-

| tion, and the special purpose control agencies); and the
| Strategies and personal and technical skills required to im-
plement change in the criminal] justice system. Not only

are criminal justice systems studied as entities, but em-

| phasis is placed on the relationships between the various
elements of the systems.

In addition to filling the ever-increasing demand for
persons qualified to do research on and to teach about
crime and the criminal justice system, graduates will find
positions in all of the operating agencies of the system.
Some will prefer line responsibilities, and others staff posi-
| _ tions, either in the agencies themselves or with federal

officials, governors, mayors, and others having frequent
contact with elements of the criminal justice system. Pri-
| vate agencies will also find useful persons with a thorough

————— eee
er eres

ey eye

' knowledge of how the system operates.
: The School of Criminal Justice offers graduate programs
leading to the degrees of Master of Arts and Doctor of

| | Philosophy:
| A graduate student in the School of Criminal Justice
must meet the requirements and standards of the school
. and of the Office of Graduate Studies of the State Univer-
| __ sity of New York at Albany and be governed by their reg-
ulations.

For a complete description of the programs and courses
' Jeading to the master’s and doctor’s degree, see the current
School of Criminal Justice Bulletin.

beere'=

249

J In response to student demand, the School of Criminal
Justice is offering the following five undergraduate courses.
| All undergraduate courses offered by the School of Crim-
inal Justice are considered liberal arts and sciences courses
for purposes of degree requirements for the B.A. or B.S.
degrees.

Courses listed in this section are preceded by the school’s

[ee “Cc”,
¥ Crj 300 Introduction to the Nature of Crime and its Control (3)

A multi-disciplinary analysis of criminal and delinquent behavior.
Special attention will be given to the definition, nature and scope

of_crime—and-delinquency-in the United States and the explanations

which evolved to account for these phenomena; the course will in-

clude historical analyses of criminological thought and strategies of

sia control, with special emphasis on the law, which underpin
rrent (and past) penal codes and correctional practices.

| Jon 301 Introduction to the Criminal Justice Process (3)

An analysis of the decisions made in the process whereby citizens
become suspects, suspects become defendants, some defendants are
convicted and in turn become probationers, inmates and parolees.
This is done by analysis of operational practices at the major
criminal justice decision stages. Innovative programs and _ the
dilemmas of change in policing, diversion, court administration,

sentencing and community correctional programs will also be
analyzed.

= erverernemey:

Poet eee

+ a +

Crj-304—_Juvenilé Delinquency and Juvenile Justice

A description of the distribution of delinquency, stressing both
official and unofficial data as well as a multi-disciplinary overview
of major theories of delinquency control. Against this background,
the course will analyze the justice system’s response to delinquency,
A major point of emphasis will be police, courts, and correctional

pyactices in dealing with youthful offenders as well as proposals for
e reform of those practices.

a he prea ren ta

fCrj 401 The Correctional Process, Prisons and Community
Alternatives

An interdisciplinary analysis of trends in the functions and ad-
ministration of institutional and community processing of the con-
victed offender. Special attention will be given to current correc-
tions alternatives, issues of screening and classification, and the
legal norms and constraints effecting correctional practice. Contem-

rary reform proposals will be examined. Prerequisites: Crj 300 or
O1. he,

Crj 499 Seminar in Criminal Justice (3)

Seminar will cover a variety of topics in the criminal justice sys-
tem. Contents of this course will vary at each offering.

250

| oe)

,
arene eran

tr te,

lene a ee

ee ts ene

School of Education |
Gilbert D. Moore, Dean

In cooperation with the College of Arts and Sciences,
the School of Education offers an undergraduate Teacher
Education Program leading to provisional certification as
teachers in the secondary schools of New York State.

Students who wish to enter the Teacher Education Pro-
gram normally enroll in one or more professional courses
during the sophomore year, However, formal application
to the School of Education is usually made during the
session preceding junior status. Students who expect to
complete 56 credits satisfactorily (C average or better un-
less otherwise specified) by the end of the session in which
application is made, are eligible for consideration, Students
whose applications are not accepted will not be permitted
to register for “methods” and student teaching.

Because it has been necessary to establish enrollment
ceilings for certain teaching majors, satisfying the minimum
requirements does not guarantee admission to the program.

Undergraduate Professional Requirements*

gn nt,

Education must complete their major requirements, E. Tch
A402 or, in the School of Nursing, N Nur 410, and the fol-
ing professional sequence:

1, A course identified with the Teaching-

Learning Process ................0. 3 credits
2. A course identified with the study of

School and Society ........60.0000. 3 credits
3. Professional elective (s) [may be addi-

tional course from (1) or (2)] ........ 3 credits

4, The Teaching of Secondary School (sub-
ject) (the 401 series—commonly referred

borne ae as rennin s

19-08—metneds eerste -3-eredits-
5. Student Teaching in (subject) (490 series,
including a concomitant seminar) ..... 9 credits

Minimum-Total ......... 0.0.0.0. ce eens 21 credits

*The State Education Department has required that teacher
education programs in New York State be re-registered in a Compe-
tency Based format. These programs may call for different profes-
sional requirements, Therefore, as teacher education programs are
re-registered, the professional requirements may be modified. Stu-
dents will be appropriately advised.

251

Undergraduate students completing progranrin‘Feacher-——{

The “methods” course (401 series) is normally taken dur-
ing the junior year. It cannot be scheduled later than the
first session of the senior year.

One term of the senior year is called the “Professional
Session.” One half of that session is devoted to full-time
student teaching. The other half of the session is given
over to professional courses and may include a special
course in the major field of study,

This program, recently begun, permits the student—
with advisement—to plan a professional sequence which

meets his particular needs and interests, At the same time— -.

it preserves a structure of preparation which assures the

student of the opportunity to master the knowledge and
skills requisite to effective performance as a teacher in the
secondary schools.

To assist the student in making appropriate selections,
the following explanations are offered:

1. The Teaching-Learning Process—includes courses
contributing to the student’s understanding of adoles-
cent development, the process of learning, appropri-

ate instructional objectives and strategies for achiev-
ing them.

Examples of current offerings: E Psy 200 Psycholog-

{cal Foundations of Education; E Psy 440 Evaluation;
FE, Tch 305 Directed Activities in Teaching; EZ C & I
405 Individualizing Instruction in the Secondary
School; E Cmu 401 Educational Communications
Concepts I (See Note 1).

2. School and Society—includes courses contributing to

the student’s understanding of the American educa-
tional system-—its development, purposes, organiza-
tion, and services.
Examples of current offerings: E Fdn 300 Social
Foundations of Education; E Fdn 301 Issues in
American Education; E C & I 400 The Program of
the Secondary School; His 420 Vocation in American
Society; E Soc 411 Education and Social Stratifica-
tion (See Note 1.)

3. Professional Elective(s)—includes courses which ex-
tend the student’s knowledge and skills in specific
areas related to his proficiency as a teacher,

The student may expect to choose from offerings con-
cerned with reading instruction, counseling and

252

} |
ei “
a i

Eee

~~ +

personnel services, educational communications, edu-
| | cation of exceptional and disadvantaged, school .ad-

ministration, and psychology of learning.

Note 1. An official listing of all acceptable courses, by category,

. will be included in an annual advisement bulletin available to ad-

| | visers and students.
k

Student Teaching

. R. Andersen, Coordinator
| | A. Lento, Associate Coordinator

FACULTY: J. Crowley, M. Huffmire, J. Kiepper, B. Mo-
han, B. O’Brien, M. Robinson, D. Schenck; W. Short,
| | M. Tavarozzi, W. Whitney.

| | The placement of all student teachers is done by the
office of the Coordinator of Student Teaching.

. The majority of student teaching assignments take place

| - in the schools of the greater Capital District area although

| at times centers are arranged on Long Island, in West- !

___ chester, in northern and central New York.
Students expecting to do student teaching should con-
sult with the coordinator’s office in the first session of the

junior-year- Feacher Education students irr the Junior Year

_ Abroad programs should inform the student teaching office

of their plans during the second session of their sophomore

' | year. The undergraduate student will enroll in one of the

490 Series of Student Teaching. Undergraduate students

ji in mathematics have the option of applying for the Albany

| | Mathematics-Science Teaching Project (AMST). Those who :

‘are accepted will enroll in the E 492 Series Methods

_. and Student Teaching. Science majors must apply for

| | the AMST program. Students wishing more information

| should contact the chairperson of the Department of

Instruction, |

_ 2. —The-Student Teaching Office_places-applicants-in-schools———____|

| where they can perform most effectively, This job requires :

- close attention to the academic preparation and personality

of the applicant as well as to his wishes for grade levels

| | and type of school. Once the student is assigned, the staff
' gives him frequent and critical supervision.

At Albany, the student teaching program has been used

| : for experimental patterns in student teaching and in su-

eres ee Ore
|

externas 5

pervision, One of the new ideas emphasized is the field
centered, performance-based practicum in teaching.

253

re
own ee en

Registration for Student Teaching during the academic
year 1977-78 will take place on the following dates in the
School of Education rooms 332 and 333, during the Fall
session 1976:

Major Dates

English ..... 0... cc eee November 18 and 19
Social SEES 24.5 ks aE ba ame TeS November 29 and 30
Business Education ............... December land 2
Mathematics .............0000 4s December 3
Languages .....0... 0.00. e een December 6and 7
Science ............. sv .aeeers.., December 8 83 ¢
Speech Pathology ................ December 9 and 10

Education Courses

All courses listed are preceded by the school’s letter E
unless otherwise noted.

The following undergraduate courses offered by the
School of Education are considered liberal arts and sci-
ences courses for purposes of degree requirements for the
B.A. and B.S. degrees: Bus 351; Che 350, 353, 356; Pec
360; Fdn 300, 301, 405, 497; His 419, 420; Ph] 330; Sau

a eee

roy

a mere ae om nr

202, 205, 210, 420; Soc 410, 411.

vA SPECIALIZED METHODS COURSES

Eng 401 The Teaching of Secondary-School English (3)

Objectives, motivation, selection of content and materials, organi-
zation of classroom procedures, and evaluation of instruction,
observation and participation in teaching. Prerequisite: acceptance
by: School of Education to Teacher Education Program, or consent
of Department of Instruction. Two class hours, one laboratory
period weekly.

/ 401i The Teaching of Secondary-School Foreign Languages (3)
Objectives, selection of materials, classroom procedures, and
evaluation, Observation of and participation in a secondary school
- arranged. Prerequisite: oral/aural facility in target language and
acceptance by School of Education to Teacher Education Program,
or consent of Department of Instruction.

Lat 401 The Teaching of Secondary-School Latin (3)

Objectives, motivation, selection of materials, classroom pro-
cedures, and evaluation of instruction in Latin. Prerequisite: accep-
tance by School of Education to Teacher Education Program, or
consent of Department of Instruction.

254

a
a
semesters

| F®™* \g \T

: Dee \v\% |

! Mat 20%-<1he Teaching of Secondary-School Matheniatics (3)
Reports an imental project ethods of teaching and

1
| evaluation of instruction, Sé and procurement of materials of
| | Instruction; observation and participa ~arcange’ Prerequisite:
ta scoontayoe-By School of Education to Teacher ation..Program,

v4 congent of Department of Instruction.

Sst 401 The Teaching of Secondary-School Social Studies (3) _-

Objectives, content, methods and evaluative procedures with
emphasis on course organization, lesson planning and conceptual
teaching. Observation and participation arranged, Prerequisite: ac-

ceptance by School of Education to Teacher Education Program or
consent of Department of Instruction.

hen 402 Teaching about the Nature and Abuse of Drugs, Alcohol
and Tobacco (2)
| Methods of Teaching about Drugs, Alcohol and Tobacco Abuse
including an examination of the nature of these addictives with

special emphasis on the hazards and implications for the teen-agers
and’ the secondary school.

ote —r nae

awe

«Sei 492: Methods and Student Teaching (Science) (12)
f i
| \“* 492 Methods and Student Teaching (Social Studies) (12)

Abe. Drug Use nt Our Souety Col 0L)( Leotup
| | seo Methous! and Student Teaching (tisthematies) (12). CV 1f #7) t

A-field-eentered;—performance-based—practicumin_teaching, Conr

bines theoretical inquiry, demonstration of knowledge skills, perfor-

| mance skills, and experience related to teaching in appropriate

| t school settings. Normally requires the equivalent of eight weeks of

| | full-time work in the schools. Prerequisites: Admission to teacher
education program and permission of instructor.

| | vA STUDENT TEACHING COURSES
“490 Student Teaching (9)
Student teaching is a practicum in professional education wherein
the student learns by practicing under supervision the theoretical
| bases of the discipline and the teaching of that discipline. Student
teaching is the culminating course for the undergraduate student
seeking state provisional certification, Courses in the student teach-

i 1 — ing series listed below. Prerequisites: acceptance by the School of
| Education to the Teacher Education Program, an acceptable grade
(minimum of “C” or “S”) in the appropriate 401 series course, an
average of “C” or equivalent in all education courses taken prior to

| student teaching, and registration with the Office of the Coordinator
| f Student Teaching.

. a 490 Student Teaching (Business)
i ¥ Eng 490 Student Teaching (English)
| | ire 490 Student Teaching (French)

255

rn ee oes
1

ee ee ee

Ger 490 Student Teaching (German) \/
S ta 490 Student Teaching ({talian)
fis 490 Student Teaching (Latin)

Mat 490 Student Teaching (Mathematics)

fi Rus 490 Student Teaching (Russian)

# Sau 490 Student Teaching (Speech Pathology and Audiology)
i/sen 490 Student Teaching (Spanish)
Ast 490 Student Teaching (Social Studies)— — ——._

see

vA aMat 492 Methods and Student Teaching (Mathematics) C(.)
f {Sei 492 Methods and Student Teaching (Science). C{2)

it Sst 492 Methods and Student Teaching (Social Studies)

Education Elective Courses
J (Acceptable in the Professional Sequence)

Adm 422 School Organization for the Classroom Teacher (3)
Principles and problems of school organization and function.

classroom teacher, including an tnderstanding—of—human_relations.

Processes_and_ methods of local leadership and participation by the

The relationship of the classroom teacher to professional personnel

ff others
*“ €&1400 The Program of the Secondary School (3)

Origins and present status, analysis of curriculum problems and
trends. Process of curriculum change and the teacher’s role in it.
Students study patterns and materials in their fields of teaching and

onstruct teaching units. Open only to students during the pyrofes-
fo term of the senior year,

C&l 405 Problems and Procedures for Individualization in the
Secondary School Classroom (3)

Ways. of individualizing instruction and encouraging independent
study in the secondary school with an emphasis on instructional
planning, strategies and techniques for directed study, tutoring, and
independent study. One classroom session per week plus completion
of modules, laboratory work, and independent study required.
Prerequisite: educational psychology and methods of instruction in

pecific subject area or equivalent.
‘ J

C&l 411 Programs and Resources for Teaching Exceptional
Children (3)
An examination of current programs and instructional techniques
focusing on the gifted, retarded, auditory handicapped, visually
handicapped, special health problema, emotionally disturbed and

256

‘ }
| the speech handicapped. Definitions and characteristics, dlevelop-
ment of resources and teaching materials, field study.

| \WC&l 414 Aesthetic Development in the Secondary School
Consideration of the aesthetic dimension of the secondary-school
curriculum, intended as an aid to non-specialists in the arts. Devel-
opment of instructional materials and exploration of appropriate
teaching procedures for promoting adolescents’ aesthetic develop-

—— = ee

a a
SS Oh

a
i¥ C&l 423 Group Procedures and Techniques in Teaching (3)

An experience-based exploration of ways to promote learning
through an application of group process theory and techniques.
Emphasis on such skills as: communication, cooperation, discussion,
feedback, decision-making, problem solving, self-evaluation, Pro-
vision for creative designing of teaching strategies.

er
-— oP

| Ww C&l 425 Major Issues in Teaching the Disadvantaged (3) ll
i Antecedents of the present status of disadvantaged students.
An ae of current programs and materials. Design of teachable

drerial for classroom use.
| Aon C&l 431 Common Goals of School Subjects (3)

Study of certain curricular aspects which are common to various

secondary-school subjects. Such topics as creativity, values, mental

y health, and moral development will be considered. Topics may
| change from quarter to quarter.

cy sa Principles and Procedures in School Program
Development (3)

| Teachers’ role in curriculum decisions and instructional pro-
| | cedures in program selection, initiation, conduct and evaluation.

vi Cmu 401 Educational Communications Concepts I (3)

f Educational communication via media; taxonomy, characteristics,
| | J selection and evaluation of media.

“# CGmu 402 Educational Communications Concepts I! (3)
. Introduction to design of messages and simple graphic production
| | po Preparation and production of. a variety of media,

| wi Cmu 425 Educational Motion Picture Productions:
Fundamentals (3)

_i_____Theory, principles, -and—teehniques—of—producing—and- evaluating
ducational motion pictures for specified audiences. Prerequisite:
feonsent of department.

W Cmu 435 Educational Television: Production and Direction (3)
| . Techniques involved in the production of educational television
i programs. Prerequisite: consent of department.

J Cmu 450 Mass Communication and Education (3)
I Implications of mass communication for education; communica-
| tion revolution; mass media; propaganda; effects of technology on
| €dueation. Prerequisite: consent of the department.

257

Cah TameteMeeeta= 3

oes one

Cps 421 Introduction to Counseling and Personnel Services (3)

Aims, philosophy, scope and organization of guidance roles of
non-specialists and specialists in pupil-personnel; pupil needs in the
contest as economic and cultural influences.

(Es! 001 English Practice for International Students (0)

_ Designed to give the international student whose native language
is not English intensive analysis of and practice in conversation
patterns, oral and written comprehension, and varied writing skills,

fo aid him in his regular academic program.

J Fdn 300 Social Foundations of Education (3)
Inquiry into educational policies, purposes and ideas based upon
the resources and insights of the humanities and the social sciences.

Yot open to students with credit for Fdn 200 or Fdn 301.

Fdn 301 Issues in American Education (3)
Study of the structure and function of American education in the
light of contemporary problems. Not. open to students with credit
J for Fdn 200 or Fdn 300,

Fdn 405 Women and Education
A study of women and education using sociological historical
sources. An examination of the relationship of women to institutions
of education and the new criticisms of the conventional roles of
fe in education,

Fdn 497 Independent Study in Foundations (3-6)
Independent reading, study, and research in foundations of edu-
—Prerequisite:—consent—of—department;

His 419 A Social History of Childhood and Childcaring
Institutions in America (3) |

A socio-historical examination of the changing status of children
and young people in American society with a critical evaluation of
the social institutions and legitimating ideologies which serve to
socialize the young for entry into adult society. Intended for juniors
and seniors in the teacher education program and for other studerits
interested in the social sciences or in careers in the helping

f professions,
’ His 420 The Meaning of Vocation in American Society (3)

A study of the ways in which the meaning of vocation and/or
profession is comprehended in different historical eras. Emphasis is
on the social definition of vocation and its effects on educational
methods and goals. Several vocations will be studied with special
attention to the role of the teacher as a profession. Intended as an
elective for juniors and seniors in the teacher education program

f and for students generally in the university interested in the his-
if torical study of education.

Phi 330 Classics in Philosophy of Education (3)

A study of the classical works that have been written in philos-
ophy of education, Close analysis will be used to examine these
major books to see how they express significant and persistent view-

258

2—- ny meee
' )

points about philosophy of education, Intended as an elective for

juniors and seniors in the teacher education program and for stu-

dents in the university interested in philosophy and education,
oy

sy 200 Introduction to the Psychological Process of
Schooling (3)

A critical analysis of the psychological process of schooling. An
interpretive survey of the literature and research in learning, moti-
vation, development, and intelligence and their impact on American
education and society. Observation and participation in school and
community agencies are required, Two class periods, Two labora-
| A discussion periods. Intended for Sophomores and juniors.

eee penser tro

pees

sy 360 Behavior Problems in the Classroom (2)

Practical techniques and materials for handling the child in the
fceuler classroom and in other group settings who has some
I / degree of learning and/or emotional and/or social problems.

A Fey 400 Instructional Psychology (3)
An intensive investigation of theories and research in ——
and motivation as they apply to classroom instruction. Open to

students in the teacher education program, Others by permission of
|
_t

jhe department,

“M Psy 420 Child and Adolescent Development (3)

5 Theory and research in social, emotional, physical, and intellec-

| tual development and its app lieaton to Smatriction, Emphasis on the
| je childhood through middle adolescence. Open to students. in

eacher-education,—Others—by—permission—of—the department;

Selection, construction, interpretation of tests and reports. Open

Vv Psy 440 Evaluation (3)
| nly to students during the professional term of the senior year.

£
5

f Psy 460 Seminar in Educational Psychology (3)
Selected topics and issues in human learning, motivation, develop-
[ ment and instruction. Open to seniors with permission of the de-
-4 partment.

' \f Psy 480 Educational Psychology: Independent Study (3-6)
Designed for students who wish to complete E Psy 400 and/or
| : E Psy 420 as a competency-based, self-instructional program. Regu-
lar evaluation and conferences with mentor required. Open to stu-

F ninth in teacher-education. Others permission of the department.

f yf Rdg 402 Reading in Secondary Schools (3) uv’

ti An introductory study of the theory and practice of reading in-
struction in secondary schools. Examination of the contexts in which
reading occurs, of the various philosophical approaches to secondary
| | reading instruction, and of the major practices and procedures
1

Wpically employed in reading instruction. There will be opportuni-
fties to observe secondary reading programs in the Albany area,

* Soc 300 Introduction to the Sociology of Education (3)
An introduction to the sociology of education. An emphasis on
| the impact of institutions and various educational problems.

259

Soc 410 Problems of Urban Education (3) ~

A. critical study of selected classical and modern sociological
writings on urbanism and an exploration of the impact of the city
setting on educational institutions. Intended as an elective for jun-
iors and seniors in the teacher education program and for other

tudents in the university interested in the study of sociology and
education.

Soc 411 Education and Social Stratification (3)

An historical and sociological examination of social inequality
with particular emphasis on the effect of educational institutions in
the’ creation, maintenance, or attentuation of social stratification,

rerequisite: A three hundred level foundations of education course |
‘or-consent- of the-instructor. _ ; | af

Tch 305 Directed Activities in Teaching (3)

For students interested in on-site participation as a teacher's
assistant, Seminar on activities of teaching. Requires two half-day
sessions each week. Open to students prior to student teaching. Per-
mission of chairperson required for students who have completed
student teaching. Prerequisite: consent of Department of Instruction.

cor coe

eee

Education Elective Courses

(Not to be applied to the Professional Sequence) “2

| i
( C&1 301 Methods of Procedures in Instructions (3) ef
Review, analyses, demonstration tryout, appraisal of instructional - !

schniques. Application of theories and research in teaching. Orga-
nization, techniques and technology, lesson—planning;—instruetional—.._,
system management, diagnosis, individualization, evaluation. May be‘ |
used in the professional sequence if takén before the specialized
methods course.

'/ Cps 301 Methods—Resident Assistants (2) ;
| Resident Assistants often find, as a result of their position on the |
residence staff, that they develop stronger motivation to explore
theoretical constructs and to develop a broader base of skills in the
areas defined below. This motivation reaches beyond typical job
expectations, and is, instead related to the R.A.’s own desire for
self development. Optimally, this R.A. seeks to bring his own moti-
vations into congruence with his future growth. This course is in-
tended to provide a more specialized program for these R.A.’s
/ beyond the in-service program currently offered to all R.A.’s, ‘

Cps 302 Methods—Resident Assistants (2)
The student is involved in a group work situation where he will *
experience his inter-personal relationships, how they affect others,
and how he can be more effective in dormitory groups. Emphasis is
placed on self-awareness and skill development. Readings deal with
group skill, personal development, and awareness of differing values
and behaviors that can be seen in students. Student projects focus

on research that stimulate knowledge primarily in the following
areas: values, attitudes, behaviors, campus crime, conflict resolution,
pregnancy and abortion, conflict management. No prerequisite.

260

—

AS
oe n= orang

| |

1
ee | Ste rep

——T—

eae rere aa

aia =

8 Neat J
‘
<<

The student continues skill development in dealing with student
life in the dormitories. The goal is expansion of personal character-
istics and acquiring skills not covered in Cps 301 or Cps 302, The
student is able to choose from a number of options that are ‘pre-
sented in seminar form, Relevant reading of the literature along
with a experiential format during class time can be expected for
most options. Prerequisites: Cps 301, 302.

| | Cps 303 Methods—Resident Assistants (2)

/ Edu 300 Independent Study (1-4)

An independent study course with variable credit, Contingent
upon the consent of instructor(s) willingness to function as ad-
viser(s) and the Dean, School of Education or his designate(s), The
credits may be apportioned in whole ox in part as major credit,
second field credit, or elective credit as appropriate and as deter-
mined by the student’s major department.

Edu 301 Independent Study (5-15)

An independent study course with variable credit designed to
provide large blocks of time for independent study projects. Con-
tingent upon the consent of instructor(s) willing to function as
adviser(s), and the Dean, School of Education or his designate(s).
The credits may be apportioned in whole or in part as major credit,
second field credit, or elective credit as appropriate and as deter-
mined by the student’s major department.

~ Edu 390 Community Service Projects (1-15)

Special projects involving community activities and collateral

study, to be approved as designated by the Dean, School of
E.dugation,

DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS EDUCATION

FACULTY: C, Blanchard, R. Blodgett, R. Fairbank, R.
Knouse, M. McKenna, D. Mulkerne, C, Petitijean, H.
Safford, W. Savage, B. Wakin.,

The objective of the Department of Business Education,
which was formed in September 1970, is to administer
undergraduate and graduate programs for the preparation

of business and distributive educators. The department of-

fers professional and content courses in business, office,
and distributive subjects.

The undergraduate programs lead to a Bachelor of Sci-
ence degree and provisional certification to teach either
business or business and distributive education subjects in
secondary schools of New York State. The programs fea-
ture a major sequence in business subjects with a second
field in education.

261

Special Opportunities:

ve
The Department of Business Education in the School
of Education has available for students second fields in
Secretarial Administration and Systems Administration.
Secretarial Administration includes such courses as short-
hand, typewriting, and secretarial administration. Sug-
gested courses for Systems Administration include data
processing, office administration, and office systems and
procedures,
Students will find that they can combine study in a

specialized skill with a major in-arts—and-sciences. ‘These.

combinations can lead to interesting opportunities in a
variety of positions.

Students who are interested in these second fields should
consult with their advisors or with the Department of Busi-
ness Education,

Degree Requirements for the Major
in Business Education

Admission
Qualified students may be admitted upon the satisfac-

tory completion of-a—minimum-of56_credits of appropriate

Semensr eH

undergraduate study at SUNY at Albany, a two-year col-
lege, or other college. The student is expected to have
completed at least 18 high school units, including at least
two years of mathematics (elementary algebra and plane
geometry, or equivalents). At least two units of laboratory
science are desirable.

A SUNY at Albany lower-division student who is ad-
vancing to a business education program is expected to
have completed a substantial portion of the liberal arts
and sciences requirements and to have started his study
in business with appropriate lower-division courses, es-
pecially in accounting and office subjects. |

A two-year college transfer student is generally limited

to a maximum of 64 hours of transfer credit in courses.

appropriate to the teacher-education program, To minimize
scheduling problems, at least 30 credits of transfer course
work in the liberal arts and sciences is desirable, including
a term each of English composition, literature, speech,
natural science, psychology, and sociology, and two terms
of economics, Deficiencies in high school preparation in

262

| . ‘

subjects such as science. and mathematics should be made
up at the two-year college. Lower-division courses in busi-
ness appropriate to teacher education programs should be
; completed at the two-year college in subjects such as ac-
counting, business statistics, data processing or computer
science, finance, law, marketing, retailing, communication,
. shorthand, and typewriting. Study in professivnal educa-
( tion (e.g, student teaching, methods, foundations) should
be deferred to the upper-division level,

| Appropriate experience in business is required for certi-
‘fication and may be completed either before or after ad-
mission to the program.

Vea

263

Requirements

All B.S. degree programs require a minimum of 120
credits, distributed as follows:
Liberal arts and sciences:

d xt

Professional Education** (second field)
Education as advised, including methods

and student teaching ................0.. 18
Free electives ............. WTTPTIT TCT Tee 6
Total degree credits (minimum)*** |, . 120

*Elective study in the liberal arts and sciences preferably is dis-
tributed over several areas, fields, or subjects, and preferably
includes at least one course each of English, composition, speech,
literature, natural science, psychology, and sociology. —

*%Tn addition to the 18 credit professional sequence, New York
State certification requirements mandate competency in drug
abuse education. Student must, therefore, elect one of the fol-
lowing courses as part of their total undergraduate experience:
E Tch 402, N Nur 410.

#%#A minimum of one year of appropriate work experience, or
equivalent lesser amount of college-supervised work experience,
is also required for State certification.

| Electives* A5

Required as part of major: j

Bconomics ..... 0.0... tees 6 |

! Communications (E Bus 351) ....,..... 3, mn

Law (B Law 200 or 220) .............. 3

| Statistics (B Msi 220 or A Mat 108) ..... 38 15 i

| Total liberal arts and sciences ........ Oe 60°:

t ~ Major requirements: a,
Core:

Accounting ......... 0... cee eee ee eee e 7
| Advanced Typing .,...........0 00005. 3 |
i Data Processing (EF Bus 360) .......... 8 |
| Data Processing (E Bus 462) .......... 3
: An additional business course, as advised 3 18

and an

Approved concentration such as the following:
| Accounting .

PURE weemeyosewe nwnss wees ees 6-9 i

CC i re 3-6
, ims wetewed ag ca wii ees Ree Bede GERLESE: 3-6
} Distribution a Wy
Marketing and Distribution ........... 12 |

As advised . 0.0... cece een 6 oF

Office .

Shorthand and Transcription .......... 9 Z|

Secretarial Administration ............. 3 |

Office Administration ....,..........., 3 aa

AS BAVISC”: 6: 5 66 65 HER RH ERS E13 a DTA BES 3 18 _

Total major requirements ........... 36

eee ee

ee) ane eR)

The department offers a variety of courses in business

and office subjects and in professional business and dis-
tributive education.

Business and Office*

Bus 015 Typewriting (0)
Basic keyboard mastery; introduction to business letters, tabu-
lations, and manuscripts. No degree credit.

Bus 110 Shorthand (3)

Principles of Gregg shorthand, Diamond Jubilee system. Develop-
ment of reading and writing skills at the pre-typewritten transcrip-
tion level. Open only to students with little or no previous Gregg
shorthand. Laboratory hours arranged.

Bus 211 Advanced Shorthand (3)

Continuation of E Bus 110. Development of speed and accuracy
in reading and taking dictation; introduction to typewritten trans-
scription, Laboratory hours arranged, Prerequisite: E. Bus 110, or
equivalent as determined by a placement test.

E Bus 212. Transcription and Word Processing (3)

The refinement and integration of the arts of word processing,
emphasizing the extensive knowledge needed for teaching com-
petency. Designed for business education majors.

Bus 215 Advanced Typewriting (3)

——Development_of_professional skill in preparing office papers and

1 ae eters
Cisse

Pitemrar

technical material, including statistical matter, under time—stan=

ce —

dards, Prerequisite: FE. Bus 015, or equivalent as determined by a
placement test.

Bus 270 Mathematics of Business Finance (3)
Financial problems of bank discount and negotiable instruments,
cost of credit, partial payments, taxes, depreciation, amortization,

iY a sinking funds, security transactions,
AVE Bus 319 Administrative Secretarial Problems (3)

Development of the high level of competency in the administra-
tive aspects of secretarial careers needed by business teachers
through advanced case problems and simulated office situations.
Designed for business education majors,

/ ¥ Bus 351 Business Communication (3)
~~ Theory;—principles,;—and-—practices_of_effective written and oral

communications: correspondence, formal and informal reports. Re-

* Mens for all business education majors.

. Bus 360 Data Processing | (3)

Concepts of processing data for the business teacher, including
analysis of principles and current practices in utilizing manually
operated business equipment and record management systems. Re-
quired for all business education majors.

* Business and office courses are business content courses; not pro-
fessional business education courses.

265
# EBus 424 Experience In Office and Distributive Occupations (3)
Cooperative on-the-job training. Part-time work under university
supervision, and class meetings twice weekly. Open only to business
education majors to meet certification requirements. Prerequisite:

JS consent of department.
VE Bus 440 Office Administration (3)
An overview of the administrative service functions of the mod-
ern office in relation to the total organization; managerial principles,
concepts, and guidelines applicable for planning, organizing, staffing,

controlling, and implementing the office service function, Designed
for business education majors.

. E Bus 445 Office Systems and Procedures (3)

Development and application of office methods, procedures, and
systems. Data control and audit; systems organization and manage-
—_— ent; fact-gathering and recording systems; fact-analysis and docu-

fmentation; data systems. Designed for business education majors. —

E Bus 462-562 Data Processing II (3)

/ Essential knowledge for the business teacher in processing data
by means of the computer and unit record equipment. Flowcharting;
preparation of input data; operational characteristics of equipment;
introduction to programming. Required for all business education
majors,

E Bus 495 Independent Study in Business, Office, and Distributive
Occupations (1-3)
Individualized bibliography and study plan for intensive reading
in a selected area approved by the instructor. Written and oral

ete

Seer are "4

progress-reports required. Opén t0 superior seniors in the business
education program only, with consent of the department,

DEPARTMENTS OF HEALTH, PHYSICAL
EDUCATION, AND RECREATION

Women

FACULTY: M. Baum, J. Clark, E, Cobane, C. DeLamater,
L. Hoar, P. Mann, B, Palm, I. Rhenish, P. Rogers.

Men
FACULTY: R. Burlingame, R. Ellis, R. Ford, J. Garcia,

M. Hathaway, J. Koelmel, R. Lewis, K. Munsey, R, Sauers,
W. Schieffelin, A. Werner, R. White.

Physical Education Program

The programs, in physical education, intramurals, clubs,
and inter-collegiate athletics provide a broad experience of
instruction, recreation, and competition in a variety of ac-
tivities. It does not offer a major.

266

\t XK

Bees aa

eee rere y
Ties eden ee

ge Lichen

Sekine ee
1

Fr a ee

}

Activity courses are one credit (30 instructional-activity
hours), and may meet for a part of a term or for the full
term, A student may apply six credits of physical education,
100 and 200 level courses, for credit towards graduation,

Program offerings emphasize individual sports, aquatics,
and rhythmic activities. In many activities, instruction is
offered at both the beginning and intermediate levels. The
appropriativeness of the student’s skill level is judged by
the instructor.

Coaching registration courses are offered to all non-
physical education certified prospective teachers wishing
to coach in secondary schools.

ACTIVITY COURSES

Pec 120-299 Physical Education Activity (1)
fais knowledge and. appreciation of the particular activity.

vPet 120-129 Aquatics: Beginning

Pe ‘430-139 Goal Centered Activities

i aaa Individual Sports: Beginning

Ré¢160-169 Dance: Beginning
we 170-179 Team Sports

as ee eae

a eee ee

ped 200-299 Intermediate, Advanced and Special Skills

THEORY COURSES

Pec 300 Recreation Leadership

Use of leisure, the nature of play and its value, and program
planning for activities in varied recreational organizations.

Officiating Courses (1)

Theory and practice in_efficiating each sport.
Pec 301 Basketball--Men

: ‘# Pec 302 Basketball—Women
vi Pec 303 Baseball

iD heer

i eed i

fe ae ee,

vA Pec 304 Soccer

/ Pee 305 Softball

V Pec 306 Volleyball

V’ pec 307 Track & Field
fae 308 Swimming

Tran 309 Football
Pec 330 Lacrosse

267

he ec 356 Personal Safety and Emergency Care (1)

* Study of causes of accidents and practice and procedures for
ves sick and injured.

Pec 360 Introduction to Dance (2)

The basic evolution of dance, the types of dance, important per-
Fae in the field of dance and their philosophies of dance,

Se 362 Modern Dance Technique and Composition (2)
Analysis and practice of form, rhythm and movement composi-

tion. Practice and development of skill in the construction of vari-
vi dance forms; solo and group.

Pec 393 Assistant Instructor (1)

F edaciebions and evaluation.
. 3

Pec 400 Principles and Problems of Coaching (3)
Study of the philosophy and psychology of contemporary sport
As it relates to coaching responsibilities in secondary education.
J

Pec 402 Prevention and Care of Athletic Injuries (3)
Accepted procedures in recognizing, preventing, and caring for
common injuries—with laboratory experience. Prerequisite: consent

of instructor. ] .
Coaching Courses ge - Ve tp Ps ThA #3

eory and practice in coaching each sport: ,
if Pec 410 Football Cube

Assist_in_instruction_of_activity—_course, -including- planning,- in-- —-

oss a 7a
ee ee

—_

7Pec 414 ‘Soccer
V Pec 412 Basketball
J Pec 413 Wrestling
J ec 414 Swimming

VJ Pec 415 Track 5 OX
. j Pec 416 Baseball rhol7e ~
\.Pec 417 Lacrosse Acs SOPTR

J VECuiy THRV FTES Cor
* ae 419 Volleyball

re Bec a : Waren s Gymnastics ful Yo du
CU? Y*eTEC CORCH
Ss Pei 150 Adult Fitness Oe OBER TERMS

Evaluation and analysis of a person’s physical fitness. The devel-
opment of program options and understandings for personal adult
tness assignments, written reports and class discussions. The

| uman resource is one of our natural resources.

| Pec 450 Women and Sport (3)
Historical and current perspective on women’s role in sport; cul-

tural, ethnic and economic factors; past and present leaders, societal
attitudes.

268

1
!
ee oe

renee ee heresy
ane ves
harms eed

Health Education Program V

., This program is designed to deal with current personal

| | problems of the student, problems that are likely to arise

1: with marriage and family living, and with personal safety
aid emergency care,

. Che 350 Crucial Health Problems (2)
| S Accidents, drugs, emotional problems, sexuality, social diseases.

“Che 353 Family Health Problems (2)
Family planning, pregnancy, nutrition, compatibility, diseases,
; geriatrics.

a ae eee

! Traffic Safety Program
Richard D. Ellis, Director

| The State Education Department requires that all ap-
' plicants for provisional approval to teach secondary school
_ and adult continuing driver education (1) be certified in or
| eligible for secondary school teaching, (2) have an accept-
. able driving record, and (3) have completed Tsp 450 and
Tsp 451; in addition to these prerequisites, undergraduate
applicants enrolled in university programs leading to sec-
ondary certification will have preference. Permanent ap-

ee ceed Pe al

proval is granted after the successful completion of Tsp

552, a graduate level course that is open to qualified
| seniors, Recommended prerequisite: Tsp 350, Principles

of Accident Prevention.

) Traffic Safety Education Courses
bo 051

Driver and Traffic Safety Education (0)
. A complete program of classroom and laboratory instruction for

students without drivers’ licenses; taught by students enrolled in
Tsp 451,

| Tsp 350 Principles of Accident Prevention (3)
] History and development of the interdisciplinary derived factors
' and theories of accident causation and prevention; including the

a a oS

oduct safety:

| : Tsp 450 Traffic Safety Education (3)
Analysis of the traffic accident problem; knowledge, attitudes and
_ _ Sskillf/factors essential for safe and efficient operation of motor
| , vehjeles; survey of materials and methods in both classroom and
| , lakdratory instruction.
~ ‘Tp 451 Traffic Safety Education (3)
Classroom and laboratory teaching techniques for the driver and
traffic safety educational program; supervised student teaching,

_ Prerequisite: Tsp 450 and consent of department.

| |

ye of motor vehicles, home, work, recreational and consumer

269

J |
| DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY |
AND AUDIOLOGY

FACULTY: P. Bianchi, P. Boomsliter, E. Brayton, C. | |
Fasulo, R. Ferguson, C. Harris, S. Hart, R. Hewitt, J. | |
Liebman, C, Marchewka, D. Miller, C. Pelone, C. Rosen-
thal, M. G. Ross, R. Solomon, J. Muller-Vogt, W. Watson, ~ |
C, Westby, J. Wood.

The purpose of. the Department of Speech Pathology
and Audiology at the State University of New York at
Albany is to prepare students to effectively serve people
+ with communication handicaps. The department offers two
programs leading to a B.S, degree in Speech Pathology
and Audiology. The Teacher Education Program provides | |
the opportunity for one session of clinical practice and one | |
quarter of student teaching and yields provisional New
York State Certification as Teacher of the Speech and _ ;
Hearing Handicapped. The General Program requires two ; |
sessions of work in the clinical setting; it does not yield = '
State certification. Both programs provide the basic prep-
aration for the fifth year degree program necessary for .
American Speech and Hearing Association certification.* |
The curriculum is an integrated and sequential program —

which-is-designed-te-be- completed-in-four-academic-years—-——
- Transfer students or students electing the program in their | |
junior year must plan on five sessions to complete the | |
program.

Since the department’s main focus is in the development 1 }
of the outstanding clinicians, the academic and clinical as- {|
pects of the program are rigorous. Clinical placements are ~
made in the University Clinic, which services the SUNYA __
community; Northeastern New York Speech Center, which {| |
serves children and adults with speech, language, voice, ; |
| and hearing disorders; and in local hospitals and centers —
of the handicapped. Student teachers are placed in public
schools in the Albany area and other areas of New York

ar a

te .

* Note: Certification by the American Speech and Hearing Asso- — |
ciation, referred to as the Certificate of Clinical Competence (CCC), = |
requires the master’s degree or its equivalent, 300 clock-hours of
supervised clinical practicum and one year of successful paid pro-

fessional work experience upon completion of the master’s program |
or its equivalent. a |

270

] |

State. Due to the location of these placements and the

, itinerant nature of the public school speech and language
| clinician, students require the use of a car during their

student teaching quarter.

Students interested in majoring in Speech Pathology and
Audiology should understand that clinical and student
teaching placements and supervisory staff are limited and
that it may not be possible to accommodate all who wish

_ to enter the major, Students whose overall qualifications
| appear to offer greatest promise of success in the profes-
| sional opinion of the department will be selected. Students

seeking admission to the department will be asked to dem-
onstrate’ basic competencies in reading, writing, and speak-
ing skills. A personal interview with faculty of the depart-
ment is also required.

Degree Requirements for the Major in
Speech Pathology and Audiology *

General Program

B.S.: A minimum of 65 credits, 47 credits for the major

and-a-seeond-_field_of1-8-eredits—as-advised_by—the-depart=
ment or in Psychology to include: A Psy 101, A Psy 203 or
FE; Psy 420, A Psy 214 and nine credits as advised (sug-
gested courses A Psy 270, 327, 338, 380, 382; E Psy 360,
520, 521, 560).

Sau 201, 202, 205, 210, 250, 321 a and b, 327, 351, 420;
four credits of Sau 370; two credits of Sau 371; Reo 203;
six additional credits as advised in Speech Pathology and

Audiology; a professional sequence consisting of Sau 470
and 427,

Teacher Education Program (Teaching the Speech and
Hearing Handicapped)

B.S. Degree: 40 credits in the major to indludé: Sau 201,
202, 210, 250, 321 a and b, 327, 351, 420: two credits of
Sau 370; one credit of Sau 371; two of the following: Reo

- 203, Reo 204, Reo 208, Thr 207 (or 302); six additional
| credits as advised in Speech Pathology and Audiology; a

second field of 18 credits as advised by the department or
in Psychology to include: A Psy 101, A Psy 203 or E Psy

*No degree will be awarded in this program after August, 1979.
271

420, A Psy 214 and nine credits as advised (suggested

courses A Psy 270, 327, 338, 380, 382; E Psy 360, 520,

521, 560); and a professional sequence of 19 credits con-

sisting of: an educational course identified with the Teach-

ing-Learning Process (3), an education course identified

with the study of school and society (3), and a professional
fon which includes E Sau 470, 427 and 490,

Sau 003 Spoken English for Foreign Students (0)

Instruction and practice in the sounds and patterns of conversa-
tional American English for the foreign student; intensive work in
ear training and in such features of spoken English as juncture,

stress, sequence, and the dialogue patterns of the language in con-
_ rected speech, Admission only by permission of the instructor. Does
not carry degree credit.

‘Sau 201 Structure and Functioning of the Speech Mechanism (3)

The basic anatomy of the ear, the larynx, and the other bodily
organs subserving speech. The principles of vital functions as they
fare modified to make speech possible.

./ Sau 202 The Rhonetics of American English (3)
Basic principles of descriptive phonetic study, non-instrumental
phonetic investigation and representation of pronunciation using

he International Phonetic Alphabet; ear training; practice in pho-
hetic transcription.

JSau 205 Voice and Diction (3)

A study of the principles of voice and speech produotion, includ-
ing breath control, resonance, variety and expressiveness, articula-

tion, and pronunciation. Emphasis on the improvement of the
student’s voice and speech.

} Sau210 The Linguistic Study of Speech Development (3)
Linguistic analysis and interpretation of the normal learning se-
quence underlying individual speech. Stress upon acoustic differ-
fect as exemplified in American-English dialect patterns, in

intonation, and in disordered speech.

Sau 250 Audiomeiric Testing (3)

Principles of measurement in psychoacoustics. The equipment,.
techniques and interpretation of auditory measurement, including

ractice with pure tone, speech, and other audiometric testing

Sau 320 Essentials of Speech Correction (4)
Sensory and motor factors in speech learning: characteristics of

hisordered speech; appropriate remediation techniques. Prerequisite:
Sau 201, Not open to majors in Speech Pathology and Audiology.

Sau 321 a Speech Correction (3)

The study of developmental processes affecting acquisition and
development of language and the effect of deviations in producing
disordered language. Prerequisites: Sau 201, Sau 202, and Sau 210.

272

TE ee re eer sn elY
!
— ower

apie nia aac

Te eee et
Se

tama, mn wed

or ee

Students must earn a grade of C or better to be eligible for clinical

pyactice,
fas 321b Speech Correction (3)

The diagnostic and therapeutic aspects involved in devising pro-
grams for a variety of speech and language disorders; special em-
phasis on the developmental processes of behavior, the therapeutic
process and application of appropriate methodology; observation of
clinical procedures in the Albany area. Prerequisite: Sau 321.
Students must earn a grade of C or better to be eligible for clinical

practice
han 327 Clinical Methods (2)

Methods of evaluation of articulation, language, motor coordina-
tion and social development. Opportunities for observation and
evaluation of therapy sessions, preparation of lesson plans and
case summaries, and the establishment of short range goals will be
provided, Activities for articulation and language remediation will
be discussed and demonstrated. This course is a prerequisite to
E Sau 370, Prerequisites: 201, 202, 210, 321 a—taken concurrently

th 321 b. Students must earn a grade of C or better to be eligible
or clinical practice.

Sau 351 Auditory Training and Speech Reading (3)

The equipment and methods which contribute to the improve-
ment of receptive skills of speech and hearing of handicapped per-
sons; relation to the type and severity of the handicap and to the
age, language level, and linguistic capacity of the individual.

Deter eal

t
:

foe Sau 302 and 250,
§

au 355 Hearing Loss and Problems of Hearing (3)
The function of the ear in normal and abnormal states, Differen-

a diagnosis in hearing loss; personality and hearing deficit; speech
ifficulties associated with hearing loss. Prerequisite: Sau 250,

Of Sau 370 Clinical Practice in Speech Pathology and Audiology (2-8)

Supervised therapy with functional and organic voice, articula-
tion, hearing, and language disorders in the University Speech
Clinic and in other area agencies; weekly group discussions and
conferences with the instructor. Sau 371 must be taken concur-
rently, Open only to majors, Prerequisites: Sau 321 a and b, Sau
327, An acceptable grade, minimum of C, is required and an over-
all of C in all Speech Pathology and Audiology courses taken prior

__ tofclinical_practice.
_/Sau 371 Seminar in Clinical Relationships in Speech Pathology

and Audiology (1)
Discussions of therapist-client behavior and related topics central
to the processes of clinical improvement in speech, hearing, and

language. Must be taken concurrently with Sau 370. Open only to
majors. May be repeated for credit.

273

Mie.

Sau 397 (Sau 390) Independent Study in Speech Pathology and
Audiology (2-4)

Individual study on a topic of special interest not treated in
courses currently offered. May be repeated for a total of six credits.
Prerequisite: plan of study approved by chosen professor and de-
/partment chairman,

Sau 420 Theory of Speech Improvement (2)

The relations of speech performance to social and linguistic
factors in the child’s environment. Methods for compensating for
environmental deprivations. Techniques and methods for improving
peech development in and through school and community situations.

' j

= “Sau 440 Elementary Psycho-Acoustics (3)

Topics from psycho-acoustics and allied fields which explain and
exemplify the special conditions of language perception. The ap-
proach is instrumental and experimental but not mathematical.
Prerequisites: Sau 201 (or equivalent study) and one course in

fee phonetics

/ Sau 470 Program Organization in Speech Correction and
Audiology (2)

A consideration of the organization and administration of clinical

ee only to seniors majoring in Speech Pathology and Audiology.
S

| au 471 Clinical Methods II (2)
An advanced study of clinical methods used in the treatment of

and public school programs in speech correction and audiology. -

+——communication disorders in Children in the clinical’ and school

settings. Open only to seniors majoring in Speech Pathology and
/ Audiology.

Sau 490 STUDENT TEACHING (see Student Teaching courses).

274

Tee eee

ar we ae ett

yee eee ts
ollege of General Studies

Hilton M. Power, Dean
Kay C. Hotaling, Assistant Dean
James M. Lewis, Assistant Dean

The College of General Studies provides continuing ed-
ucation opportunities for adults in the Capital District who
wish to develop their cultural and intellectual horizons or
their professional and occupational competency. Profes-
sionals, semi-professionals, tradespeople, craftspeople, for-
mer dropouts and retired people are among the more than
5,000 adults who attend the college’s credit and noncredit
programs. Credit and noncredit courses, seminars, confer-
ehces and workshops are offered during the days, evenings
and Saturdays on both the Uptown and Downtown Cam-
puses,

Noncredit programs are open to all adults. No grades
are awarded, no academic records compiled, and no ex-
aminations are given.

The College of General Studies works directly with com-
munity, professional and cultural organizations, business,
industry, and units of Jocal and state government to make

available-the-full-resources-of the university through coop-
erative development of courses, conferences, workshops,
institutes and seminars to meet their specialized educa-
tional needs,

Credit Program

Through simple procedures adults are admitted and. as-
sisted in registering for undergraduate day, evening, and
Saturday credit courses offered by the University. Individ-
ual academic advisement is available through the counsel-
ing staff of the College of General Studies, Anyone with a
high school or equivalency diploma may take courses for

= Le |
i

credit. Adults who have attended college previously may
register as well as those who have not yet attempted col-
lege level courses,

Students who hold the bachelor’s degree may also reg-
ister through the College of General Studies in undergrad-
uate credit courses, but these courses may not be applied
for graduate credit. No graduate courses are offered in the
College of General Studies. Students who wish to enroll in

275

ee ey ee ee

graduate courses must apply through the graduate admis-
sions office of the appropriate school or college of the
university.

A student on academic probation at a previous college
or university or one who was academically dismissed, may
not enroll in courses through the College of General Stud-
ies until one year has elapsed. In addition, any former
State University of New York at Albany degree candidate
who has not received a baccalaureate degree, is not per-
mitted to enroll in the College of General Studies and
should refer to the section in this bulletin on “Readmission
Procedure,”— - a

College of General Studies students are a
(non-degree), This means they have not been formally ad-
mitted to the University as a candidate for a degree. All
the course credits earned while as a General Studies stu-
dent may be applied to a Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of
Science program once the student has been accepted as a
degree candidate. The course credits may also be trans-
ferred to other institutions according to their transfer credit
policies.

A student who wishes to earn a degree at the university
should refer to the procedures described in this bulletin in
the section on Undergraduate Admissions,-Once-aceepted

oars — 2 oer Ee -

as a degree candidate, a student may continue to pursue
the degree program on a part-time basis.

Students not holding a bachelor’s degree enrolled in the
College of General Studies are permitted to pursue a maxi-
mum of three courses. Students who wish to register for
more than a three course load must petition the Dean of
the College of General Studies. Those holding a bachelor’s
degree are not limited in the number of courses which they
may take, A veteran may enroll in a full load of 12 credits
upon approval by a member of the counseling staff of the
College of General Studies.

Individuals may formally or informally audit undergrad-
uate courses on a space available basis through the Col-
lege of General Studies. Persons over sixty are encouraged
and assisted by the College of General Studies to audit
courses. Please see “Undergraduate Regulations” in this
bulletin for further description of auditing courses.

The offices of the College of General Studies are located
in Draper Hall, Room 101, on the downtown campus, 135

276

Whe ante! 6 corer

t
'
penne co page ad

er |
Fi La dR
a

Western Avenue in Albany. Most credit classes are held on
the new campus, 1400 Washington Avenue.

Members of the counseling staff of the College of Gen-
eral Studies are available throughout each session to advise
and counsel adult students. Interviews are arranged be-
tween 9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m, Monday through Friday.
During registration periods the counselors are also avail-
able in the evening and on Saturday. The evening and
Saturday hours are announced in the College of General
Studies bulletin of late afternoon, evening and Saturday
credit courses,

Descriptive brochures and detailed information about

offerings are available from the College of General Studies,

SUNY at Albany, 135 Western Avenue, Albany, N.Y.
12222, For credit course information telephone (518) 472-
8495; for noncredit information telephone (518) 472-8494.

277

Office of International Programs
Charles W. Colman, Director

Study Abroad Programs

International study is conducted at all levels of the un-
dergraduate program, Education at the university level is
by definition universal in nature and therefore interna-
tional, In order to strengthen the international dimension
of all disciplines and to foster a cross-cultural approach,
the university makes an international expeHlente available
as_a part of almost-every_major,

The State University of New York offers oppaiunittes to
study in most-of the major cultural or geographical regions
of the world. Students at Albany register for Albany resi-
dence credit for any of the study abroad programs admin-
istered by any of the SUNY campuses. A complete listing
of the programs and detailed information about them are
available in the Office of International Programs, Social
Sciences 322, Students in the academic year programs will
normally register for 15-18 credits per session, Registration
for the courses is through the College of General Studies.

The Summer Intensive Language Program Abroad, de-
signed primarily for freshmen, offers an innovative orien-

tation to university study. Entering freshmen may begin
their university studies abroad in France, Germany, Italy,
and Spain, During the summer’s intensive studies of lan-
guage and culture, a student may earn an average of four
to six credits, Conducted during July and August, the pro-
gram will allow for a short period of orientation and travel.

It also prepares the student for entrance into academic.

year study abroad programs during later years at the uni-
versity.

Listed below are the programs administered by State
University of New York at Albany on behalf of the State
University of New York system.

SUMMER INTENSIVE LANGUAGE
PROGRAM ABOARD

@-Ins-101—Albany==France

G_Ins 103 Albany—Haly
278

G-Ins-102---Albany—-Germany a hele Le, [ / t4

ice —

a
eo

yon
— ooo

G-Ins-104-—Albanyo=Spain> Hati lhe / YY - Fl

ummer study in French, German, Italian, or Spanish is offered
hegols located in countries where the language is spoken na-
ada. tote open to university students at all levels who have com-
pleted at leas e year of language at the college level or two
years at the high sc¢ nal eee or the equivalent and who wish to
increase their language n the four to six weeks of immersion

in the language and culture of a ea Credit is determined
by means of proficiency examinations Which each student takes at

the beginning and at the end of the program. While no _ specific
credit.can-be-guaranteed-students should average four to six credits,

ACADEMIC YEAR PROGRAMS ABROAD

The academic year programs administered by State Uni-
versity of New York at Albany offer students a wide variety
of disciplines. Undergraduates normally register for 30-36
credits during the academic year. Open to advanced under-
graduates.

Current program sites are: Jerusalem/Tel Aviv, Israel;
Madrid, Spain; Moscow, USSR; Nanyang, Singapore’*;

) van France; Wiirzburg, Germany,

__' __Students may_enroll_for_any_of_the-courses- offered_by-the-program

G Ins 304aandb Albany—Madrid (15 or 30)

at the International Institute. Courses are offered in Spanish lan-
guage, literature, art, history, geography and philosophy.
Prerequisites: junior standing, two years of Spanish at the college
level, above average scholastic record, and survey course of Spanish
litefature. Exceptionally well qualified sophomores may also partici-
pate. Students are strongly urged to enroll for the academic year
ut may register for either term alone. e

G Ins 305 a and b Albany—Nanyang* (up to 30) Liew dae Cray
TAY ese se

burdents 178 £Q te hit guage or Chine

Studies. Prerequisites: ox sailing or above, above average
scholastic record; Aatinese language: no prior knowledge of the
eae Chinese Studies: three years of Mandarin

runs for full academic year.

\4i Ins 306a and b Albany—Nice (36).

Qualified ‘students may choose any courses offered at the Univer-
sity. of Nice, Prerequisites:, junior. standing, and. abdve average:
scholastic record. Students must have completed an advanced
grammar course or the equivalent. Students who are planning to
take courses in French literature must also have taken a two
semester survey course in French literature. SUNYA French majors

“Students wishing to participate in the programs marked with an

asterisk may have to take a leave of absence from the Albany
campus.

279

will obtain information concerning additional prerequisites from the

rench Department. Program includes pre-session and academic

year.

Gins 309aandb Albany—Wirzburg (36)

Qualified students may enroll in any course offered at the Uni-
versity of Wiirzburg. Prerequisites: junior standing, above average
scholastic record, two years of college German or equivalent. Ger-
man majors must also have completed a survey of German litera-

Ja Program includes pre-session and academic year.

Gins311aandb Albany—lsrael (36)

Study is offered at the Hebrew University in Jerusalem or Tel

Sd otenentlicetieeetaabett itd

Aviv University in Tel-Aviv—Three tracks_are offered at both uni-

versities including one which permits a program tailored to the —

needs of the student. Prerequisites: sophomore standing or above ,
(Because of prerequisites, sophomores may not qualify for Tracks 1 |
and 2 of the program at the Hebrew University), above average _
cholastic aptitude. Proficiency requirement in Hebrew language

ili depend on the program chosen. Program includes summer

Ulpan and entire academic year (114 months of study).

G ins 312 Albany—Moscow (15)

A one term exchange program with the Institute of Foreign

Languages in Moscow offers qualified students the opportunity to

study Russian language and literature intensively, Enrollment will |
be limited to ten students per session. Prerequisite: junior standing,
above average scholastic record, three years of college level Russian

— —

~or-the-equivalent.

Sontag ae OE

eee oe

Og ee ee #8

ence 322,
~"GLus2%e Muy Awroad

280

Other State University of New York units offer many |
additional programs for which State University of New
York students are eligible. Students wishing to participate
in a program offered by one of the other campuses of the ;
State University of New York will register on the Albany
campus if the program is supported by state monies. Stu-
dents participating in non-funded programs are required _
to take a leave of absence from the SUNYA campus for ;
the duration of the program. For information on any of |
these programs and details about registration procedures,
inquire at the Office of International Programs, Social Sci- —

—Letiref
a TOP Bar .-1a)

Pe ek

id Se ha
.

School of Library and Information Science
John J. Farley, Dean

Lucille Whalen, Associate Dean
Alfred F. Dascher, Jr., Assistant to the Dean

| FACULTY: VY. Aceto, R. Burgess, J. Farley, R. Halsey,
| N. Hoyle, J. Llinas, W. Katz, I. Klempner, D. Mitchell,

' J, Morehead, Jr., L. Orsini, A. Prentice, W. Saffady, G.
Stevenson, P. Vaillancourt, L, Whalen.

Since the basic preparation for librarians requires five
| years of study leading to a master’s degree, professional
courses in Library and Information Science are usually
i taken on the graduate level. However, as a means of pro-
| viding undergraduate students with certain library skills
which may be of value in their studies or for the purpose
of providing an introduction to the field of Library and
Information Science, a number of courses are available to
undergraduates.
The School of Library and Information Science offers a
. broad program of study which prepares students for ca-
| reers in school, public, college, and special libraries, Under-
' graduate students contemplating a career in librarianship

et oe

ee!

|
i

it i
é

are encouraged to consult with personnel of the School of
; Library and Information Science concerning career oppor-
| tunities and concerning undergraduate preparation for ad-
mission to graduate study in library and information sci-
ence, Such students should also consult the current bulletin
| of the School of Library and Information Science.

No undergraduate courses offered by the School of Li-
brary and Information Science are considered liberal arts
| a d sciences courses for purposes of degree requirements.
' \4ib 203 Introduction to Library Resources (3)

Productive and creative use of library resources; developing
bibliographic skills, using general and specialized reference sources,

|_searghing _scholarly—literatures,—organizing—the—mdergraduate—re=
yf paper.
L

206 Library Research for Public Policy Issues (1)
A short course designed to assist students in identifying and

joogting information available in libraries on selected public policy
isspies,
Lib 301 Introduction to Librarianship (3)

An introduction to types of libraries and library services; the
| concep of the librarian as a mediator between materials and people.
| The operation of various types of libraries are studied a Io
; planngd field visits. QnW7

[Ny ag@ LIBRARY RESEARCH (“-) q] 98]

ote ee ee

| School of Nursing *

Marjorie A. Meyer, Acting Dean

FACULTY: L. Bonser, G. Cardinali, A. Cioppa, S. Daly,

C, Francis, M. Hayner, P. Hemmings, S. Kane, D, Major,

M. Meyer, D. Moldoff, N. Moore, A. Rudolph, D. Serrone,
M. Shipp, E. Simpson, J. Whitaker.

The school aims to prepare students for the practice of
nursing, supplying the educational background which can
serve as the basis for advanced study in nursing and for

It was established primarily for the purpose of providing a
pool of baccalaureate graduates qualified to pursue gradu-

ate study leading to specialization for teaching, adminis-
tration and research,

Philosophy and Objectives

The faculty of the School of Nursing accepts its respon-

sibility for contributing to the purposes of the university
through teaching, research and service, The faculty fur-
ther acknowledges its responsibility to provide an environ-

| ___ _professional-growth-and-advancement through experience. ~

ae
ae ee oe 2 =

ment which encourages

university community, to develop his potential as a person
while preparing for professional practice, The faculty be-
lieves this goal is best achieved through an integrated pro-
gram of liberal and professional studies which facilitates
the development of intellectual, social and professional
skills.

Learning is an active, self-perpetuating process. It is in-
dividual and selective in that each learner brings to it the
uniqueness of his own life patterns and goals. The environ-
ment in which learning occurs should generate critical
thinking, group interaction and self-direction as student
and teacher share this experience. This process, in a demo-
cratic society, enables each learner to develop an under-
standing of his rights, his responsibility to self and society,
and the comparable rights and responsibilities of others.

The faculty believes that nursing offers a service within
a health delivery system, the goal of which is promotion

*No degree will be awarded in this program after August, 1979.
282

nt,_as_a-member-of the—,

eee ee

Kewanee &

a ewe he

[A Ce
'
Soa

of health for individuals, families and communities, The
focus of the health care system has moved to encompass
the full spectrum of the health-illness continuum requiring
a broader scope of services in new as well as traditional
agencies, Nurses must be prepared, therefore, to take lead-
ership in identifying and initiating new roles and responsi-
bilities in the delivery of their services. Using the nursing
process, the nurse must assess health needs, identify health
goals and utilize a variety of resources in making judg-
ments essential to the provision of services. While nursing
shares some activities with professionals of other health
disciplines, it accepts responsibility for provision of phys-
ical care and emotional support, for health counseling and
teaching and for case-finding. On this basis, nursing must
derive from a broad knowledge of relevant social, natural
and applied sciences.

The faculty believes its goals are best achieved through
an integrated program of liberal and professional studies
offered at increasing levels of complexity throughout the
program, To facilitate the integration of knowledge, nurs-
ing courses in each year of the program must offer content
and clinical experiences interrelating all aspects of nursing

1 ee er lt
Pee we

(oom ere mae

in a variety of community settings.

The graduate is prepared to provide and direct nursing
care of individuals and groups, to function in a colleague
relationship with other health personnel, and to participate
in community action programs concerned with health, The
graduate is also qualified for advanced study in nursing at
the master’s level.

The school has developed a curriculum designed to pre-
pare nurses who possess:

I. Understanding of the responsibilities of a citizen in a

democratic society and a changing world;
II, Understanding of the dynamic relationship between a

profession-and-the-society- which it serves;
III. Ability to provide, in a variety of settings, a service
directed toward the promotion of health, utilizing the
nursing process in meeting immediate and long-term
health needs.
Further information may be obtained by writing the
School of Nursing, State University of New York at AI-
bany, Albany, N.Y. 12222,

283

Foo:
f

Curriculum

The curriculum leading to the Bachelor of Science de-

gree is an integrated program of 120 credits designed to .

be completed in four academic years, Students who for
any reason need to lighten the course load will require
additional time for completion.

Courses in general education and in the nursing major
are offered simultaneously throughout the program, During
the first two years general education courses predominate;
during the third and fourth years nursing courses increase

1|________and-general-edueation-courses-decrease: Liberal arts courses

throughout the program are taught by faculty of various
departments of the university. Nursing courses are taught
by faculty of the School of Nursing with clinical practice
in hospitals and other health agencies. The curriculum is
planned to provide a balance in the study of social and
behavioral sciences, humanities, and physical and biolog-

| ical sciences in addition to required courses in the profes-

sional major.

Requirements. for the degree in nursing include the fol-

All courses in Group I and Vertebrate Physiology must be
completed as prescribed by the school. The balance of
credits may be selected by the student from the other
groups shown.

Clinical nursing courses begin in the sophomore year.
Because of the nature of instruction in nursing, class size

*Prerequisites for this course include two terms of general bio-
logy and two terms of general chemistry.

284

lowing:
Group t——Nursing 58 credits"
Group II Communications - 3 credits. |
Group III Science and Mathematics 1821 credits
must include: z
Vertebrate physiology® 4 credits |
Group IV Social Sciences and Humanities 21 credits ¢ }
must include:
Sociology 6 credits : |
| Psychology 6 credits — |
Humanities 3 credits * °
Group V_ Free Electives 17-20 credits

en ee a
er rermeeity
ee ey thers meg bee

me ATT ee

me,

at this point must be controlled. Candidates for sophomore
nursing courses, therefore, are selected from those mem-
bers of the freshman class and transfer applicants whose
overall qualifications appear to offer greatest promise of
success in the program.

Nursing courses provide learning experiences of increas-
ing depth, moving from the simple to the complex in all
phases of nursing practice as the student progresses through
the course of study. All clinical nursing courses require that
the student demonstrate satisfactory achievement in the
application of nursing knowledge as she plans, ministers,
and evaluates nursing care in hospitals and health agencies.

Because of emphasis on family and community nursing
and the distances involved in obtaining such experiences,
students require use of a car during portions of the junior
and senior years.

Faculty of the School of Nursing reserve the right to
require a student to withdraw from any nursing courses if
such action is in the best interest of the university.

The following undergraduate courses offered by the
School of Nursing are considered liberal arts and sciences
courses for purposes of degree requirements for the B.A.

ee ee Te

1h ES

Fay TR cereeenrenerre:

and B.S. degrees: Nur 100, 211 a and b, 410; Nsc 220, 225.
All courses listed in this section are preceded by the
school’s letter “N.”

200-level courses are prerequisite to 300-level; 300-level
are prerequisite to 400-level. b 78. 7

Nur-2'10-a-and-b._Nursing.and the Individual-(4,-4)-C-}—bat--"- 7
Identification and application of scientific principles in’ clinical
nursing. “Emphasis is on planning and nursing care in/felation fo

asic human-needs, stress, and adaptive mechanisms?’ Experiences
ith various age wQUDS | in selected clinical settin es ‘provide oppdr-°
K

tunity. for the practi a of fundamental nursi ills, 210 a, pye-
equisites or corequisitess230 a, 211 a, at 3, 210 b prerequi-

ee eee

2 sci

sites: 210 a, Bio 213; corequigsites: 230 4)
ur 211 aandb The Life Cycle (2-2) Ne ee.
chological
ph a and devel

Study of interrelationships of
ides field experierjce

e vironmental factors as they je eat
the study of a ig rerequisite for 211 @xthree credits jin

ental tasks in the life of each individual. Po
Séciology or Psycholo

rinciples essential to understanding scientific basis of theTag
including contént from nutrition, i and other clin cal

CO Sg panerser erarnrannonanornaunnnianrverey “aay at? a

DA 2 285

Ngc 230 a es troduction to Clinical Sciences (2, 2) |

/ Cane ell 47

| Nse-235-—Mieroblology-in-Health-and-Disease-(3)°
| StF Studyof-miterobiology “anid” bs dy “defenses” apart infection~and

el _application-to-nursing-actione<——— nnn
WA 300 aand b Contemporary Problems in Nursing (2, 2)

| (' ~

PEG Deals with concepts and skills essential to development of the
| ZAP leadership role in effecting improvement of nursing care, Utilizes
systems theory in analyzing health problems and the scientific
method as the preferred means of introducing change in nursing
practice. Prerequisite: junior standing or consent of instructor.

Cant r350 Nursing and Family I (8)
| Faults Deals with scientific rationale underlying comprehensive care of

lp physically ill adults and children and with the application of. nursing- .

—B. ‘skills in increasingly complex situations. Opportunities are provided
| for development of leadership skills, teaching patients and families,
| and in planning for continuity of care.

| ) Nu’370 Nursing and Family I! (8)
ligule Family-centered nursing care in home, hospital and community
5 i settings. Provides opportunity for study of individual and group

dynamics, behavioral disorders, the child-bearing family, and com-

deve

Deals with patterns of organization of health agencies and health

decision-making. Assists the learner in transition from role of stu-
dent/to that_of_practitioner_through—examination~of~ ethical, legal,

andfother factors inherent in professional practice.

{i of Nur 460 Nursing and the Community I (5)

' ON 74 Focuses on Jeadership in planning and providing care to hospital-

Fos ‘ized individuals with complex nursing problems. Involvement of

1} family and community resources is emphasized. The nurse’s role in
directing patient care is developed through a team _ leading

experi¢nce.
| by
iva ul Num70 Nursing and the Community II (5)

Aims to prepare the student for first level community health
practice. Provides learning experiences to develop leadership skills
necessary for the care of multi-problem families. Emphasizes use of
the epidemiological method, and of community resources as well as
the nurse’s role in functioning within an interdisciplinary team.

(pul nue 0 Special Problems Practicum (2)
Study of nursing problems related to areas of special interest,
Sa abilities, and goals of individual students. Involves independent

() 14 reading, investigation, and practice under direction of faculty
folk member or committee. Prerequisite: Nur 460 or Nur 470.

286

ot health problems. Leadership potential is identified and ;

( to Nut'400 a and b_ Professional Practice Seminar (2, 2) :

care delivery systems, stressing management theory, planning and ;

Other Courses

These courses. are designed for non-nursing maj B 24.
¢-220.....Introduction-to-the "Drug Problem (3) Cau | 4

~QGauses and effects of drug abuse. Deals primarily with “street
drugs” available to American youth, clarifying misconceptions and
iscussing..treatment-modalittés for the chronic user. ee

Study of effects of hunger and malnutrition at various poirfts in
the life cycle, with exploration-ef-ways-to~improye-nutrition in all
aial-PTOUDS.

Nur 410 Drugs in American Society (3) J
An intredyction to the basic principles of drug actiop—arid to a
consideration oF rug. abuse. Lectures and disc ‘one will explore
the physiological and psy¢hological_ haz; rds3t indiscriminate use of
drugs, drug testing and drug,advertisittg-Saciglogical, legal and
ehtical implications, of settle in contemporary / méfican-life are
stressed. Prosganitss two biology courses and one psychology 6r

sociology-cBurse.

Graduate Level Courses for Non-nursing Majors:

Nur510~” Drugs if American-Society..(3)..__.
The scientific principles of drug interaction with biological sy§-

ems—will-be—analyzed—in relationship to contemporary drug abus¢.
he physiological and the psychological-Razards of indiscriminate
drug use will be related to American’ fife today. Evaluation of tHe
role of drugs in society and thé legal and ethical implications {
new drug development wil]-be considered. Prerequisite: two biology
courses or one course itt | psychology or sociology.

Nsc 520 Humafi Sexuality (3)
Interdisciplinary course dealing with basic concepts of hunjan

sexyal” development _and the bio-psycho-social dynamics_i
Zaal-bohavion ‘throughout the life cycle.

5 — aE ee |

bam Wee names oe

287

Graduate School of Public Affairs

L. Gray Cowan, Dean
Sandro A. Barone, Assistant Dean

Department of Political Science

FACULTY: C, Astiz (Chairman), J. Brigham, C. Brown,
L. G. Cowan, M. Edelman, W. Fiser, W. Goldstein, J.

Gunnell, R, Hedges, E, Hoffmann, B. Johnpoll, J. Knight,
A. Magid, J. Piereson, L. Powell, J. Riedel, R. Rienow, —

R, Stout, C. Tarlton,-TWright, J.-Zimmerman. |

Political science is concerned with the activity and or-

values. The study of political science is designed to prepare
the student for responsible and effective citizenship, politi-
cal participation, and advanced academic or professional
studies. The student of political science may gain an un-
derstanding and appreciation of political values, institu-

tions, and processes operating in American, foreign, and
international systems,

- a

-Preparation-forLaw-School

or pn

Recognizing the fact that a lawyer must be politically
knowledgeable, many pre-law students major in political
science, Individuals engaged in the practice of law auto-
matically are involved in “political” activities because of
their dealings with the executive, legislative, and judicial

branches of government. The nature and extent of political >

involvement with each branch, of course, depends upon
the type of practice each attorney engages in,

Attorneys are employed as counsels by executive depart-
ments and legislative committees of the federal, state, and
local governments, Other attorneys are employed as legis-
lative representatives (lobbyists), A high percentage of the
members of Congress, state legislatures, and councils in
medium and large cities are attorneys, Other attorneys
seek election to office as mayors and county executives.
With relatively few exceptions, judges are “Learned-in-
Law.” Students with long range plans for judgeships should
recognize that all or some judges are popularly elected in
40 states and “political” considerations influence the ap-
pointment of judges.

288

ye meta wl oe
y

Pre-law students are encouraged to join the very active
Pre-Law Association, which has an office in the Campus
Center, and visit the pre-law information room in Univer-
sity College.

For further information about law schools, consult Pro-
fessor Ronald M. Stout, Departmental Pre-Law Adviser,
Dean Robert H. Gibson of University College, and Pro-
fessor William F. Sheehan of the School of Business,

Students interested in attending law school are advised
also to consider attending a graduate program in political
science with a major in public law. If the student is inter-
ested in public law as it relates to policy areas (environ-
ment, urban planning and development, energy, transpor-
tation, consumer protection, etc.), a public law graduate
program may better facilitate the career aspirations of the
student. A type of adjudication growing in importance is
administrative adjudication, a subject which can be stud-
ied in a public law graduate program.

i
:
t

Special Opportunities or Programs:

The location of the Graduate School of Public Affairs in
the capital city of the Empire State affords students of
political science unusual opportunities to observe and study
the executive, judicial and legislative branches of the State
Government, the second largest public employer in the
United States. With a few exceptions, the principal office

of each State Department, Division, and Office is located
in Albany.

Library resources to support research in New York State
Government are excellent, Students have access to the New

| tho » State—Library,with-one-of-the—largest-collections-in

the world, State Departments, Divisions, and Offices also
have specialized libraries containing information not com-
monly housed in university or public libraries.

All undergraduate courses offered by the Graduate
School of Public Affairs are considered liberal arts and
sciences courses for purposes of degree requirements,

All courses listed in this section are understood to be
preceded by School’s designation “P.”

289

|
|
|
‘
;

]

DEGREE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR IN
POLITICAL SCIENCE

General Program

B.A.: A minimum of 30 credits in political science in-
cluding Pos 120.

a. Pos 120 Introduction to Political Science is a prereq-
uisite for other political science courses in the areas of the
American Political System, Comparative Political Systems,
International Political Systems, Political Theory, Public Ad-

:———ministration, and Public Law,

b. Normally, the Department of Political Science re-
quires that those courses to be counted toward the major
be taken at SUNYA and that most of them be classroom
courses, The department reserves the right to review trans-
fer credit used to complete the major in political science.
Independent study courses are to be used to deal with

topics not covered by regular departmental offerings and ;

after classroom courses dealing with the same subject have
been completed. Prior to registering for independent study,
a student must have his proposed research project ap-
proved by his adviser and a faculty member willing to
direct the research, The student’s prospectus must outline

the topic of his or her proposed research, indicate-itsim-—;

portance to political science, and describe the methodology
to be employed and methodological problems that may be
encountered. Students may not register for independent
study unless a copy of the prospectus, properly signed, has
been filed with the department. Independent study courses
may not be used in lieu of classroom courses.

c. Pad 303 (Public Administration and Management)
and Pad 405 (Bureaucracy and Politics in American So-

ciety) are acceptable as political science courses in meeting:

the 30 credit requirements in Political Science.
d. The following courses are strongly recommended for
political science majors:

American Political Systems

Pos 321 State and Local Government

Pos 331 The American Legislature

Pos 332 The American Executive

Pos 334 American Political Parties and Groups
Pos 338 Political Behavior

290
|

Pos 150 Comparative Governments (Two other area
courses from among Pos 351, 352, 353, 354,
355, 357, 358, 359 and 360)

International Political Systems

Comparative Political Systems

Pos 370 International Relations: Theory
Pos 371 International Relations: Practice
Pos 380 Basics of International Law

Pos 381 International Organization

Political Theory

Pos 301 Political Philosophy

Pos:307 American Political Theory

Pos 310 Contemporary Political Philosophy
Pos 314 Problems of Political Inquiry

Public Law

Pos 330 The American Judiciary
Pos 335 The American Supreme Court
Pos 426aandb American Constitutional Law

Each student majoring in political science must file with
the department chairman a tentative degree program by
the middle of the first term subsequent to the declaration
of the major. Majors are encouraged to include in their
tentative degree programs at least one course in each of
the five fields of Political Science.

A INTRODUCTION AND SURVEY
os 101

Politics and Political Science (3)
A. general view and survey of politics and political science. The
course is concerned with identifying and characterizing the main
conéeptual features of the political dimension of social life.

|
:

Pos 120 Introduction to Political Science (3)

An introduction to the study of politics, focusing on American
national government; it includes some discussion of theoretical
questions (such as authority, representation, and consent), and
some illustrative examples from the area of comparative and inter
national politics. It will satisfy the requirements previously met by

an
os 130 Practical Politics (2)

It is the objective of this course to consider the rich variety of
polffical activity with which the individual citizen is most likely to
ome in contact in trying to become influential in his own locale.

Bos WO TATRO PUBLe Policy (3) "EKT og)

eee anenee Sart + = -
1

te yr ee

Relying heavily on available partisan and non-partisan political
actors in the capital district for participants and examples, the
course will review from both literature and experience, the means

by which people alone, in small groups, or through political parties

become politically effective.

J POLITICAL THEORY

Pos 301 Political Philosophy (3)

Historical and topical examination of various aspects of the
literature of Western Political Philosophy.

Pos 307 American Political Theory (3)

An examination of the_development _of _political_ thought— and— -;—; -

Sroes in the American experience.

Pos 310 Contemporary Political Philosophy (3)

An analysis of selected perspectives in the political and social
F pom of the 19th and 20th centuries.

Pos 314 Problems of Political Inquiry (3)

An introduction to the discipline of political science and contem-
bovaey approaches to the study of politics,

Pos 318 Seminar in Political Philosophy (3)
An investigation of selected topics in political philosophy. Sub-
jects to be announced by instructor. Limited enrollment.
Sete two courses in political theory or consent of instructor.
p

os 416 Statistics for Political Scientists (3)

An introduction to quantitative analysis of political and social

data; methods of summarizing and describing univariate distribu-

tions including the use of tables and graphs, measures of central

tendency and dispersion; methods of examining relationships be-

‘ween two or more variables; probability, sampling, and inference,
feomoste usage

Pos 417 Empirical Data Analysis (3)

The course is designed to introduce the student to a variety of
data analysis techniques ranging in complexity from simple table
construction and interpretation to casual analysis. Within this
range are coding, scale and index construction, multidimensional
scaling, levels of measurement, measures of association, correlation

nd regression, panel, and cohort analysis, and Markov Chains.
rerequisite: Pos 416,

\ Pos 418 Introduction to Formal Theory (3)
-An examination of formal theory as an axiomatic deductive ap-
proach relying on a small number of assumptions to generate
empirically testable theories of political behavior. Topics would
include: Game Theory, the logic of voting, mechanisms of Social
hoice, Electoral competition. Emphasis will be placed on the art
of model building and applications in the American Political System.

Pos 419 Seminar in Political Theory (3)
An investigation of special topics in political theory and philos-

ophy. Prerequisite: two courses in political theory or consent of the
instructor.

292

}
:

‘
a
|
a

ST Gow wutts EZ

i
|
J

rd |

'
|

| t
eof

—4_t._ pte and Tocal- goverment

|
4 j
7
i |

vA AMERICAN GOVERNMENT

Pos 220 American National Government (3)

An examination of the underlying principles and theories of
American national government: its institutions, branches of govern-
ment; relations with other levels of government; constitutional
powers and limitations; formal and informal mechanisms of prob-
lem-solving, relating the structure of government to the various
forms of political activity.

0s 222 New York State and Local Government (3)

The development of the State constitution; the judiciary and
judicial administration; organization, powers and procedures of the
legislature; power and duties of the governor; an introduction to
the administration agencies. The function, organization, financing
azid politics of local units of governments.

Pos 320 American Federalism (3)

A thorough exploration of the basic organizing principles of the
American political system including the theoretical, historical, con-
stitutional, and political factors that made and have kept the
United States a federal polity for 200 years. A major emphasis will
be in the various modes of intergovernmental relations, including
such topics as fiscal relations, grants-in-aid, revenue sharing, and
including such policy areas as health, education, environmental
pyotection, and economic planning,

os 321 State and Local Government (3)
An analysis of governmental structure, operations, and problems
at the state and local level within the states of the United States,

a special attention to policy formulation and administration.

Pos 323 Urban Government (3)

An examination of governmental patterns in major urban areas of
the United States. Consideration will be given to the nature of a
mupicipal corporation, forms of government, state-local relations
and urban politics.

hon 324 Community Politics (3)

An examination of the bases of power at the local level. Political
power, social stratification and technology are discussed within a
historical and contemporary context. Recommend prior course in

Pos 330 The American Judiciary (3)
The structure and function of the courts in the American political
system with special attention to staffing, the decision-making
rocess, judicial policy-making, and checks upon judicial power.

Pp
‘ee
os 331 American Legislature (3)

An examination of the legislative function in the American politi-
cal system, Inquiry into the sources of legislative power, the institu-
tions involved in formulating legislation, and the people who
participate in the legislative process,

293

asiewunives: iien mm

Pos 332 The American Executive (3)

The course will focus on the principal institutions, functions, and
problems of the Executive branch of government. Emphasis will be
flaced on the President as political leader, head of state, and ad-
ministrator, as well as on his relations with Congress.

Pos 334 American Political Parties and Groups (3)
An examination of the theory, organizational forms and dynamics
of political group formation and activity, with special attention given

to the political party system, interest groups, political leadership,
and electoral behavior.

Pos 335 The American Supreme Court (3)

This- course_wil]_ deal with the role of the Supreme Court in Amer-

ican political life. Topics to be considered-will-include:_access to the

Court; the nature of Supreme Court decision-making; the selection of

Supreme Court justices; the relationship between the Supreme Court
nd the Executive and Legislative branches of government; and the

major substantive issues with which the Supreme Court has been

Wess ae Ci vil Liberties (85 dD {d itl tof

Pos 338 Political Behavior (3)
Politically relevant behaviors are discussed in terms of their psy-
chological and sociological determinants. Emphasis on manifest and
/ latent. political training in numerous contexts,
\y

— —__}

Pos 339 Political Socialization (3)
Operating within a behavioral framework, this course deals with

~p Raiticas_soctalization and_ its relationship to the development of
; political attitides;political_participation, and the maintenance and.
change of political systems. Both theoretica and empiriealsworks

OF er ok eae ee

vill be considered,

Pos 365 Government and the Mass Media (3)
A study of the relation of the mass media to the American poli-
tical process, including an examination of the effect of the mass

media on legislative actions, the executive, voting behavior, and the
‘bureaucracy.

' Pos 400 Problems in Urbanism (3)
Independent study in interdisciplinary urban problems chosen by
f the student in consultation with the instructor. Also open to majors

j in. other social sciences and to qualified upper division students in
vi _ other disciplines, |
Py

see __|society (3)

| | Pos 405 (Pad £05) ' Bureaucracy and Politics in American 2] ”) ’)
See Pad 405.

tL
| Pos 426a American Constitutional Law (3)
' Basie cases will be examined in their historical settings and
analyzed in terms of legal or constitutional issues and judicial doc-
trines, including judicial review, separation of powers, division of
power, inter-state relations, the power to tax and spend, war
powers, and treaty powers.

294

i
t

——
es ne ee —
Pee owe erate nl

ee tern oe

2
t

how 426 b American Constitutional Law (3)

I:
b

An examination of basic cases in their historical settings and
analyzed in terms of legal or constitutional issues and judicial doc-
trines, including interstate and foreign commerce, civil and political
rights, the privileges and immunities of oltizenship, due process,

Bes 4 equal protection, evi “ey wen Lu f ( cw (3)

| gPos Sree. ve Internship (3) £1r/ jed) b

Active participation in the legislative process li. work in a
staff position in the New York State Legislature. Students will also
attend a series of occasional seminars to discuss the legislative
process and their work experiences; prepare an annotated bibliog-
raphy indicating a substantial knowledge of the academic literature
related to the legislative process; and write a research paper dealing
with the legislative process or some aspect of substantive polic oy

deyélopment. Py req ussite: Pos 32) ov 22)\,

Bo os 434 Campaign Internship (3)

This course is designed for students who wish to work in election
campaigns and relate their experience to the academic study of
political parties, campaigns, and elections. Each student will be
expected to do substantial reading of the academic literature in the
field and to write a research paper which relates the campaign work
experience to selected theoretical frameworks discussed by scholars
in the field. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

re ae A ee oe

COMPARATIVE POLITICS

Pos 150 Contemporary Governments (3)

The impact of the comparative study in political theory; the char-
act¢ristics and development of statehood ,and power; conditions of
ss ility; constitutions and the comparative political process.

Pos 351 European Politics (3)
A study of politics and political change in contemporary Europe,
as reflected in ideology, organization, and leadership. Both Western

ework.

if Eastern Europe will be treated in a common, comparative
fram

Pos 352 Communist Political Systems (3)

The characteristics_of_communism—in-the-modern-world:-the role

ree et 5
i

——- -

eee

of the Communist party; the state as a bureaucracy, with special
reférence to the U.S.S.R,; relations among the powers of the com-
tinist bloc and the impact of these relations on the Soviet Union.

Pos 353 Developing Political Systems (3)

The characteristics of the developing societies; their problems of
constitutional development and governmental organization; the
planning of developing economies and the determination of priori-
ties, the tendency towards one party political systems; the develop-
ment of enterpreneurial and management skills and the use of
autonomous institutions and public enterprises.

295

es ee oS

Yaw 354 Government and Politics of the Soviet Union (3)

In depth study of Russian and Soviet internal politics, 1861 to
the present. Emphasis is placed on the activities of the Communist
Party of the Soviet Union—political, economic and ideological—
and on changing characteristics of the Soviet political system. Equal

the Lenin, Stalin, Khrushchev, and Brezhnev and Kosygin eras.

Pos 355 Government and Politics in Subsaharan Africa (3)

The course will focus on the relationship between ideologies, in-
stitutions, and individuals in African political systems. Implications
of these factors for African political behaviors (domestic and inter-

;

t
T
i
|

| Tos be examined.. ; oe ae

Pos 356 The Foreign Policy of the Soviet Union (3)

A survey of. Soviet activities in international relations, 1917 to
the present. Attention is devoted to the Soviet Union’s relations
with Western Europe, Eastern Europe, China, the developing na-
ions and the United States. Contemporary Soviet policy is empha-

sized. Previous study of Soviet internal politics is desirable, but not
a prerequisite.

Pos 357 Latin American Politics (3)
/ A study of the domestic political institutions, the forces which

shape the quest for power, and the processes by which public
Policies are determined in Latin America.

Perey
ee

Poet hak 2 | ee ad

|
'

Pos-358—Government and Politi¢s of South Asia (3)

A detailed consideration of the distinctive characteristics and
problems of political development in India and Pakistan with em-

phasis on the post-independence era, national integration, and the
politics of scarcity.

Pos 359 Israeli Politics (3)

In depth study of the political system of Israel: its history, social

and political cleavages, governing institutions and persistent
problems.

Pos 360 Contemporary Politics in the Middle East (3)

An analytical survey of contemporary politics in the Middle
East, including political institutions, processes, and major political
issues. Particular stress will be placed on the internal variables of
Middle Eastern politics,

Pos 458 Minority Politics in the Third World (3)

Against a background of European and American experience,
case studies will be made of the composition and problems of
various religious and ethnic minorities; their origins, characteristics,
and integration into the social and political systems of the new
nations of Asia and Africa in the process of political development.
Examples: the Chinese of Southeast Asia, Indian Muslims, and
overseas Indians.

296

fee ny
A pt et
caine te ns eet

Setemancih edi Sad

ne I

Se -

y INTERNATIONAL POLITICS
Pos 370

International Relations: Theory (3)

Attention will focus on the uses of theory in observing the inter-
action patterns found in the international system. Concepts of
equilibrium, conflict and nationalism will be examined. Theoretical
pfopositions about power, war and diplomacy will be tested and

ounter-theories will be formulated.

Pos 371 International Relations: Practice (3)

This course will survey fundamental procedures of interstate and
transnational relations. It examines the historical evolution of the
international system, statecraft, the use of force, negotiation and
diplomacy, alliance formation, and nationalism and imperialism.
Note: Pos 370 is not a prerequisite for Pos 371.

Pos 375 International Organization (3)

The structure and processes of the United Nations evaluated in
terms of its historical antecedents and the challenges that face it.
The operational foundations of the specialized agencies and such
other governmental organizations as are universal in character.
flose attention to the forces and interest groups of international
scope to which the United Nations and related organizations
respond,

Pos 380 Basics of International Law (3)
An analytical survey of the precedents and limitations of world

law, The uses of Jaw _forthe_pacific—settling—of -disputes—and—wars
Soo be pursued with varied texts, cases and documents.
P

os 381 International Organization (3)

The integration of political communities will be surveyed at a
regional or supra-national level. An evaluation of the United Nations
in theory and practice, will suggest principles of organization that
gan be found in NATO, the OAS or the Common Market.

Pos 383 American Foreign Policy (3)

An introduction to the political and strategic dimensions of
American foreign policy, Issues considered: revolution, survival and
expansion, 1763-1900; the strategies of world power; America,
Russia, and the Cold War; the nuclear revolution; U.S. diplomacy

fam and after the Vietnam war.

!
im

Pos 384 Formulation of American Foreign Policy_(3)

An introduction to the political institutions and values of the
American foreign policy process. Issues considered: American na-
tional character; the search for national interests; the role of in-
terest groups and public opinion; the Congress; the Presidency; the
military-industrial complex; the policy system in times of peace and

Z ld War,
‘Pos 390. Organizing to Combat Global Problems (3)

A systemic review of the organizational issues that confront man-
kind (population control, development of resources, oceanic degra-
dation, currency stability, etc.) and of the effectiveness of the
specialized agencies that try to grapple with them.

297

Pos 391 Regional Economic and Political Integration (3)

An investigation of regional political and economic groupings,
paying special attention to such organizations as the European
Economic Community, In pursuit of these objectives the course also
addresses itself to the setting of regional integration, situating it in

the general process of political development and the wider context
J of the global system.

Pos 392 Strategic Studies (3)

An introduction to the threat and use of organized coercion by
states in their international relations. Issues considered: professional
armies of the 18th century; the industrial revolution and the

-—__democratization_ of national politics; limited wars of the 19th cen-
tury; European §statecraft; Bismarck and Clausewitz; alliance

aa and alliance breaking: total war—World War I and World
ar II

va 393 Conflict Theory (3)
“ Attention will focus on contemporary problems in strategic con-
flict, including game theory, decision theory and the causes of war.

Studies will also be made of the varying diplomatic and strategic
contexts in which warfare arises.

\f Pos 394 Imperialism and Economic Policy (3)

The economic instruments available to the nation-state are be-
( coming more numerous and yet weaker. Intervention in trade, aid
and fiscal policy have enlarged the operational scope of the state;
; yet the opposition that it faces, from multi-national firms and or-
; ~~ ganizations-has-grown—at_a_faster_rate, The course will focus upon

ewe eee

the economics of coercion and the politics of imperialism and inter-
tional trade.

os 498 Independent Study (1—6)

eading or resarch under the direction of appropriate faculty.
Pyerequisite: consent of instructor.

os 499 Senior Seminar (3)
An intensive examination of selected problems of political life,
Specific topics will be selected and announced by the instructor

when offered. This course may be repeated once if the selected
| topic is substantively changed.

298

PS re er ey a
a? (
Li Vv
mo Department of Public Administration

FACULTY: H. Adams, D. Axelrod, A. Baaklini, W. Balk,
| H. Gerjuoy, L. Hawkins, J. Heaphey, J. Heikoff, R. Nunez,
J. Plant, O. Poland, R. Quinn, J. Wade, V. Zimmermann.

Public Administration is concerned with the formulation
and implementation of governmental policies and pro-
grams, The approach of the department is interdisciplin-

ary, drawing on various social and behavioral sciences. The
| courses focus on such topics as the role of bureaucracy in
society, management of finances of the public sector, or-
ganizational theory and development, the political and
7 legal environment of administration, and public policy re-

| vin and analysis.
fd
Pad 201 Living with Large Organizations (3)

An exploration of basic ideas about people in large organizations,
he social structure in such organizations, and how they interact
ith their environment, The final sessions deal with the problems
involved in using large organizations to bring about social change.

Ce eke

he Sate tice
re marie

| Pad 303 Public Administration and Management (3)
| An introduction to the field of public administration as its theory
and practice have developed in the United States, emphasizing
opirent trends and problems of organization and—management—in
ch areas as personnel policy, budget making, policy research and

; pen
| | Pad 405 Bureaucracy and Politics in American Society (3)
An investigation of how bureaucratic institutions function in the
' American political system and why they are variously seen as
| | assets or liabilities for a public policy process. faced with unprece-
dented problems in guiding American society through a transition to
the next century.

The following graduate courses are open to qualified
| seniors, (See the Bulletin of the Graduate School of Public
Affairs for descriptions.)

Aan ce ee

sp 30:

+ Pad- -§00 —Theories-and-Processes-of-Public-Administration-(4)
! (Not open to students who have taken Pad 303.)

Pad 502 Public Administration and the Political Process (4)
(Not open to students who have taken Pad 405.)

Pad 571 National Goals and Public Policy (4)

Pee ee
qo eee

a eee eed
a

Pad 572 Program Seminar in Urban Environment Systems (4)

299

Program in Public Affairs

FACULTY: Combined faculty of the Graduate School of
Public Affairs, including faculty from other schools and
departments of the university.

Designed as a graduate program of study in the field of
public policy, the program in public affairs offers several
undergraduate courses in a variety of topics.

See “Interdisciplinary Second Fields” for a description

Kei the interdisciplinary second field in Urban Affairs.
P

af 150 Man Against His Environment (3) |
A, study of ecological, political and cultural forces destroying our
environment and threatening the physical and mental well-being
and quality of American life. Designed for the university student
nd the citizen concerned with public affairs.

Paf 200 Social Policy and the Environment (3)

This course will deal with the principal values and institutions
affecting the formulation of private and public policies directed
oward environmental issues. Specific topics to be discussed include
opulation, land, minerals, water, and air.

Paf 300a &b Environment Legislative Workshop (3-3) |
Intensive study of current New York State legislative proposals
involving environmental topics. Preparation of factual analyses of

ogublic. Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Paf 314 Peace Studies Forum (3)

The course is centered upon a series of discussions led by faculty
from each of the many disciplines which contribute to an under-
standing of the problems of violence in international and domestic
affairs and to an assessment of the possibilities of non-violent con-
flict resolution in both spheres. This is the basic course of the
Second field in Peace Studies, but is open to students who. are not

ee this second field.

Paf 360 Seminar in Journalism (3)

Intended primarily for students interested in a career in journal-
ism, the seminar focuses upon an examination of both practical and

hilosophical variety of instructional formats, including lectures,
posts media presentations and field trips as well as presenta-

ions by practicing journalists, Prerequisite: consent of instructor.

Paf 390 Forum in Public Affairs (3)
The examination and discussion of selected areas of public policy

and topics of current social and political concern. Junior standing
and consent of instructor are required.

300

os
tt

Boies
a

hese proposals-for—information for-the—legislators—andthe—general——_,_

School of Social Welfare vi

Seth W. Spellman, Acting Dean
Ivan J. Edelson, Assistant Dean

FACULTY: D, Cohen, C. David, M. Didier, A. Klein, D.

Lamkin, H. McKinley, M. Miringoff, J. Nelson, S. Nixon,

M. O’Connell, C. O'Reilly, S. Pflanczer, R. Rivas, E.
Sherman, M. Siporin, S, Spellman.

The objective of the school is to provide professional
education in the social services to prepare students for
beginning practice in social work under supervision or for
graduate study. It also can serve the liberal education
needs of students generally interested in the social sciences
and/or the human service profession. The advanced de-
gree program (M.S.W.) prepares students for leadership
positions within the profession requiring advanced theore-
tical, practice research skill and/or management and policy
analysis skills.

To accomplish its objectives, the school offers full pro-
grams leading to the B.S. with a major in Social Welfare
and the Master of Social Work degrees. A Ph.D. program

in Social Welfare hasbeen —approved—by—the—Board—of
Regents of the State of New York, but is not yet offered
by the school.

Both the B.S. and M.S.W. program are accredited by
the Council on Social Work Education—the national ac-
crediting agency.

DEGREE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAJOR IN
SOCIAL WELFARE

General Program

B.S,: Within the general credit requirements of a Bache-

a ee

—_lor-of-Sceience,-the School-of- Social Welfare_advises_in_the

selection of the required 66 credits for a major in Social
Welfare.

Of the 66 credits: (a) 15 credits represent general re-
quirements; (b) 30 credits constitute the core requirements
for a major in Social Welfare; (c) The remaining 21 credits
must be in approved supporting courses,

(4) General requirements (15 credits); a minimum of one
(1) course in each of the following five (5) areas of study
before beginning the major:

301

,
|

Fundamentals of Human Biology;
Introduction to Human Ecology; or Ssw 200
Elementary Statistics;

Philosophy;

Ssw 210

In addition, it is recommended that prospective Social

Welfare majors elect Ssw 290 (Community Service) during
the sophomore year.

(b) Core requirements (30 credits) of the major in Social
Welfare consist of these ten courses: Ssw 321, Ssw 322,

yum & por

+—-—Ssw-850;-Ssw 351, Ssw 400, Ssw 401, Ssw 402, Ssw 405,

Ssw 406, and Ssw 410.

1. A minimum of 12 credits in one social science: Afro-
American studies, Anthropology, Criminal Justice,
Economics, Geography, History, Judaic Studies, Poli-
tical Science, Psychology, Puerto Rican Studies or

Sociology (of these, six credits must be in upper divi-
sion courses); ~

2, A minimum of nine credits in one of the other social
sciences, i.e., other than the one in which the above

12 credits are earned.

Finally, credits toward the major for courses with sub-
stantially equivalent content of core requirements (Ssw

322) and for approved courses require formal approval by
the School of Social Welfare, All 300 level core courses for

a major in Social Welfare may be open to qualified upper
division non-social welfare majors upon approval by the
School of Social Welfare. All 400 level courses are re-
stricted to accepted majors in Social Welfare,

Other Degree Requirements

Students interested in majoring in Social Welfare should
be aware that because of the limited number of placements
for the field course, it may not be possible to accommodate
all who wish to enter the major.

At this time a limitation will be placed on the number
of students to be enrolled as social welfare majors..

The major can begin only in the Fall term of the junior
academic year.

302

--t ¢
Oe ee ee

ey
i |
i}!
|| 4
7

Those wishing to enter the major must complete all the
general requirements for the major indicated elsewhere in
this bulletin and have a personal interview with faculty of
| the School to ascertain their readiness to participate in the
program.

Field instruction is an integral part of the total educa-
tional process. It affords the student the opportunity to
develop, apply, and integrate the necessary knowledge,
skills, and attitudes while in direct practice in Social Wel-
fare settings, During the senior year each student is pro-
vided field instruction by a qualified instructor in an agency
designated by the school. The placements are selected by

oT eta a a AT
ee

tape res
—. oe

poe
re nt

| the schoo! for the student on the basis of his educational
. | needs and, wherever possible, his area of interest. The field
Li placements represent a variety of settings under public

and private auspices, and are located throughout the tri-
| cities’ area of Albany, Schenectady, Troy and adjacent
areas, Students are responsible for the expenses involved
in traveling to and from placement.
7 In addition, a regularly scheduled seminar is required
'' as part of the field instruction courses.
| The faculty of the School of Social Welfare reserve_the
right to require a student to withdraw from any Social
| | Welfare course if such action is in the best interest of the |

Universiy. :

The followimg undergraduate courses offered by the .

School of Social Welfare are considered liberal arts and

| sciences courses for the purpose of requirements for the
1, B.A. and BS. degrees: Ssw 200, 210, 290, 320, 821, 822, |
va 351, 390, 401, 402, 450.

sw 200 The Social System: Man and His Environment (3)

An introductory survey of culture, society, and personality as the’

ii systemic components of human, "development and functioning:
family life, instrumental : van

41 __ tions, - and_communities.(Py | %, :
1 : Ss, 210 Development of Social Welfare as an Institution (3) _— ars

7 | Consideration of economic, political, and social changes as they

have influenced the development of social welfare policy and pro-

| grams in the United States. Examination of public policy and pri-

ho vate efforts to meet human needs and the function of the social

pr in interdisciplinary as well as primary social work programs. y-

Ssw 290 Community Service (3)
: Volunteer work in public or private agencies involving different
i types of service to the community. Six hours per week of actual
| | work in the agency, together with supervised evaluation seminars.

303i

a ed
Ssw 320 Child Welfare (3)

Supportive, supplementary, and substitute child welfare services
employed in dealing with the problems of dependent, neglected,
delinquent children. Scope, method, problems, trends reviewed with
‘egard to each of the services; child welfare in other countries;
sociology of the child welfare worker.

Ssw 321 Community Organization and Community
Development (3)

Familiarity with the basic principles, concepts, and strategies of
Community Organization as a method of social work practice. Dis-
cussion of the use of both formal and informal community structures
in bringing about desirable social change. The distinction between

Community” Organization—and- Community —Development_is_expli-_ _

cated. Community assessment techniques utilized in developed and

underdeveloped regions will be examined. Prerequisite: for majors
only and Ssw 210.

Ssw 322 Introductory Research Method in Social Welfare (3)

A study of methodological approaches and research techniques in
the field of social welfare; problems formulation, research tech-
niques in data collection and analysis. Reviews of current research
professional journals; fundamentals of report writing.
Prerequisite: for majors only.

" Ssw 350 Community Law and Client Advocacy (3)

Understanding the role of attorneys, social workers, and other
advocates in our legal system, Examination of legal rights of clients

as parents; juveniles; employees,-tenants,_consumers, welfare clients,

the aged, and mental patients. Functioning of the courts and ad-
ministrative agencies in resolving client problems. Legislative

foe as a tool. Prerequisite: for majors only.

Ssw 351 Social Work with Groups (3)

Social Work with Groups is a course which explicates the social
work method called group work. It covers the fundamental knowl-
edge, skills, values, and techniques inherent in the method Empha-
sis is placed upon practice. Tracing the stages of group develop-
ment, the course addresses itself to the role and function of the

cial worker in each period, Preyequisite; for majors only.
usdl ag \pasia professione! secial work Valugs aind

/ Ssw.390 »- Community Service (3)4 . 4... Philosophy:
.- «Volunteer work in public or private agencies involving service to

the community. A minimum of six hours per week of actual time
must be spent in the agency, together with seminars examining
ome aspects of voluntarism and roles of participating agencies.
Prerequisite; Ssw 290,

Ssw 400 Field Instruction in Social Welfare I (3)

Practical work experience in a social welfare agency or suitable
laboratory setting; hours per week are set to meet acceptable pro-
fessional standards. Action cycles of agency service and simple
tasks. Prerequisites: for majors only, and consent of instructor.

304
ee

ci: cae

Sepetenn Me we ands oe

——

ee ee eee.

en a

—

ih 401 Human Behavior and Social Welfare (3)

Life cycle tasks from infancy to old age. The maturation process,
class differences in social expectations, stress and balance in the
maintenance of optimal functioning, the influence of opportunity
systems in various culutres and sub-cultures in relation to social
welfare, Prerequisite: for majors only.

_ sw 402 Social Dysfunction (3)

Social effects of chronic problems related to dependency, child

) neglect, marital conflict, mental illness, retardation, delinquency,

the’ addictions and other deviant behavior, Implications for Social
elfare intervention. Prerequisite: for majors only and Ssw 401.

Ssw 405 Social Welfare Intervention Methods I (3)

Study is made of basic social welfare interventive methods
utilized in assisting individuals, families, groups, organizations and
logal communities with social problems, Particular attention is
given to interviewing with individuals, and groups and to the use
f community resources. Prerequisite; for majors only.

Ssw 406 Social Welfare Intervention Methods Il (3)
Further study is made of interventive methods and skills. Em-
phasis is given to the development of applied knowledge and skill

iny the helping process. For majors only. Prerequisites: for majors
ly and Ssw 400, 401, 405.

Sse 410 Field Instruction in Social Welfare If (3)
Continuation of Ssw 400, with_an_emphasis_on_developing-diag--———

le gee tl,

nostic and direct service skills under supervision. Prerequisite: for

rent only, Ssw 400 and consent of instructor.
s

sw 450 Independent Study in Soclal Welfare (3)
Independent reading or research on a selected experimental,
theoretical or applied problem under direction of a faculty member.

Must have written consent of instructor and Director of under-
graduate program.

305

|
| J TYPICAL PROGRAM FOR JUNIORS AND SENIORS

Fall-Junior Year
Ssw 321 Community Organization and Community Development (3).

Ssw 350 Community Law and Client Advocacy (3)

Supporting Social Science courses as necessary

Spring-Junior Year
Ssw 322 Introductory Research Methods in Social Welfare (3)

7 —— ——Ssw 351 — Social Work with Groups-((3) ~ — -— — =

Supporting Social Science courses as necessary

| Fall-Senior Year
! Ssw 400* Field Instruction in Social Welfare (3)

! Ssw 401* Human Behavior and Social Welfare (3)

Ssw 405* Social Welfare Intervention Methods (3)

*Courses must be taken concurrently.

Spring-Senior Year

eee

f. Ssw'402** Social Dysfinetion (3)
Ssw 406** Social Welfare Intervention Methods Il (3)
Ssw 410** Field Instruction in Social Welfare Ii (3)

** Courses must be taken concurrently.

enrererely a

306

fe te we ee ee

eee ee
St ee renting, |
VS a, caine vm]

ai re is

State University of New York

State University of New York, which celebrated its 25th
anniversary in 1973, is unique in its organization and the
breadth of its educational mission, It is the largest coordi-
nated, centrally managed multi-level system of public
higher education in the nation.

In a recent report to the University’s Trustees, Chan-
cellor Ernest L. Boyer said, “The State University wel-
comes not only the future architects, business executives,
engineers, surgeons, and literary critics, but also future
dairy farmers and medical technicians, accountants and
social workers, foresters and automobile mechanics, And,
through work in film, electronics, pollution control, data
processing, police science, urban studies and similar fields,
the University seeks to educate persons for tomorrow's
roles as well as those of today.”

Since its founding in 1948, the State University has
grown from 29 State-supported but unaffiliated campuses
into an organized system of higher education comprising
64 institutions.

and_veterinary_medicine.

centers (two of which, Buffalo and Stony Brook, include
health science centers); two medical centers; 13 colleges
of arts and science; a non-residential college; three special-
ized colleges; six agricultural and technical colleges; five
statutory colleges; and 30 locally-sponsored community
colleges. Twelve of the campuses offer graduate study at
the doctorate level, 22 at the master’s level.

Advanced degree study encompasses a wide spectrum,
including agriculture, business administration, criminal jus-
tice, dentistry, education, engineering, forestry, life and
physical sciences, medicine, nursing, optometry, pharmacy

Specifically_the-University-encompasses-four-university-——

Four-year programs emphasize the liberal arts and sci-
ence and include such specializations as teacher education,

business, forestry, physical education, maritime services,

ceramics and the fine and performing arts.

The two-year colleges offer associate degree opportuni-
ties in arts and science and in technical areas such as
agriculture, business, civil technology, data processing,
police science, nursery education, nursing, medical labora-
tory technology and recreation supervision. The two-year

307

colleges also provide transfer programs within the Univer-
sity for students wishing to continue study toward a |
baccalaureate degree. |
Two of the University’s state-wide programs which have =: |
played important roles in upgrading educational oppor-
tunity for disadvantaged students have been merged into
single operations called Educational Opportunity Centers.
The ten centers now combine the efforts. of the former
Urban Centers, which provided opportunities for educa-
tionally deprived students to upgrade occupational skills

and find gainful employment; with those-of-the former co-_ __ |.
operative college centers, which identified students with
college potential and prepared them for matriculation into — |
public and private colleges in New York State. a
Educational innovation has from the first been a Univer-—- '
sity watchword, _
With funding support from a private educational foun- | |
dation, several University campuses are experimenting with * |
programs to shorten substantially the traditional four-year
period of baccalaureate study, :
Empire State College, the newest institution, is a non- ‘|
residential college whose students earn degrees without | '

— >

being attached-to-a-specifie-campus-_or_attending traditional
classes. Its coordinating center at Saratoga Springs reaches
out to students through regional learning centers, |
State University is governed by a Board of Trustees, ~~
appointed by the Governor, which determines the policies
to be followed by the 34 State-supported campuses, |
The 30 community colleges operating under the program,
of State University have their own local board of trustees.
The State contributes one-third to 40 percent of their
operating costs and one-half of their capital costs,
The State University motto is “Let Each Become All He
Is Capable of Being.”

308

ee a ee ee SD

Published by State University
of New York at Albany:

Undergraduate Bulletin

College of Arts and Sciences Graduate Bulletin

School of Business Graduate Bulletin

School of Criminal Justice Graduate Bulletin

School of Education Undergraduate and Graduate

Bulletin .
School of Library and Information Science Graduate
Bulletin

Graduate School of Public Affairs Bulletin

School of Social Welfare Graduate Bulletin

Graduate Bulletin (General)

Summer Sessions (Undergraduate and Graduate Bulletin)
Schedules of courses are published in the spring and fall
for:

Late Afternoon, Evening, and Saturday Programs

(Graduate)

College of General Studies (Undergraduate Credit
Courses) .

il sehedules-of-non-credit-courses offered by the College of

;

|
|

General Studies are published periodically.

These may be obtained by writing the individual school
at the University’s address: 1400 Washington Avenue,
Albany, New York 12222,

en te ema”

309

~ a peer naw

I
|

i
i

INDEX

Abbreviations, 29

.. Abroad, Academic Year Pro-

grams, 278
Academic average, 23
Academic credit, 19
Academic regulations, 17
Academic standing, 19
Accounting, 234, 240
Accreditation, 8

Advisement, academic, 14

African and Afro-American
Studies, Department of, 39

American History, Concentra-
tion in, 153

Ancient Greek, 87

Anthropology, Department of,
44

Application, Degree, 24

Archaeology, 84 -

Art History, Program in, 54

Art (Studio), Department of, 51

Arts and Sciences, College of, 32

Asian History, Concentration in,
159

Center for Inter-American
Study, 160

Chemistry, Department of, 76

Chinese Studies, Program in, 81

Classics, Department of, 84

Classical Archaeology, 84

Classification, student, 17

College courses, 32

Community Service, 304

ture, Department of, 90
Computing Center, 9
Computer Science, Department
of, 97
Computer Science and Applied
Mathematics, Program in, 100
Course designation, 28
Course enrollment, 20
Course numbers, 28
Credit-grade requirements, 28
Credit load, 19
Credit transfer, 21
Criminal Justice, School of, 249
Cross-registration, 12
Cuernavaca, 161

= ——Adding. a-course,-22-— ——. —— -- Comparative-and World Litera-- — —:—

ena eee chp ew get

rte *

term ero

Asian Studies, Program in, 58

Astronomy and Space Science,
Department of, 60

Atmospheric Sciences, Depart-
ment of, 61

Attendance, 21

Auditing courses, 21

Bachelor of Arts, 25

Bachelor of Science, 26

Bachelor’s Degree, require-
ments, 25

Biological Sciences, Department
of, 64

Board of Trustees, Inside back
cover

Britain, Theatre Study in, 231

Broadcasting, 209

Business, School of, 233

Business Administration, 23'7

Business Education, Depart-
ment of, 261

CALE, 161
Calendar, Inside front cover, 1

310

Dean’s list, 23
Degree application, 24
Description, SUNYA, 7
Dismissal, academic, 19
Division courses, 38 |
Driver and Traffic Safety —
Education, 269
Dropping a course, 22

4t' {he VBCrence
uconomics, Department of, 101

Education courses, 254

Education electives, 256

Education, School of, 251

English, Department of, 105

Enrollment,.20 |

edinrviroritmentalStudies# 118

European History, Concentra-
tion in, 155

expenses, 15

Experimental Programs, 25

Fees, 15
Film, 53
Financial assistance, 14
Finance, 242

Fo caer emnntaate

[ae he

! 85
—| —@reek-Modern, 90

Foreign Language Study Place-
ment Policies, 38

France, 278

French, Department of, 116

General Information, 6

General Studies, College of, 2'75

Geography, Department of, 124

Geological Sciences, Depart-
ment of, 130

German, 135

Germanic Languages and Lit-
eratures, Department of, 134

Germany, 278

Government, 293

Grading, 17

Graduate courses—Undergrad-
uate credit, 20

Graduate-Undergraduate Study,
20

Graduation requirements, 23

Graduate School of Public
Affairs, 288

Greek, Ancient, 87

Greek and Roman Civilization,

Independent Study, 32

Information, General, 6

Inter-American Studies, 160

Interdisciplinary Majors, 33

Tnterdisciplinary Second Fields,
3

International Programs, 278

Intemship, 295

Israel, 280

Italian, 141

Journalism, 27, 34
Judaic Studies, Department of,
163

Language program abroad, 278

Latin, 88

Law, 243

Law school, preparation for, 288

Leave of absence, 12

Libraries, 9

Library and Information Sci-
ence, School of, 281

Linguistics, 169

Grievance Procedures, 21
Guadalajara, 161

Health, Physical Education,
and Recreation, Department
of, 266

Health Education, 269

Hebrew, 164

Hispanic and Italian Studies,
Department of, 140

History, Department of, 150

American History, Con-
centration in, 153
Asian History, Concentra-

Madrid, 279
Major; double;27
Majors, 24

Majors, interdisciplinary, 33
Majors
Requirements, see each
department

Management, 243
Management Science, 245
Marketing, 246
Mathematics, Department of,

172
Medical Technology, 64, 67
Methods, 254
Moscow, 280
Music, Department of, 179

tion in, 159

Composition, 182

Ibero-American History,
Concentration in, 159
European History, Con-
centration in, 155
United States, Concentra-
tion in, 153
Honors, 24
Humanities, Division of, 37

Tbero-American. History, Con-
centration in, 159

ald a A

Music History and Litera-
ture, 183

Music Theory, 184

Performance Study, 185

Nanyang, 279
Nice, 279
Nursing, School of, 282

Office of International Pro-
grams, 278

ll
Peace Studies, 35

Philosophy, Department of, 189

Photography, 52

Physical Education, 267

Physics, Department of, 193

Placement Policies, Foreign
Language Study, 38

Polish, 216

Political Science, Department
of, 288

Politics, 291, 295

Portuguese, 144

Practice teaching, 253

Slavic, 217

Slavic Languages and Litera-
tures, Department of, 212

Social and Behavioral Sciences,
Division of, 39

Social Studies, 218

Social Welfare, School of, 301

Sociology, Department of, 219

Spain, 279

Spanish, 145

Special courses, 247

Special projects, 33

Speech Pathology and Audiol- -_

~ Pre-Professional Program for ~~

Business, 233, 239
Probation, Academic, 19
Program changes, 22
Programs of study,

see each department
Psychology, Department of,

200
Public Administration, Depart-

ment of, 299
Publications, SUNYA, 309
Public Affairs, Graduate School

of, 288
Puerto Rican Studies, Depart-

ment of, 203

“ony, Department of, 270° — — — = 7

State University of New York,
307

Student Teaching, 253, 255

Studio Art, Department of, 151

Study Abroad Programs, 278

Summer Intensive Language
Program Abroad, 278

Linsitbiominen 1 28

Teaching, student, 253 vo
Terminal probation, 19
Termination, academic, 19
Theatre, Department of, 227
Theatre Study in Britain, 231
Traffic Education, 269

ore caper vee ob

Radio and Television, 209

Readmission procedure, 13

Re-examination, 21

Refunds, 16

Regulations, Undergraduate,
171

Residence, 24

Rhetoric and Communication,
Department of, 207

Russian, 213

Russian and East European
Studies, Program in, 211

Schedule changes, 22

Science and Mathematics,
Division of, 38

Second Field, 27

Second Fields, Interdisciplin-
ary, 34

31
oy
Wy b

Transfer of credit; 21
Tuition, 15

sae reed

Undergraduate credit—Gradu-
ate courses, 20 _

Undergraduate-Graduate Study,
20

Undergraduate study, 11 ~

Units of SUNY, Inside back
cover

Urban Affairs, 35

Visiting Student Program, 12

Withdrawal procedure, 22
Women’s Studies, 36
Wiirzberg, 280

Yiddish, 165

Crest 5/76—2614M

Cover: Bruce Stewart
State University of New York

Office of the Chancellor
99 Washington Avenue, Albany, New York 12210

Chancellor of the University Ernest L. Boyer, A.B., M.A,,
Ph.D., Litt.D., L.H.D., P.S.D., D.Sc.
Secretary of the University Martha J. Downey, B.S., M.A.

Board of Trustees: Mrs, Maurice T, Moore, B.A., LL.D., L.H.D.,
Chairman, New York City; James J, Warren, L.H.D., Vice
Chairman, Albany; Robert R. Douglass, A.B., LL.B., New York
City; Manly Fleischmann, A.B., LL.B., Buffalo; William D.
Hassett, Jr., B.A., L.H.D., Snyder; John L. S, Holloman, Jr.,
B.S., M.D., East Elmhurst; Robert H. Kirkpatrick, Kingston;
Clifton W. Phalen, B.S., LL.D., L.H.D., Shelter Island; Mrs.
Bronson A, Quackenbush, A.B., Herkimer; John A. Roosevelt,
A.B., New York City; Mrs. Edward Siegel, R.N., Roslyn; Roger
J. Sinnott, B.S., Utica; Mrs. Walter N, Thayer, New York City;
Thomas Van Arsdale, B. E.E., New York Citys Darwin R. Wales,
B.A., LL.B. - Binghamton.

University Centers: Albany, Binghamton, Buffalo, Stony Brook
Medical Centers: Downstate at Brooklyn, Upstate at Syracuse

Colleges of Arts and Science: Brockport, Buffalo, Cortland, Em-
pire State, Fredonia, Geneseo, New Paltz, Old Westbury, One-

_onta, Oswego, Plattsburgh, Potsdam, Purchase, Utica/Rome

Specialized Colleges: Environmental Science and Forestry at
Syracuse, Maritime at Fort Schuyler (Bronx), Optometry at
New York City

Agricultural and Technical Colleges (Two-Year): Alfred, Can-
ton, Cobleskill, Delhi, Farmingdale, Morrisville

Statutory Colleges: At Alfred University: Ceramics; At Cornell
University: Agriculture and Life Sciences, Human Ecology,
Veterinary Science, Industrial and Labor Relations

Community Colleges (Locally-sponsored two-year colleges under
the program of State University): Adirondack, Glens Falls;
Broome, Binghamton; Cayuga County, Auburn; Clinton, Platts.
burgh; Columbia- Greene, Hudson; Finger Lakes, Canandaigua;
Corning; Dutchess, Poughkeepsie; Erie, Buffalo; Fashion Insti-
tute of Technology, New York City; Fulton-Montgomery,
Johnstown; Genesee, Batavia; Herkimer County, Herkimer;
Hudson Valley, Troy; Jamestown; Jefferson, Watertown; Mo-
hawk Valley, Utica; Monroe, Rochester; Nassau, Garden City;
Niagara County, Sanborn; North Country, Saranac Lake; Onon-
daga, Syracuse; Orange County, Middletown; Rockland, Suf-
fern; Schenectady County, Schenectady; Suffolk County, Sel-
den; Sullivan County, Loch Sheldrake; Tompkins-Cortland,
Dryden; Ulster County, Stone Ridge; Westchester, Valhalla

| | | | |

State University of New York at Albany Non-Profit Organization |

Albany, New York 12222 US. Postage
PAID
Permit No. 205
Albany, N.Y.

LUAXTHE UNINERSITY AT ALBANY

Metadata

Containers:: Box 14, Folder 9
Resource Type:: Bound Volume
Rights:: CC BY 4.0
Date Uploaded:: May 31, 2019

Using these materials

Access:: The archives are open to the public and anyone is welcome to visit and view the collections.

Collection restrictions:: Access to this collection is unrestricted with the exception of series 6 and 7; these two series are partially processed and may contain personally identifiable information. Please contact an archivist for more information.
Collection terms of access:: The University Archives are eager to hear from any copyright owners who are not properly identified so that appropriate information may be provided in the future.